SM-Super Multi Splus E Series - Cooling Only

EDSG18-936
- Cooling Only -
E-Series
EDSG18-936
Part 1 Features ............................................................................ 1

1. Features ..................................................................................................2
1.1 Features ...................................................................................................2
1.2 Selection Procedure .................................................................................6
1.3 Control System.........................................................................................8
Part 2 Multi-Split System Room Air Conditioners

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only .................... 13
1. Power Supply ........................................................................................15
2. Functions...............................................................................................16
3. Specifications ........................................................................................20
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Outdoor Units .........................................................................................20

BP Unit ...................................................................................................21
Combination Capacity Index ..................................................................22
Indoor Units ............................................................................................25
4. Dimensions ...........................................................................................32
4.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................32
4.2 BP Units .................................................................................................33
4.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................34
5. Wiring Diagrams....................................................................................45
5.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................45
5.2 BP Units .................................................................................................46
5.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................47
6. Piping Diagrams....................................................................................52
6.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................52
6.2 BP Units .................................................................................................53
6.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................54
7. Capacity Tables ....................................................................................57

7.1 Total Capacity ........................................................................................57
7.2 Capacity Correction Factor by the Length of Refrigerant Piping ............63
8. Operation Limit......................................................................................65
9. Fan Characteristics ...............................................................................66
10.Sound Level ..........................................................................................69
10.1 Measuring Location ................................................................................69
10.2 Octave Band Level .................................................................................70
11.Electric Characteristics..........................................................................73
Part 3 Installation Manual ......................................................... 75

1. Outdoor Units ........................................................................................76
1.1 Installation ..............................................................................................76
1.2 Service Precautions ...............................................................................94
2. BP Units ................................................................................................98
3. Indoor Units.........................................................................................110
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series
Safety Precautions ...............................................................................110

Wall Mounted Type FTKS25/35D.........................................................111
Wall Mounted Type FTKS50/60/71F ....................................................119
Wall Mounted Type FTKS50B..............................................................126
Duct Connected Type FDKS25/35CA ..................................................134
i
EDSG18-936
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Duct Connected Type FDKS50/60C, FDKS25/35EA ...........................144

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FFQ25/35/50/60B..............................154
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FCQ35/50/60/71B .............................176
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type FBQ60/71B...........................................199
Part 4 Operation Manual .......................................................... 219

1. Operations...........................................................................................220
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RMKS112/140/160E Series .................................................................220

FTKS, FDKS Series .............................................................................221
FFQ25/35/50/60B Series......................................................................275
FCQ35/50/60/71B Series .....................................................................288
FBQ60/71B Series ...............................................................................299
Part 5 Options .......................................................................... 309

1. Option List ...........................................................................................310
1.1 Outdoor Units .......................................................................................310
1.2 BP Units ...............................................................................................310
1.3 Indoor Units ..........................................................................................310
2. Options for Outdoor & BP Units ..........................................................314

2.1 Options for Outdoor Units.....................................................................314
2.2 Options for BP Units.............................................................................315
3. Options for Indoor Units ......................................................................318

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Duct Connected Type...........................................................................318

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (600600)..........................................319
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type ..............................................................345
4. Control Devices...................................................................................355
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
ii
<DCS302CA61> Central Remote Controller .......................................355

<DCS301BA61> Unified ON/OFF Controller .......................................387
<DST301BA61> Schedule Timer .........................................................395
Combination of <DCS302CA61 / DCS301BA61 / DST301BA61>
Combinations of Optional Controllers for Centralized Control..............414
<KRP928B2S> Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET
(Residential Air Conditioner) ................................................................417
<DTA112BA51> Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (SkyAir).....................419
<KRC72> Centralized Control Board-up to 5 Rooms...........................421
<KRP413A1S> Wiring Adaptor for Timer Clock / Remote Controller...423
<KRP4AA51/53> Wiring Adaptor for Electrical Appendices.................427
<KRP1BA54/57> Adaptor for Wiring ....................................................432
<KRP1BA101> Installation Box for Adaptor PCB ................................433
<KRCS01-1B> Remote Sensor............................................................435
<BRC1C61> Wired Remote Controller for SkyAir................................438
<BRC7C613W> Wireless Remote Controller.......................................445
<BRC7E531W> Wireless Remote Controller.......................................450
SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series
EDSG18-936
Part 1
Features
1. Features ..................................................................................................2
1.1 Features ...................................................................................................2
1.2 Selection Procedure .................................................................................6
1.3 Control System.........................................................................................8
Features
Features
EDSG18-936
1. Features
1.1
Features
More Variation of Indoor Units
Features
L.S.P. Duct Slim & Compact Type
Energy Saving
Developed DAIKIN original
new scroll compressor
Quiet Operation
Night Quiet Mode
Easy Installation
Automatic Test Operation
Easy Wiring Working
RMKS112E (4HP)
RMKS140E (5HP)
RMKS160E (6HP)
Easy Maintenance
Operation Data Memory Function
before failure
06RAG09-2
Indoor Units
Cooling Only
: New Model Mo/C: Mo/C model : Continued Model
Type
Model Name
25
35
Wall Mounted
FTKS-DVM
50
60
71
FTKS-BVMA
FTKS-FVM
L.S.P. Duct (Slim Compact)
FDKS-EAVMB
L.S.P. Duct (Slim)
FDKS-CAVMB
FDKS-CVMB
M.S.P. Ceiling Mounted Built-in
FBQ-BV1
Ceiling Mounted Cassette

(950x950 Multi Flow)
FCQ-BVE
Ceiling Mounted Cassette

(600x600 Multi Flow)
FFQ-BV1B9
: Invalidated Model
Mo/C
Mo/C Mo/C
Mo/C
Added slim & compact duct type which is suitable for a small room. Meet more variation of needs!
06RAG09-14
External Appearance
Wall Mounted
< FTKS25/35D >
Duct Connected
Slim & Compact Type

(25/35 class)
< FDKS25/35EA >
Built-in
Slim type (25-60 class)

< FDKS25/35CA >
< FDKS50/60C >
< FBQ60/71B >
< FTKS50B >

Cassette
< FTKS50-71F >

950x950
< FCQ35-71B >
600x600
< FFQ25-60B >
06RAG09-20
Features
EDSG18-936
Features
1
New Scroll Compressor
The efficient scroll G type compressor realized further energy saving
High Thrust mechanism realized a reduction of friction loss and leaks of refrigerant and high efficiency.
- Improvement in scroll performance by high precision processing technology (improvement in the
degree of outline of VOLUTE)
Compressed
gas load
High
precision
scrolling
Fixed
Scroll
High Thrust
mechanism
Low Pressure
Hydro Dynamic
Bearing
DC motor
of high
efficiency
and low
vibration
Rotor
Stator
Differential
Pressure Pump
Pushing back
Power of High
Pressure Oil
Moving
Scroll
Thrust Slide Part
Housing
Reduction of
Sliding Loss
High-pressure
pushing power
Crank
Shaft
High Efficiency G Type Compressor
High
Pressure
High Pressure
Oil
High Thrust mechanism
06RAG09-23
Night Quiet Mode

3 steps of setting are possible (Button setting of an outdoor unit
unit PC Board).
(dBA)
STEP1
47
STEP2
44
STEP3
41
Night Quiet Mode

Night Quiet Mode Starts
Night Quiet Mode Ends
Note: This function is available in setting at site.

The relationship of outdoor temperature (load) and time shown in the
graph is just an example.
06RAG09-24

Check of wiring, stop valves, sensors and refrigerant volume
automatically.
Test Operation
Simply press the
test operation
button!
Just press the test operation button after

refrigerant charging completes. The check of wiring,
stop valves, sensors and refrigerant volume is
performed. The operation stops automatically
when the check is completed.
06RAG09-25
Features
Features
EDSG18-936
Easy Wiring Work

Improved the shape of PCB. Divided the operating part and the
terminal plate for easy wiring work.
Current Model
Operating part
Transmission wiring
Connection (to BP Unit)
06RAG09-26
Memory Function of
the Operation Data before Failure
When a malfunction occur, operating data for the 3 minutes preceding the
breakdown is stored in memory automatically. This function speeds up the
process of identifying and correcting the cause of the problem.
Normal Operation
Malfunction
Analysis of data to
identify location of
problem and
cause of
malfunction
Automatic
storage of 3
minutes of
operation data
Implementation of
measures to
eliminate cause of
malfunction
06RAG09-27
(ex. 5HP)
Refrigerant Piping
Total main piping length

(between Outdoor unit BP unit)
Total branch piping length
(between BP unit Indoor unit)
55m
80m
135m(55+80)
Total piping length
Note) Refrigerant charge is necessary.

Main piping
Branch piping
Max. height
difference
30m
BP unit
Branch piping
BP unit
06RAG09-28
Features
EDSG18-936
Features
1
Refrigerant
Piping
Max. Inter-unit Piping Length
4HP
5HP
Piping length BP I/U (f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m)
15m
Piping length 1st branch I/U (ex. b+c+m)
40m
Total main piping length *1 (O/U - BP: a+b+c+d+e)
6HP
55m
Total branch piping length *2 (f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m)
60m
80m
90m
Total piping length ( *1+*2 )
115m
135m
145m
Note) The pipe size of branch BP varies according to the capacity of

I/Us connected to the BP. (for oil return operation)
st
1 Branch
Max. height
difference
30m
06RAG09-29
Features
Features
EDSG18-936
1.2
Selection Procedure
1.2.1
Outdoor Unit
Cooling only
Model name
RMKS112E
RMKS140E
RMKS160E
Type
4HP
5HP
6HP
Rated capacity (kW) Cooling
11.2
14.0
15.5
5 units
7 units
8 units
5.5-14.5
7.0-18.2
8.0-20.8
Connectable indoor
units
Maximum number
of indoor units
Total indoor unit
capacity (kW)
Maximum number of connectable BP units
1.2.2
3 Units
Indoor Unit
Cooling only
Type
25
35
50
60
71
Rated capacity (kW)
2.5
3.5
5.0
6.0
7.1
RA
SA
1.2.3
Wall mounted
FTKS
Duct connected
(Slim compact)
FDKS-EA
Duct connected (Slim)
FDKS-C(A)
Ceiling mounted
cassette (600600)
FFQ
Ceiling mounted
cassette (950950)
FCQ
Ceiling mounted built-in
FBQ
Decoration Panel
A decoration panel is required for SkyAir models.
1.2.4
Ceiling mounted cassette

(600600)
FFQ
BYFQ60B8W1
Ceiling mounted cassette

(950950)
FCQ
BYC125K-W1
Ceiling mounted built-in
FBQ
BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1)
Remote Controller
Choose the suitable remote controller for SkyAir models.
Cooling only
Wireless remote controller
Wired remote controller
FFQ
BRC7E531W
FCQ
BRC7C613W
FBQ
FFQ
FCQ
BRC1C61
FBQ
1.2.5
BP Unit
Cooling only
Model name
Type
Maximum capacity (kW)
Maximum number of BP units for 1 system
BPMKS967B2B
BPMKS967B3B
2 rooms
3 rooms
14.2
20.8
3 units
Features
EDSG18-936
1.2.6
Features
REFNET JOINT
Model name
Number of BP units
1.2.7
KHRP26A22T
1
Not necessary
KHRP26A22T1
KHRP26A22T2
Option
You can choose various optional accessories for control system, indoor unit, and outdoor unit.
(See "Part 5 Options" for details.)
Features
Control by Remote Controller

Residential Air conditioner
Local operation
of remote
controller
Control Method
Example of
typical use
Objective / Use
ARC433 series
Unit Name and

Model
Receiver
Wireless
Wireless
Remote
Remote
Controller
Controller
The wireless remote controller transmits the signals up to 7m long.
Outline of System
Available functions are different by models.
Functions
Start/stop (ON/OFF)
Operation mode change-over
Temperature setting
Timer setting
Airflow rate setting
Airflow direction adjustment (Swing flap)
INTELLIGENT EYE operation
POWERFUL operation
HOME LEAVE operation
ECONO mode operation
MOLD PROOF operation
Error code display
Function
1 remote controller
controls 1 indoor unit
Standard Number of
Units
(R4925)
Part 5
Operation
Manual
Relevant
Page
Features
EDSG18-936
1.3
Control System
1.3.1
Various Control by Remote Controller
Features
Features
Same as the number of
units controlled by
remote controller
Operation of
other equipment
combined with
the operation of
indoor unit
Combining
control by
remote controller
Control by Remote Controller
Note:
1. These figures above show the system using wired remote controllers. Wireless remote controller replaced for wired remote controller can be used for same control.
2. In control by two remote controllers, one of two remote controllers must be a wired remote controller. Two wireless remote controllers must not be used.
3. Wiring from a wireless remote controller to the receiver can be lengthened to 200m in maximum.
Operates HRV in accordance with

indoor unit operation.
2 remote controllers
control up to 16 indoor
units from 2 different
places simultaneously
For above
control from
distant place.
1 remote controller
controls up to 16 indoor
units simultaneously
Group control by
2 remote
controllers
2 remote controllers
control 1 indoor unit
1 remote controller
controls 1 indoor unit
Standard Number of
Units
Group control
Operational functions
Start/Stop (ON/OFF)
Temperature setting
Timer setting (Settings in units of 1 hour
up to a maximum of 72 hours)
Airflow setting
Airflow direction adjustment (Swing flap)
Indication function
Operating display
Program dry function display
Defrost/Hot start display
Filter sign
Temperature setting display
Timer display
Airflow display
Abnormal operation display
In case of group control all the indoor
units in the system are set to the same
value and each unit is controlled
individually by its internal thermostat.
(Not by the thermostat equipped in
remote controller)
In command by double remote controls,
the most recent one takes priority.
(Selection between master and slave
controller is essential)
According to indoor units model, some
models cannot be set.
Function
For the control of

plural indoor
units on a floor
at the same time
Outline of System
For control from

2 places (distant
or local)
For control from

distant place
Remote
operation of
remote controller
BRC1C61
Unit Name and

Model
2 remote control
Note 2
Example of
typical use
Objective / Use
Local operation
of remote
controller
Control Method
438
Relevant
Page
(R4926)
EDSG18-936
Features
Central Control
Residential Air conditioner, SkyAir
10
Room Air conditioner
Schedule timer
Schedule
timer
Central
remote
controller
Unified ON/
OFF
controller
Unified ON/OFF
controller
For controlling
all indoor units
from one place
For carrying out

weekly
schedule
operation by
1-minute unit
Central remote
controller
Control from
one position
Objective / Use
Central remote
controller for
five indoor units
Control Method
DCS301BA61
DCS302CA61
DST301BA61
DCS301BA61
DCS302CA61
DST301BA61
KRC72
Unit Name and Model
Outline of System
Respective functions of schedule timer,

central remote controller and unified ON/
OFF controller are possible. (Control mode
of central remote controller is given priority
for operation of remote controller for indoor
unit.)
Controls up to 128 indoor

units with one schedule
timer, two central remote
controllers (4 units at the
double functions) and eight
unified ON/OFF controllers
(16 units at the double
functions).
Controls up to 16 groups of
indoor units with one unified
ON/OFF controller.
Controls up to 64 groups of
indoor units with one central
remote controller.
Double central control function

Function of liquid crystal remote controller
can be controlled individually for each zone
of the indoor unit.
Individual/unified operation
Up to 8 patterns of scheduled operation can
be set in combination with schedule timer.
Temperature setting for each zone
Control operation for each room during
centralized control
Remote controller operation rejected
command
Sequential start function
Double central control function
Indoor unit ON/OFF control
Individual/unified operation
Remote controller operation rejected
command (Central remote controller given
priority when used in combination with
central remote controller.)
Sequential start function
Simultaneously controls 64
groups with one schedule
timer. Max. 128 units
Controls max. 5 indoor units

individually by one central
remote controller.
Standard Number of Units
ON/OFF time can be set by units of day,

hour and minute; ON/OFF pattern can be
set by time zone of twice per day in
accordance with the application.
Individual operation/stop
Operation display
Function
(R4927)
414
387
355
395
355
Relevant
Page
Features
EDSG18-936
Features
Remote Control
Wiring adaptor
for electrical
appendices
Interface
adaptor
Remote control
adaptor
Remote
operation
command is
required for
control.
Objective / Use
KRP4AA5153
KRP928B2S
KRP413A1S
Unit Name and Model
Outline of System
Note:
1. "Remote control adaptor" used for the central remote controller regulating five indoor units is KRP413A1S.
2. "Interface adaptor for residential air conditionor" used for connecting DIII-NET central control devices is KRP928B2S.
3. "Interface adaptor for SkyAir" used for connecting DIII-NET central control devices is DTA112BA51.
4. Make sure the control system devices applied for each indoor unit in accordance with the option list.
SkyAir
Features
Control Method
1 PC board simultaneously
controls 16 groups.
1 PC board simultaneously
controls 1 group of indoor
units.
To use adaptor both as a constant "a"

contact and an instantaneous "a" contact.
12~24 VDC or no-voltage
Various remote control methods available
by mode select switch
Voltage, no-voltage selector switch
Output of alarm and operation display
signal (no-voltage)
Remote temperature setting (resistance
input of 0~135)
Selector for remote controller temperature
setting enable/inhibit
For group unified control, the setting

becomes the same for all connected indoor
units, and each indoor unit is controlled
individually by built-in thermostat.
One adaptor controls one

indoor unit
One adaptor controls one

indoor unit
Standard Number of Units
This kit is an interface between central

control equipment (central remote
controller, unified ON/OFF controller,
schedule timer, etc.) and the room air
conditioner.
Constant "a" contact without voltage

Instantaneous "a" contact with voltage
Output of alarm and operation display
signal
Function
(R4928)
427
419
423
Relevant
Page
EDSG18-936
Features
11
Features
12
EDSG18-936
Features
EDSG18-936
Part 2
Multi-Split System
Room Air Conditioners
SUPER MULTI PLUS
E-Series
Cooling Only
FTKS25DVM
FTKS35DVM
FTKS50FVM
FTKS60FVM
FTKS71FVM
FTKS50BVMA8
FDKS25CAVMB
FDKS35CAVMB
FDKS50CVMB
FDKS60CVMB
FDKS25EAVMB
FDKS35EAVMB
FFQ25BV1B9
FFQ35BV1B9
FFQ50BV1B9
FFQ60BV1B9
FCQ35BVE
FCQ50BVE
FCQ60BVE
FCQ71BVE
FBQ60BV1
FBQ71BV1
RMKS112EVM
RMKS140EVM
RMKS160EVM
BPMKS967B2B
BPMKS967B3B
1. Power Supply ........................................................................................15

2. Functions...............................................................................................16
3. Specifications ........................................................................................20
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Outdoor Units .........................................................................................20

BP Unit ...................................................................................................21
Combination Capacity Index ..................................................................22
Indoor Units ............................................................................................25
4. Dimensions ...........................................................................................32
4.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................32
4.2 BP Units .................................................................................................33
4.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................34
5. Wiring Diagrams....................................................................................45
5.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................45
5.2 BP Units .................................................................................................46
5.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................47
6. Piping Diagrams....................................................................................52
6.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................52
6.2 BP Units .................................................................................................53
6.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................54
SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only
13
EDSG18-936
7. Capacity Tables ....................................................................................57

7.1 Total Capacity ........................................................................................57
7.2 Capacity Correction Factor by the Length of Refrigerant Piping ............63
8. Operation Limit......................................................................................65
9. Fan Characteristics ...............................................................................66
10.Sound Level ..........................................................................................69
10.1 Measuring Location ................................................................................69
10.2 Octave Band Level .................................................................................70
11.Electric Characteristics..........................................................................73
14
EDSG18-936
Power Supply
1. Power Supply
Indoor Unit
Wall Mounted Type
FTKS25DVM
FTKS35DVM
FTKS50FVM
FTKS60FVM
Outdoor Unit
Power Supply
RMKS112EVM
RMKS140EVM
RMKS160EVM
BPMKS967B2B
BPMKS967B3B
1, 230V, 50Hz
FTKS71FVM
FTKS50BVMA8
Duct Connected Type
FDKS25CAVMB
FDKS35CAVMB
FDKS50CVMB
FDKS60CVMB
FDKS25EAVMB
FDKS35EAVMB
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type
FFQ25BV1B9
FFQ35BV1B9
FFQ50BV1B9
FFQ60BV1B9
FCQ35BVE
FCQ50BVE
FCQ60BVE
FCQ71BVE
Ceiling Mounted
Built-in Type
Note:
FBQ60BV1
FBQ71BV1
Power Supply Intake ; Outdoor Unit
15
Functions
EDSG18-936
Basic
Function
Compressor
Functions
Comfort
Control
5
~
46
Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter
Operation Limit for Heating (CWB)
Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic

Deodorizing Function
PAM Control
Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic

Air-Purifying Filter
Longlife Filter (Option)
Swing Compressor
Air Filter (Prefilter)
Rotary Compressor
Wipe-Clean Flat Panel
Washable Grille
Oval Scroll Compressor
Power-Airflow Flap
Filter Cleaning Indicator
Power-Airflow Dual Flaps
Mold Proof Operation
Power-Airflow Diffuser
Heating Dry Operation
Wide-Angle Louvers
Good-Sleep Cooling Operation
24-Hour ON/OFF Timer
Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)
Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)
3-D Airflow
COMFORT AIRFLOW Mode
Timer
Worry Free
Reliability &
Durability
Note:
16
Night Set Mode
Auto-Restart (after Power Failure)
Self-Diagnosis (Digital, LED) Display
Wiring-Error Check
Auto Fan Speed
Indoor Unit Quiet Operation
Memory Function
Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor
Heat Exchanger
Flexibility
Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation (Manual)
Lifestyle
Convenience
3-Step Airflow (H/P Only)
Night Quiet Mode (Automatic)
Operation
Operation Limit for Cooling (CDB)
Reluctance DC Motor
Comfortable
Airflow
Air-Purifying Filter with Bacteriostatic &

Virustatic Functions
Category
Health &
Clean
Inverter (with Inverter Power Control)
Functions
RMKS112/140/160EVM
Category
RMKS112/140/160EVM
2. Functions
Multi-Split / Split Type Compatible

Indoor Unit
INTELLIGENT EYE Operation
Flexible Voltage Correspondence
Quick Warming Function
High Ceiling Application
Hot-Start Function
Chargeless
Automatic Defrosting
Either Side Drain (Right or Left)
Automatic Operation
Power Selection
5-Rooms Centralized Controller

(Option)
Remote
Control
Program Dry Function
Fan Only
Remote Control Adaptor

(Normal Open-Pulse Contact) (Option)
New POWERFUL Operation

(Non-Inverter)

(Normal Open Contact) (Option)
Inverter POWERFUL Operation
Dlll-NET Compatible (Adaptor)

(Option)
Priority-Room Setting
COOL / HEAT Mode Lock
HOME LEAVE Operation
ECONO Mode
Indoor Unit ON/OFF Button
Signal Receiving Sign
Temperature Display
Another Room Operation
Remote
Controller
Wireless
Wired
: Holding Functions
: No Functions
Compressor
Comfortable
Airflow
Health &
Clean

Swing Compressor
Rotary Compressor

Reluctance DC Motor
Power-Airflow Flap
Washable Grille
Wide-Angle Louvers

3-D Airflow
Timer

Night Set Mode
Worry Free
Reliability &
Durability
Wiring Error Check


Heat Exchanger
Hot-Start Function
Flexibility

Indoor Unit
Automatic Operation
Chargeless
Fan Only

(Non-Inverter)


ECONO Mode
Power Selection
Remote
Control
5-Rooms Centralized Controller (Option)
DIII-NET Compatible (Adaptor)

(Option)

Note:
Lifestyle
Convenience
Functions
PAM Control
Auto Fan Speed
Operation
Air-Purifying Filter with Bacteriostatic,

Category
Comfort
Control
FTKS50BVMA8
FTKS50-71FVM
FTKS25/35DVM
Basic
Function
Functions
FTKS50BVMA8
Category
FTKS50-71FVM
Functions
FTKS25/35DVM
EDSG18-936
Temperature Display
Remote
Controller
Wireless
Wired
: Holding Functions
: No Functions
17
FDKS50/60CVMB
FDKS25/35EAVMB
Basic
Function

PAM Control

Swing Compressor
Functions
Comfortable
Airflow
Lifestyle
Convenience
Reluctance DC Motor
Washable Grille
Power-Airflow Flap
Wide-Angle Louvers
Timer
3-D Airflow
Night Set Mode
Worry Free
Reliability &
Durability
Auto Fan Speed
Wiring-Error Check

Heat Exchanger
Operation
Rotary Compressor

Comfort
Control
Category
Health &
Clean

Compressor
FDKS25/35EAVMB

Category
FDKS50/60CVMB
Functions
FDKS25/35CAVMB
EDSG18-936
FDKS25/35CAVMB
Functions
Flexibility

Indoor Unit
Chargeless
Hot-Start Function
Power Selection
Automatic Operation
Remote
Control

(Option)

Fan Only


(Non-Inverter)

DIII-NET Compatible (Adaptor) (Option)

Remote
Controller
Wireless
Wired

ECONO Mode

Note:
18
Temperature Display
: Holding Functions
: No Functions
Comfortable
Airflow
FBQ60/71BV1

PAM Control

Swing Compressor
Rotary Compressor
Reluctance DC Motor
Washable Grille
Power-Airflow Flap
Wide-Angle Louvers
Timer

Night Set Mode
3-D Airflow
Worry Free
Reliability &
Durability
Auto Fan Speed
Chargeless
Power Selection

(Option)
Flexibility

Wiring-Error Check

Heat Exchanger

Indoor Unit
Hot-Start Function

Automatic Operation

Dlll-NET Compatible (Adaptor)

(Option)
Fan Only
Note:
Remote
Control
Lifestyle
Convenience
Operation
FCQ35-71BVE
Comfort
Control

Category
Health &
Clean

Compressor
Functions
FFQ25-60BV1B9
Basic
Function
Functions
FBQ60/71BV1
Category
FCQ35-71BVE
Functions
FFQ25-60BV1B9
EDSG18-936
Remote
Controller

(Non-Inverter)
ECONO Mode
Temperature Display
Wireless
Wired
: Holding Functions
: No Functions
19
Specifications
EDSG18-936
3. Specifications
3.1
Outdoor Units
50Hz 230V
Model
RMKS112EVM
RMKS140EVM
RMKS160EVM
4HP
5HP
6HP
kW
(kcal/h)
11.2 (9,630)
14.0 (12,040)
15.5 (13,330)
Total Indoor Unit Capacity
kW
5.5~14.5
7.0~18.2
8.0~20.8
Power Consumption 1
Running Current 1
Cooling Capacity
Casing Color
Ivory White
Type
Compressor
Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type
Model
JT100G-VDL
Motor Output
(2.2kW/60rps)
Refrigerant
Oil
Refrigerant
Air Flow Rate
(H)
kW
2.5
3.0
Model
Charge
Type
1.5
R-410A
Charge
kg
4.0
m/min(cfm)
106 (3,742)
Type
Fan
Propeller
Motor Output
70+70
Running Current
Power Consumption
A
W
0.4+0.4
88+88
Starting Current
15.4
19.7
Dimensions (HWD)
mm
1,345900320
Package Dimensions (HWD)
mm
1,475925390
Weight
kg
125
Gross Weight
kg
136
Operation Sound
Liquid
Piping
Gas
Connection
Drain
dBA
mm
52
Max. piping
length
Max. level
difference
53
54
19.1 (Brazing Connection)
mm
18
mm
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes

3 For Power Supply (Including Earth Wiring), 2 For Interunit Wiring (Outdoor Unit-BP)
O.U. - BP
BP - I.U.
m
m
System Total
BP - I.U.
m
m
1st Branch - I.U.

O.U. - BP
m
m
40
30
O.U. - I.U.
BP - BP, I.U. - I.U.
m
m
30
15
kg/m
Necessary
Necessity of Additional Charge 2
Note:
23.5
9.5 (Flare Connection)
Heat Insulation
No. of Wiring Connection
Total piping
length
3.5
DAPHNE FVC68D
55
80
60
115
135
15
1. 1 See page 22 Combination Capacity Index.

2. 2 Refrigerant charge is required. (Chargeless piping length 0m)
Formula for calculation charge : R (kg)
R = Total length (m) of liquid pipe size at 9.50.054 +Total length (m) of liquid piping size at 6.40.022
3. The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Cooling
90
145
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3
Piping Length
Indoor ; 27CDB / 19CWB

Outdoor ; 35CDB
Main Piping : 5m
Branch Piping : 3m
Level difference:0m
Outdoor Unit
Main Piping
Indoor Unit
BP Unit
Branch Piping
(Q0143)
20
EDSG18-936
3.2
Specifications
BP Unit
50Hz 230V
Model
BPMKS967B2B
Connectable Indoor Units
BPMKS967B3B
1~2 Units
Casing Color
Power Consumption
1~3 Units
Paintingless
Running Current
Refrigerant Type
10
10
0.05
0.05
R-410A
Dimension (HWD)
mm
Package Dimension (HWD)
mm
Machine Weight
Gross Weight
kg
kg
7.5
11
mm
Main : 9.51 / Branch : 6.42
Main : 9.51 / Branch : 6.43
mm
Main : 19.11 / Branch : 15.92
Main : 19.11 / Branch : 15.93
Number of Wiring Connections

Liquid
Piping
Connection
Gas
(Brazing)
Drain
180294(650)*350
257738427
4 for Interunit Wiring
Heat Insulation
Max. Piping Length
Amount of Additional Charge
mm
Drain Processingless
g/m
Max. Height Difference
Max. Combination
kW
Min. Combination
kW
Installation Manual
14.2
pc.
pc.
Accessories
For Branch
Hanger Metal
pc.
Drawing No.
Note:
Liquid
1 (For I.D. 6.4)
Gas
1 (For I.D. 12.7)
Gas
1 (For I.D. 15.9, 19.1)

1 (For I.D. 9.5)
Liquid
Gas
2 (For I.D. 12.7, 9.5)
pc.
Screws
pc.
Heat Insulation (2pc. is 1 set)
Binding Band
20.8
2.0
For Main
L Shape Reducer
8
12
3 (For I.D. 12.7, 9.5)

4
8 (M48)
3 Set
4 Set
2
C : 4D050058B
1. BP or Indoor Unit Max. Height - BP or Indoor Unit Min. Height Max. 15m.
Set up BP and indoor unit within 15m height difference.
2. The piping connection must be cut so as to suit the piping sizes of the indoor unit which will be connected.
The same sizes should be used for the piping on the outdoor unit.
3. ( )* : including auxiliary piping length
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3
21
Specifications
3.3
EDSG18-936
Combination Capacity Index

Indoor Unit
FTKS, FDKS, FFQ, FCQ, FBQ
Class
25
35
50
60
71
Rated Capacity (kW)
2.5
3.5
5.0
6.0
7.1
Capacity of each indoor unit = Capacity calculated on the table below Rated capacity of each indoor unit
Total rated capacity of the indoor units
Cooling Capacity for 4HP
4HP(cooling)
Capacity, power consumption (kW)
25
20
Capacity [kW]
Power consumption [kW]
15
10
5
0
0
5
10
15
Total indoor unit capacity
20
(R5902)
4HP (cooling)
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
Cooling
capacity
(kW)
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
Power
consumption
(kW)
1.68
1.71
1.75
1.78
1.81
1.85
1.88
1.91
1.95
1.98
2.01
2.05
2.08
2.11
2.14
2.18
2.21
2.24
2.28
2.31
2.34
2.38
2.41
2.44
2.48
2.51
2.54
2.57
2.61
2.64
2.67
2.71
2.74
2.77
2.81
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
Cooling
capacity
(kW)
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
Power
consumption
(kW)
2.84
2.87
2.90
2.94
2.97
3.00
3.04
3.07
3.10
3.14
3.17
3.20
3.24
3.27
3.30
3.33
3.37
3.40
3.43
3.47
3.50
3.53
3.57
3.60
3.63
3.67
3.70
3.73
3.76
3.80
3.83
3.86
3.90
3.93
3.96
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
Cooling
capacity
(kW)
12.7
12.7
12.8
12.8
12.8
12.8
12.8
12.9
12.9
12.9
12.9
12.9
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.1
13.1
13.1
Power
consumption
(kW)
4.00
4.00
4.01
4.02
4.02
4.03
4.04
4.05
4.05
4.06
4.07
4.07
4.08
4.09
4.10
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.12
4.13
4.14
(R5903)
22
EDSG18-936
Specifications
Total rated capacity =

of the indoor units
2.5
Cooling capacity of FTKS25D =

Cooling capacity of FTKS35D =
5.0
15.1 2.5
17
15.1 3.5
17
FBQ60B
3.5
FDKS50C
=
for a 5HP (cooling):

FTKS25D
+
FTKS35D
=
For Example:
6.0 = 17 < 18.2
= 2.221
Cooling capacity of FDKS50C
= 3.109
Cooling capacity of FBQ60B
15.1 5.0 = 4.441

17
15.1 6.0 = 5.329
17
5HP (cooling)
25
Capacity [kW]
20
15
10
0
0
5
10
15
20
(R5904)
5HP (cooling)
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
Cooling
capacity
(kW)
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.5
10.6
10.7
Power
consumption
(kW)
1.80
1.84
1.87
1.91
1.95
1.98
2.02
2.06
2.10
2.13
2.17
2.21
2.25
2.28
2.32
2.36
2.40
2.43
2.47
2.51
2.54
2.58
2.62
2.66
2.69
2.73
2.77
2.81
2.84
2.88
2.92
2.96
2.99
3.03
3.07
3.10
3.14
3.18
3.22
3.25
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
Cooling
capacity
(kW)
10.8
10.9
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
Power
consumption
(kW)
3.29
3.33
3.37
3.40
3.44
3.48
3.52
3.55
3.59
3.63
3.67
3.70
3.74
3.78
3.81
3.85
3.89
3.93
3.96
4.00
4.04
4.08
4.11
4.15
4.19
4.23
4.26
4.30
4.34
4.37
4.41
4.45
4.49
4.52
4.56
4.60
4.64
4.67
4.71
4.75
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
15.0
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
15.9
16.0
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
16.8
16.9
17.0
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
17.9
18.0
18.1
18.2
Cooling
capacity
(kW)
14.8
14.8
14.8
14.8
14.8
14.9
14.9
14.9
14.9
14.9
14.9
14.9
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.2
15.2
15.2
15.2
15.2
15.2
Power
consumption
(kW)
4.79
4.79
4.80
4.80
4.81
4.82
4.82
4.83
4.84
4.84
4.85
4.86
4.86
4.87
4.88
4.88
4.89
4.90
4.90
4.91
4.91
4.92
4.93
4.93
4.94
4.95
4.95
4.96
4.97
4.97
4.98
4.99
4.99
(R5905)
23
Specifications
EDSG18-936
6HP(cooling)
25
Capacity [kW]
20
15
10
0
0
5
10
15
20
(R5906)
6HP (cooling)
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
Cooling
capacity
(kW)
7.8
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.9
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
Power
consumption
(kW)
2.04
2.09
2.13
2.17
2.21
2.26
2.30
2.34
2.39
2.43
2.47
2.51
2.56
2.60
2.64
2.68
2.73
2.77
2.81
2.85
2.90
2.94
2.98
3.03
3.07
3.11
3.15
3.20
3.24
3.28
3.32
3.37
3.41
3.45
3.50
3.54
3.58
3.62
3.67
3.71
3.75
3.79
3.84
3.88
3.92
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
15.0
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
15.9
16.0
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
16.8
16.9
Cooling
capacity
(kW)
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
14.0
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
15.0
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.6
15.6
15.6
15.6
15.6
15.6
15.7
Power
consumption
(kW)
3.96
4.01
4.05
4.09
4.14
4.18
4.22
4.26
4.31
4.35
4.39
4.43
4.48
4.52
4.56
4.60
4.65
4.69
4.73
4.78
4.82
4.86
4.90
4.95
4.99
5.03
5.07
5.12
5.16
5.20
5.25
5.29
5.33
5.37
5.42
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
17.0
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
17.9
18.0
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7
18.8
18.9
19.0
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7
19.8
19.9
20.0
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.8
Cooling
capacity
(kW)
15.7
15.7
15.7
15.7
15.8
15.8
15.8
15.8
15.8
15.8
15.9
15.9
15.9
15.9
15.9
16.0
16.0
16.0
16.0
16.0
16.0
16.1
16.1
16.1
16.1
16.1
16.2
16.2
16.2
16.2
16.2
16.2
16.3
16.3
16.3
16.3
16.3
16.4
16.4
Power
consumption
(kW)
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
(R5907)
Note:
Cooling capacity is based on: indoor temp. 27CDB, 19 CWB; outdoor temp. 35 CDB.
The rated capacities above show the rise in the total indoor unit capacity when operating frequency is constant.
Values for changes in capacity are fixed after accounting for variations in operating frequency and should be used as
reference values.
24
EDSG18-936
3.4
Specifications
Indoor Units
Wall Mounted Type

50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color
m/min
(cfm)
Air Flow Rates
Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Direction Control
Air Filter
Running Current (Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L/SL
Sound
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan
H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
A
W
%
mm
mm
kg
kg
Air Flow Rates
Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Filter
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/M/L/SL
Sound
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan
Note:
FTKS35DVM
3.5kW Class
White
8.9 (314)
6.9 (242)
4.8 (169)
4.0 (141)
Cross Flow Fan
40
5 Steps, Silent, Auto
Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.18
40
96.6
Microcomputer Control
283800195
265855340
9
12
dBA
37/25/22
39/26/23
mm
mm
mm

6.4
9.5
18.0
3D049321

6.4
9.5
18.0
3D049322
mm
mm
kg
kg
FTKS50FVM
5.0kW Class
White
14.7 (519)
12.6 (445)
10.2 (360)
9.2 (325)
Cross Flow Fan
43
5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
0.15
34
98.6
2901,050238
3371,147366
12
17
FTKS60FVM
6.0kW Class
White
16.2 (572)
13.9 (491)
11.5 (406)
10.0 (353)
Cross Flow Fan
43
0.18
40
96.6
2901,050238
3371,147366
12
17
dBA
43/39/34/31
45/41/36/33
mm
mm
mm

6.4
12.7
18.0
3D056225

6.4
12.7
18.0
3D056226
Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color
m/min
(cfm)
FTKS25DVM
2.5kW Class
White
8.7 (307)
6.7 (237)
4.7 (166)
3.9 (138)
Cross Flow Fan
40
0.16
35
95.1
283800195
265855340
9
12
H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
A
W
%
See Page 22 Combination Capacity Index.
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3
25
Specifications
EDSG18-936
50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color
m/min
(cfm)
Air Flow Rates
Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Filter
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/M/L/SL
Sound
Sound Power H
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan
Note:
26
mm
mm
kg
kg
FTKS71FVM
7.1kW Class
White
17.4 (614)
14.6 (516)
11.9 (420)
10.7 (378)
Cross Flow Fan
43
0.20
45
97.8
2901,050238
3371,147366
12
17
FTKS50BVMA8
5.0kW Class
White
11.4 (402)
9.8 (346)
8.7 (306)
7.7 (271)
Cross Flow Fan
40
0.17
40
98
290795238
280840338
9
13
dBA
46/42/37/34
44/40/35/32
dBA

6.4
15.9
18.0
3D056227
63
6.4
12.7
18.0
3D060919
H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
A
W
%
mm
mm
mm
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3
EDSG18-936
Specifications
Duct Connected Type

50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color
FDKS25CAVMB
2.5kW Class
m/min
(cfm)
Air Flow Rates
Fan
Type
Motor Output
Speed
mm
mm
kg
kg
9.5 (335)
8.8 (311)
8.0 (282)
6.7 (237)
Sirocco Fan
62
0.47
100
92.5
200900620
2661,106751
25
31
10.0 (353)
9.3 (328)
8.5 (300)
7.0 (247)
Sirocco Fan
62
0.47
100
92.5
200900620
2661,106751
25
31
dBA
35/33/31/29
35/33/31/29
Pa
L/h
40
1.2
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D048947C
40
1.9
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D048948C
FDKS50CVMB
5.0kW Class
FDKS60CVMB
6.0kW Class
H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
Air Filter
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/M/L/SL
Sound
External Static Pressure
Moisture Removal
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
A
W
%
mm
mm
mm
Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color
m/min
(cfm)
Air Flow Rates
Fan
Type
Motor Output
Speed
Note:
mm
mm
kg
kg
12.0 (424)
11.0 (388)
10.0 (353)
8.4 (297)
Sirocco Fan
130
0.64
140
95.1
200900620
2661,106751
27
34
16.0 (565)
14.8 (523)
13.5 (477)
11.2 (395)
Sirocco Fan
130
0.74
160
94.0
2001,100620
2661,306751
30
37
dBA
37/35/33/31
38/36/34/32
Pa
L/h
40
2.9
6.4
12.7
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D052134A
40
3.9
6.4
12.7
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D052135
H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
Air Filter
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/M/L/SL
Sound
Moisture Removal
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
FDKS35CAVMB
3.5kW Class
A
W
%
mm
mm
mm
1. See Page 22 Combination Capacity Index.

2. The operating sound is based on the rear side suction inlet and the external static pressure 40 Pa.
Operating sound for under side suction inlet: [operating sound for rear side suction inlet]+5 dB.
However, when installation to which the external static pressure becomes low is carried out,
5 dB or more may go up.
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3
27
Specifications
EDSG18-936
50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color
FDKS25EAVMB
2.5kW Class
m/min
(cfm)
Air Flow Rates
Fan
Type
Motor Output
Speed
Note:
28
mm
mm
kg
kg
8.7 (307)
8.0 (282)
7.3 (258)
6.2 (219)
Sirocco Fan
62
0.48
71
64.3
200700620
274906751
21
29
8.7 (307)
8.0 (282)
7.3 (258)
6.2 (219)
Sirocco Fan
62
0.48
71
64.3
200700620
274906751
21
29
dBA
35/33/31/29
35/33/31/29
Pa
L/h
30
1.2
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D051882A
30
1.9
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D051884A
H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
Air Filter
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/M/L/SL
Sound
Moisture Removal
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
FDKS35EAVMB
3.5kW Class
A
W
%
mm
mm
mm
1. See Page 22 Combination Capacity Index.

2. The operating sound is based on the rear side suction inlet and the external static pressure 30 Pa.
Operating sound for under side suction inlet: [operating sound for rear side suction inlet]+6 dB.
However, when installation to which the external static pressure becomes low is carried out,
6 dB or more may go up.
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3
EDSG18-936
Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type

50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity 1
Color
Decoration
Panel
Dimensions (HWD)
m/min
(cfm)
Air Flow Rates
Type
Motor Output
Speed
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD) 2
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L
Sound
Sound Power H
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan
mm
mm
kg
kg
FFQ25BV1B9
2.5kW Class
White
55700700
9.0 (318)
6.5 (230)
Turbo Fan
55
2 Steps
Horizontal, Downward
0.37
73
85.8
260 (286)575575
370687674
17.5
21
FFQ35BV1B9
3.5kW Class
White
55700700
10.0 (353)
6.5 (230)
Turbo Fan
55
2 Steps
0.40
84
91.3
260 (286)575575
370687674
17.5
21
dBA
29.5/24.5
32/25
dBA
46.5
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D040444B
49.0
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D040442B
mm
mm
kg
kg
FFQ50BV1B9
5.0kW Class
White
55700700
12.0 (424)
8.0 (283)
Turbo Fan
55
2 Steps
0.49
97
86.1
260 (286)575575
370687674
17.5
21
FFQ60BV1B9
6.0kW Class
White
55700700
15.0 (530)
10.0 (353)
Turbo Fan
55
2 Steps
0.61
120
85.5
260 (286)575575
370687674
17.5
21
dBA
36/27
41/32
dBA
53
6.4
12.7
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D040437
58
6.4
12.7
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D040431
H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
A
W
%
mm
mm
mm
Model
Rated Capacity 1
Color
Decoration
Panel
Dimensions (HWD)
m/min
(cfm)
Air Flow Rates
Type
Motor Output
Speed
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD) 2
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L
Sound
Sound Power H
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan
Note:
1
2
H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
A
W
%
mm
mm
mm

( ) : dimension including control box
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3
29
Specifications
EDSG18-936
50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Color
Decoration
Panel
Dimensions (HWD)
m/min
(cfm)
Air Flow Rates
Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Filter
Running Current (Max. Rated)
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L
Sound
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan
H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
A
W
mm
mm
kg
kg
Air Flow Rates
Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Filter
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L
Sound
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan
Note:
30
FCQ50BVE
5.0kW Class
White
40950950
15.0 (530)
11.0 (388.3)
Turbo Fan
45
2 Steps
0.8
140
230840840
305930920
24
32
dBA
34/30
34/30
mm
mm
mm

6.4 (Flare)
9.5 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049093A

6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049093A
FCQ60BVE
6.0kW Class
White
40950950
19.0 (670.7)
14.0 (494.2)
Turbo Fan
45
2 Steps
0.8
161
230840840
305930920
24
32
FCQ71BVE
7.1kW Class
White
40950950
19.0 (670.7)
14.0 (494.2)
Turbo Fan
45
2 Steps
0.8
161
230840840
305930920
24
32
Model
Rated Capacity
Color
Decoration
Panel
Dimensions (HWD)
m/min
(cfm)
FCQ35BVE
3.5kW Class
White
40950950
14.0 (494)
10.0 (353)
Turbo Fan
45
2 Steps
0.8
140
230840840
305930920
24
32
H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
A
W
mm
mm
kg
kg
dBA
36/31
36/31
mm
mm
mm

6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049093A

9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049093A
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3
EDSG18-936
Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type

50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Color
Decoration
Panel
Dimensions (HWD)
m/min
(cfm)
Air Flow Rates
Fan
Type
Motor Output
Speed
W
Steps
Air Filter
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L
Sound
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Note:
H
M
L
SL
A
W
mm
mm
kg
kg
FBQ60BV1
6.0kW Class
White
551,100500
17.0 (600)
13.0 (459)
Sirocco Fan
110
2 Steps
Resin Net (with mold resistant)
0.9
165
3001,000800
4001,171991
41
50
FBQ71BV1
7.1kW Class
White
551,100500
19.0 (670)
14.0 (494)
Sirocco Fan
12.5
2 Steps
Resin Net (with mold resistant)
1.1
184
3001,000800
4001,171991
41
50
dBA
42/36
42/36
mm
mm
mm

6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049097

9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049097
Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3
31
30
45
140
376
191
71
142
89
620
140
(Pitch of foundation bolt holes)
900
92
30
16
19
39
7
6
30
410
435
(Pitch of foundation bolt holes)

350
(345~355)
24
71 102 117
60
89
95
54
16
19
55
13
145
67
8 Drain pipe connection
7 Control wiring intake
6 Power supply wiring intake
5 Refrigerant piping intake
4 Grounding terminal
3 Service port
2 Liquid pipe connection
1 Gas pipe connection
NO.
Parts name
52
80
84
36
54
320
58
95
54
55
223
32
95
In switch box (M5)

In the unit
9.5 Flare
19.1 Brazing
Remarks
Outside Diameter 26
27 knock hole
34 knock hole
3D052596
4.1
53
Hole for anchor

bolt 4-M12
Dimensions
EDSG18-936
4. Dimensions
Outdoor Units
RMKS112EVM, RMKS140EVM, RMKS160EVM
1345
EDSG18-936
4.2
Dimensions
BP Units
BPMKS967B2B
Manufacturers
Branch piping label
4-Suspension
bolt(M8~M10)
Standard accessories (Caution5. )

68
163
For indoor side(Gas)
I.D.9.5
Cut line for
Cut line for I.D.12.7
322
Suspension bolt pitch
Terminal(For A room)
Wiring clamp
Terminal(For B room)
45 Wiring clamp
Electric box
Terminal(For transmission)
I.D.19.1CuT
2-I.D.15.9CuT
INDOOR UNIT SIDE
Terminal
Earth(M4) (For Power supply) Earth(M4) I.D.9.5CuT
178
178
294
(650)
Characteristics:
1. No drain treatment necessary.
2. This unit can be installed so that or side
faces forward. (It choosed by servicing direction).
3. The piping for the indoor unit and outdoor unit can be.
freely installed to directions of , , or .
4. This unit can be installed with either suspending
from the ceiling or mounting on wall.
Wall-mounting
(Characteristic 4. )
90
I.D.12.7
165
90
For outdoor side(Gas)

110
Dimple
65
O.D.19.1
I.D.19.1
Cut line for

45
I.D.15.9
For indoor side(Liquid)
Cut line for O.D.6.4
150
For outdoor unit side(Liquid)
O.D.9.5 100 I.D.6.4
I.D.9.5
Installation restrictions
(servicing space) (installation and service space) (servicing space)
Min390
Min390
OUTDOOR UNIT SIDE
Screw for temporary fixing

323~355 (Cautions 3.)
113
25
Cautions:
1. This unit must be installed so that side of is facing up.
2. The slant of face must be within 5
for front and rear, right and left.
3. Before mounting on the wall , installation becomes easy
by hanging this unit on screw for temporary fixing. (2 places)
4. At the time of brazing the pipes, wrap the pipes with
sufficient wet cloths.
And after brazing also, must cool piping enough.
5. Cut the piping of the standard accessories in order to
match the indoor units piping diameter.
2-Brazing
197
107
For outdoor unit side(Gas)

O.D.15.9
(servicing space)
Min300
2-I.D.6.4CuT
RoomB
RoomA
23 73.5
(180)
(304)
57 95
23 73.5
22-Brazing
70
125
155
(304)
254
O.D.15.9
110
25
The opening for Inspection

Servicing is needed
opening of 650mm square
for service and maintenance.
:screw for fixing. (4 places)
3D048412A
BPMKS967B3B
Manufacturers 4-Suspension
bolt(M8~M10)
Branch piping label
Standard accessories(Caution5. )
110
45
Cut line for

I.D.15. 9
For indoor side(Liquid)

Cut line for O.D.6. 4
150
For outdoor unit side(Liquid)
100
O.D. 9.5
I.D.6.4
OUTDOOR UNIT SIDE
Screw for temporary fixing

323~355 (Cautions 3.)
25
Cautions:
1. This unit must be installed so that side of is facing up.
2. The slant of face must be within 5
for front and rear, right and left.
3. Before mounting on the wall , installation becomes easy
by hanging this unit on screw for temporary fixing. (2 places)
4. At the time of brazing the pipes, wrap the pipes with
sufficient wet cloths.
And after brazing also, must cool piping enough.
5. Cut the piping of the standard accessories in order to
match the indoor units piping diameter.
165
90
155
Wall-mounting
I.D.19. 1
O.D.19. 1
I.D.9.5
113
Characteristics:
1. No drain treatment necessary.
2. This unit can be installed so that or side
faces forward. (It choosed by servicing direction).
3. The piping for the indoor unit and outdoor unit can be.
freely installed to directions of , , or .
4. This unit can be installed with either suspending
from the ceiling or mounting on wall.
2-Brazing
197
107
For outdoor side(Gas)

110
Dimple
65
(servicing space) (installation and service space) (servicing space)
Min460
Min390
(servicing space)
Min300
Terminal
Earth(M4) (For Power supply) Earth(M4) I.D.9.5CuT
178
178
294
(650)
For outdoor unit side(Gas)

O.D.15.9 90
I.D.12.7
23 73.5
(180)
RoomC
RoomB
RoomA
23 73.5
INDOOR UNIT SIDE
O.D.15.9
I.D.9.5
Cut line for
Cut line for I.D.12.7
322
Terminal(For A room)
Wiring clamp
Wiring clamp
Terminal(For B room)
23-Brazing (304)
Terminal(For C room)
45
Electric box
Terminal(For transmission)
57 95 95 57
I.D.19.1CuT
3-I.D.15.9CuT
3-I.D.6.4CuT
For indoor side(Gas)
70
125
68
163
258
(304)
254
25

Servicing is needed
opening of 650mm square
for service and maintenance.
: screw for fixing.(4 places)
3D048411A
33
Dimensions
EDSG18-936
4.3
Indoor Units
4.3.1
Wall Mounted Type
THE MARK () SHOWS PIPING DIRECTION
AIR FLOW(INDOOR )
30MIN.
REAR
800
RIGHT
LEFT
( INCLUDING
MOUNTING PLATE )
50MIN.
197
50MIN.
(SPACEFOR
MAINTENANCE)
195
( SPACE FOR
PERFORMANCE)
FTKS25DVM, FTKS35DVM
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)
REQUIRED SPACE
SIGNAL RECEIVER
283
NAME PLATE
OPERATION LAMP
TIMER LAMP
INTELLIGENT EYE LAMP
TERMINAL BLOCK
WITH EARTH
TERMINAL
INTELLIGENT EYE SENSOR

BOTTOM
GAS PIPE 9.5Cut

(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE
THE UNIT:ABOUT390)
DRAIN HOSE
(CONNECTING PART
I. D. 14
LIQUID PIPE 6.4CuT
O. D.18
(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE THE HOSE LENGTH OF OUTSIDE
THE UNIT:ABOUT 340)
THE UNIT IS APPROX. 440)
INDOOR UNIT ON/OFF SWITCH

FLAPS
FRONT PANEL FIXED SCREWS

( INSIDE )
ROOM TEMP. THERMISTOR( INSIDE )
SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
17
711
13
800
BLADE ANGLE
18
58
49
UP/DOWN( AUTOMATIC )
163
60
50
44.5
10
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER
283
44.5
FAN
COOLING, DRY
180
DAIKIN
110
WALL HOLE FOR EMBEDDED PIPING

65 HOLE
70
WALL HOLE
65 HOLE
STANDARD LOCATIONS OF WALL HOLES
RIGHT/LEFT( MANUAL )
( ARC433B47 )
3D047958F
45
45
AIR FLOW(INDOOR)
(FOR PERFORMANCE AND MAINTENANCE)
REAR
1050
RIGHT
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)
MIN.50
INCLUDING
INSTALLATION PLATE
240
238
OPERATION LAMP
SIGNAL RECEIVER
290
FRONT GRILLE FIXING SCREWS

(INSIDE)
MODEL NAME
PLATE
INDOOR UNIT ON/OFF

SWITCH
FLAPS
TERMINAL BLOCK WITH

EARTH TERMINAL
(INSIDE)
ROOM TEMP. THERMISTOR

(INSIDE)
TIMER LAMP
HOME LEAVE LAMP
DRAIN HOSE FOR VP13

(CONNECTING PART
I. D. 14.0, O. D. 18.0)
(THE HOSE LENGTH OF
LIQUID PIPE 6.4 CuT
OUTSIDE THE UNIT :
(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE ABOUT 530)
THE UNIT : ABOUT 480)
1050
GAS PIPE 12.7 CuT

SIGNAL
TRANSMITTER
18
BLADE ANGLES
HORIZONTAL BLADE
(AUTOMATIC)
COOLING
893.5
52.5
14.5
58
MIN.50
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)
REQUIRED SPACE
DRY
(ARC433B71)
35 5
35
FAN
VERTICAL BLADE(AUTOMATIC)
5
50
5
55
34
50
60
WALL HOLE FOR
EMBEDDED PIPING
80 HOLE
99.5
52
WIRELESS REMOTE
CONTROLLER
52
40 10
40
155.5
290
163
10
30
REAR
LEFT
MIN.30
(SPACE FOR
PERFORMANCE)
FTKS50FVM, FTKS60FVM
WALL HOLE
80 HOLE
3D055868A
55
EDSG18-936
Dimensions
AIR FLOW(INDOOR)
REAR
REAR
1050
LEFT
MIN.30
RIGHT
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)
MIN.50
MIN.50
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)
REQUIRED SPACE
INCLUDING
( INSTALLATION
PLATE )
(SPACE FOR
PERFORMANCE)
FTKS71FVM
240
238
OPERATION LAMP
SIGNAL RECEIVER
TERMINAL BLOCK WITH

EARTH TERMINAL
(INSIDE)
ROOM TEMP. THERMISTOR

(INSIDE)
TIMER LAMP
HOME LEAVE LAMP
DRAIN HOSE FOR VP13

(CONNECTING PART
I. D. 14.0, O. D. 18.0)
(THE HOSE LENGTH OF
LIQUID PIPE 6.4 CuT
OUTSIDE THE UNIT :
(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE ABOUT 530)
GAS PIPE 15.9 CuT

SIGNAL
TRANSMITTER
18
1050
BLADE ANGLES
893.5
HORIZONTAL BLADE
(AUTOMATIC)
COOLING
52.5
14.5
58
35
35
FAN
CONTROLLER
60
(ARC433B71)
99.5
WALL HOLE FOR

EMBEDDED PIPING
80 HOLE
50 50
5
55
52
WIRELESS REMOTE
52
40 10
40
155.5
290
163
DRY
10
30

(INSIDE)
FLAPS
290
MODEL NAME
PLATE
INDOOR UNIT ON/OFF

SWITCH
WALL HOLE
80 HOLE
3D055869A
55
FTKS50BVMA8
RIGHT
INCLUDING
( INSTALLATION
PLATE )
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)
238
GAS PIPE 12.7 CuT

FLAPS
BLADE ANGLES
35
40
625. 5
62. 5
155. 5
40 10
795
14. 5
DRY
CONNECTING PART
I. D. 14
O. D. 18
THE HOSE LENGTH OF
OUTSIDE THE UNIT :
ABOUT 500
44. 5
163
LIQUID PIPE 6.4 CuT

HORIZONTAL BLADE
(AUTOMATIC)
COOLING
10
DRAIN HOSE FOR VP13
30

(INSIDE)
HOME LEAVE LAMP
58
REQUIRED SPACE
TERMINAL BLOCK
WITH EARTH
TERMINAL
(INSIDE)
SIGNAL RECEIVER
INDOOR UNIT ON/0FF SWITCH
ROOM TEMP. THERMISTOR(INSIDE)
TIMER LAMP
SIGNAL
TRANSMITTER
18
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)
MODEL NAME
PLATE
290
OPERATION LAMP
MIN.50
MIN.50
240
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)
REAR
290
795
MIN.30
REAR
LEFT
AIR FLOW(INDOOR )
35
WIRELESS REMOTE
CONTROLLER
ARC433A22
5
5
55
60
98
WALL HOLE FOR EMBEDDED PIPING

80 HOLE
50
55
50
44. 5
FAN
WALL HOLE
80 HOLE
3D044774A
35
Dimensions
4.3.2
EDSG18-936
Duct Connected Type
FDKS25CAVMB, FDKS35CAVMB, FDKS50CVMB
90
130 63
163
100
160
180
170
100
330
150
100
90
80
20-M5 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)
NOTE)
1. IN CASE OF BACK-SUCTION,
MOUNT CHAMBER COVER TO BOTTOM SIDE OF THE UNIT.
INCASEOFBOTTOM-SUCTION,
MOUNT CHAMBER COVER TO BACK SIDE OF THE UNIT.
2. LOCATION OF UNITS NAME PLATE : CONTROL BOX COVER
3. MOUNT THE AIR FILTER AT THE SUCTION SIDE.
SELECT ITS COLORIMETHOD(GRAVITY METHOD)
50% OR MORE.
IT CAN NOT BE EQUIPPED WITH AIR FILTER(ACCESSORY)
WHEN CONNECTING DUCT TO SUCTION SIDE.
6
4. PIPE SPECIFICATION
CDX(K)S25
CDX(K)S35
9.5 (FLARE CONNECTION)
FDX(K)S25
FDX(K)S35
CDX(K)S50
FDX(K)S50
200
180
160
100
10
20
50
SIGNAL RECEIVER
CORD
(LENGTH:1900mm)
INFRARED RECEIVER UNIT
20-M5 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)
HOME
LEAVE
LAMP
23
30
7xP100=700
780
800
820
DAIKIN
38
50
20
10
TIMER
LAMP
INDOOR UNIT
ON/OFF
SWICH
(72)
300
ALLOW VIEW
(20)
70
SERVICE SPACE

FDKS--C(A)VMB : (ARC433B76)
ROOM
TEMP.
SENSOR
120
900
OPERATION
LAMP
INSPECTION DOOR
(CEILING OPENING)
18-M4 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)
(45)
CEILING
200
170
153
80
90
880
860
4xP150=600
400 OR MORE
(INCASE OF
BOTTOM SUCSION)
47
90
12.5
21
57.5
SUSPENSION
BOLT
4-M8~M10
DAIKIN
60
(ALL AROUND)22-4.7 HOLE

8xP100=800
940
(SUSPENSION BOLT PITCH)
SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
18
58
620
240 OR MORE
620
500
20 OR MORE
20 OR MORE
300 OR MORE
(SERVICE SPACE)
900
130
100
90
80
IN CASE OF BOTTOM-SUCTION
7xP100=700
780
800
820
IN CASE OF BACK-SUCTION
AIR FILTER(ACCESSORY)
9
8
SUSPENSION BRACKET
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTION
INFRARED RECEIVER
6
UNIT CONNECTION
5
CONTROL BOX
DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY)
4
SOCKET FOR DRAIN
3
GAS PIPE CONNECTION
2
LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION
1
NUMBER
NAME
7
I.D.25(OUTLET)
VP20 (O.D. 26/I.D. 20)
NOTE) 4.
DESCRIPTION
C: 3D045486E
163
FDKS60CVMB : (ARC433B76)
HOME
LEAVE
LAMP
SIGNAL RECEIVER
CORD (LENGTH:1900mm)
100
160
180
170
47
90
24-M5 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)
330
38
100
23
30
ROOM
(20)
TEMP.
SENSOR
(72)
300
INDOOR UNIT
ON/OFF
SWICH
ALLOW VIEW
INSPECTION DOOR
(CEILING OPENING)
130 63
70
TIMER
LAMP
120
OPERATION
LAMP
SERVICE SPACE
SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
18
50
20
10
500
12.5
21
57.5
(45)
CEILING
200
170
153
80
18-M4 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)
58
60
620
26-4.7 HOLE (ALL AROUND)

10xP100=1000
1140
SUSPENSION BOLT
4-M8~M10
1080
1060
6xP150=900
620
400 OR MORE
(IN CASE OF
BOTTOM SUCSION)
1100
300 OR MORE
(SERVICE SPACE)
1100
240 OR MORE
20 OR MORE
20 OR MORE
FDKS60CVMB
150
100
90
80
9xP100=900
980
1000
1020
9
200
180
160
100
24-M5 HOLES (ALL AROUND)
10
20
50
9xP100=900
980
1000
1020
36
130
100
90
80
NOTE)
1. IN CASE OF BACK-SUCTION,
IN CASE OF BOTTOM-SUCTION,
2. LOCATION OF UNITS NAME PLATE : CONTROL BOX COVER
3 .MOUNT THE AIR FILTER AT THE SUCTION SIDE.
SELECT ITS COLORIMETHOD (GRAVITY METHOD)
50% OR MORE.
SUSPENSION BRACKET
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTION
5
4
3
2
1
NUMBER
INFRARED RECEIVER
UNIT CONNECTION
CONTROL BOX
DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY) I.D.25(OUTLET)
VP20 (O.D. 26/I.D. 20)
SOCKET FOR DRAIN
GAS PIPE CONNECTION
LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION 6.4 FLARE (CONNECTION)
NAME
DESCRIPTION
C: 3D045487C
EDSG18-936
Dimensions
FDKS25EAVMB, FDKS35EAVMB
163
OPERATION LAMP
ROOM TEMP.
SENSOR (20)
70
38
(72)
120
HOME LEAVE
LAMP
SIGNAL RECEIVER
CORD(LENGTH:1900mm)
16-M5 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)
10 9
100
23
200
170
153
80
DAIKIN
50
20
10
130 63
TIMER LAMP
INDOOR UNIT
ON/OFF SWITCH
47
90
30
14-M4 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)
FDKS25,35EAVMB(ARC433B76)
ALLOW VIEW
INSPECTION DOOR
(CEILING OPENING)
680
660
4P150=600
12.5
21
57.5
700
SERVICE SPACE

(45)
100
160
180
SUSPENSION BOLT
4-M8~M10
400 OR MORE
(IN CASE OF
BOTTOM SUCSION)
170
DAIKIN
CEILING
60
(ALL AROUND)
16-4.7 HOLE
5P100=500
740
SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
18
58
620
300
620
500
20 OR MORE
20 OR MORE
300 OR MORE
(SERVICE SPACE)
240 OR MORE
700
330
140
100
90
80
5P100=500
580
600
620
200
180
160
100
6
10 5P100=500
10
20
50
16-M5 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)
4.3.3
NOTE) 1. IN CASE OF BACK-SUCTION,

IN CASE OF BOTTOM-SUCTION,
2. LOCATION OF UNITS NAME PLATE: CONTROL BOX COVER
3. MOUNT THE AIR FILTER AT THE SUCTION SIDE.
SELECT ITS COLORIMETHOD(GRAVITY METHOD)
50% OR MORE.
4. PIPE SPECIFICATION
140
580
100
600
90
80
620
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
NUMBER
PROTECTION NET
SUSPENSION BRACKET
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
INFRARED RECEIVER UNIT CONNECTION
CONTROL BOX
DRAIN HOSE(ACCESSORY)
SOCKET FOR DRAIN
GAS PIPE CONNECTION
LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION
NAME
I.D.25(OUTLET)
VP20(O.D.26/I.D.20)
9.5(FLARE CONNECTION)
6.4(FLARE CONNECTION)
DESCRIPTION
C: 3D050379A
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (600600)
FFQ25BV1B9, FFQ35BV1B9 with BYFQ60B8W1 (Decoration Panel)

300 OR LESS
700
NOTE)2.
585 ~ 660(CELING OPENING SPACE)

533(SUSPENTION POSITION)
320
89
PIPE CONNECTION
SIDE
CEILING
89
B
10
150
533 (SUSPENTION POSITION)
700
585 ~ 660(CELING OPENING SPACE)
210
DRAIN CONNECTION
SIDE
4-M4 HOLE
OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE

(DIRECT CONNECTION)
B ARROW VIEW
7
320
REQUIRED SPACE
3
575
62.5
575
62.5
1500mm
OR MORE
62.5
196
1500mm OR MORE
211
45 OR LESS
NOTE) 1. STICKING LOCATION FOR MANUFACTURES LABEL

MANUFACTURES LABEL FOR INDOOR UNIT : ON THE BELL MOUTH INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE
MANUFACTURES LABEL FOR DECORATION PANEL : ON THE INNER FRAME INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE
2. IN CASE OF USING WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER, THIS POSITION WILL BE A SIGNAL RECEIVER.
REFER TO THE DRAWING OF WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER IN DETAIL.
3. WHEN THE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY IN THE CEILING EXCEED 30C AND RH 80% OR THE FRESH AIR
IS INDUCTED INTO THE CEILING OR THE UNIT CONTINUES 24 HOUR OPERATION, AN ADDITIONAL
INSULATION (THICKNESS 10mm OR MORE OF GLASSWOOL OR POLYETHYLENE FORM) IS REQUIRED.
4. THOUGH THE INSTALLATION IS ACCEPTABLE UP TO MAXIMUM OF 660mm SQUARE CEILING OPENING,
KEEP THE CLEARANCE OF 45mm OR LESS BETWEEN THE MAIN UNIT AND THE CEILING OPENING SO THAT
THE PANEL OVERLAP ALLOWANCE CAN BE ENSURED.
45 OR LESS
NOTE)4.
A
DECORATION PANEL
BYFQ60B8W1
WHITE Ral 9010
1500 OR MORE
(REQUIRED SPACE)
FROM THE FLOOR SIDE
2500 OR MORE
FOR HEIGHT INSTALLATION
172
(180)
145
183
285
205
30
55
25
260
SUSPENTION BOLT
4-M8 ~ M10
1500mm OR MORE
62.5
295 OR MORE
750
ADJUSTABLE(0 ~ 545)
A ARROW VIEW
1500mm OR MORE
WHEN THE DISCHARGE GRILL IS CLOSEOUT,
THE REQUIRED SPACE IS 200mm OR MORE.
8
7
6
5

SUCTION GRILLE
AIR DISCHARGE GRILL
REMOTE CONTROL CODE
AND CONTROL WIRING CONNECTION
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
3 DRAIN PIPE CONNECTION
2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION
1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION
ITEM
PART NAME
I. D.25 (OUTLET)
VP20(O.D.26)
REMARK
C: 3D039003B
37
Dimensions
EDSG18-936
FFQ50BV1B9, FFQ60BV1B9 with BYFQ60B8W1 (Decoration Panel)

700
300 OR LESS
NOTE)2.
585~660(CELING OPENING SPACE)

320
PIPE CONNECTION
SIDE
210
CEILING
B
89
100
150
700
585~660(CELING OPENING SPACE)
89
DRAIN CONNECTION
SIDE
4-M4 HOLE
OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE

(DIRECT CONNECTION)
B ARROW VIEW
7
320
REQUIRED SPACE
3
196
575
1500mm
OR
OR MORE
MORE
62.5
575
1500mm OR MORE
45 OR LESS
NOTE)4.
45 OR LESS
NOTE) 1.STICKING LOCATION FOR MANUFACTURES LABEL

MANUFACTURES LABEL FOR INDOOR UNIT:ON THE BELL MOUTH INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE
MANUFACTURES LABEL FOR DECORATION PANEL :ON THE INNER FRAME INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE
2.IN CASE OF USING WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER, THIS POSITION WILL BE A SIGNAL RECEIVER.
REFER TO THE DRAWING OF WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER IN DETAIL.
3.WHEN THE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY IN THE CEILING EXCEED 30C AND RH 80% OR THE FRESH AIR
IS INDUCTED INTO THE CEILING OR THE UNIT CONTINUES 24 HOUR OPERATION,AN ADDITIONAL
DECORATION PANEL
INSULATION (THICKNESS 10mm OR MORE OF GLASSWOOL OR POLYETHYLENE FORM) IS REQUIRED.
4.THOUGH THE INSTALLATION IS ACCEPTABLE UP TO MAXIMUM OF 660mm SQUARE CEILING OPENING,
KEEP THE CLEARANCE OF 45mm OR LESS BETWEEN THE MAIN UNIT AND THE CEILING OPENING SO THAT BYFQ60B8W1 WHITE Ral 9010
THE PANEL OVERLAP ALLOWANCE CAN BE ENSURED.
1500 OR MORE
(REQUIRED SPACE)
FROM THE FLOOR SIDE
2500 OR MORE
211
(180)
145
183
285
205
172
30
55
25
260
SUSPENTION BOLT
4-M8~M10
1500mm OR MORE
62.5
295 OR MORE
62.5
62.5
1500mm OR MORE
WHEN THE DISCHARGE GRILL IS CLOSEOUT,
THE REQUIRED SPACE IS 200mm OR MORE.

SUCTION GRILLE
AIR DISCHARGE GRILL
REMOTE CONTROL CODE
AND CONTROL WIRING CONNECTION
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
3 DRAIN PIPE CONNECTION
2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION
1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION
ITEM
PAR TNAME
8
7
6
5
FOR HEIGHT INSTALLATION
750
ADJUSTABLE(0~545)
A ARROW VIEW
I. D.25 (OUTLET)
VP20 (O.D.26)
REMARK
C: 3D039005B
BYFQ60B8W1 Decoration Panel (Option)
700
700
62.5
62.5
62.5
575
(140)
A
40
THICKNESS
OF PANEL SPACER
3
2
15
DIMENSION BETWEEN
THE BOTTOM SURFACE
OF INDOOR UNIT AND
THE SURFACE OF CEILING
105
575
143
245
62.5
255 OR MORE
A ARROW VIEW
3
2
1
PANEL SPACER
DECORATION PANEL
INDOOR UNIT
ITEM
NAME
REMARK
3D041038
38
EDSG18-936
Dimensions
BRC1C61 Wired Remote Controller (Option)

NOTE)1.REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD AND STAPLE ARE NOT ATTACHED.
THEY ARE FIELD SUPPLIED PARTS.
SPECIFICATIONS OF CORD
VINYL CORD WITH SHEATH OR CABLE
TYPE
(INSULATED THICKNESS : 1mm OR MORE)
SIZE
0.75~1.25mm 2
TOTAL
500m
LENGTH
38
84
120
42
REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS
120
18
17
CORD OUTLET HOLE

23
28
46
INSTALLATION METHOD
STAPLE
REMOTE CONTROLLER
B EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD

C EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD
CONDUIT
17
REMOTE CONTROLLER
REMOTE CONTROLLER
117
A EXPOSED BODY, EXPOSED CORD
0~5
BETWEEN REMOTE
CONTROLLER AND
CONTROL BOX
(
17
THROUGH HOLE
(12~16)
17
)
CONTROL BOX
C: 3D028952
BRC7E531W Wireless Remote Controller (Option for Cooling Only Type)

RECEIVER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
TRANSMITTING PART
157
DRAIN PIPING SIDE
REFRIGERANT PIPING SIDE
RECEIVER
62
17.5
REMOTE CONTROLLER HOLDER

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
<INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE>
LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)
DECORATION PANEL
(BYFQ60B8W1)
RECEIVER DETAIL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER
3D038937A
39
Dimensions
4.3.4
EDSG18-936
FCQ35BVE with BYC125K-W1 (Decoration Panel)

C
85
(165)
2 100=200
80
950
780 Suspension position
10
40
Branch duct
connection
350
C view
60
4-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)
7
5
80
80
950
860~890 Ceiling opening
Note3.

300 or less
420
55
55
840
2 100=200
80
55
12-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)
85
*1500mm or more
Required space
30
260
270
315
150
2
40
350
Branch duct
connection
A
Notes:
1. Location of units Name Plate
For Main body:Switch Box cover inside surface of suction grille.
For decoration panel: Panel frame inside surface of suction grille.
1000 or more
Required space 165
125
150
240
95
110
295
240
Suspension
bolt
4-M8~M10
For fresh air intake kit

connection
(direct installation type)
B view
840
55
200
750
Adjustable(0~550)
40
230
10
420
160
A view
*1500mm
or more
*1500mm
or more
*1500mm or more
*When the discharge grill is closeout, the required space is
200mm or more.
Name
Number
3. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will

be a signal receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote
controller in detail.
2. When installing an optional accessory, refer to the

installation drawings.
For fresh air intake kitInspection port is necessary.
For high efficiency filter unitInspection port is not necessary.
Description
Liquid pipe connection
6.4 flare
Gas pipe connection
9.5 flare
Drain pipe connection
VP25
Power supply connection
Remote control code and control

wiring connection
Air discharge grille
Air suction grille
Port for water supply
Corner decoration cover
10
Drain hose
O.D.32
3D049126
FCQ50BVE, FCQ60BVE with BYC125K-W1 (Decoration Panel)
C
950
300 or less
9

420
2 100=200
80
85
(165)
Note3.
Branch duct
connection
350
C view
4-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)
7
5
60
80
80
40
950
10
55
840
55
55
80
840
2 100=200
85
240
8
260
270
315
12-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)
*1500mm or more
Required space
Branch duct
connection
165
150
2
40
350
*1500mm
or more
*1500mm
or more
*1500mm or more
200mm or more.
Name
Number
Notes:
For Main body:Switch Box cover inside surface of suction grille.
For decoration panel:Panel frame inside surface of suction grille.
For fresh air intake kitInspection port is necessary.
For high efficiency filter unitInspection port is not necessary.

connection
B view
1000 or more
Required space
125
150
240
30
Suspension
bolt
4-M8~M10
55
95
110
295
200
750
Adjustable(0~550)
40
230
10
420
160
A view
Description
6.4flare
Gas pipe connection
12.7flare
VP25
Remote control code and control

wiring connection
Air suction grille
10
Drain hose
O.D.32
3D049127
40
EDSG18-936
Dimensions
FCQ71BVE with BYC125K-W1 (Decoration Panel)
300 or less
2100=200
80
40
950
10
C view
4-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)
7
5
60
80
55
55
80
160
55
12-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)
85
95
110
295
840
2100=200
240
260
270
315
Branch duct
connection
165
150
40
350
*1500mm or more
Required space
1000 or more
Required space
125
150
240
750
840
30
Suspension
bolt
4-M8~M10

connection
B view
55
200
Adjustable(0~550)
40
230
10
420
Branch duct
connection
350
A view
85
(165)
950
80
Note3.

420
*1500mm
or more
*1500mm
or more
*1500mm or more

200mm or more.
Description
9.5 flare
Gas pipe connection
15.9 flare
VP25
Notes:
For Main body: Switch Box Cover inside surface of suction grille.
For decoration panel: Panel frame inside surface of suction grille.
z For fresh air intake kitInspection port is necessary.
z For high efficiency filter unitInspection port is not necessary.
Name
Number
Remote control code and control wiring connection
Air suction grille
10
Drain hose
O.D. 32
3D012312D

TYPE
SIZE
0.75~1.25mm 2
TOTAL
500m
LENGTH
38
84
120
42
120
18
17
CORD OUTLET HOLE

23
28
46
INSTALLATION METHOD
STAPLE
REMOTE CONTROLLER

CONDUIT
17
REMOTE CONTROLLER
REMOTE CONTROLLER
117
0~5
BETWEEN REMOTE
CONTROLLER AND
CONTROL BOX
(
17
17
)
CONTROL BOX
THROUGH HOLE
(12~16)
C: 3D028952
41
Dimensions
EDSG18-936
BRC7C613W Wireless Remote Controller (Option for Cooling Type)

RECEIVER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
DRAIN PIPING
SIDE
TRANSMITTING PART
157
RECEIVER
REFRIGERANT
PIPING SIDE
62
17.5
REMOTE CONTROLLER HOLDER

(BYC125K-W1,W1S,W2,W2C)
(BYC125KJW1)
RECEIVER DETAIL
<INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE>
DECORATION PANEL
LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT FOR EACH DECORATION PANEL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER
WIRELESS REMOTE
CONTROLLER KIT
BRC7C612W
BRC7C613W
BRC7C612WC
BRC7C613WC
BRC7C512W BRC7CA512W
BRC7C513W BRC7CA513W
BYC125K-W1 W2
BYC125K-W2C
BYC125KJW1
BYC125K-W1S
BRC7C613WS
4.3.5
DECORATION PANEL
3D005912D
FBQ60BV1 with BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1) (Decoration Panel)
46
160
228
18-M5 hole
1060(Ceiling opening)
1100
6150=900
1000
View
1165=715
600
Fresh air intake position
Notes;
1. Location of units Name Plate:Fan housing surface
inside of filter.
2. When installing an optional accessory, refertothe
3. Refer to the separate drawing when installing the
duct.
4. "Decoration panel"and"Air suction canvas"are
optional accessories.
Number
Name
1
2
Gas pipe connection
6-M5 hole
(Circumference)
Position of
Natural evaporating
pan type humidifier
(Note2)
7
1050(Suspension position)
View
42
Suction air intake position

when installing the duct
(Note 3)
100
630 (Suspension position) 145
P.C.D160
125
(Knockout hole)
195
6
45
950
927
500
462 (Ceiling opening)
135 120
57
300 or more
(Service space)
* The required ceiling depth

varies according to configuration
of specific system.
150
250
300
245
215
150
135
67
150
200
265=130
45
10
5150=750
785
800
595(Air suction panel center)
440
3
315
300
60
50
Suspension bolt
4-M8~M10
350 or more
Required
installation space
25
1000
760
65
View
3
4

Interunit wiring port
5
6
Power wiring port

Drain hole
Air filter
Description
6.4 flare connection
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)
3D049451
EDSG18-936
Dimensions
FBQ60BV1 with BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1) (Decoration Panel) and KSA-25KA80 (Canvas Duct)
25
135 120
46
45
57
300 or more

of specific system.
265=130
300
245
215
150
135
45
75~255
440
315
195
Suspension bolt
4-M8~M10
800
595 (Air suction panel center)
425 or more
Required installation space
60
50
67
150
200
1000
785
760
5150=750
65
6 4
150
250
160
228
18-M5 hole
300

(Note 3)
950
927
500
10
(Service space)
6150=900
1000
1100
Notes;
inside of filter.
duct.
View
1165=715
600
100
145
P.C.D160
125
(Knockout hole)
Name
Number
1
6-M5 hole
(Circumference)
2
3
4
5
6
7
Position of
Natural evaporating
pan type humidifier
(Note 2)
7
Gas pipe connection

Power wiring port
Drain hole
Air filter
Description
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)
View
3D049452
View
FBQ71BV1 with BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1) (Decoration Panel)
46
160
228
18-M5 hole
1100
6150=900
1000
View
1165=715

(Note 3)
600
Notes;
inside of filter.
duct.
100
145
P.C.D160
125
(Knockout hole)
195
6
45
950
927
500
135 120
57
300 or more
(Service space)

of specific system.
150
250
300
245
215
150
135
67
150
200
265=130
45
10
5150=750
785
800
440
3
315
300
60
50
Suspension bolt
4-M8~M10
350 or more
Required
installation space
25
1000
760
65
6-M5 hole
(Circumference)
Position of
Natural evaporating
pan type humidifier
(Note 2)
7
View
View
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Gas pipe connection
Power wiring port
Drain hole
Description
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)
Air filter
3D039435A
43
Dimensions
EDSG18-936
FBQ71BV1 with BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1) (Decoration Panel) and KSA-25KA80 (Canvas Duct)
25
45
75~255
300
245
215
150
135
67
150
200
265=130
57
300 or more

of specific system.
45
195
Suspension bolt
4-M8~M10
800
440
3
315
46
6 4
425 or more
Required installation space
60
50
135 120
1000
785
760
5150=750
65
150
250
160
228
18-M5 hole
300

(Note 3)
950
927
500
10
(Service space)
6150=900
1000
1100
Notes;
inside of filter.
duct.
View
1165=715
600
100
630 (Suspension position) 145
P.C.D160
125
(Knockout hole)
6-M5 hole
(Circumference)
Position of
Natural evaporating
pan type humidifier
(Note 2)
7
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Gas pipe connection
Power wiring port
Drain hole
Air filter
Description
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)
View
3D039439A
View

TYPE
SIZE
0.75~1.25mm 2
TOTAL
500m
LENGTH
38
84
120
42
120
18
17
CORD OUTLET HOLE

23
28
46
INSTALLATION METHOD
STAPLE
REMOTE CONTROLLER

CONDUIT
17
REMOTE CONTROLLER
REMOTE CONTROLLER
117
0~5
BETWEEN REMOTE
CONTROLLER AND
CONTROL BOX
(
17
44
17
)
CONTROL BOX
THROUGH HOLE
(12~16)
C: 3D028952
HBP
K1R
Y1S
Y2S
Y3S
Z1C~7C
Z1F~4F
K3R
L1R
SOLENOID VALVE (4 WAY VALVE)

L-RED
N-BLU
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (MAIN)
SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS) A1P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (SERVICE)
SOLENOID VALVE (U/L CIRCUIT) A2P
X1M L N
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (NOISE FILTER)
NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE) A3P
Z1C
X37A
A2P
A4P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (C/H SELECTOR)
NOISE FILTER
N=1
A3P
C4
PUSH BUTTON SWITCH
BS1~5
C/H SELECTOR
BLU
RED
H2P H4P H6P
H8P
N
A4P
S1S
SELECTOR SWITCH (FAN/COOL HEAT)
(MODE, SET, RETURN, TEST, RESET)
LA F1U Z
NA
HAP X2M
L
H3P
H7P
H1P
H5P
S2S
SELECTOR
SWITCH
(COOL/HEAT)
C1~4
CAPACITOR
DS1
2
ON
DS1
CONNECTOR OF OPTION ADAPTOR
A1P
DIP SWITCH
F
E
GRN
A3P
OFF
E1HC
CRANKCASE HEATER
CONNECTOR
X37A
(BACK)
BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5
Z1F
1 2
X1M (FRONT) NOTE)4 (OPTION ADAPTOR POWER SUPPLY) F1U,F4U FUSE(T 6.3A/250V)
FUSE(T 5.0A/250V)
F6U
X205A
LB
NB
A2P
EL,COMPO,BOX
H1P~8P PILOT LAMP(SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE)
BLU
RED
[H2P]PREPARE,TEST ------ FLICKERING
F4U
LC
NC
MALFUNCTION DETECTION - LIGHT UP
X37A
NOTE)4
OPERATION PILOT LAMP
HAP
X5A
(SERVICE MONITOR - GREEN)(A1P)
Z4C
Z3F
INV. PILOT LAMP
HBP
N=1
(SERVICE MONITOR - GREEN)(A1P)
Z4F
PS
S1NPH
X17A
R1
K1M
MAGNETIC CONTACTOR
L1R
K1R
MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S)
K1M
BLU
K5R
WHT LD
K2R
X26A
X28A
X27A
X25A
S1NPL K3R
X2A WHT LE
X18A
K4R
MAGNETIC
RELAY (E1HC)
S1PH
K5R
MAGNETIC RELAY
Z3C
V2R
P<
HAP
HBP
REACTOR
L1R
E1HC
N=1
+
Y1E M1C
Y1S
Y2S
Y3S
MOTOR (COMPRESSOR)
X32A
V1T
6 M M1F
+ C2 + C3
MOTOR (FAN) (UPPER)
X21A
FIN
C4
V3R
P ORG
R6T
R3T
R5T
R4T
R7T
R2T
R1T
MOTOR (FAN) (LOWER)
M2F
TH
PS
POWER SUPPLY
+ C1
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
N GRY
Y3E R1
t
RESISTOR
6 M R2
RESISTOR
X22A
R2
F6U
THERMISTOR (AIR)
R1T
+
Z7C
1 X13A
X111A
X11A 1 X12A
R2T
THERMISTOR (M1C DISCHARGE)
V1R
N=1
THERMISTOR (SUCTION1)
R3T
X106A
X107A
X81A
R4T
THERMISTOR (COIL)
X66A
A1P
THERMISTOR (SUCTION2)
R5T
Z6C
R6T
THERMISTOR (SUBCOOL)
MS
MS
Z5C
N=1
THERMISTOR (LIQUID)
R7T
N=4
M1F 3~
M2F 3~
Z2C
X1A
FINTH
THERMISTOR (FIN)
X2M
N=6
C/H
SELECTOR
RED WHT BLU
PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH)
S1NPH
F1 F2 F1 F2
B
C
A
X1M
U V W
PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW)
S1NPL
NOTES)1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTDOOR UNIT.
A4P
TO BP UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT
PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
S1PH
MS
2.
: FIELD WIRING.
3~
POWER MODULE
V1R
M1C
3.
: TERMINAL STRIP
,
: MOVABLE CONNECTOR
: FIXED CONNECTOR
DIODE
MODULE
V2R,
V3R
: TERMINAL
:PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW)
:NOISELESS EARTH
V1T
IGBT
4.
WHEN
USING
THE
OPTION
ADAPTOR,
REFER
TO
THE
INSTALLATION
MANUAL.
HEAT
THE POSITION OF
W
TERMINAL STRIP (POWER SUPPLY)
X1M
S2S AIR CONTROL
5. REFER TO "OPERATION CAUTION LABEL "(ON BACK OF FRONT PLATE)
NOTE)8
COMPRESSOR U
X2M
TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL)
COOL
HOW TO USE BS1~BS5 AND DS1 2 SWITCH.
NOTE)9
TERMINAL
X1M
TERMINAL STRIP (C/H SELECTOR) (A4P)
S1S
6. WHEN OPERATING,DONT SHORT CIRCUIT FOR PROTECTION DEVICE.(S1PH)
OUTDOOR
V
BP
UNIT
THE ENTRANCE
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN)
Y1E
FAN
7. COLORS BLU:BLUE BRN:BROWN GRN:GREEN RED:RED WHT:WHITE YLW:YELLOW ORG:ORANGE.
(F1)(F2)
(F1)(F2)
OF WIRE
Y3E
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB COOL)
COOL/HEAT SELECTOR
8. REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL,FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO
3D051733C
BP-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 F2.
9. WHEN USING THE CENTRAL CONTROL SYSTEM,CONNECT OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 F2.
GRN/YLW
BRN

RED
5.1
K4R
YLW
POWER SUPPLY
V1A:220-240V~50Hz
VM :220-230V~50/60Hz
EDSG18-936
Wiring Diagrams
5. Wiring Diagrams
Outdoor Units
45
ORG
K2R
Wiring Diagrams
5.2
EDSG18-936
BP Units
BPMKS967B2B
R1T R2T R3T R4T
(DLA) (DGA) (DLB) (DGB)
t
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU
FIELD WIRING
OFF
1
2 DS2
3
4
12
6
X22A
(BLU)
1
6
X21A
(RED)
1
6
X20A
(WHT)
1
1
X90A
(WHT)
X6M
X3M
INDOOR
ROOM A
3
X4M
INDOOR
ROOM B
TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT
H1P
LEDA
H2P
LED1
H3P
LED2
H4P
LED3
H5P
LED4
F2U
3.15A
RED
BLU
YLW
RED
BLU
YLW
RED
BLU
YLW
BRW
ORG
WHT
BRW
ORG
WHT
BRW
ORG
WHT
Y3E
M
Y1E
M BYPASS
FOR TRANSMISSION
TO OUTDOOR (F1F2)
OR OTHER BP UNIT
F2
TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT
T201R
ROOM B
Y2E
M ROOM A
F1
X1M
N2
N1
TO OTHER BP UNIT
L1
L2
N1
E1
PCB
L1
POWER SUPPLY
230V~50Hz
GRN/YLW
X20A~X22A, X90A : CONNECTOR

: PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
PCB
: FUSE
F2U
H1P~H5P : PILOT LAMP

R1T~R4T : THERMISTOR
DS2
: DIP SWITCH
T201R
: TRANSFORMAR
X1M, X3M, X4M, X6M : TERMINAL STRIP
Y1E~Y3E
: MOTOR OPERATED VALVE COIL
3D048565B
BPMKS967B3B
R1T R2T R3T R4T R5T R6T
(DLA) (DGA) (DLB) (DGB) (DLC) (DGC)
YLW
t
YLW
BLU
YLW
YLW
t
BLU
BLK
BLU
BLU
t
BLK
BLK
BLK
FIELD WIRING
OFF
1
2 DS2
3
4
12
INDOOR
ROOM A
3
X4M
INDOOR
ROOM B
3
X5M
INDOOR
ROOM C
TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT
H1P
H2P
LEDA
LED1
H3P
H4P
LED2
LED3
H5P
LED4
F2U
3.15A
TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT
RED
1
6
YLW
RED
BLU
1
6
X21A
(RED)
1
X90A
(WHT)
BLU
X22A
(BLU)
X3M
1
X23A
(YLW)
YLW
RED
BLU
X20A
(WHT)
1
6
YLW
RED
BLU
YLW
BRW
ORG
WHT
BRW
ORG
Y3E
M ROOM B
WHT
BRW
ORG
Y2E
M ROOM A
WHT
BRW
ORG
Y1E
M BYPASS
WHT
X6M
F2
T201R
Y4E
M ROOM C
F1
FOR TRANSMISSION
TO OUTDOOR (F1F2)
OR OTHER BP UNIT
X1M
N2
L2
TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT
PCB
N1
L1
E1
N1
TO OTHER BP UNIT
L1
N
L
POWER SUPPLY
230V~50Hz
GRN/YLW
X20A~X23A, X90A : CONNECTOR

PCB
: FUSE
F2U
46
H1P~H5P : PILOT LAMP

R1T~R6T : THERMISTOR
DS2
: DIP SWITCH
T201R
: TRANSFORMAR
X1M, X3M~X6M : TERMINAL STRIP
Y1E~Y4E
: MOTOR OPERATED VALVE COIL
3D048566A
EDSG18-936
Wiring Diagrams
5.3
Indoor Units
5.3.1
Wall Mounted Type
FIELD WIRING.
S27
PCB3
S26
PCB1
H1
F1U
~
RECTIFIER
LED1
3.15A
X1M
V1
H1P
H2
LED2
H2P
LED3
H3P
WHT
RED
GRN /
H3
TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT
BLK
FG
S1
RED
t
HA
R1T
BLU
BRN
ORG
INTELLIGENT EYE
SENSOR
WHT
S35
S28
PCB2
S32
S6
M
M1F
FG
F1U
H1P~H3P
M1F
M1S
PCB1~PCB4
R1T, R2T
S1~S38
S1W
X1M
RED
ORG
YLW
PNK
BLU
S36
PCB4
OUTDOOR
CAUTION
NOTE THAT OPERATION WILL
RESTART AUTOMATICALLY IF
THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY IS
TURNED OFF AND THEN BACK
ON AGAIN.
YLW
S1W
S21
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
FRAME GROUND
FUSE
PILOT LAMP
FAN MOTOR
SWING MOTOR
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
THERMISTOR.
CONNECTOR
OPERATION SWITCH
TERMINAL STRIP
PROTECTIVE EARTH
S29
R2T
WIRELESS
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
SIGNAL
RECEIVER
INDOOR
M
M1S
3D046453E
FTKS50FVM, FTKS60FVM, FTKS71FVM
FIELD WIRING.
PCB3
S27
S26
PCB1
H1
~
~
RECTIFIER
Fu
3.15A
H2
t
R1T
S38
BLK
WHT
RED 3
GRN
/
YLW
H3
TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT
X1M
FG
PCB4
S37
S21
S1
RED
LED1 LED2 LED3

H1P
BLU
BRN
ORG
WHT
H2P H3P
PCB5
S36
S35
INTELLIGENT EYE
S28
S32
S6
S8
M
M1F
SIGNAL
WIRELESS
REMOTE
RECEIVER
S1W
t
S29
BRN
RED
ORG
YLW
PNK
BLU
PCB2
RED
ORG
YLW
PNK
BLU
SENSOR
INDOOR
R2T
M
M1S
CONTROLLER
M
M2S
FG
Fu
H1 ~ H3
H1P ~ H3P
M1F
M1S, M2S
PCB1~ PCB5
R1T, R2T
S1 ~ S38
S1W
X1M
OUTDOOR
CAUTION
ON AGAIN.
: FRAME GROUND
: FUSE
: HARNESS
: PILOT LAMP
: FAN MOTOR
: SWING MOTOR
: THERMISTOR
: CONNECTOR
: OPERATION SWITCH
: TERMINAL STRIP
: PROTECTIVE EARTH
3D038530S
47
Wiring Diagrams
EDSG18-936
FTKS50BVMA8
FIELD WIRING.
PCB3
S27
S26
PCB1
H1
~
~
RECTIFIER
Fu
3.15A
H2
t
R1T
S38
X1M
BLK
1
WHT
RED
GRN
/ YLW
H3
TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT
2
3
2
3
CAUTION
ON AGAIN.
FG
PCB4
S37
S21
OUTDOOR
S1
RED
LED1 LED2 LED3

BLU
BRN
ORG
WHT
H1P H2P H3P

S35
INTELLIGENT EYE
SENSOR
S28
S32
PCB2
t
S29
SIGNAL
RECEIVER
WIRELESS
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
5.3.2
S6
S8
M
M1F
INDOOR
R2T
S1W
: FRAME GROUND
Fu
: FUSE
H1~H3
: HARNESS
H1P~H3P
: PILOT LAMP
M1F
: FAN MOTOR
: SWING MOTOR
M1S, M2S
PCB1~PCB5 : PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
: THERMISTOR
R1T, R2T
BRN
RED
ORG
YLW
PNK
BLU
S36
RED
ORG
YLW
PNK
BLU
PCB5
FG
S1~S38
: CONNECTOR
S1W
: OPERATION SWITCH
X1M
: TERMINAL STRIP
: PROTECTIVE EARTH
M2S
M1S
3D038065K
Duct Connected Type
FDKS25CAVMB, FDKS35CAVMB, FDKS50CVMB, FDKS60CVMB, FDKS25EAVMB, FDKS35EAVMB
X1M
PCB1
PCB2
H1
F1U
3.15A
V1TR
LED LED LED S1
1
H1P H2P H3P
S26
1
SIGNAL
TERMINAL FOR
CENTRALIZED CONTROL
S21
S1W
RECEIVER
H2
10
2 S32 1
RED
S7
10
2 RTH11
S1
GRY
R1T
YLW
C1
BRN BRN
R2T
WIRELESS
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
:
C1 :
F1U :
indoor
PROTECTIVE EARTH
CAPACITOR(M1F)
FUSE
PPL
BLU
M
1~
M1F
Q1M
130C
WHT
RED
GRN / YLW
GRN / YLW
1
2
3
outdoor
FIELD WIRING.
CAUTION
ON AGAIN.
BLK
N=2
H3
TRANSMISSION
GND
CIRCUIT
WHT
t
Z1C
BLK
H1P ~ H3P
M1F
PCB1 ~ PCB2
Q1M
R1T ~ R2T
S1 ~ S32, RTH1
S1W
V1TR
X1M
Z1C
: PILOT LAMP
: FAN MOTOR
: THERMAL PROTECTOR (M1F EMBEDDED)
: THERMISTOR
: CONNECTOR
: OPERATION SWITCH
: PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT
: TERMINAL BLOCK
: NOISE FILTER(FERRITE CORE)
3D045012K
48
EDSG18-936
5.3.3
Wiring Diagrams
FFQ25BV1B9, FFQ35BV1B9, FFQ50BV1B9, FFQ60BV1B9
SS1
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
SS2
X2A
A1P
X27A
X60A NOTE)3
T1R
t
F1
P2
P1
X11A
SS1
P2
P1 R1T
X5A X1M
KPR
V1TR X20A
H1P
H2P BS1
H3P
H4P
C1
RED
X25A
YLW
RC
TC
YLW
Q1M
M1F
BLK
~
M1P
MSW
X36A
X40A NOTE)3
NOTE)3
X33A NOTE)3 X35A HAP
: CONNECTOR
2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT

IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
3. X24A, X33A, X35A, X40A, X60A AND X61A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE OPTIONAL
ACCESSORIES ARE BEING USED.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION
SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5. GROUND THE SHIELD OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD TO THE INDOOR UNIT (IN CASE OF USING SHIELD WIRE).
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED:RED BLK:BLACK WHT:WHITE YLW:YELLOW PRP:PURPLE GRY:GRAY BLU:BLUE
GRN
NOTE)5 WIRED
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
F2
X24A
NOTE)3
X17A
X10A
X1A
X1A
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
YLW
WHT
YLW
X19A X18A
X61A NOTE)3
H05VV-U4G2.5
A3P
A4P
X24A
NOTE)3
:CONNECTER DISCRIMINATION COLOR FOR COMPONENTS.

:CONNECTER COLOR FOR COMPONENTS.
:CONNECTER COLOR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.
R3T
YLW
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
GRN/YLW
NOTES)
1.
: TERMINAL
: FIELD WIRING
R2T
INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT

(MASTER)
(SLAVE)
F1U
TO OUTDOOR X2M
X2M
X2M
1 BLK
UNIT
1
1
2 WHT
2
2
3 RED
3
3
A1P
R1T
WHT
IN CASE OF SIMULTANEOUS
OPERATION SYSTEM
M1S
X15A
S1L
C1
T1R
X1M
A1P
X2M
CONTROL BOX
A1P
C1
F1U
HAP

CAPACITOR (M1F)
FUSE (F,5A,250V)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P)
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP)
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED)
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL-1)
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL-2)
FLOAT SWITCH
S1L
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V)
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT
X1M TERMINAL STRIP
X2M TERMINAL STRIP
RC
SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT
TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
(RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT)
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)

(ON-RED)
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(TIMER-GREEN)
(FILTER SIGN-RED)
(DEFROST-ORANGE)
SELECTOR SWITCH
SS1
(MAIN/SUB)
SELECTOR SWITCH
SS2
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
X24A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS
REMOTE CONTROLLER)
X33A CONNECTOR
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING)
X35A CONNECTOR
(GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
X40A CONNECTOR
(ON/OFF INPUT FROM OUTSIDE)
X60A CONNECTOR
X61A (INTERFACE ADAPTOR
FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
BS1
H1P
3D064844
49
Wiring Diagrams
EDSG18-936
FCQ35BVE, FCQ50BVE, FCQ60BVE, FCQ71BVE

:CONNECTER DISCRIMINATION COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.
R3T
:CONNECTER COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.
R2T
:CONNECTER COLOUR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.
t
t
YLW
WHT
A1P
X2M
X19A
BLK
WHT
RED
X18A
X17A
NOTE)3
GRN/YLW
X27A
NOTE)5
T1R
X10A
NORM. EMG.
X1M
KPR
V1TR
X20A
RED
X25A
YLW
RC
TC
YLW
BLK
M
~
M1P
X36A
X33A
X35A
P2
P1
P1
X5A
X2A
H4P
X1A
X1A
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
R1T
WIRED
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
C1
M
~
Q1M
T1R
M1F
MSW
M1S
HAP
X24A
NOTE)3
SS1
P2
X60A
X24A
SS1
X11A
H1P
H2P BS1
H3P
SS2
NOTE)5
X61A
H05VV-U4G2.5
A3P
SS1
YLW
TO BP UNIT
A2P
A1P
GRN
YLW
WHT
R1T
X15A
S1L
X33A
C1
X60A
X61A X35A
X2M
A1P
X1M
SS1
SWITCH BOX
NOTES)
1.
: TERMINAL
: CONNECTOR
: FIELD WIRING
2.IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
3.X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED.
4.REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION
SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5.GROUND THE SHIELD OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD TO THE INDOOR UNIT
(IN CASE OF USING SHIELD WIRE).
6.SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED:RED BLK:BLACK WHT:WHITE YLW:YELLOW
PRP:PURPLE GRY:GRAY BLU:BLUE
7.CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH(SS1,SS2)
BY INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
A1P
C1
HAP

CAPACITOR(M1F)
KPR
MAGNETIC RELAY(M1P)
M1F
MOTOR(INDOOR FAN)
M1P
MOTOR(DRAIN PUMP)
M1S
MOTOR(SWING FLAP)
Q1M
THERMO SWITCH(M1F EMBEDDED)
R1T
THERMISTOR(AIR)
R2T
THERMISTOR(LIQUID)
R3T
THERMISTOR(COIL)
S1L
FLOAT SWITCH
SS1
SELECTOR SWITCH(EMERGENCY)
T1R
TRANSFORMER(220-240V/22V)
V1TR
PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT
X1M
TERMINAL STRIP
X2M
TERMINAL STRIP
RC
SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
TC
R1T
THERMISTOR(AIR)
SS1
SELECTOR SWITCH(MAIN/SUB)
(RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT)
A2P
A3P
BS1
H1P
PUSH BUTTON(ON/OFF)
(ON-RED)
H2P

(TIMER-GREEN)
H3P

(FILTER SIGN-RED)
(DEFROST-ORANGE)
H4P
SS1
SELECTOR SWITCH
(MAIN/SUB)
SELECTOR SWITCH
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
CONNECTOR
X33A
CONNECTOR
X35A
CONNECTOR
X60A
X61A
(INTERFACE ADAPTOR
FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
SS2

3D048793
50
EDSG18-936
5.3.4
Wiring Diagrams
FBQ60BV1, FBQ71BV1
R1T
:CONNECTER DISCRIMINATION COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.
R3T
R2T
:CONNECTER COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.

:CONNECTER COLOUR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.
t
t
INDOOR UNIT
X2M
TO BP UNIT
BLK
WHT
A1P
X60A
X61A
C1
X2M
RED
YLW
WHT
X18A
X61A
X10A
T1R X11A
t
X60A
SS1
NORM. EMG.
K4R
KPR
H05VV-U4G2.5
X25A WHT
X1M
X5A
X1M
P2
P1
SS1
P2
P1 R1T
NOTE)7
X21A
FLL
ORG
K3R
FL
BLU
K2R
FM
BLK
K1R
FH
GRY
FC
RED
NOTE)7
M1F WHT
M
~
C1
Q1M YLW
M
~
CONTROL BOX
M1P
RC
TC
X15A
X33A
NOTES)

(OPTIONAL PARTS)
A1P
X17A
X27A
T1R
SS1
YLW
1.
:TERMINAL
2.
:FIELD WIRING
S1L
GRN/YLW
X35A
X33A
X19A
X35A HAP
:CONNECTOR
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT

TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM,
CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED:RED BLK:BLACK WHT:WHITE YLW:YELLOW
GRN:GREEN GRY:GRAY BLU:BLUE ORG:ORANGE
6. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH(SS1)
BY INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING MATERIALS, ETC.
7. GROUND THE SHIELD OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD TO THE INDOOR UNIT
(IN CASE OF USING SHIELD WIRE).
A1P
C1
HAP

CAPACITOR(M1F)
K1R~4R MAGNETIC RELAY(M1F)
KPR
MAGNETIC RELAY(M1P)
M1F
MOTOR(INDOOR FAN)
M1P
MOTOR(DRAIN PUMP)
Q1M
THERMO SWITCH(M1F EMBEDDED)
R1T
THERMISTOR(AIR)
R2T
THERMISTOR(LIQUID)
R3T
THERMISTOR(COIL)
SS1
SELECTOR SWITCH
(EMERGENCY)
S1L
FLOAT SWITCH
T1R
TRANSFORMER(220-240V/22V)
X1M
TERMINAL STRIP
X2M
TERMINAL STRIP
RC
SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
TC
R1T
THERMISTOR(AIR)
SS1
SELECTOR SWITCH(MAIN/SUB)

X33A CONNECTOR
X35A CONNECTOR
X60A CONNECTOR
X61A (INTERFACE ADAPTOR
FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
3D048487
51
Piping Diagrams
EDSG18-936
6. Piping Diagrams
6.1
Outdoor Units
Electronic
expansion valve
Electronic
expansion valve
Double pipe
heat exchanger
Filter
Heat exchanger
Pressure
regulating valve
Filter
Service port
Four way
valve
High pressure
sensor
Service port
Solenoid
valve
SV
Filter
Capillary
tube
Oil
separator
Capillary
tube
SP
SP
Filter
Low pressure
sensor
Filter
Compressor
HPS
SV
Capillary
tube
High pressure
switch
Solenoid
valve
ACCUMULATOR
Stop valve (With service port on field piping side 7.9mm flare connection)
52
3D052628
EDSG18-936
6.2
Piping Diagrams
BP Units
BPMKS967B2B
INDOOR UNIT
GAS SIDE
THERMISTOR(DGA)
REFRIGERANT FLOW
HEATING
ROOM A
(15.9CuT)
LOCAL PIPING
COOLING
GAS SIDE
THERMISTOR(DGB)
EVH
GAS
LOCAL PIPING
ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(BYPASS)
FILTER
ROOM B
(15.9CuT)
ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(ROOM A)
EVA FILTER
ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(ROOM B)
EVB FILTER
INDOOR UNIT
LIQUID SIDE
THERMISTOR(DLA)
ROOM A
(6.4CuT)
LOCAL PIPING
LIQUID SIDE
THERMISTOR(DLB)
OUTDOOR UNIT
(19.1CuT)
LIQUID
ROOM B
(6.4CuT)
LOCAL PIPING
LOCAL PIPING
OUTDOOR UNIT
(9.5CuT)
FILTER
LOCAL PIPING
3D048286B
BPMKS967B3B
INDOOR UNIT
GAS SIDE
THERMISTOR(DGA)
ROOM A
(15.9CuT)
LOCAL PIPING
GAS SIDE
THERMISTOR(DGB)
REFRIGERANT FLOW
HEATING
ROOM B
(15.9CuT)
GAS
LOCAL PIPING
COOLING
GAS SIDE
THERMISTOR(DGC)
ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(BYPASS)
FILTER EVH
LOCAL PIPING
ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(ROOM A)
LIQUID SIDE
EVA FILTER THERMISTOR(DLA)
ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(ROOM B)
LIQUID SIDE
EVB FILTER THERMISTOR(DLB)
OUTDOOR UNIT
(19.1CuT)
ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(ROOM C)
LIQUID SIDE
EVC FILTER THERMISTOR(DLC)
LOCAL PIPING
ROOM C
(15.9CuT)
INDOOR UNIT
ROOM A
(6.4CuT)
LOCAL PIPING
ROOM B
(6.4CuT)
LIQUID
LOCAL PIPING
ROOM C
(6.4CuT)
LOCAL PIPING
OUTDOOR UNIT
(9.5CuT)
FILTER
LOCAL PIPING
3D048285A
53
Piping Diagrams
EDSG18-936
6.3
Indoor Units
6.3.1
Wall Mounted Type
FTKS50FVM, FTKS60FVM
INDOOR UNIT
INDOOR UNIT
MUFFLER ASSY
HEAT EXCHANGER
7.0CuT
(7.9CuT)
7.9CuT
6.4CuT
THERMISTOR
ON HEAT EXCH.
6.4CuT
HEAT EXCHANGER
6.4CuT
THERMISTOR
ON HEAT EXCH.
FIELD PIPING
(6.4CuT)
CROSS FLOW FAN

FIELD PIPING
(6.4CuT)
M
FAN MOTOR
FIELD PIPING
(12.7CuT)
9.5CuT
FIELD PIPING
(9.5CuT)
CROSS FLOW FAN
M
FAN MOTOR
(12.7CuT)
REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING
REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING
4D050757D
FTKS71FVM
4D054932D
FTKS50BVMA8
INDOOR UNIT
INDOOR UNIT
(7.9CuT)
(7.9CuT)
HEAT EXCHANGER
HEAT EXCHANGER
THERMISTOR
ON HEAT EXCH.
THERMISTOR
ON HEAT EXCH.
FIELD PIPING
(6.4CuT)
FIELD PIPING
(6.4CuT)
CROSS FLOW FAN
FIELD PIPING
(12.7CuT)
FAN MOTOR
FIELD PIPING
(15.9CuT)
CROSS FLOW FAN
M
FAN MOTOR
(12.7CuT)
(12.7CuT)
REFRIGERANT FLOW
REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING
HEATING
COOLING
4D050919H
54
4D040081T
EDSG18-936
6.3.2
Piping Diagrams
Duct Connected Type
FDKS25CAVMB, FDKS35CAVMB, FDKS50CVMB, FDKS60CVMB, FDKS25EAVMB, FDKS35EAVMB

INDOOR UNIT
(6.4CuT)
2
HEAT EXCHANGER
FIELD PIPING
(6.4CuT)
THERMISTOR
ON HEAT
EXCH.
SIROCCO FAN
M
FAN MOTOR
FIELD PIPING
(
CuT)
CuT)
REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING
HEATING
FDKS25EAVMB
FDKS35EAVMB
FDKS25CAVMB
FDKS35CAVMB
9.5
FDKS50CVMB
FDKS60CVMB
12.7
C: 4D045449K
6.3.3
FFQ25BV1B9, FFQ35BV1B9, FFQ50BV1B9, FFQ60BV1B9
Indoor heat exchanger
MODEL
FFQ25 35BV1B9
6.4
9.5
FFQ50 60BV1B9
6.4
12.7
Field piping
C1220T-O
Field piping
C1220T-O
To
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
C : 4D039335
55
Piping Diagrams
EDSG18-936
FCQ35BVE, FCQ50BVE, FCQ60BVE, FCQ71BVE

Field piping
C1220T-0
Field piping
C1220T-0
To
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
MODEL
FCQ35BVE
FCQ50, 60BVE
FCQ71BVE
6.4
6.4
9.5
9.5
12.7
15.9
C: 4D037995H
6.3.4
FBQ60BV1, FBQ71BV1
Field piping
C1220T-0
Field piping
C1220T-0
To
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
MODEL
FBQ60BV1
FBQ71BV1
6.4
9.5
12.7
15.9
C: 4D037995H
56
EDSG18-936
Capacity Tables
7. Capacity Tables
7.1
Total Capacity
7.1.1
RMKS112EVM
[Cooling Capacity]
Combination
(%)
130%
120%
110%
100%
90%
Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
12.61 2.23
12.38 2.39
12.12 2.59
11.98 2.69
11.76 2.87
11.44 3.12
11.09 3.41
10.72 3.72
10.31 4.06
9.88
4.42
9.04
4.33
12.46 2.17
12.23 2.33
11.97 2.52
11.83 2.63
11.61 2.80
11.29 3.06
10.94 3.34
10.57 3.64
10.17 3.98
9.74
4.34
8.92
4.33
11.86 2.04
11.64 2.20
11.40 2.39
11.27 2.49
11.06 2.66
10.76 2.90
10.44 3.18
10.09 3.47
9.71
3.80
9.31
4.15
8.81
4.33
10.54 1.81
10.36 1.96
10.16 2.13
10.06 2.22
9.89
2.38
9.64
2.60
9.37
2.85
9.07
3.13
8.75
3.43
8.41
3.75
8.13
4.01
9.55
1.54
9.38
1.68
9.20
1.84
9.10
1.93
8.94
2.07
8.71
2.29
8.46
2.53
8.19
2.79
7.89
3.08
7.58
3.39
7.33
3.63
16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
13.99 2.22
13.72 2.39
13.41 2.60
13.25 2.71
12.99 2.89
12.63 3.15
12.23 3.45
11.81 3.77
11.35 4.11
10.87 4.49
9.87
4.33
13.79 2.16
13.51 2.33
13.20 2.53
13.04 2.64
12.78 2.82
12.42 3.09
12.03 3.37
11.61 3.69
11.16 4.03
10.68 4.40
9.74
4.33
13.14 2.03
12.88 2.20
12.60 2.40
12.44 2.50
12.20 2.68
11.86 2.93
11.50 3.21
11.10 3.51
10.68 3.85
10.23 4.20
9.62
4.33
11.79 1.80
11.57 1.95
11.33 2.13
11.21 2.23
11.00 2.39
10.71 2.62
10.40 2.88
10.06 3.16
9.70
3.47
9.31
3.80
9.00
4.06
10.65 1.52
10.45 1.67
10.22 1.83
10.11 1.93
9.92
2.08
9.65
2.30
9.37
2.54
9.06
2.81
8.73
3.10
8.38
3.42
8.10
3.67
Indoor Air Temp.:CWB

18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
15.02 2.21 15.54 2.21
14.71 2.40 15.22 2.40
14.37 2.61 14.87 2.61
14.19 2.72 14.68 2.73
13.91 2.91 14.39 2.92
13.52 3.18 13.98 3.19
13.09 3.48 13.54 3.49
12.64 3.80 13.06 3.82
12.15 4.16 12.56 4.18
11.63 4.54 12.03 4.56
10.50 4.33 10.83 4.33
14.82 2.15 15.33 2.15
14.50 2.33 15.01 2.33
14.17 2.54 14.66 2.55
13.99 2.66 14.47 2.66
13.71 2.84 14.18 2.85
13.31 3.11 13.77 3.12
12.89 3.40 13.33 3.42
12.44 3.73 12.86 3.74
11.96 4.07 12.36 4.10
11.44 4.45 11.83 4.47
10.37 4.33 10.69 4.33
14.14 2.02 14.64 2.02
13.85 2.20 14.34 2.20
13.53 2.40 14.01 2.41
13.37 2.51 13.83 2.52
13.11 2.69 13.56 2.70
12.73 2.95 13.17 2.96
12.34 3.24 12.76 3.25
11.91 3.55 12.32 3.56
11.46 3.88 11.85 3.90
10.98 4.24 11.36 4.27
10.24 4.33 10.56 4.33
12.71 1.79 13.18 1.78
12.47 1.95 12.93 1.95
12.20 2.13 12.65 2.13
12.06 2.24 12.50 2.24
11.84 2.40 12.27 2.40
11.52 2.64 11.93 2.65
11.18 2.90 11.58 2.91
10.82 3.19 11.20 3.20
10.42 3.50 10.80 3.51
10.01 3.83 10.36 3.85
9.68
4.10 10.02 4.12
11.47 1.51 11.89 1.50
11.25 1.66 11.65 1.65
11.00 1.83 11.40 1.83
10.87 1.93 11.26 1.92
10.67 2.08 11.05 2.08
10.38 2.31 10.75 2.31
10.07 2.56 10.42 2.56
9.73
2.83 10.08 2.84
9.38
3.13
9.72
3.14
9.01
3.44
9.33
3.46
8.71
3.70
9.02
3.71
2
22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
17.16 2.20
16.79 2.40
16.39 2.63
16.18 2.75
15.85 2.95
15.39 3.23
14.90 3.54
14.38 3.88
13.83 4.25
13.25 4.64
11.83 4.33
16.94 2.14
16.57 2.34
16.17 2.56
15.96 2.68
15.63 2.88
15.17 3.16
14.68 3.47
14.17 3.80
13.62 4.16
13.04 4.55
11.68 4.33
16.21 2.01
15.86 2.20
15.48 2.42
15.28 2.53
14.98 2.72
14.54 2.99
14.08 3.29
13.60 3.61
13.08 3.96
12.53 4.33
11.54 4.33
14.64 1.77
14.34 1.94
14.02 2.14
13.85 2.24
13.59 2.42
13.21 2.67
12.82 2.94
12.39 3.24
11.95 3.56
11.47 3.90
11.10 4.18
13.19 1.48
12.92 1.64
12.63 1.82
12.47 1.92
12.23 2.08
11.89 2.32
11.53 2.58
11.15 2.86
10.75 3.17
10.32 3.50
9.99
3.76
24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
18.27 2.20
17.86 2.40
17.44 2.64
17.21 2.76
16.86 2.97
16.36 3.26
15.84 3.58
15.28 3.92
14.70 4.29
14.08 4.69
12.51 4.33
18.05 2.13
17.64 2.34
17.21 2.57
16.98 2.70
16.63 2.90
16.14 3.19
15.62 3.50
15.06 3.84
14.49 4.21
13.87 4.60
12.36 4.33
17.29 2.00
16.90 2.20
16.50 2.42
16.28 2.54
15.95 2.74
15.49 3.02
14.99 3.32
14.47 3.65
13.93 4.00
13.35 4.38
12.20 4.33
15.64 1.75
15.31 1.94
14.96 2.14
14.78 2.25
14.49 2.43
14.09 2.68
13.67 2.96
13.22 3.26
12.74 3.59
12.24 3.94
11.84 4.21
14.09 1.46
13.79 1.63
13.47 1.82
13.30 1.92
13.04 2.09
12.68 2.33
12.30 2.59
11.89 2.88
11.46 3.19
11.01 3.52
10.66 3.79
57
Capacity Tables
Combination
(%)
80%
70%
60%
50%
Symbols
TC
: Total capacity
PI
: Power input
EDSG18-936
Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
8.50
1.29
8.35
1.42
8.18
1.56
8.09
1.65
7.95
1.78
7.74
1.98
7.52
2.20
7.28
2.45
7.02
2.72
6.74
3.01
6.52
3.25
7.39
1.08
7.26
1.18
7.12
1.31
7.04
1.38
6.92
1.50
6.75
1.67
6.56
1.87
6.35
2.10
6.13
2.35
5.89
2.62
5.70
2.84
6.22
0.89
6.12
0.97
6.01
1.07
5.95
1.13
5.86
1.23
5.72
1.38
5.57
1.55
5.40
1.74
5.22
1.96
5.02
2.20
4.87
2.39
4.98
0.73
4.93
0.78
4.86
0.85
4.82
0.89
4.75
0.97
4.66
1.09
4.55
1.22
4.43
1.38
4.29
1.56
4.14
1.76
4.02
1.92
16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
9.46
1.27
9.28
1.40
9.08
1.55
8.98
1.64
8.81
1.77
8.57
1.98
8.32
2.21
8.05
2.46
7.76
2.73
7.45
3.03
7.21
3.27
8.23
1.05
8.07
1.16
7.91
1.29
7.82
1.36
7.68
1.49
7.48
1.67
7.26
1.88
7.03
2.10
6.78
2.36
6.51
2.63
6.30
2.85
6.95
0.87
6.83
0.95
6.70
1.05
6.63
1.11
6.52
1.22
6.36
1.37
6.19
1.55
6.00
1.74
5.79
1.97
5.58
2.21
5.40
2.41
5.63
0.71
5.55
0.76
5.47
0.84
5.42
0.88
5.34
0.96
5.23
1.08
5.10
1.22
4.96
1.38
4.80
1.56
4.63
1.76
4.50
1.93

18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
10.19 1.25 10.57 1.24
9.99
1.39 10.35 1.38
9.77
1.54 10.13 1.54
9.66
1.63 10.01 1.63
9.47
1.77
9.82
1.77
9.22
1.98
9.55
1.98
8.94
2.21
9.26
2.22
8.65
2.47
8.96
2.47
8.34
2.75
8.64
2.75
8.01
3.05
8.30
3.06
7.75
3.29
8.03
3.30
8.88
1.03
9.21
1.02
8.71
1.14
9.03
1.13
8.52
1.28
8.83
1.27
8.42
1.35
8.73
1.35
8.27
1.48
8.57
1.48
8.05
1.67
8.34
1.67
7.82
1.88
8.10
1.88
7.56
2.11
7.84
2.11
7.30
2.36
7.56
2.37
7.01
2.64
7.27
2.65
6.79
2.87
7.04
2.87
7.52
0.85
7.81
0.84
7.39
0.93
7.68
0.93
7.25
1.04
7.52
1.04
7.17
1.10
7.44
1.10
7.05
1.21
7.31
1.20
6.87
1.37
7.13
1.36
6.68
1.54
6.93
1.54
6.48
1.75
6.72
1.75
6.26
1.97
6.49
1.97
6.02
2.22
6.25
2.22
5.83
2.42
6.06
2.42
6.13
0.69
6.39
0.68
6.05
0.75
6.30
0.74
5.95
0.83
6.19
0.82
5.89
0.87
6.13
0.87
5.81
0.95
6.04
0.95
5.68
1.08
5.91
1.08
5.54
1.22
5.76
1.22
5.38
1.38
5.60
1.38
5.22
1.57
5.42
1.57
5.03
1.77
5.23
1.77
4.88
1.94
5.08
1.94
22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
11.72 1.21
11.48 1.36
11.22 1.52
11.08 1.62
10.87 1.77
10.57 1.98
10.25 2.22
9.92
2.49
9.56
2.78
9.19
3.08
8.89
3.33
10.23 0.99
10.03 1.11
9.81
1.25
9.69
1.34
9.51
1.47
9.25
1.66
8.98
1.88
8.69
2.12
8.39
2.38
8.07
2.66
7.81
2.89
8.72
0.81
8.56
0.90
8.38
1.02
8.29
1.08
8.15
1.19
7.94
1.36
7.72
1.54
7.48
1.75
7.23
1.98
6.96
2.23
6.75
2.44
7.19
0.66
7.07
0.73
6.95
0.81
6.88
0.86
6.78
0.94
6.62
1.07
6.46
1.22
6.27
1.39
6.08
1.58
5.87
1.79
5.70
1.96
24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
12.52 1.19
12.26 1.34
11.98 1.52
11.83 1.61
11.60 1.76
11.28 1.98
10.94 2.23
10.58 2.50
10.20 2.79
9.80
3.10
9.49
3.35
10.94 0.97
10.72 1.09
10.48 1.24
10.35 1.33
10.16 1.46
9.88
1.66
9.59
1.88
9.28
2.12
8.96
2.39
8.62
2.68
8.35
2.91
9.35
0.79
9.17
0.89
8.98
1.01
8.88
1.07
8.72
1.19
8.50
1.35
8.26
1.54
8.01
1.75
7.74
1.99
7.45
2.24
7.23
2.45
7.74
0.65
7.61
0.71
7.48
0.80
7.40
0.85
7.29
0.94
7.12
1.07
6.94
1.22
6.74
1.39
6.53
1.58
6.30
1.80
6.12
1.97
NOTE:
(kW)
(kW)
1. This table shows outdoor unit cooling capacity and power input.
2.
is specified point.
3. PI of indoor units is not included in the table.
3D052905
58
EDSG18-936
7.1.2
Capacity Tables
RMKS140EVM
[Cooling Capacity]
Combination
(%)
130%
120%
110%
100%
90%
Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
14.84 2.78
14.55 2.98
14.23 3.20
14.06 3.32
13.78 3.53
13.39 3.82
12.96 4.15
12.49 4.51
11.99 4.90
11.47 5.13
8.69
4.10
14.57 2.74
14.30 2.92
14.00 3.14
13.83 3.26
13.57 3.46
13.19 3.75
12.78 4.07
12.33 4.43
11.84 4.81
11.33 5.13
8.58
4.10
14.29 2.68
14.03 2.86
13.74 3.07
13.58 3.19
13.33 3.39
12.97 3.67
12.57 3.99
12.13 4.34
11.66 4.73
11.19 5.13
8.47
4.10
13.35 2.45
13.11 2.62
12.83 2.83
12.69 2.94
12.45 3.12
12.12 3.39
11.74 3.69
11.34 4.02
10.91 4.39
10.44 4.78
8.37
4.10
11.97 2.05
11.75 2.22
11.50 2.42
11.37 2.53
11.16 2.70
10.86 2.95
10.53 3.23
10.18 3.54
9.80
3.87
9.39
4.23
8.26
4.10
16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
16.49 2.79
16.14 2.99
15.76 3.23
15.56 3.36
15.24 3.57
14.78 3.88
14.29 4.22
13.77 4.59
13.20 4.99
12.53 5.13
9.52
4.10
16.21 2.74
15.88 2.94
15.52 3.17
15.32 3.30
15.02 3.50
14.58 3.81
14.11 4.14
13.60 4.50
13.05 4.90
12.37 5.13
9.40
4.10
15.93 2.68
15.61 2.87
15.26 3.10
15.08 3.23
14.78 3.43
14.36 3.73
13.90 4.06
13.40 4.42
12.87 4.81
12.22 5.13
9.28
4.10
14.93 2.44
14.64 2.63
14.31 2.85
14.14 2.97
13.86 3.16
13.46 3.44
13.04 3.75
12.58 4.09
12.08 4.46
11.56 4.86
9.17
4.10
13.39 2.04
13.12 2.22
12.83 2.43
12.67 2.54
12.43 2.72
12.07 2.98
11.70 3.27
11.29 3.59
10.86 3.93
10.40 4.29
9.05
4.10

18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
17.75 2.79 18.37 2.80
17.36 3.01 17.96 3.02
16.94 3.26 17.52 3.27
16.72 3.39 17.29 3.41
16.37 3.61 16.93 3.63
15.87 3.93 16.41 3.95
15.34 4.28 15.86 4.30
14.77 4.65 15.27 4.69
14.16 5.06 14.64 5.10
13.35 5.13 13.75 5.13
10.16 4.10 10.49 4.10
17.45 2.74 18.05 2.75
17.07 2.95 17.66 2.96
16.67 3.20 17.24 3.21
16.46 3.33 17.02 3.34
16.12 3.54 16.67 3.56
15.65 3.85 16.17 3.87
15.13 4.19 15.64 4.22
14.58 4.57 15.07 4.60
14.00 4.97 14.46 5.00
13.18 5.13 13.58 5.13
10.03 4.10 10.36 4.10
17.17 2.68 17.76 2.68
16.81 2.89 17.39 2.89
16.42 3.12 16.98 3.14
16.22 3.25 16.77 3.27
15.89 3.46 16.43 3.48
15.43 3.77 15.94 3.79
14.93 4.11 15.43 4.13
14.39 4.48 14.87 4.51
13.82 4.88 14.28 4.91
13.02 5.13 13.41 5.13
9.90
4.10 10.22 4.10
16.14 2.44 16.70 2.44
15.80 2.64 16.35 2.65
15.44 2.87 15.97 2.87
15.25 2.99 15.77 3.00
14.94 3.19 15.45 3.20
14.51 3.48 15.00 3.50
14.04 3.80 14.52 3.82
13.54 4.14 14.00 4.17
13.01 4.52 13.45 4.55
12.44 4.93 12.86 4.96
9.78
4.10 10.09 4.10
14.47 2.04 15.01 2.03
14.17 2.22 14.69 2.22
13.84 2.44 14.35 2.44
13.67 2.55 14.17 2.56
13.40 2.74 13.88 2.75
13.01 3.01 13.48 3.02
12.60 3.30 13.06 3.32
12.16 3.62 12.60 3.64
11.69 3.97 12.12 3.99
11.20 4.34 11.60 4.36
9.65
4.10
9.96
4.10
22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
20.25 2.81
19.79 3.05
19.29 3.31
19.03 3.46
18.62 3.69
18.04 4.03
17.43 4.39
16.78 4.78
16.73 5.13
14.95 5.13
11.42 4.10
19.90 2.76
19.46 2.99
18.98 3.25
18.73 3.39
18.34 3.62
17.79 3.95
17.20 4.30
16.57 4.69
15.90 5.11
14.77 5.13
11.27 4.10
19.61 2.69
19.18 2.92
18.72 3.17
18.47 3.31
18.09 3.54
17.55 3.86
16.98 4.21
16.37 4.60
15.72 5.01
14.58 5.13
11.13 4.10
18.47 2.45
18.07 2.66
17.63 2.90
17.40 3.04
17.04 3.25
16.54 3.55
16.00 3.89
15.43 4.25
14.82 4.64
14.18 5.05
10.99 4.10
16.63 2.02
16.26 2.23
15.87 2.45
15.66 2.58
15.34 2.77
14.89 3.06
14.42 3.36
13.91 3.69
13.38 4.05
12.82 4.43
10.85 4.10
24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
21.56 2.82
21.05 3.07
20.51 3.35
20.23 3.50
19.79 3.73
19.18 4.08
18.52 4.45
17.83 4.85
17.65 5.13
15.78 5.13
12.17 4.10
21.20 2.77
20.71 3.01
20.20 3.28
19.93 3.43
19.50 3.66
18.91 4.00
18.28 4.36
17.61 4.76
17.43 5.13
15.59 5.13
12.02 4.10
20.90 2.70
20.43 2.94
19.93 3.20
19.67 3.35
19.26 3.57
18.68 3.91
18.06 4.27
17.41 4.66
16.73 5.08
15.39 5.13
11.86 4.10
19.72 2.45
19.28 2.68
18.80 2.93
18.56 3.06
18.17 3.28
17.63 3.59
17.05 3.94
16.49 4.30
15.80 4.70
15.11 5.12
11.71 4.10
17.76 2.02
17.36 2.23
16.94 2.46
16.71 2.59
16.37 2.79
15.89 3.08
15.37 3.39
14.87 3.73
14.27 4.09
13.67 4.48
11.56 4.10
59
Capacity Tables
Combination
(%)
80%
70%
60%
50%
EDSG18-936
Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
Symbols
14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
10.60 1.68
10.40 1.84
10.19 2.02
10.07 2.12
9.88
2.28
9.62
2.51
9.33
2.77
9.03
3.05
8.70
3.35
8.34
3.68
8.06
3.94
9.24
1.34
9.07
1.48
8.88
1.64
8.78
1.72
8.62
1.87
8.39
2.07
8.15
2.30
7.88
2.55
7.60
2.82
7.30
3.11
7.06
3.34
7.88
1.03
7.74
1.14
7.58
1.27
7.50
1.34
7.37
1.46
7.18
1.63
6.98
1.82
6.75
2.04
6.52
2.27
6.26
2.53
6.06
2.74
6.52
0.75
6.42
0.82
6.30
0.91
6.23
0.97
6.13
1.05
5.98
1.19
5.82
1.34
5.64
1.52
5.44
1.71
5.23
1.93
5.06
2.10
16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
11.86 1.67
11.62 1.83
11.36 2.02
11.22 2.12
11.01 2.29
10.70 2.53
10.37 2.79
10.02 3.08
9.64
3.39
9.25
3.72
8.93
3.98
10.33 1.32
10.13 1.46
9.90
1.63
9.79
1.72
9.60
1.87
9.34
2.08
9.06
2.31
8.76
2.57
8.44
2.84
8.10
3.14
7.83
3.37
8.81
1.01
8.64
1.12
8.46
1.26
8.36
1.33
8.21
1.45
7.99
1.63
7.75
1.83
7.50
2.05
7.24
2.29
6.95
2.55
6.72
2.75
7.29
0.73
7.17
0.81
7.03
0.90
6.95
0.95
6.83
1.05
6.66
1.18
6.47
1.34
6.26
1.52
6.04
1.72
5.81
1.94
5.62
2.12

18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
12.81 1.65 13.31 1.65
12.54 1.83 13.03 1.82
12.25 2.02 12.73 2.02
12.10 2.13 12.57 2.13
11.86 2.30 12.32 2.30
11.53 2.54 11.97 2.55
11.17 2.81 11.60 2.82
10.79 3.10 11.20 3.11
10.39 3.41 10.78 3.43
9.96
3.75 10.34 3.77
9.52
4.02
9.89
4.03
11.16 1.30 11.61 1.30
10.93 1.45 11.37 1.45
10.68 1.62 11.11 1.62
10.55 1.72 10.97 1.71
10.35 1.86 10.76 1.86
10.06 2.08 10.46 2.08
9.76
2.32 10.14 2.32
9.43
2.58
9.80
2.58
9.09
2.86
9.44
2.87
8.72
3.16
9.06
3.17
8.44
3.40
8.77
3.41
9.51
0.99
9.90
0.98
9.33
1.11
9.70
1.10
9.12
1.25
9.48
1.24
9.02
1.32
9.37
1.32
8.85
1.45
9.20
1.44
8.61
1.63
8.95
1.63
8.36
1.83
8.68
1.83
8.09
2.05
8.40
2.06
7.80
2.29
8.10
2.30
7.49
2.56
7.78
2.56
7.25
2.77
7.53
2.78
7.87
0.72
8.17
0.71
7.73
0.79
8.03
0.79
7.58
0.89
7.86
0.89
7.49
0.95
7.77
0.94
7.36
1.04
7.64
1.04
7.17
1.18
7.44
1.18
6.97
1.34
7.23
1.34
6.75
1.52
7.00
1.53
6.51
1.73
6.76
1.73
6.26
1.95
6.49
1.95
6.06
2.13
6.29
2.13
22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
14.77 1.63
14.44 1.81
14.10 2.02
13.92 2.13
13.64 2.31
13.24 2.57
12.83 2.84
12.39 3.15
11.93 3.47
11.44 3.81
10.68 4.08
12.89 1.27
12.61 1.43
12.32 1.61
12.16 1.71
11.92 1.86
11.59 2.09
11.23 2.33
10.86 2.60
10.46 2.89
10.05 3.20
9.72
3.44
11.00 0.96
10.78 1.08
10.53 1.23
10.40 1.31
10.21 1.44
9.93
1.63
9.63
1.83
9.32
2.06
8.99
2.31
8.64
2.58
8.36
2.80
9.10
0.69
8.93
0.77
8.74
0.87
8.64
0.93
8.48
1.03
8.26
1.18
8.03
1.35
7.77
1.53
7.50
1.74
7.22
1.97
6.99
2.15
24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
15.78 1.62
15.43 1.81
15.06 2.02
14.86 2.13
14.56 2.32
14.14 2.58
13.69 2.86
13.22 3.17
12.73 3.50
12.21 3.84
11.41 4.10
13.78 1.25
13.48 1.42
13.16 1.60
13.00 1.70
12.74 1.86
12.38 2.09
12.00 2.34
11.59 2.61
11.17 2.90
10.73 3.22
10.39 3.46
11.77 0.94
11.52 1.07
11.26 1.22
11.12 1.30
10.91 1.43
10.61 1.62
10.29 1.84
9.96
2.07
9.60
2.32
9.23
2.59
8.94
2.81
9.73
0.67
9.54
0.76
9.34
0.87
9.23
0.93
9.07
1.03
8.83
1.18
8.58
1.35
8.32
1.54
8.02
1.75
7.72
1.98
7.48
2.16
NOTE:
TC
: Total capacity
(kW)
PI
: Power input
(kW)
2.
is specified point.
3D052906
60
EDSG18-936
7.1.3
Capacity Tables
RMKS160EVM
[Cooling Capacity]
Combination
(%)
130%
120%
110%
100%
90%
Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
15.66 2.95
15.37 3.16
15.04 3.40
14.86 3.54
14.58 3.75
14.17 4.08
13.72 4.43
13.23 4.82
12.71 5.25
11.23 5.27
8.69
4.18
15.31 2.96
15.03 3.16
14.71 3.40
14.54 3.54
14.27 3.75
13.88 4.07
13.45 4.43
12.98 4.82
12.47 5.25
11.09 5.27
8.58
4.18
14.97 2.96
14.70 3.17
14.40 3.40
14.24 3.54
13.98 3.75
13.60 4.07
13.19 4.42
12.74 4.81
12.25 5.24
10.95 5.27
8.47
4.18
14.64 2.97
14.39 3.17
14.10 3.41
13.94 3.54
13.70 3.75
13.33 4.07
12.93 4.42
12.50 4.81
12.02 5.24
10.81 5.27
8.36
4.18
13.05 2.49
12.83 2.68
12.59 2.90
12.45 3.02
12.24 3.22
11.92 3.51
11.58 3.83
11.20 4.18
10.80 4.57
10.36 4.98
8.25
4.18
16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
17.65 2.96
17.28 3.19
16.88 3.45
16.66 3.59
16.32 3.82
15.84 4.15
15.32 4.53
14.76 4.93
13.66 5.27
12.29 5.27
9.63
4.18
17.25 2.97
16.90 3.19
16.52 3.45
16.31 3.59
15.99 3.82
15.52 4.15
15.02 4.52
14.48 4.92
13.49 5.27
12.14 5.27
9.51
4.18
16.86 2.97
16.53 3.19
16.16 3.45
15.96 3.59
15.65 3.81
15.21 4.15
14.72 4.51
14.20 4.92
13.31 5.27
11.98 5.27
9.39
4.18
16.48 2.98
16.16 3.19
15.91 3.45
15.63 3.58
15.33 3.81
14.90 4.14
14.43 4.51
13.93 4.91
13.14 5.27
11.83 5.27
9.27
4.18
14.64 2.49
14.37 2.69
14.17 2.93
13.91 3.05
13.65 3.26
13.28 3.56
12.89 3.89
12.46 4.26
11.99 4.65
11.50 5.07
9.15
4.18

18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
19.02 2.97 19.67 2.98
18.60 3.21 19.24 3.22
18.16 3.48 18.77 3.50
17.92 3.63 18.53 3.65
17.55 3.87 18.14 3.89
17.02 4.21 17.59 4.24
16.45 4.59 17.00 4.63
15.85 5.01 16.38 5.04
14.69 5.27 15.07 5.27
13.20 5.27 13.55 5.27
10.28 4.18 10.59 4.18
18.60 2.98 19.26 2.98
18.21 3.21 18.85 3.22
17.78 3.48 18.40 3.49
17.55 3.63 18.16 3.64
17.19 3.86 17.79 3.88
16.69 4.21 17.26 4.23
16.14 4.59 16.69 4.62
15.56 5.00 16.08 5.04
14.51 5.27 14.88 5.27
13.03 5.27 13.38 5.27
10.15 4.18 10.46 4.18
18.19 2.97 18.85 2.98
17.81 3.20 18.45 3.22
17.40 3.47 18.02 3.49
17.18 3.61 17.79 3.64
16.84 3.85 17.44 3.88
16.35 4.19 16.93 4.23
15.83 4.57 16.38 4.61
15.26 4.98 15.79 5.03
14.33 5.27 14.69 5.27
12.87 5.27 13.21 5.27
10.02 4.18 10.33 4.18
17.77 2.95 18.44 2.99
17.42 3.18 18.06 3.22
17.03 3.44 17.65 3.49
16.82 3.58 17.43 3.64
16.49 3.82 17.09 3.88
16.02 4.15 16.60 4.22
15.51 4.53 16.07 4.60
14.97 4.93 15.50 5.02
14.14 5.27 14.50 5.27
12.70 5.27 13.04 5.27
9.89
4.18 10.19 4.18
15.89 2.47 16.49 2.49
15.58 2.68 16.17 2.71
15.24 2.93 15.81 2.95
15.06 3.06 15.62 3.09
14.77 3.27 15.32 3.31
14.37 3.58 14.89 3.62
13.93 3.92 14.44 3.96
13.46 4.29 13.95 4.34
12.96 4.68 13.43 4.74
12.42 5.11 12.88 5.18
9.76
4.18 10.06 4.18
22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
21.69 3.00
21.20 3.26
20.67 3.55
20.39 3.71
19.95 3.96
19.34 4.33
18.69 4.73
18.00 5.16
16.42 5.27
14.79 5.27
11.63 4.18
21.28 3.00
20.80 3.26
20.29 3.55
20.02 3.71
19.60 3.96
19.01 4.32
18.38 4.72
17.71 5.15
16.22 5.27
14.60 5.27
11.49 4.18
20.87 3.00
20.41 3.26
19.92 3.55
19.66 3.70
19.26 3.95
18.68 4.32
18.07 4.71
17.43 5.14
16.01 5.27
14.42 5.27
11.34 4.18
20.47 3.01
20.03 3.26
19.56 3.54
19.31 3.70
18.91 3.95
18.36 4.31
17.77 4.71
17.14 5.14
15.81 5.27
14.23 5.27
11.20 4.18
18.34 2.49
17.96 2.72
17.55 2.98
17.33 3.13
16.99 3.35
16.51 3.68
16.00 4.04
15.46 4.42
14.88 4.84
14.05 5.27
11.05 4.18
24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
23.08 3.02
22.54 3.29
21.97 3.59
21.67 3.76
21.20 4.02
20.55 4.39
19.86 4.80
19.12 5.24
17.33 5.27
15.62 5.27
12.50 4.18
22.66 3.02
22.14 3.29
21.59 3.59
21.30 3.75
20.85 4.01
20.21 4.39
19.54 4.79
18.83 5.23
17.11 5.27
15.42 5.27
12.34 4.18
22.25 3.02
21.75 3.29
21.22 3.58
20.94 3.75
20.50 4.01
19.88 4.38
19.23 4.79
18.54 5.22
16.89 5.27
15.23 5.27
12.18 4.18
21.84 3.02
21.36 3.29
20.84 3.58
20.57 3.74
20.15 4.00
19.55 4.37
18.92 4.78
18.25 5.22
16.68 5.27
15.03 5.27
12.03 4.18
19.60 2.49
19.18 2.74
18.73 3.01
18.50 3.15
18.13 3.39
17.61 3.72
17.06 4.09
16.48 4.48
15.87 4.90
14.84 5.27
11.87 4.18
61
Capacity Tables
Combination
(%)
80%
70%
60%
50%
EDSG18-936
Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
Symbols
14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
11.51 2.02
11.32 2.20
11.11 2.40
10.99 2.51
10.81 2.69
10.54 2.95
10.25 3.24
9.93
3.55
9.58
3.89
9.21
4.26
8.14
4.18
10.02 1.57
9.85
1.72
9.67
1.90
9.57
2.00
9.41
2.15
9.18
2.38
8.93
2.63
8.66
2.91
8.37
3.21
8.05
3.53
7.80
3.79
8.56
1.14
8.42
1.26
8.27
1.41
8.18
1.48
8.05
1.61
7.85
1.81
7.64
2.02
7.41
2.26
7.16
2.52
6.89
2.80
6.67
3.02
7.16
0.73
7.04
0.81
6.90
0.92
6.83
0.98
6.71
1.08
6.55
1.23
6.36
1.40
6.17
1.60
5.95
1.81
5.72
2.05
5.54
2.24
16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
12.92 2.02
12.69 2.20
12.53 2.41
12.29 2.53
12.07 2.71
11.76 2.98
11.41 3.28
11.05 3.60
10.65 3.95
10.23 4.33
9.03
4.18
11.32 1.56
11.12 1.72
10.99 1.90
10.77 2.00
10.58 2.16
10.31 2.40
10.02 2.66
9.70
2.94
9.37
3.25
9.00
3.58
8.72
3.84
9.84
1.12
9.66
1.24
9.56
1.39
9.36
1.48
9.19
1.61
8.95
1.81
8.70
2.03
8.42
2.28
8.13
2.54
7.82
2.83
7.57
3.06
8.47
0.69
8.31
0.78
8.23
0.90
8.04
0.96
7.89
1.07
7.68
1.22
7.45
1.40
7.20
1.61
6.94
1.83
6.66
2.07
6.44
2.27

18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
14.04 2.00 14.59 2.00
13.77 2.19 14.30 2.20
13.48 2.41 13.99 2.42
13.33 2.53 13.83 2.54
13.08 2.72 13.57 2.74
12.73 3.00 13.21 3.02
12.36 3.30 12.82 3.32
11.96 3.63 12.40 3.66
11.53 3.98 11.96 4.01
11.07 4.37 11.48 4.40
9.63
4.18
9.93
4.18
12.24 1.55 12.72 1.54
12.01 1.71 12.47 1.71
11.76 1.90 12.21 1.90
11.62 2.00 12.07 2.00
11.41 2.17 11.85 2.17
11.12 2.41 11.54 2.42
10.80 2.67 11.21 2.68
10.45 2.96 10.85 2.97
10.09 3.27 10.47 3.29
9.70
3.61 10.07 3.63
9.40
3.88
9.75
3.89
10.47 1.11 10.89 1.10
10.28 1.24 10.68 1.23
10.06 1.39 10.45 1.39
9.95
1.48 10.34 1.47
9.77
1.61 10.15 1.61
9.52
1.82
9.89
1.82
9.25
2.04
9.60
2.04
8.96
2.29
9.30
2.29
8.65
2.56
8.98
2.56
8.32
2.85
8.64
2.85
8.06
3.08
8.37
3.09
8.75
0.68
9.09
0.67
8.58
0.77
8.92
0.77
8.40
0.89
8.73
0.88
8.31
0.95
8.63
0.95
8.15
1.06
8.47
1.06
7.94
1.22
8.25
1.22
7.71
1.40
8.01
1.40
7.46
1.60
7.75
1.61
7.20
1.83
7.48
1.83
6.92
2.07
7.19
2.08
6.70
2.27
6.96
2.28
22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
16.25 1.99
15.92 2.20
15.56 2.43
15.38 2.56
15.08 2.76
14.67 3.05
14.23 3.37
13.76 3.71
13.27 4.08
12.75 4.47
10.90 4.18
14.19 1.52
13.90 1.70
13.60 1.90
13.44 2.01
13.19 2.18
12.84 2.43
12.46 2.71
12.06 3.01
11.64 3.33
11.20 3.67
10.85 3.95
12.15 1.07
11.91 1.21
11.65 1.38
11.52 1.47
11.31 1.61
11.01 1.82
10.69 2.05
10.35 2.31
9.99
2.59
9.62
2.88
9.32
3.12
10.15 0.65
9.95
0.75
9.73
0.87
9.61
0.94
9.44
1.05
9.18
1.22
8.91
1.41
8.63
1.62
8.33
1.85
8.01
2.10
7.76
2.30
24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
17.38 1.99
17.02 2.20
16.63 2.44
16.43 2.57
16.11 2.78
15.67 3.08
15.19 3.40
14.69 3.75
14.17 4.12
13.61 4.52
11.72 4.18
15.19 1.51
14.87 1.69
14.54 1.90
14.37 2.01
14.10 2.19
13.72 2.45
13.32 2.73
12.89 3.03
12.44 3.36
11.97 3.71
11.53 3.98
13.01 1.05
12.75 1.20
12.47 1.37
12.32 1.46
12.09 1.61
11.77 1.83
11.43 2.06
11.07 2.32
10.69 2.60
10.29 2.90
10.12 3.14
10.87 0.63
10.65 0.74
10.41 0.86
10.29 0.93
10.10 1.05
9.82
1.22
9.54
1.41
9.23
1.62
8.91
1.86
8.57
2.11
8.25
2.32
NOTE:
TC
: Total capacity
(kW)
PI
: Power input
(kW)
2.
is specified point.
3D052907
62
EDSG18-936
7.2
Capacity Tables
Capacity Correction Factor by the Length of Refrigerant Piping
Rate of Change in Capacity by the Main Piping Length

Rate of Change in Cooling Capacity
Main Piping Length
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
Rate of Change in Cooling Capacity 100.0% 98.6% 97.2% 95.9% 94.7% 93.5% 92.3% 91.2% 90.1% 89.1% 88.1%
Main Piping Length Rate of Change in Capacity

100%
98%
Rate of Change in Capacity (%)
96%
94%
92%
90%
88%
Rate of Change in Cooling

Capacity
86%
84%
82%
80%
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
Main Piping Length L1 (m)
(R11192)
Both case the outdoor unit is in inferior or superior for indoor unit, the rate of change in capacity is the same.
Rate of Change in Capacity by Branch Piping Length

1. Refrigerant Piping Connection Diameter
liquid: 6.4 or 9.5
liquid: 6.4
gas : 15.9
gas : 12.7
Rate of Change in Capacity
piping length
Cooling
piping length
Cooling
100.0%
100.0%
99.6%
99.1%
10
98.7%
10
96.9%
15
97.9%
15
94.8%

liquid: 6.4
Piping size for field connection (mm)
gas : 9.5
RA
Liquid
piping length
Cooling
20
100.0%
25
98.0%
10
93.4%
15
89.3%
Class
(kW)
35
50
60
71
SA
gas
Liquid
gas
9.5
6.4
9.5
6.4
12.7
15.9
12.7
9.5
15.9
63
100%
EDSG18-936
Refrigerant Piping Connection Diameter

liquid: 6.4, gas: 15.9

Cooling
99%
98%
97%
96%
95%
0
10
15
99%
98%
97%
96%
95%
94%
93%
92%
91%
90%
0
Branch piping length L2 (m)

10
(R11194)
Cooling
100%
Capacity Tables
15
(R11193)
Cooling
100%
98%
96%
94%
92%
90%
88%
0
10
15
(R11195)
[Method of calculating cooling/heating capacity]

Total capacity from capacity tables (Rate of change in capacity by main piping length
Rate of change in capacity by branch piping length)
Note:
1. These figures illustrate the rate of change in capacity of a standard indoor unit system at maximum load
(with the thermostat set to maximum) under standard conditions.
Moreover, under partial load conditions there is only a minor deviation from the rate of change in
capacity shown in the above figures.
2. With this outdoor unit, evaporating pressure constant control when cooling, and condensing pressure
constant control when heating is carried out.
3. System layout of piping
Piping length : L1 = 5m, L2 = 3m
Outdoor unit
L1
L2
5m
3m
BP unit
Indoor unit
(R4882)
C: 3D050529
64
EDSG18-936
Operation Limit
8. Operation Limit
Cooling
50
(50/60Hz)
46
30
20
10
Pull-down period
Continuous operation
Outdoor temp.( CDB)
40
0
-5
10
14
20
23
28 30
Indoor temp.( CWB)
Notes:
The graphs are based
on the following conditions.
Equivalent piping length
From outdoor unit to BP unit
From BP unit to each indoor units
Level difference
Air flow rate
5m
3m
0m
High
3D049155C
65
Fan Characteristics
EDSG18-936
9. Fan Characteristics
FDKS25CAVMB
(Pa)
50
60
External static pressure
(mmH2O)
70
rn
a
40
U
st ppe
at r
ic lim
pr i
es t o
su f e
re xt
e
(mmH2O)
30
H
3
l
rna
xte
fe
it oure
m
i
r l ss
we re
Lotatic p
s
20
SL
1
10
(Pa)
6
(mmH2O)
8
9
Air flow rate (m3/min)
10
11
(mmH2O)
3D045760E
FDKS35CAVMB
(mmH2O)
7
(Pa)
(mmH2O)
70
60
50
r
te
ex
f
o
it ure
im s
r l pres
e
p c
Up tati
s
L
30
20
SL
na
40
4
H
3
al
ern
t
f ex
it oure
m
i
l
s
er res
Lowatic p
st
10
(Pa)
(mmH2O)
66
8
9
10
11
(mmH2O)
3D045761E
EDSG18-936
Fan Characteristics
FDKS50CVMB
(mmH2O)
7
(Pa)
60
50
(mmH2O)
70
2
6
5
al
n
er
t
ex
of
it sure
im
r l res
pe ic p
p
t
U ta
s
40
4
H
30
L
2
20
SL
rnal
exte
it of
er lim ure
Low c press
stati
10
(Pa)
(mmH2O)
10
11
12
13
14
(mmH2O)
3D045762D
FDKS60CVMB
(mmH2O)
7
(Pa)
60
50
(mmH2O)
70
al
n
ter
x
fe
it o ure
m
s
r li es
pe pr
Up tatic
s
40
H
4
L
30
SL
2
20
10
al
tern
of ex
r limit ure
Lowtiec press
sta
(Pa)
(mmH2O)
9.5
10.5
11.5
12.5
13.5
14.5
15.5
16.5
17.5
(mmH2O)
3D045763D
67
Fan Characteristics
EDSG18-936
(Pa)
70
(mmH 2 O)
7
(mmH 2 O)
7
60
50
l
Up
sta p e r o
tic f li
pre mit
ssu e x
re tern
a
40
30
3
H
20
2
L
10
SL
(Pa)
(mmH 2 O)
10
11 (mmH 2 O)
Air flow rate(m 3 /min)

3D051853
FBQ60BV1, FBQ71BV1
Notes:
1.The remorte controller can be used to switch between "high" and "low".
2.The air flow is set to "standerd" before leaving the factory. It is possible
to switch between "standerd ESP" and "high ESP" by changing the
terminals in the indoor unit electrical box.
50HZ 220V
High(standerd ESP)
10
60HZ 220V
High(high ESP)
100
10
2
3
50
10
Intake panel
Long life 1
filter
20
30
40
(mmH2O) (Pa)
68
al
extern ESP)
h
limit of
Lower pressure(hig
c
stati
14
16
18
Air flow(m3/min)
20
Internal
External
static pressure static pressure
Internal
External
static pressure static pressure
10
High(Low ESP)
Low
High(Low ESP)
50
15
l P)
rna ES
xte h
f e e(hig
o
it ur
r lim ss
pe pre
Up tatic
s
100
10
Low
5
High(standerd ESP) High(high ESP)

(mmH2O)
(mmH2O) (mmH2O) (Pa)

150
15
15
U
sta pper
tic lim
pre it
ssu of e
re( xte
hig rna
hE l
SP
)
(mmH2O) (Pa)
150
15
3.The external static pressure indicates the characteristics of the fan

when a suction panel (optional accessory)and a canvas for the suction
panel (optional accessory) are incorporated into the main unit (with a
long-life filter).
5
al )
extern
limit of igh ESP
Lowecr pressure(h
ti
sta
10
20
30
40
21
(mmH2O) (mmH2O) (Pa)
14
18
16
Air flow(m3/min)
20
21
Intake panel
Long life
filter
4
(mmH2O)
3D049455
EDSG18-936
Sound Level
10. Sound Level

10.1 Measuring Location
Indoor Units
Duct Connected Type
Wall Mounted Type
2m
1m
DUCT
DUCT
0.8m
1.5m
1m
MICROPHONE
(R4124)
(R1759)
Outdoor Units
0.67m
1m
Note:
(R4948)
1. Operation sound is measured in an anechoic chamber.

2. The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Cooling
Piping Length
Indoor ; 27CDB/19CWB
Outdoor ; 35CDB
5m
69
Sound Level
EDSG18-936
10.2 Octave Band Level

10.2.1 Outdoor Units
RMKS112EVM
COOLING
70
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60
60
NC-50
50
SCALE
220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz
52
68.5
( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )

OPERATING CONDITIONS
220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz
RETURN
AIR
TEMPERATURE:
27CDB, 19.0CWB
COOLING OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE: 35CDB,
24CWB
NC-40
40
POWER SOURCE
NC-30
30
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
70
RMKS140EVM
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60
60
NC-50
50
SCALE
220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz
53
69

220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz
NC-40
40
POWER SOURCE
AIR TEMPERATURE: 27CDB, 19.0CWB

COOLING RETURN
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE: 35CDB, 24CWB
NC-30
30
NC-20
20
4D049260A
8000
COOLING
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
4D049261A
8000
RMKS160EVM

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
70
COOLING
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60
60
NC-50
50
SCALE
220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz
54
69

220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz
AIR TEMPERATURE: 27CDB, 19.0CWB
COOLING RETURN
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE: 35CDB, 24CWB
NC-40
40
POWER SOURCE
NC-30
30
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
4D049262A
8000
10.2.2 Indoor Units

FTKS25DVM
FTKS35DVM
70
60
NC-50
37
25
50
NC-40
POWER SOURCE 220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz
40
JIS STANDARD
STANDARD EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(H)
NC-30
30
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(L)
NC-20
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
FTKS50FVM
70
NC-50
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
220-240/220-230v 220-240/220-230v
(H)
(L)
39
26
(B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED)

NC-40
POWER SOURCE 220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz
40
JIS STANDARD
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230v(H)
NC-30
30
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230v(L)
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500
1000 2000 4000 8000
4D048814
FTKS60FVM
70
OVER ALL ( dB )
60
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
SCALE 220-240/220-230V 220-240/220-230V
(H)
(L)
NC-60
NC-50
43
70
34
50
NC-40
POWER SOURCE 220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz
40
JIS STANDARD
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(H)
NC-30
30
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(L)
Cooling
NC-20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
SCALE
50
4D048279C
8000
NC-60
60
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
20

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
SCALE 220-240/220-230V 220-240/220-230V
(H)
(L)
NC-60
20
OVER ALL(dB)
OVER ALL ( dB )
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
8000
4D056195A

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
70
OVER ALL ( dB )
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
SCALE 220-240/220-230V 220-240/220-230V
(H)
(L)
NC-60
60
NC-50
45
36
50
NC-40
POWER SOURCE 220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz
40
JIS STANDARD
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(H)
NC-30
30
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(L)
Cooling
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
8000
4D040304G
EDSG18-936
Sound Level
FTKS71FVM
FTKS50BVMA8
70
60
46
NC-50
37
50
NC-40
POWER SOURCE
40
220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz
JIS STANDARD
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(H)
NC-30
30
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(L)
Cooling
NC-20
FDKS25CAVMB
50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(L)
35
31
POWER SOURCE
230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz
JIS STANDARD
(H) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz
NC-30
30
(L) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

Cooling
NC-20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
4D040303A
8000
COOLING
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60
NC-50
SCALE
50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(H)
50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(L)
35
31
50
NC-40
POWER SOURCE
40
230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz
JIS STANDARD
(H) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz
NC-30
30
(L) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

Cooling
NC-20
20
70
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60
NC-50
SCALE
50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(H)
50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(L)
37
33

NC-40
POWER SOURCE
40
230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz
JIS STANDARD
(H) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz
NC-30
30
(L) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

Cooling
NC-20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
4D046334C
8000
COOLING
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60
60
NC-50
SCALE
50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(H)
50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(L)
38
34
50
NC-40
POWER SOURCE
40
230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz
JIS STANDARD
(H) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz
NC-30
30
(L) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

Cooling
NC-20
20
4D046335B
8000

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
FDKS60CVMB
50
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
4D046336B
8000
FFQ25BV1B9
COOLING
70
OVER ALL ( dB )
220-240V/50Hz
SCALE 220-230V/60Hz
(H)
NC-60
60
NC-50
220-240V/50Hz
220-230V/60Hz
(L)
35
31
50
NC-40
POWER SOURCE 220-240V/50Hz, 220-230V/60Hz
40
JIS STANDARD
(H)220-240V/50Hz, 220-230V/60Hz
NC-30
30
(L)220-240V/50Hz, 220-230V/60Hz
Cooling
NC-20
20
Cooling
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
COOLING
63
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(L)
60
4D046333C
8000
FDKS50CVMB
70
20

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
SCALE
50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(H)
NC-40
60
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(H)
NC-20
70
40
20
NC-30
30

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
NC-60
NC-50
70
JIS STANDARD
OVER ALL ( dB )
63
POWER SOURCE 220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz
FDKS35CAVMB
50
20
NC-40
COOLING
60
35
(B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED)
40
4D040305K
8000
44
NC-50
50
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
SCALE 220-240/220-230V 220-240/220-230V
(H)
(L)
NC-60
60
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
70

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
SCALE 220-240/220-230V 220-240/220-230V
(H)
(L)
NC-60
20
OVER ALL(dB)
OVER ALL ( dB )
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
8000
4D051868

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
70
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60
60
NC-50
NC-40
40
HI
NC-30
LOW
NC-20
24.5
36.1
32.3
HI
LOW
46.5
230V 50Hz
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE : 27C DB, 19C WB

COOLING OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE : 35C DB, 24C WB
HEATING OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE : 7C DB, 6C WB
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
LOW
29.5
POWER SOURCE
30
63
HI

POWER LEVEL ( dB )
50
20
SCALE
4 DIRECTION DISCHARGE
8000
4D040176A
71
Sound Level
EDSG18-936
FFQ35BV1B9
FFQ50BV1B9
70
NC-60
60
SCALE
HI
LOW
32.0
25.0
NC-50
38.0
32.7

POWER LEVEL ( dB )
50
NC-40
HI
40
LOW
-
49.0
HI
NC-30
LOW
30
LOW
NC-20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
FFQ60BV1B9

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
60
NC-50
50
SCALE
HI
LOW
41.0
32.0
44.8
38.0

HI
HI
40
LOW
58.0
NC-30
LOW
30
POWER SOURCE
20
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE:27C DB, 19CWB

COOLING
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE:35C DB, 24CWB
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE:20C DB, 15CWB
HEATING
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE:7C DB, 6CWB
NC-20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
230V 50Hz

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
34.2
HI
NC-30
30
POWER SOURCE
LOW
NC-20
20
LOW
53.0
HI
HEATING
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
230V 50Hz
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE:27C DB, 19C WB

COOLING OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE:35C DB, 24C WB
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE:20C DB, 15C WB
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE:7C DB, 6C WB
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
4D040178A
8000
NC-60
SCALE
NC-50
50
H(240V)
NC-40
H(220V)
40
220V
240V
35
30
37
32
41
36
43
38
POWER SOURCE 50Hz/60Hz
JIS STANDARD
30
220V
240V
NC-20
L(220V)
125
250
500
1000 2000 4000
NC-50
50
H(240V)
220V
240V
33
29
35
31
39
35
41
37
NC-40
40
POWER SOURCE 50Hz/60Hz
H(220V)
NC-30
JIS STANDARD
30
220V
240V
20
NC-20
L(240V)
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
L(220V)
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
4D006198C
8000
70
NC-30
L(240V)
SCALE
60
63
OVER ALL ( dB )
60
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60
FBQ60BV1, FBQ71BV1
70
72
27.0
41.0
NC-40
4D040179A
8000
FCQ60BVE, FCQ71BVE
63
LOW
36.0
70
POWER LEVEL ( dB )
NC-40
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
HI
A
C

POWER LEVEL ( dB )
40
63
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60
20
NC-50
SCALE
FCQ35BVE, FCQ50BVE
70
63
NC-60
50
4D040177A
8000
OVER ALL ( dB )
60

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
20
230V 50Hz
POWER SOURCE
COOLING
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE : 35C DB, 24C WB
HEATING
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE : 7C DB, 6C WB

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
OVER ALL ( dB )
8000
4D006201D

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
70
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60
60
SCALE
NC-50
H(240V)
H(220V)
NC-40
50
220V
240V
41
35
43
37
48
43
50
45

40
POWER SOURCE 220V 240V 50Hz

JIS STANDARD
NC-30
30
L(240V)
220V
240V
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
STANDARD ESP 49Pa (H)
L(220V)
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
8000
DU426-4186A
EDSG18-936
Electric Characteristics
11. Electric Characteristics

Model
Outdoor
Hz
Volts
Units
Min.
Max.
Power supply
MCA
MFA
Comp.
MSC
RLA
RMKS112EVM
Cooling
50
230
198
253
27.0
30
15.4
15.4
RMKS140EVM
Cooling
50
230
198
253
27.0
30
19.7
19.7
RMKS160EVM
Cooling
50
230
198
253
27.0
30
23.5
23.5
SYMBOLS:
MCA : MIN. CIRCUIT AMPS (A)
MFA : MAX. FUSE AMPS (A)
MSC : MAX. CURRENT DURING THE
STARTING COMPRESSOR (A)
RLA
: RATED LOAD AMPS (A)
OFM : OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR
FLA
: FULL LOAD AMPS (A)
W
: FAN MOTOR RATED OUTPUT (W)
OFM
W
88
+
88
88
+
88
88
+
88
FLA
0.4
+
0.4
0.4
+
0.4
0.4
+
0.4
NOTE:
1. RLA is based on the following conditions.
Power Supply: 50Hz 230V
Cooling
Indoor temp.: 27CDB/19CWB
Outdoor temp.: 35CDB.
2. Voltage range.
Units are suitable for use on electrical systems where voltage
supplied to unit terminal is not below or above listed range limits.
3. Maximum allowable voltage variation between phases is 2%.
4. Select wire size based on the value of MCA.
5. MCA represents maximum input current.
MFA represents capacity which may accept MCA.
6. Instead of fuse, use circuit breaker.
7. MFA is used to select the circuit breaker and the ground fault
circuit interrupter (earth leakage circuit breaker).
8. Be sure to install an earth leak detector. (One that can handle
higher harmonics.)
(This unit uses an inverter, which means that it must be used an
earth leak detector capable handling high harmonics in order to
prevent malfunctioning of the earth leak detector itself.)
C : 3D052890
73
Electric Characteristics
74
EDSG18-936
EDSG18-936
Part 3
Installation Manual
1. Outdoor Units ........................................................................................76
1.1 Installation ..............................................................................................76
1.2 Service Precautions ...............................................................................94
2. BP Units ................................................................................................98
3. Indoor Units.........................................................................................110
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Installation Manual
Safety Precautions ...............................................................................110

Wall Mounted Type FTKS25/35D.........................................................111
Wall Mounted Type FTKS50/60/71F ....................................................119
Wall Mounted Type FTKS50B..............................................................126
Duct Connected Type FDKS25/35CA ..................................................134
Duct Connected Type FDKS50/60C, FDKS25/35EA ...........................144
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FFQ25/35/50/60B..............................154
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FCQ35/50/60/71B .............................176
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type FBQ60/71B...........................................199
75
Outdoor Units
EDSG18-936
1. Outdoor Units
1.1
Installation
1
1
1
2
2
2
1,500
1,000
1,000
3
6
1,500
1,500
5
2
figure 1
figure 2
[1]
figure 3
[2]
10
re
o
rm
0o
r
0o
50 ore
m
[1]
[2]
rm
0o
or
ore
10
0o
00
rm
[3]
or
r
mo
10
ore
15
0
mo or
re
rm
0o
10
500 or
more
[3]
15
0
mo or
re
500 or
more
10
0o
rm
1000 or
more
1000 or
more
0
15
or
or
m
1000 or
more
10
0
mo 0 or
re
ore
20
re
re
0o
rm
r
0o
mo
20
0
mo or
re
30
ore
figure 4
0
30
or
mo
figure 5
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
H
L
L
ore
re
rm
0o
50
0
00
mo
L>H
L>H
r
0o
50 ore
m
[3]
or
r
0o
10 ore
r
m
o
0
50 ore
m
r
0o
50 ore
m
[4]
r
0o
50 less
1000 or
more
rm
0o
00
or
re
mo
figure 6
L
r
0o
30 ore
m
figure 7
[6]
[5]
[7]
[8]
r
0o
50 ore
m
r
0o
50 ore
m
1000 or
more
H
L
r
0o
10 ore
m
or
0
50 ore
m
1000 or
more
H
H
L>H
r
0o
25 ore
m
10
50
or
1000 or
more
L
ore
00
r
0o
30 ore
m
[4]
[3]
1000 or
more
1000 or
more
10
r
0o
50 less
ore
L
L
A
or
00 e
10 mor
or
00 e
10 mor
or
00 e
15 mor
figure 7
76
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Units
[1]
[1]
20
100
or
00
20 more
figure 10
r
or 00 ore
2 o
00
m
10 more
re
mo
or
00
10
[2]
r
0o
10 ore
m
[2]
L
A
100
r
0o
60 re
or mo
0
0
15 more
ore
rm
0o
0
3
figure 9
figure 11
620
620
140
140
350350
117117
30 30
219219
290290
1
1
140
140
45
45
8
9
8
8
4
5
8
7
3
3
421
421612
612
(345~355)
(345~355)
figure 8
or
00
30 more
10
2
2
4
3
figure 12
7
10
8
8
8
8
10
3
5
10
figure 13
figure 14
11
1
11
4
9
10
10
2
3
5
5
5
2
2
7
3
6
8
7
figure 15
Installation Manual
figure 16
77
Outdoor Units
EDSG18-936
1
4
TO BP UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT

F1 F2 F1 F2
2
3
1
F1 F2
F1 F2
F1 F2
3
F1F2
F1F2
F1F2
F1F2
figure 17
F1F2
F1F2
5
4
figure 18
figure 19
figure 20
1
2
3
4
6
figure 23
[2]
2
3
figure 22
figure 21
8
7
[1]
figure 24
[3]
[4]
3
3
figure 25
1
2
9
10
8
11
2
1
2
12
12
4
5
3
4
figure 26
figure 27
5
3
8
9
6
1
2
figure 28
10
7
5
4
1
figure 29
78
figure 30
figure 31
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
1.
Outdoor Units
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Please read this SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before

installing air conditioning equipment and be sure to install it correctly.
This manual classifies precautions into WARNINGS and CAUTIONS.
Be sure to follow all precautions below: they are all important for
ensuring safety.
After completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates
properly during the start-up operation.
Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it
maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store this installation manual
along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the terms appliances not accessible to the general public.
Safety Precaution
VRV System is a class A product. In a domestic environment this
product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
Meaning of warning and caution symbols.
Warning ........Failure to observe a warning may result in death
or serious injury.
Caution .........Failure to observe a caution may result in injury
or damage to the unit.
Warning
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation
work. Do not try to install the machine yourself.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Perform installation work in accordance with this installation manual.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks
or fire.
Steps must be taken to prevent the critical concentration from
being exceeding in case the refrigerant leaks when the unit is
installed in a small room. Consult your dealer about ways to avoid
exceeding the critical concentration.
If the refrigerant does leak and the critical concentration is
breached, the room may become deprived of oxygen.
Be sure to use only the specified accessories and parts for installation work.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in water leakage,
electric shocks, fire or the unit falling.
Install in a location which can fully support the weight of the unit.
Insufficiently strong locations will cause the unit to drop and
cause injury.
Carry out the specified installation work after taking into account
strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Improper installation work may result in the equipment falling and
causing accidents.
Electrical wiring work should be done in compliance with all local
laws, specifications, and this manual. Dedicated power supply
wiring should be used.
Insufficient capacity in the power supply wiring or incorrect wiring
work may cause electric shock or fire.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires and used,
and no external forces act on the terminal connections or wires.
Improper connections or installation may result in fire.
Wiring between indoor and outdoor units and for the power wiring
should be laid out and securely attached with an outer panel so it
does not force the service lid or other parts out of place.
Otherwise this may cause the terminal board to get hot, electric
shock, or fires.
If the refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area
immediately.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire.
After completing the installation work, check that the refrigerant
gas does not leak.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas leaks into the
room and comes into contact with a source of fire, such as a fan
heater, stove or cooker.
Always shut off the power before touching any electrical parts.
Be sure to establish an earth.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, arrester, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock, or fire.
A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause
damage to the air conditioner.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric
shocks, or fire.
Caution
Drain pipes should be laid following the explanation in this installation manual to achieve proper drainage and should be insulated
to prevent condensation.
Improper drain work may cause leaks, damaging furniture, etc.
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wiring at least 1 meter away from televisions or radios in
order to prevent image interference or noise.
Do not install the air conditioner in the following locations:
(a) where a mineral oil mist or an oil spray or vapor is produced,
for example in a kitchen.
Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall off or result in water leakage.
Installation Manual
79
Outdoor Units
EDSG18-936
(b) where corrosive gas, such as sulfurous acid gas, is produced.

Corroding copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage.
(c) near machinery emitting electromagnetic waves.
Electromagnetic waves may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of the equipment.
(d) where flammable gases may leak, where there are carbon
fiber or ignitable dust suspensions in the air, or where volatile
flammables such as thinner or gasoline are handled.
Operating the unit in such conditions may result in fire.
(e) Make sure to provide for adequate measures in order to prevent that the outdoor unit be used as a shelter by small animals.
Small animals making contact with electrical parts can cause
malfunctions, smoke or fire. Please instruct the customer to
keep the area around the unit clean.
Do not mount or place objects on the outdoor unit.
Falling and tipping may cause injury.
Do not wash outdoor or indoor units with water.
This may cause electric shock or fire.
Disposal requirements
Dismanting of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and eventual other parts, shold be done in accordance with the relevant
local and national regulations.
Caution
See the indoor units and BP unit installation manual for indoor unit
and BP unit and the remote controller installation.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
INTRODUCTION
This series uses R410A new refrigerant. Be absolutely sure to
comply with 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING,
because even greater caution is needed to prevent impurities
from entering R410A (mineral oils and water).
The design pressure is 4.0MPa (2.8MPa for R22), which means
that piping may be thicker than conventionally, so please refer to
7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING.
This is a mixed refrigerant, so charge as a liquid when adding
refrigerant.
(If charged as a gas, the composition of the refrigerant may
change, preventing normal operation.)
The indoor unit must use R410A. See the catalog for indoor unit
and BP unit models which can be connected. (Normal operation
is not possible when connected to other units.)
The power supply of this series is single-phase, 220 to 240V
(50Hz) in the model ~EV1A, single-phase, 220 to 230V (50/60Hz)
in the model ~EVM, single-phase, 220V (60Hz) in the model
~EVLT.
2-2 Standard operation limit

Normal operation
The figures below assume following operating conditions for indoor
and outdoor units:
Equivalent pipe length
From outdoor unit to BP unit................................................. 5m
From BP unit to indoor unit................................................... 3m
Level difference .................................................................... 0m
(H/P model only)
A
Cooling
Heating
*(c)
*(a)
46
40
*(b)
35
15.5
10
5
5
10
A
B
C
D
14
19
23
15
10
28
14
20
28
Outdoor temperature (CDB)

Indoor temperature (CWB)
Outdoor temperature (CWB)
Indoor temperature (CDB)
Range for continuous operation
Range for pull down operation
Range for warming up operation
2-3 Spec list

For operating conditions marked with a *(a)(b) in the table, see 2-2
Standard operation limit.
H/P
Model name
C/O
RMXS112EV1A RMXS140EV1A RMXS160EV1A

RMXS112EVLT RMXS140EVLT RMXS160EVLT
RMKS112EVM RMKS140EVM RMKS160EVM Remarks
RMKS112EV1A RMKS140EV1A RMKS160EV1A
Refrigerant type
R410A
Cooling performance
(kW)
11.2
14.0
15.5
* (a)
Heating performance
(kW)
12.5
16.0
17.5
* (b)
H/P
model
only
Energy use during cooling
(kW)
3.50
4.49
5.46
* (a)
Energy use during heating
(kW)
4.17
5.19
5.65
* (b)
H/P
model
only
External dimensions
(width depth height)
(mm)
Mass
(kg)
Connec- Gas line piping

tion piping
Liquid line piping
(inch)
(mm)
3/4
19.1
3/4
19.1
3/4
19.1
(inch)
(mm)
3/8
9.5
3/8
9.5
3/8
9.5
2-1 Combination
The indoor units can be installed in the following range.
Be sure to connect a dedicated indoor unit. See the catalog
for indoor unit models which can be connected.
Total capacity/quantity of indoor units
Outdoor unit
Total capacity of indoor units Total quantity of indoor units
RMXS112EV1A, RMXS112EVLT, RMKS112EVM, RMKS112EV1A.......... 55 ~ 145.5
6 units
RMXS140EV1A, RMXS140EVLT, RMKS140EVM, RMKS140EV1A....70 ~ 182
8 units
RMXS160EV1A, RMXS160EVLT, RMKS160EVM, RMKS160EV1A..........80 ~ 208
9 units
80
1345 900 320

125
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Units
2-4 Electrical properties
3.
For operating conditions marked with a *(c) in the table, see 2-2
<Transporting the Unit>

As shown in figure 2, bring the unit slowly. (Take care not to let hands
or things come in contact with rear fins.)
Standard operation limit.

H/P RMXS112EV1A RMXS140EV1A RMXS160EV1A Remarks
Model name
C/O RMKS112EV1A RMKS140EV1A RMKS160EV1A
Phase
Frequency
(Hz)
50Hz
Voltage
(V)
220-240V
Voltage tolerance range
(%)
10
Rated current for fuses
30
Maximum outdoor unit operating current
(A)
Model name
H/P RMXS112EVLT RMXS140EVLT RMXS160EVLT Remarks
27
Phase
* (c)
Frequency
(Hz)
60Hz
Voltage
(V)
220V
(%)
10
30
(A)
Model name
C/O RMKS112EVM RMKS140EVM RMKS160EVM Remarks
27
Phase
* (c)
Frequency
(Hz)
50Hz/60Hz
Voltage
(V)
220-230V
(%)
10
30
(A)
27
* (c)
2-5 Standard supplied accessories

Make sure that the accessories shown below are all present.
(The accessories can be found behind the front panel.)
Name
Regarding use
Clamp
Quantity
2 pcs.
Name
Others
Installation manual
Shape
Gas side
Gas side
Gas side
accessory pipe (1) accessory pipe (2) accessory pipe (3)
Quantity
1 pc.
1 pc.
1 pc.
Shape
(Refer to figure 31)

1. Accessories
2. Screw for front panel
3. Front panel
2-6 Option accessory

Refrigerant branching kit
REFNET joint
KHRP26A22T
* See 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING for

details on how to connect refrigerant branch kits and how many
are needed.
Installation Manual
(Refer to figure 2)
1. Air outlet grille
2. Intake hole
3. Corner
4. Outdoor unit
5. Handle
6. Front
7. Rear
8. Always hold the unit by the corners, as holding it by the
side intake holes on the casing may cause them to
deform.
Use only accessories and parts which are of the designated specification when installing.
4.
BEFORE INSTALLATION
SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE
(1) Select an installation site where the following conditions are

satisfied and that meets with your customers approval.
Places which are well-ventilated.
Places where the unit does not bother next-door neighbors.
A locations where small animals will not make nests in the unit.
Safe places which can withstand the units weight and vibration
and where the unit can be installed level.
Locations not exposed to rain.
A locations where there is enough space to install the unit.
Places where the indoor and outdoor units piping and wiring
lengths come within the allowable ranges.
A location where there is no risk of flammable gas leaking.
(2) If the unit is installed in a location where it might be
exposed to strong wind, install as per figure 3.
5m/sec or more strong wind blown against the outdoor units air
outlet causes the outdoor unit to deteriorate in air capacity and
suck in the air blown out of its air outlet (short circuit), and the following effects may result.
Drop in performance.
Increased frost formation in heating mode.
Shutting down due to increase in pressure.
If very strong wind blows continuously on the side of the outdoor
unit with the outlet vent, the fan may turn in reverse at high
speed and break, so install as per figure 3.
(Refer to figure 3)
1. Turn the air outlet side toward the buildings wall, fence or
windbreak screen.
2. Air inlet grille
3. Ensuring there is enough space for installing the unit.
4. Set the outlet side at a right angle to the direction of the
wind.
5. Strong wind
6. Blown air
(3) In installing the unit in a place frequently exposed to snow,
pay special attention to the following:
Elevate the foundation as high as possible.
Attach the snow hood (field supply).
Remove the rear inlet grille to prevent snow from accumulating
on the rear fins.
(4) The outdoor unit may short circuit depending on its environment,
so use the louvers (field supply).
(5) The refrigerant gas (R410A) is a safe, non-toxic and non-flammable gas, but if it leaks into the room, the concentration may
exceed tolerance levels, especially in small rooms, so steps need
to be taken to prevent refrigerant leakage. See the equipment
design reference for details.
81
Outdoor Units
EDSG18-936
(6) Inverter-type air conditioners sometimes cause static in other

electrical appliances.
When selecting an installation location, make sure the air conditioner and all wiring are sufficiently far away from radios, computers, stereos, and other appliances, as shown in figure 1.
Particularly for locations with weak reception, ensure there is a
distance of at least 3 meters for indoor remote controllers, place
power supply wiring and interunit wiring in conduits, and ground
the conduits. Use shielded wire for interunit wiring.
Note)
Get the lower part of the frame sealed so that air from the outlet
does not bypass.
2.
LH
(Refer to figure 1)
1. Indoor unit
2. Branch switch (ground-fault circuit interrupter)
3. Remote controller
4. Personal computer or radio
5. BP unit
(7) Space needed for installation
<Precautions when installing units in series>
The direction for interunit piping is either forward or down when
installing units in series, as shown in the figure.
If the piping is brought out from the back, the outdoor unit will
require at least 250 mm from its right side.
(All figures represent millimeters.)
(7)-1 IN CASE OBSTACLES EXIST ONLY IN FRONT OF THE
AIR INLET
When nothing is obstructing the top
1. Installation of single unit
In case obstacles exist only in front of the air inlet
(Refer to figure 4-[1])
In case obstacles exist in front of the air inlet and on both sides
of the unit (Refer to figure 4-[2])
2. In case of installing multiple units (2 units or more) in lateral connection per row
When something is obstructing the top
1. Installation of single unit
In case obstacles exist only in front of the air inlet
2. In case of installing multiple units (2 units or more) in lateral connection per row
Series installation (up to two units) (Refer to figure 7-[4])

Relation of dimensions of H, A, and L are shown in the table
below.

1. Installation of single unit (Refer to figure 7-[1])
2. In case of installing multiple units (2 units or more) in lateral connection per row (Refer to figure 7-[2])
Relation of dimensions of H, A, and L are shown in the table below.
LH
H<L
82
0 < L 1/2H
750
1/2H < L H
1000
1/2H < L H
1250
Set the frame to be L H
Note)
1. Get the lower part of the frame sealed so that air from the outlet does not bypass.
2. Only two units at most can be installed in series.
Pattern 2: Where obstacles in front of the air outlet is lower than the
unit.
(There is no height limit for obstructions on the intake
side.)
below.
L
0 < L 1/2H
250
1/2H < L H
300

below.
LH
0 < L 1/2H
100
1/2H < L H
200
H<L
Note)
Get the lower part of the frame sealed so that air from the outlet
does not bypass.
2.
Series installation (up to two units) (Refer to figure 7-[8])

below.
LH

(7)-3 IN CASE OBSTACLES EXIST IN FRONT OF BOTH THE

AIR INLET AND OUTLET SIDES
Pattern 1: Where obstacle in front of the air outlet is higher than the
unit.
(There is no height limit for obstructions on the intake side.)
A
1000
H<L
(7)-2 IN CASE OBSTACLES EXIST IN FRONT OF THE OUTLET

SIDE

L
0 < L 1/2H
H<L
0 < L 1/2H
250
1/2H < L H
300
Note)
1. Get the lower part of the frame sealed so that air from the outlet does not bypass.
2. Only two units at most can be installed in series.
(7)-4 IN CASE OF STACKED INSTALLATION
1.
2.
In case obstacles exist in front of the outlet side

Note)
1. No more than two units should be stacked.
2. About 100 mm is required as the dimension for laying the
upper outdoor units drain pipe.
3. Shut off the Z part (the area between the upper outdoor unit
and the lower outdoor unit) so that outlet air does not bypass.
In case obstacles exist in front of the air inlet (Refer to figure 8-[2])
Note)
1. No more than two units should be stacked.
2. About 100 mm is required as the dimension for laying the
upper outdoor units drain pipe.
3. Shut off the Z part (the area between the upper outdoor unit
and the lower outdoor unit) so that outlet air does not bypass.
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Units
(7)-5 IN CASE OF MULTIPLE-ROW INSTALLATION (FOR ROOF

TOP USE, ETC.)
1. In case of installing one unit per row (Refer to figure 9-[1])
below.
LH
H<L
5.
0 < L 1/2H
250
1/2H < L H
300
Installation impossible.
PRECAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION
Install making sure the unit is level and the foundation is sturdy
enough to prevent vibration noise.
In accordance with the foundation drawing in figure 10, fix the unit
securely by means of the foundation bolts.
(Prepare four sets of M12 foundation bolts, nuts and washers
each which are available on the market.)
The foundation bolts should be inserted 20 mm.
1. Diagram of lower surface
<Drain pipe disposal>
Locations where drainage from the outdoor unit might be a problem.
In such locations, for example, where the drainage might drip onto
passersby, lay the drain piping using the separately sold drain
plug.
When laying the drain, at least 100 mm from the bottom of the outdoor unit is needed.
Make sure the drain works properly.
(Watch out for water leaks if piping is brought out the bottom.)
1. Drain plug
2. 4 tabs
3. Drain receiver
4. Insert the drain receiver as far as possible into the drain
plug and hook the tabs.
5. Bottom frame drain hole
6. (1) Insert the drain plug through the drain hole in the
bottom frame shown in figure 12.
(2) Turn the drain plug along the guides until it stops
(approx. 90), and then attach the bottom frame.
7. Guide
1. Air outlet side
2. Diagram of lower surface (Unit: mm)
3. Drain hole
[How to remove the transport clasp]
A yellow transport clasp and washer are attached to the legs of
the compressor to protect the unit during transportation, so
remove them as shown in figure 13.
1. Compressor
2. Securing nut
3. Washer
4. Transport clasp
5. Turn in the direction of the arrow and remove.
6. Sound-proof cover
7. Do not remove with the cover open.
(1) Open the sound-proof cover as shown in figure 13.
Do not pull the sound-proof cover or remove it from the compressor.
(2) Remove the securing nut.
(3) Remove the washer.
(4) Remove the transport clasp as shown in figure 13.
(5) Retighten the securing nut.
(6) Return the sound-proof cover as it was.
Installation Manual
6.
FIELD WIRING
Caution
To the electrician
Do not operate until refrigerant piping work is completed.
(If operated before complete the piping work, the compressor
may be broken down.)
Be sure to install an earth leakage circuit breaker.
(This unit uses an inverter, so install the earth leakage circuit
breaker that be capable of handling high harmonics in order to
prevent malfunctioning of the earth leakage circuit breaker
itself.)
6-1 Wiring connection example for whole system

Electrical wiring work should be done by a certified professional.
Follow the Electrical wiring diagram face plate when carrying out
any electrical wiring.
Only proceed with wiring work after blocking off all power.
Make sure the ground resistance is no greater than 4 .
Attach a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
Ground the indoor and outdoor units.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, sewage pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Gas pipes: can explode or catch fire if there is a gas leak.
Sewage pipes: no grounding effect is possible if hard plastic
piping is used.
Telephone ground wires and lightning rods: dangerous
when struck by lightning due to abnormal rise in electrical potential in the grounding.
Use copper wire.
When doing the electrical wiring, always shut off the power source
before working, and do not turn on the switch until all work is complete.
This unit has an inverter, so it must be grounded in order to reduce
noise and prevent it affecting other appliances, and also to
release any electrical build-up in the unit case due to leaked current.
Do not install a power-factor improving phase-advancing capacitor under any circumstances.
(Not only will this not improve the power factor, but it might cause
a fire.)
Connect the wire securely using designated wire and fix it with
attached clamp without applying external pressure on the terminal parts (terminal for power wiring, terminal for transmission wiring and earth terminal). See 6-3 How to connect the power
supply wiring.
Left-over wiring should not be wrapped and stuffed into the unit.
To prevent the power wiring from being damaged by the knock
hole edges, put it in a wiring pipe or plastic tube to protect it.
Secure the wiring with the included clamp so that it does not come
in contact with the piping or shutoff valve.
(See 6-3 How to connect the power supply wiring.)
Caution
Use a power wire pipe for the power supply wiring.
Outside the unit, make sure the weak electric wiring (i.e. for the
remote controller cord, between units, etc.) and the strong electric wiring do not pass near each other, keeping them at least
50 mm apart.
Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and
breakage.
Be sure to connect the power wiring to the power wiring terminal
block and secure it as described in 6-3 How to connect the
power supply wiring.
Interunit wiring should be secured as described in 6-4 Interunit wiring connection procedure.
Secure wiring with clamp (accessory) to avoid contact with piping.
Make sure the wiring and the front panel do not stick up above
the structure, and close the cover firmly.
83
Outdoor Units
EDSG18-936

1. When the power source is connected in series between
the BP units.
2. When the power source is suppled to each BP unit individually.
3. Branch switch and over-current interrupter (ground-fault
circuit interrupter)
4. Power supply
5. Outdoor unit
6. 16V
7. 220-240V
8. Indoor unit
9. BP unit
10. Ground wire
6-2 How to lay the power supply wiring and transmission wiring
Pass the power supply wiring (including the ground wire) through the
holes on the side, front, or back of the unit.
The interunit wiring should be passed through the wiring hole, the
piping out-hole, or the knock hole on the front of the unit.
Precautions when knocking out knock holes
Open the knock holes with a hammer or the like.
After knocking out the holes, we recommend you remove burrs in
the knock holes and paint the edges and areas around the edges
using the repair paint to prevent rusting.
When passing wiring through knock holes, make sure there are
no burrs, and protect the wiring with protective tape.
Burr
If small animals might enter the

unit, block the knock holes with an
appropriate material (field supply).

1. Shutoff valve attachment plate
2. Interunit wiring
3. Connecting electrical wiring (including ground wire)
4. Backward
5. Knockout hole
6. Sideways
7. Set apart
8. Forward
9. Clamp (accessory)
10. Terminal block
11. Control box
<Precautions when laying power wiring>
Wiring of different thicknesses cannot be connected to the power
terminal block.
(Slack in the power wiring may cause abnormal heat.)
Use sleeve-insulated round pressure terminals for connections to
the power terminal block. When none are available, connect wire
of the same diameter to both sides, as shown in the figure.
Insulating sleeve
Round crimp-style
terminal
Electric Wire
Do not connect
Do not connect
Connect wires
of the same gauge wires of the same wires of different
gauge to one side. gauges.
to both side.
Use an appropriate screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws.

A screwdriver with a small head will strip the head and make
proper tightening impossible.
Over-tightening the terminal screw may break it.
See the table below the tightening torque of the terminal screws.
Tightening torque (Nm)
M5
Power terminal
2.39~2.91
M4
Shield ground
1.18~1.44
M3
Transmission wiring terminal block
0.8~0.97
6-3 How to connect the power supply wiring

Caution
A ground-fault circuit interrupter is required in order to prevent
electric shock and fires.
Maximum
Rated
outdoor unit
current
operating
for fuses
current
Model name
Frequency
Voltage
RMXS112EV1A, RMKS112EV1A
~50Hz
220-240V
30A
27.0A
~50Hz
220-240V
30A
27.0A
~50Hz
220-240V
30A
27.0A
Model name
Frequency
Voltage
RMXS112EVLT
~60Hz
220V
30A
27.0A
RMXS140EVLT
~60Hz
220V
30A
27.0A
RMXS160EVLT
~60Hz
220V
30A
27.0A
Frequency
Voltage
RMKS112EVM
~50/60Hz
220-230V
30A
27.0A
RMKS140EVM
~50/60Hz
220-230V
30A
27.0A
RMKS160EVM
~50/60Hz
220-230V
30A
27.0A
Model name
Maximum
Rated
outdoor unit
current
operating
for fuses
current
Maximum
Rated
outdoor unit
current
operating
for fuses
current
Caution
The wiring should be selected in compliance with local specifications. See the table above.
Comply with IEC60245 as regards individual specifications for
local power supply wiring.
Use H05VV as the power supply wiring if a wiring conduit is
being used.
If a conduit cannot be used, then use H07RNF.
Always turn off the power before doing wiring work.
Grounding should be done in compliance with local laws and
regulations.
(This unit has an inverter, so an interrupter capable of handling
high frequencies is needed to prevent malfunction of the interrupter itself.)
As shown in figure 16, when connecting the power supply wiring
to the power supply terminal block, be sure to clamp securely.
Once wiring work is completed, check to make sure there are no
loose connections among the electrical parts in the control box.
Follow the instructions below if the wiring gets very hot due to
slack in the power wiring.
For wiring, use the designated power wire and connect firmly,
then secure using the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on the terminal board.
84
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Units

1. Control box
2. Ground position
3. Clamp (accessory)
4. Shutoff valve attachment plate
5. Connecting electrical wiring
6. Ground wire (Yellow/Green)
7. Terminal block (X1M)
8. Pass through included clamp.
9. Interunit wiring
10. (To X2M [TO BP UNIT] (F1, F2))
6-4 Interunit wiring connection procedure

Between indoor units in the same system, pass the wiring
between the units as shown in figure 17. (There is no polarity.)
2. Use balance type shield wire (with no polarity).
3. BP unit
4. Under no circumstances should 220-240V be connected.
Precautions regarding the length of wiring between units
Exceeding the following limits may cause transmission malfunctions,
so observe them.
Max. wiring length
Max. 200 m
Total wiring length
Max. 300 m
Precautions regarding wiring between units
Do not connect 220-240V power wiring to terminals for the
interunit wiring. Doing so would destroy the entire system.
Wiring to the indoor unit should be wired to F1 and F2 (TO BP
unit) on the outdoor units terminal block (X2M).
The interunit wiring should be secured inside the unit and then finished by being wrapped with tape at the same time as the on-site
refrigerant piping, as shown in figure 18.
1. Liquid pipe
2. Finishing tape
3. Insulation material
4. Interunit wiring
5. Gas pipe
Note
2
The above wiring should be wired using 0.75 1.25 mm shielded
(balance type) wiring.
(See figure 16 for how to ground the shielded parts.)
All interunit wiring is to be procured on site.
Caution
1. Branch
2. Caution on branches in the wiring among BP units
3. The following branches can not be performed
7.
PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT
PIPING
Caution
To the pipe-layer
Do not operate the unit with the transport clasp attached. This
can cause abnormal shaking or noise. See 5. PRECAUTIONS
ON INSTALLATION and How to remove the transport clasp.
7-1 Installation tools

Use the right parts to ensure tolerance and to prevent foreign matter
for entering.
Gauge manifold, charge hose, etc.
Make sure to use installation tools that are exclusively used for
R410A installations to withstand the pressure and to prevent foreign materials (e.g. mineral oils such as SUNISO and moisture)
from mixing into the system.
(The screw specifications differ for R410A and R407C.)
Vacuum pump
Use extreme caution to prevent pump oil from flowing backwards through the system when the pump is stopped.
Use a vacuum pump which can evacuate to 100.7 kPa (5Torr,
755mmHg).
7-2 Selecting piping material

Use pipes that have no contaminants adhered to their inner surfaces
(such as sulfur, iron oxide, dust, cutting chips, oil and moisture). (It is
desirable that adhered oil inside the piping is 30mg or less per 10m.)
The wall thickness of the refrigerant piping should comply with local
laws and regulations. The design pressure for R410A is 4.0MPa.
Use the following material for the refrigerant piping.
Material: Jointless phosphor-deoxidized copper pipe.
Thickness and size: choose based on the piping size selection
method on the 7-8 Air tight test and vacuum drying.
Make sure to use the separately sold refrigerant branch kit when
branching the piping.
Piping work should be done within the maximum length, height
difference, and length after branches set out in 7-8 Air tight test
and vacuum drying.
Install the refrigerant branch kit while observing the following condition and referring to the installation manual offered as an accessory of the kit.
1. Install the REFNET joint so it splits horizontally or vertically.
2. Horizontal surface
3. A-arrow view
4. 30 or less
5. Level
6. Vertical is also OK
7-3 Protection against contamination when

installing pipes
Wrap the piping to prevent moisture, dirt, dust, etc. from entering
the piping.
Exercise caution when passing copper piping through the
through-holes and when passing them out to the outside.
Place
Outdoor
Indoor
Installation period
Protection method
More than a month
Pinch the pipe
Less than a month

Regardless of the period
Pinch or tape the pipe
7-4 Pipe connection

See Shutoff valve operation procedure in 7-8 Air tight test and
vacuum drying regarding handling of the shutoff valve.
Only use the flare nuts included with the unit. Using different flare
nuts may cause the refrigerant to leak.
Be sure to perform a nitrogen blow when brazing.
(Brazing without performing nitrogen replacement or releasing
nitrogen into the piping will create large quantities of oxidized film
on the inside of the pipes, adversely affecting valves and compressors in the refrigerating system and preventing normal operation.)
Installation Manual
85
Outdoor Units
EDSG18-936
Table 1
Caution
Do not use a flux when brazing the refrigerant pipe joints.
Use phosphor copper brazing (BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/B-Cu93P710/795: ISO 3677) which does not require flux.
(Using a chlorine flux may cause the pipes to corrode, and if it
contains fluoride it may cause the refrigerant lubricant to deteriorate, adversely affecting the refrigerant piping system.)
1. Refrigerant pipe
2. Location to be brazed
3. Regulator
4. Nitrogen
5. Manual valve
6. Taping
7-5 Connecting the refrigerant piping

The local interunit piping is connectable in four directions.
1. Front panel
2. Pipe outlet panel
3. Backward
4. Sideways
5. Downward
6. Pipe outlet panel screw
7. Forward
8. Screw for front panel
When connecting in a downward direction, make four round holes
using a 6-mm iameter drill in the central section around the knock
hole and open the knock hole.
1. Dril
2. Center area around knockout hole
3. Knockout hole
4. Slit
After knocking out the knock-out, it is recommended to apply
repair paint to the edge and the surrounding end surfaces to prevent rusting.
1. Bottom frame
2. Interunit piping
Note
Cutting out the two slits makes it possible to install as shown in figure 24. (Use a metal saw to cut out the slits.)
<Precautions when connecting pipes>
Please refer to the Table 1 for the dimensions for processing
flares.
When connecting the flare nut, coat the flare both inside and outside with refrigerating machine oil and initially tighten by hand 3 or
4 turns before tightening firmly.
Please refer to the Table 1 for the tightening torque. (Too much
tightening will end up in splitting of the flare.)
86
Tightening
torque (Nm)
9.5
Bending radius: 32.7~39.9
30mm or larger
15.9
50mm or larger
19.1
60mm or larger
A dimensions for
processing
flares (mm)
12.8~13.2
19.3~19.7
Flare shape
Pipe size
R0.4~0.8
A
set to 0.02 MPa (0.2 kg/cm : just enough to feel a breeze on your
cheek) with the decompression valve.
Do not mix any refrigerant other than that specified into the refrigerant system.
Do not mix air into the refrigerant system.
90 2
45
Note
The nitrogen used when brazing while flowing the nitrogen should be
23.6~24.0
Refrigerant oil
If a torque wrench is not available, there is a place where the tightening torque will suddenly increase if a normal wrench is used to
tighten the flare nut.
From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown
below.
Pipe size
Further tightening angle
9.5
Bending radius: 60~ 90
30mm or larger
15.9
50mm or larger
19.1
60mm or larger
Recommended arm length

of tool
Approx. 200 mm
Approx. 300mm
Approx. 450mm
After all the piping has been connected, use nitrogen to perform a
gas leak check.
1. Front connection
2. Gas side accessory pipe (1)
4. Gas side piping (field supply)
5. Cut at an appropriate length.
1. Rear-side connection
1. Side connection
1. Bottom connection
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Units
Precautions for connecting pipes

Be careful not to let the interunit piping come into contact with the
compressor terminal cover.
Adjust the height of the insulation material on liquid pipe when it
has the possibility of getting in contact with the terminal. Also
make sure that the interunit piping does not touch the mounting
bolt of the compressor.
1. Terminal cover
2. Compressor
3. Corking, etc.
4. Insulation material
5. Bolts
6. Interunit piping
If installing the outdoor unit higher than the indoor unit, caulk the
space around insulation and tubes because condensation on the
check valve can seep through to the indoor unit side.
[Preventing foreign objects from entering]

Plug the pipe through-holes with putty or insulating material (pro
cured locally) to stop up all gaps, as shown in figure 26.
(Insects or small animals entering the outdoor unit may cause a
short in the control box.)
1. Putty or insulating material
2. (field supply)
7-6 Heat insulation of piping

If you think the humidity inside the ceiling might exceed 30C and
RH80%, reinforce the insulation on the cooling piping. (At least
20 mm thick) (Condensation may form on the surface of the insulation.)
Be sure to insulate the interunit piping (liquid and gas-side) and
the refrigerant branch kit. (Not insulating them may cause leaking.)
(The highest temperature that the gas-side piping can reach is
around 120C, so be sure to use insulating material which is very
resistant.)
Caution
For local insulation, be sure to insulate all the way to the pipe connections inside the machine.
Exposed piping may cause leaking or burns on contact.
Installation Manual
87
88
a
A
f
1
g
2
BP
H3
i
4
e
j
5
BP
2
k
6
Difference in height
Between indoor and indoor units
How to calculate the additional refrigerant to be charged

Additional refrigerant to be charged R (Kg)
R should be rounded off in units of 0.1Kg.
Pipe size selection
Refrigerant branch kit selection

refrigerant branch kits can only be used with R410A
Piping length
Between BP and BP units
Allowable length after the branch

2 Branch kit are recommanded to set as possible
as near the BP units.
c, d, e are recommanded to be as possible as short.
Difference in height between outdoor and BP units (H2) 30m
Between outdoor and BP units
Piping length
Difference in height between outdoor and indoor units (H1) 30m
Between outdoor and indoor units
Branch with refnet joint
9.5 0.8
9.5 0.8
15.9 1.0
d: 9.5 10m
e: 9.5 10m
f : 6.4 10m
g: 16.4 10m
h: 16.4 10m
i : 6.4 10m
j : 16.4 10m
k: 16.4 15m
l: 6.4 5m
R=[(a+b+d+e)0.054]+[(c+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m)0.022]=[400.054]+[780.022]=3.876 3.9kg
a: 9.5 10m
b: 9.5 10m
c: 06.4 10m
m: 6.4 8m
[Example]
indoor 4: 2.5kW
Qe = 11.0kW
indoor 5: 3.5kW
indoor 6: 5.0kW
=> (Gas pipe) 15.9 1.0 and (Liquid pipe) 9.5 0.8
[Example] for refrigerant branch using refnet joint
See the table A
Liquid pipe
Gas pipe
19.1 1.0
Total length (m) of liquid

Total length (m) of liquid
0.054 + piping size at 6.4
0.022
piping size at 9.5
R=
Qc, Qd, Qe is total connected indoor capacity

c, d, e indicates the symbols in the figure
Total indoor capacity Q

Qc, Qd, Qe 5.0 kw
Qc, Qd, Qe > 5.0 kw
Liquid pipe
6.4 0.8
9.5 0.8
c, d, e
Between refrigerant branch kit and BP unit

Gas pipe
12.7 0.8
15.9 1.0
Between refrigerant branch kit and refrigerant branch kit
Table A
symbol
Between outdoor unit and first refrigerant branch kit
Piping size (Outer diameter minimum thickness)
Refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) name : KHRP26A22T
[Example] unit 8: b+c+m 40m

[Example] unit 6: b+e+k 40m
[Example] unit 3: d+h
40m
Piping length from first refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) to indoor unit 40m
[Example] a 5m
Pipe length between outdoor and first refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) 5m
Difference in height between indoor and indoor units (H4) 15m
Difference in height between BP and BP units (H3) 15m
[Example] f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m 1 5m
Piping length between BP and indoor unit 15m
[Example] RMXS140: f+g+h+i+k+l+m 80m
Piping length between BP and indoor units: RM (XK) S112 60m / RM (XK) S140 80m / RM (XK) S160 90m
[Example] a+b+c+d+e 55m
1 room length
H4
Between BP and indoor unit
Total piping length
BP
Between BP and indoor units
Total piping length
Pipe length between outdoor and BP units 55m
H1
H2
Between outdoor and BP units
refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint)
indoor unit
BP unit
Minimum allowable length

1 Since the sound of refrigerant may be transferred from
the outdoor unit to the indoor unit, make the pipe length
from the outdoor unit to the first junction 5m or longer.
Allowable
height
Maximum
allowable
length
BP 1
Example of connection
(Connection of 8 units heat pump system)
Outdoor Units
EDSG18-936
7-7 Example of connection
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Units
7-8 Air tight test and vacuum drying

After doing the piping, perform the following inspections.
Air tight test
In cases where the unit is run in heating mode when the outside
temperature is low or in other situations where the operating pressure might drop, seal the gas-side flare nut on the shutoff valve
with silicon sealant or the like to prevent it from freezing.
Be sure to use nitrogen gas. (See the figure (Shutoff valve operation
procedure) for the location of the service port.)
[Procedure]
Pressurize from the liquid pipes and gas pipes to 4.0 MPa (and not
above 4.0 MPa). If there is not pressure drop over the next 24 hours,
the equipment has passed the test.
If the pressure drops, check for leakage positions. (Confirm that there
is no leakage, then release nitrogen.)
Silicon sealing pad
(Make sure that there is no gap)

Shutoff valve operation procedure
Have a hex wrench ready (size: 4 mm and 6 mm).
Vacuum drying
Use a vacuum pump that can create a vacuum down to at least
100.7 kPa (5 Torr, 755 mmHg).
[Procedure]
Operate the vacuum pump for at least 2 hours from both the liquid
and gas pipes and decrease the pressure to at least 100.7 kPa.
Leave at below 100.7 kPa for at least 1 hour and make sure that the
vacuum gauge does not rise. (If it does rise, there is either still moisture in the system or a leak.)
Opening the valve
1.
2.
Close the valve
1.
2.
Cases where moisture might enter the piping (i.e., if doing work
during the rainy season, if the actual work takes long enough that
condensation may form on the inside of the pipes, if rain might enter
the pipes during work, etc.)
After performing the vacuum drying for 2 hours, pressurize to
0.05 MPa (i.e., vacuum breakdown) with nitrogen gas, then depressurize down to at least 100.7 kPa for an hour using the vacuum
pump (vacuum drying). (If the pressure does not reach at least
100.7 kPa even after depressurizing for at least 2 hours, repeat the
vacuum breakdown - vacuum drying process.) Leave as a vacuum
for 1 hour after that, and make sure the vacuum gauge does not rise.
1. Nitrogen
2. Decompression valve
3. Vacuum pump
4. Valve (Open)
5. Charge hose
6. Shutoff valve service port
7. Indoor unit
8. Gas line shutoff valve (Close)
9. Liquid line shutoff valve (Close)
10. Indicates local procurement
11. Outdoor unit
12. BP unit
Note
The shutoff valve must always be turned to closed.
Otherwise the refrigerant in the outdoor unit will pour out.
Place the hex wrench on the valve bar and turn counter-clockwise.
Stop when the valve bar no longer turns. It is now open.
Place the hex wrench on the valve bar and turn clockwise.
Stop when the valve bar no longer turns. It is now closed.
Direction to open
Direction to open
<Liquid pipe>
<Gas pipe>
Precautions for handling valve lid

A seal is attached to the point indicated by the arrow.
Take care not to damage it.
Valve lid
Shutoff valve
(lid attachment)
Be sure to tighten the valve lid securely after operating the valves.
Liquid-side tightening torque
Gas-side tightening torque
13.5 ~ 16.5 Nm
22.5 ~ 27.5 Nm
Shutoff valve operation procedure

Precautions when handling the shutoff valve
The names of parts needed to operate the shutoff valve are
shown in the figure below. The unit is shipped from the factory
with the shutoff valve turned to the closed position.
Precautions for handling servicing port

Use a push-rod-provided charging hose for operation.
Be sure to tighten the valve lid securely after operation.
Tightening torque .......... 10.8 ~ 14.7 Nm
Servicing port
8.
ADDITIONAL REFRIGERANT
CHARGE
Valve bar
Warning
Valve lid
When leaving the unit with the power on, be sure to

switch with another person doing the installation or
close the front panel.
Interunit piping connection

Since the side boards may be deformed if only a torque wrench is
used when loosening or tightening flare nuts, always lock the
shutoff valve with a wrench and then use a torque wrench.
Installation Manual
89
Outdoor Units
EDSG18-936
8-1 Before adding refrigerant

Make sure the following work and inspection is complete, in
accordance with the installation manual.
Piping
Wiring
Airtightness test, Vacuum drying
8-2 Checking the refrigerant tank

Check whether the tank has a siphon pipe before charging and
place the tank so that the refrigerant is charged in liquid form.
(See the figure below.)
Tank with siphon pipe
Other tanks
There is a siphon
pipe inside, so the
cylinder need not be
upside-down to fill
with liquid.
(Stand the cylinder
upright when filling.)
Stand the tank

upside down and
charge.
8-3 Adding refrigerant

Filling after calculating the amount of refrigerant to add
1. Calculate the amount of refrigerant to add as described in Calculating the amount of refrigerant to add
in 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING.
2. After the vacuum drying is finished, open valve A and charge the calculated amount of refrigerant through
the service port for the liquid-side shutoff valve.
3. Close valve A after charging is complete.
Note: If all the refrigerant to be added cannot be charged using the above procedure, right-hand the procedure
below and re-charge the refrigerant.
If all the refrigerant could not be added

Add refrigerant using the following procedure. See the Service Precautions plate attached to the control box lid on
the outdoor unit for details on the settings for adding refrigerant.
[Procedure]
1. Close the front panel and turn on the power to all outdoor units and indoor units in the refrigeration system.
2. Open the gas and liquid-side shutoff valves all the way and add the refrigerant. (Open valve A immediately after starting the compressor.)
3. Once the appropriate amount of refrigerant is in, press the confirmation button (BS3) on the outdoor unit PC
board (A2P), and stop operation after adding the refrigerant.
4. Close valve A after charging is complete.
Status of the shutoff valve and other valves when adding refrigerant operation
Status of the shutoff valve and other valves when adding refrigerant
See Shutoff valve operation procedure in 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING for
details on how to use the shutoff valve.
1. R410A Tank (Siphon system)
2. Measuring instrument
6. Gas line shutoff valve
3. Valve A
7. Outdoor unit
4. BP unit
8. Liquid line shutoff valve
Gas line
Liquid line
Valve A
State of valve A and the shutoff valve
shutoff valve shutoff valve
Close
Close
Close
Before starting to charge the refrigerant
Open
Close
During charging of the refrigerant
Close
9.
POST-WORK CHECKS
Perform the following checks after work is complete.

(1) Drain pipe connection, removal of transport clasp
See 5. PRECAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION.
(2) Incorrect power supply wiring, loose screws
See 6-3 How to connect the power supply wiring.
(3) Incorrect interunit wiring, loose screws
See 6-4 Interunit wiring connection procedure.
(4) Incorrect refrigerant piping connections
See 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING.
(5) Piping sizes, use of insulation
See : 7-2 Selecting piping material.
7-6 Heat insulation of piping.
(6) Shutoff valve check
Make sure both the liquid-side and gas-side shutoff valves are
open.
(7) Record of Amount of Refrigerant Added
Record it on Record of Amount of Refrigerant Added on the
Service Precautions plate.
(8) Measuring the insulation of the main power circuit
Use a 500V mega-tester.
Do not use the mega-tester for weak currents other than 220240V. (Interunit wiring)
Caution
To the pipe-layer
After completing installation, be sure to open the valve.
(Operating the unit with the valve shut will break the compressor.)
90
See Shutoff valve operation procedure in 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING for details on how to use the shutoff valve.
Connect the service port (for charging refrigerant) inside the unit. When the unit is shipped from the factory,
refrigerant is already charged, so be careful when connecting the charge hose.
After adding the refrigerant, do not forget to close the lid of the service port (for adding refrigerant).
The tightening torque of the lid is 11.5 13.9 N/m.
1. Gas line shutoff valve
2. Liquid line shutoff valve
4. BP unit
5. Measuring instrument
6. R410A Tank (Siphon system)
7. Valve A
8. Service port
9. (For adding refrigerant)
10. Outdoor unit
Gas line
Liquid line
Valve A
State of valve A and the shutoff valve
shutoff valve shutoff valve
Open
Open
Close
Before starting to charge the refrigerant
Open
Open
Open
During charging of the refrigerant
10. TEST RUN

This unit is equipped with a crank case heater to ensure smooth
startup. Be sure to turn the power on at least 6 hours before
operation in order to have power running to the crank case
heater.
Warning
When leaving the unit with the power on, be sure to
switch with another person doing the installation or
close the front panel.
Precautions before turning the power on
Using insulating sheets, tape electric parts as described in the
Service Precautions plate on the back of the front panel.
All indoor units connected to the outdoor unit operate automatically.
Complete work on the indoor units in order to ensure maximum
safety.
10-1 Power OnCheck Operation

Make sure to perform the check operation after installation.
(If the air conditioner is operated using the indoor remote controller without performing the check operation, the malfunction code
U3 is displayed in the indoor remote controller, and normal operation is disabled.)
When making settings on the outdoor unit PC board (A2P) after
turning the power on, do not touch anything other than the pushbutton switches and dip switches.
(See the Service Precautions plate for the locations of the pushbutton switches (BS1-5) and dip switches (D1-1, 2) on the PC
board (A2P).)
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Units
During the operation, monitor the outdoor unit operation status

and check for any incorrect wiring.
1. Close the outdoor units front panel. Caution Be sure to turn the power on at least
Turn the power on for the outdoor
6 hours before operation in order to have
unit and the BP unit.
power running to the crank case heater.
2. Open the outdoor units front panel.
Make sure the LED display on the outdoor units PC boards (A1P and
A2P) are as shown in the following chart.
A1P
LED display
(Default status
before delivery)
SEVICE
MONITOR
HAP
A2P
TEST/
MODE
HWL
H1P
H2P
IND MASTER SLAVE L.N.O.P DEMAND

H3P
H4P
H5P
H6P
H7P
LED display: OFF

ON
Blinking
To avoid the risk of electric shock, do not touch anything other than the
push-button switches on the PC board (A2P) when making settings.
3. When the customer requests
quiet operation or demand
operation, make these settings
using the push-button switches
(BS1-5) on the outdoor units
PC board (A2P).
Operate the push-button
switches through the opening
after protecting it with an
insulation cover.
(See the Service Precautions
plate for details.)
4. Check that the liquid and gas-side
shutoff valves are open, and if
they are closed, open them.
5. Press the test run button (BS4) for
at least five seconds and perform
check operation.
For details, see How to perform
check operation on the Service
Precautions plate.
Use caution to avoid electric shock while

working, since the outdoor unit is on.
Only set the push-button switches (BS1-5)
after making sure the microcomputer OK
monitor is lit up.
See the Service Precautions plate on the
front panel of the outdoor unit for details on
how to make the settings.
(Do not forget to write the settings down on
the Service Precautions plate.)
The dip switch (DS1-1) does not need to be
set, so do not touch it.
Doing so may cause malfunction.
Caution Do not leave any shutoff valve closed
otherwise the compressor will fail.
10-2 Temperature control operation checklist

After check operation is complete, checking the temperature control using normal operation.
(Heating is not possible if the outdoor temperature is 24C or
higher. See the included operation manual.)
(1) Make sure the indoor and outdoor units are operating normally.
(If liquid compression by the compressor or other abnormal
noises can be heard, stop the unit immediately, heat the
crank case for a sufficient amount of time, and try again.)
(2) Run each indoor unit one at a time and make sure the corresponding outdoor unit is also running.
(3) Check to see if cold (or hot) air is coming out of the indoor
unit.
(4) Press the fan direction and fan strength buttons on the indoor
unit to see if they operate properly.
<Precautions during temperature control checks>

For around 5 minutes after the compressor stops, the compressor
will not run even if the operate/stop button on the remote controller is pressed.
When the system operation is stopped by the remote controller,
the outdoor units may continue operating for further 1 minutes at
maximum.
Malfunction code U3 is displayed if check operation is not performed using the test run button the first time after installation.
Perform the check operation in accordance with 10-1 Power On
Check Operation.
If you have to leave the outdoor unit during check operation,

either switch with another worker or close the front panel.
The system operates for about 30 minutes (60 minutes at
maximum) and automatically stops the check operation.
The system can start normal operation about
3 minutes after the check operation if the
remote controller does not display any error code.
6. Close the outer panel of the outdoor unit after check operation is complete.
<Precautions During Check Operation>

If operation is performed within 12 minutes of BP units and
outdoor units being turned on, H2P will light up, and the
compressor will not run.
Only perform operation after checking that the LED display is as
shown in 10-1 Power OnCheck Operation 2. table.
In order to ensure uniform refrigerant distribution, it may take up to
around 10 minutes for the compressor to start up after the unit
begins running. This is not a malfunction.
Each indoor unit cannot be checked individually for problems.
After this operation is complete, run the unit normally using the
remote controller.
The check run cannot be performed in recovery or other modes.
If the outlet pipe thermistor (R2T), the intake pipe thermistor
(R3T), and the pressure sensors (S1NPH and S1NPL) are
removed before operation, the compressor might burn out, so
avoid this under all circumstances.
Installation Manual
91
Outdoor Units
EDSG18-936
[Indoor unit displays malfunction sign]

(Check on a remote controller connected to the indoor unit.
For details. see the operation manual which comes with indoor unit.)
11. CAUTION FOR REFRIGERANT LEAKS
Malfunction code
Introduction
Installation error
Remedial action
The shutoff valve of an outdoor Open the gas-side shutoff valve and the
unit is left closed.
liquid-side shutoff valve.
E3
Refrigerant overcharge.
Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping length and correct
the refrigerant charge level by recovering
any excessive refrigerant with a refrigerant recovery machine.
Check if the additional refrigerant charge
has been finished correctly.
E4
Insufficient refrigerant.
Refrigerant overcharge.
F3
(Points to note in connection with refrigerant leaks)

The installer and system specialist shall secure safety against
leakage according to local regulations or standards. The following standards may be applicable if local regulations are not
available.
This system uses R410A as refrigerant. R410A itself is an entirely
safe non-toxic, non-combustible refrigerant. Nevertheless care must
be taken to ensure that air conditioning facilities are installed in a
room which is sufficiently large. This assures that the maximum concentration level of refrigerant gas is not exceeded, in the unlikely
event of major leak in the system and this in accordance to the local
applicable regulations and standards.
Maximum concentration level
Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping length and add an
adequate amount of refrigerant.
The maximum charge of refrigerant and the calculation of the maximum concentration of refrigerant is directly related to the humanly
occupied space in to which it could leak.
Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping length and correct
the refrigerant charge level by recovering
any excessive refrigerant with a refrigerant recovery machine.
The unit of measurement of the concentration is kg/m ( the weight in

3
kg of the refrigerant gas in 1m volume of the occupied space).
Compliance to the local applicable regulations and standards for the

maximum allowable concentration level is required.
In Australia the maximum allowed concentration level of refrigerant to
3
a humanly space is limited to 0.44 kg/m for R410A.
Check if the additional refrigerant charge

has been finished correctly.
Insufficient refrigerant.
Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping length and add an
adequate amount of refrigerant.
U2
Insufficient supply voltage
Check to see if the supply voltage is supplied properly.
U3
If a check operation has not

been performed.
Perform a check operation.
U4
No power is supplied to an out- Turn the power on for the outdoor

unit.
door unit.
UA
If no dedicated indoor unit is

being used.
UF
UH
Check the indoor unit. If it is not a dedicated unit, replace the indoor unit.
Direction of the refrigerant flow
BP unit
Room where
refrigerant leak
has occurred
(outflow of all the
refrigerant from
the system)
Pay a special attention to the place, such as a basement, etc.
where refrigerant can stay, since refrigerant is heavier than air.
Procedure for checking maximum concentration
Check the maximum concentration level in accordance with steps 1

to 4 below and take whatever action is necessary to comply.
If the right indoor unit piping and Make sure that the right indoor unit piping
wiring are not properly conand wiring are properly connected to the
nected to the outdoor unit.
outdoor unit.
1. Calculate the amount of refrigerant (kg) charged to each system

separately.
If the interunit wiring has not

be connected or it has
shorted.
Make sure the interunit wiring is correctly

attached to terminals (X2M) F1/F2 (TO
BP UNIT) on the outdoor unit circuit
board.
When using a central controller, see the installation manual or

service manual which came with the central controller.
Caution
To the pipe-layer, To the electrician
After the test run, when handing the unit over to the customer,
make sure the front panel on the unit and all screws are attached.
amount of refrigerant in a single unit

system (amount of
refrigerant with
which the system
is charged before
leaving the factory)
additional charging
amount (amount of
refrigerant added
locally in accordance
with the length or
diameter of the refrigerant piping)
total amount
of refrigerant (kg) in
the system
Note
Where a single refrigerant facility is divided into 2 entirely independent refrigerant systems then use the amount of refrigerant
with which each separate system is charged.
3
2. Calculate the smallest room volume (m )
Incase like the following, calculate the volume of (A), (B) as a single room or as the smallest room.
A.Where there are no smaller room divisions
BP unit
92
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Units
B.Where
there is a room division but there is an opening

between the rooms sufficiently large to permit a free flow of
air back and forth.
BP unit
Opening
between rooms
Partition
(Where there is an opening without a door or where there are

openings above and below the door which are each equivalent in
size to 0.15% or more of the floor area.)
3. Calculating the refrigerant density using the results of the calculations in steps 1 and 2 above.
total volume of refrigerant in the
refrigerant system
3
size (m ) of smallest room in which

there is an indoor unit installed
maximum concen3
tration level (kg/m )
If the result of the above calculation exceeds the maximum concentration level then make similar calculations for the second then
third smallest room and so until the result falls short of the maximum concentration.
4. Dealing with the situations where the result exceeds the maximum concentration level.
Where the installation of a facility results in a concentration in
excess of the maximum concentration level then it will be necessary to revise the system.
Please consult your Daikin supplier.
C : 3PN07193-3E
Installation Manual
93
Outdoor Units
1.2
EDSG18-936
Service Precautions
Cautions on Service
Warning
Caution: Electric shock

Cool/heat selector
connection procedure
Cautions on inspecting the control box for service
1. Before starting the service inspection, confirm using the tester that the power
is shut down in the power terminal block (X1M).
2. Avoid contact with the hot area.
Some portions are extremely hot in electric parts and the inside.
3. Avoid contact with the charged area.
Never touch the charged area before confirming that the residual voltage is 50 V or less.
1 Shut down the power, and then leave the control box for 10 minutes.
2 Make sure to touch the earth terminal to release the static electricity from
your body (to prevent failure of the PC board).
3 Measure the residual voltage in the specified measurement position using
the tester while paying attention not to touch the charged area.
4 Immediately after measuring the residual voltage, disconnect the connectors of
the outdoor unit fan motor. (If the fan rotates by strong wind blowing against it,
the capacitor will be charged, causes the danger of electric shock.)
After finishing the inspection, re-connect the connectors of the outdoor unit fan motor.
ABC
switch knob
A1P
A2P C4
A4P
X2M
Control box
Front
Turn on
Cover this range with

an insulating sheet and
fix the sheet with tape.
Residual voltage
measurement
position
Symbol
on
side
Capacitor (C4)
Flicker
Page
Test
Error
ABC
Side
Side
A1P
Turn off
Curing range
ON/OFF
DS1-1
DS1 1 2
X1M
LED indicator status

Reactor
A4P
IN
A1P
X106A X107A
A2P
OUT
Outdoor unit
fan connectors
Set the remote controller only when

changing over the operation mode
between cooling and heating using the
remote controller installed in the outdoor.
Connect the cool/heat selector (optional
accessory) to the terminals (A, B and
C) on the outdoor PC board (A4P).
Set the cool/heat selector switch
DS1-1 from IN (inside) (which is
selected at the factory before
shipment) to OUT (outside) .
Turn on or off
Batch
(master)
C/H
SELECTOR
If you are unsure during setting,

press the MODE button (BS1).
Set mode 1 (H1P: Turn off) is
selected again.
(The LED indicator status shown at left

indicates the status at factory set.)
Changeover between
cooling and heating
Individual
Cool/heat
selector
Batch
(slave)
Low
noise Demand
DIP switches
(DS1-1 and DS1-2)
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
A2P
BS1
BS2
BS3
BS4
BS5
MODE
SET
RETURN
TEST
RESET
A4P
DS1
ON
OFF
1 2
X2M
Sets the address again when the wiring
is changed or an indoor unit is added.
Performs the test run.
Used at field set.
Changes the set mode.
A1P
HAP
X1M
Control box
Cover electric parts with an insulating sheet during inspection to prevent electric shock.
Changing the set mode The set mode can be changed as follows using the MODE button (BS1).
Page
Set mode 1
Press and hold the MODE button (BS1)

for 5 seconds or more.
Page
Turn on
Set mode 2
Press the MODE button (BS1) once.
H1P
H1P
While the LED indicator H1P is flickering ( ), set mode 1 is selected when the MODE button (BS1) is pressed once.
Caution
When performing low noise operation or demand operation using an external command or setting cooling or
heating using the cool/heat centralized remote controller, the outdoor unit external control adaptor (optional
accessory) is required. For the details, refer to the manual attached to the adaptor.
94
Turn off
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Units
Setting (cooling/heating selection) in set mode 1 (H1P: Turn off)

Setting procedure
Press the SET
button (BS2), and
select either LED
indicator status
shown at right.
Contents of cooling/heating selection

When cooling or heating is selected individually in each outdoor unit
system (at factory set)
LED indicator status and position

When cooling or heating is selected for all outdoor unit systems (master unit)
When cooling or heating is selected for all outdoor unit systems (slave unit)
Press the RETURN button (BS3) to determine the setting.

For the contents marked with , the outdoor unit external control adaptor (optional accessory) is required. For the details, refer to the
manual attached to the adaptor.
Setting in set mode 2 (H1P: Turn on)

The following contents A to G can be set.
Setting procedure
Press the SET button (BS2), and
select either LED indicator status
shown at right in accordance with the
contents of setting ( A to G ).
Contents of setting

A Refrigerant additional charging operation

B Refrigerant recovery/evacuation mode
C Automatic low noise setting at night
D External low noise level setting
E Demand level setting
F External low noise demand absence/presence setting
Press the RETURN button (BS3) to display the currently selected setting. (Refer to 3 .)
Contents of each setting
In the case of A or B ON/OFF
In the case of F
In the case of C OFF/mode 1 to mode 3
In the case of D or F Mode 1 to mode 3
Press the SET button (BS2) , and select
either LED indicator status shown at
right in accordance with the above case.
In C and D , noise is smallest in mode
3, and largest in mode 1.
In E , the power consumption is smallest
in mode 3, and largest in mode 1.
(For the details, refer to the Service Manual.)
A B
F
ON
OFF (at factory set)
OFF (at factory set)
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 1
D E
Mode 2 (at factory set)

Mode 3
Press the RETURN button (BS3) to determine the setting. (The LED indicator status changes from flicker to turn on.)
Press the RETURN button (BS3) again to start the operation in accordance with the setting.
For any setting other than the above cases, refer to the Service Manual.
Checking the set items The following contents can be set in set mode 1 .
Check item
Current operation status
LED indicator status example

Normal status
Error status

During preparation or check operation
Cooling/heating
When cooling or heating is selected individually in each outdoor unit

system (at factory set)
selection
When cooling or heating is selected for all outdoor unit systems (master unit)
When cooling or heating is selected for all outdoor unit systems (slave unit)
Low noise operation status
During normal operation (at factory set)
During low noise operation
Demand operation status
During normal operation (at factory set)
During demand operation
Installation Manual
95
Outdoor Units
Check operation procedure
EDSG18-936
After the power is turned ON, operation is disabled until the Preparation LED
indicator (H2P) is turned off (within 12 minutes).
Make sure to open the stop valve on the gas side and the stop valve on the liquid side.
After installation, make sure to perform the check operation.
If the check operation is not performed, the error code U3 is displayed and normal operation is disabled.
To protect the compressor, make sure to turn ON the power 6 hours before starting the operation.
Select set mode 1 (H1P: Turn off).
In the stopped status, press and hold the TEST button (BS4) for 5 seconds or more to start the check operation.
The LED indicator H2P flickers, and Test run and Under centralized control are displayed in the remote controller.
For homogenizing the refrigerant status, it may take about 10 minutes to start the compressor. Note that this does
not indicate failure.
The check operation is automatically performed in the cooling mode.
During the check operation, operation sounds caused by the passing refrigerant, actuating solenoid valves, etc.
may be larger.
The following items are automatically checked:
Wiring (to detect erroneous wiring)
Piping length (automatically judged)
Stop valve status (to detect forgetting to open valves)
For suspending the check operation, press the RETURN button (BS3). The check operation is continued for about
30 seconds, and then stopped.
( The check operation cannot be stopped from the remote controller during test run.)
Close the front panel.
The check operation is continued for about 30 minutes, and then automatically stopped. Check the result by the LED
indicator status in the outdoor unit.
(Refer to the table below.)
Caution
Abnormality cannot be checked individually in each indoor unit.
Finished
normally
Finished
abnormally
After finishing the check operation, check each indoor unit by performing the
normal operation using the remote controller.
The LED indicator status changes during the check operation, but it does not
indicate failure.
During the check operation, attach the front panel to prevent electric shock accidents.
Actions to be taken when the check operation is finished abnormally

1. Check the error code in the remote controller.
2. Correct the error.
(Refer to the Installation Manual, Operation Manual or Service Manual, or contact the dealer.)
3. After correcting the error, press the RETURN button (BS3) to reset the error code.
4. Perform the check operation again, and confirm that the cause of error is definitely corrected.
When the error code is not displayed in the remote controller, normal operation can be started about 5 minutes later.
96
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Units
The service mode cannot start until the LED indicator H2P is
turned off (within 12 minutes) after the power is turned ON.
(The internal evacuation is not required during initial installation. It is required during service.)
Service mode operation procedure
Internal evacuation procedure
In the stopped status, select set mode 2 , and set to ON the refrigerant recovery/evacuation mode B .
(Do not reset set mode 2 until evacuation is completed.)
Test run and Under centralized control are displayed in the remote controller, and all
operations are disabled.
Evacuate the unit using the vacuum pump.
Press the MODE button (BS1) to reset set mode 2 .
Refrigerant recovery procedure using the refrigerant recovery device

In the stopped status, select set mode 2 , and set to ON the refrigerant recovery/evacuation mode B .
All expansion valves are completely opened and some solenoid valves are turned ON in the indoor unit
and outdoor unit.
Test run and Under centralized control are displayed in the remote controller, and all
operations are disabled.
Recover the refrigerant using the refrigerant recovery device.
(Recover the refrigerant in conformance to the laws and regulations of the local site.)
Press the MODE button (BS1) to reset set mode 2 .
Caution Never turn OFF the power of the outdoor unit while the refrigerant is being recovered.
(If the power is turned OFF, the solenoid valves are closed, and the refrigerant cannot be
recovered from the outdoor unit.)
Refrigerant additional charging operation procedure

When the outdoor unit is stopped and the entire quantity of refrigerant cannot be charged from the stop valve on the liquid side, make sure
to charge the remaining quantity of refrigerant using this procedure. If the refrigerant quantity is insufficient, the unit may malfunction.
Turn ON the power of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Make sure to completely open the stop valve on the gas side and the stop valve on the liquid side.
Connect the refrigerant charge hose to the service port (for additionally charging the refrigerant).
Service port
In the stopped status, set to ON the refrigerant additional charging operation A in
for additionally
set mode 2 (H1P: Turn on).
charging the refrigerant
The operation is automatically started.
(The LED indicator H2P flickers, and Test run and Under centralized control are displayed in the remote controller.)
After charging the specified quantity of refrigerant, press the RETURN button (BS3) to stop the operation.
The operation is automatically stopped within 30 minutes.
If charging is not completed within 30 minutes, set and perform the refrigerant additional charging
operation A again.
If the refrigerant additional charging operation is stopped soon, the refrigerant may be overcharged.
Never charge extra refrigerant.
Disconnect the refrigerant charge hose.
1. Recording the contents of various setting

C Automatic low noise setting at night D External low noise setting E Demand level setting
When setting C to E in set mode 2 , circle to
OFF Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3
record the setting contents in the right table.
2. Recording the additionally charged refrigerant quantity (Make sure to record the contents of setting, because they are required in after-sales service.)
Calculate the required refrigerant quantity to be charged using the following procedure.
Liquid pipe length
Liquid pipe length
Additional charge quantity
Liquid pipe size 9.5 X 0.054
Liquid pipe size 6.4 X 0.022
kg
(m)
X 0.054
3. Recording the indoor unit model names and installation places

No.
1
2
3
4
5
(m)
6
X 0.022
9
Model
name
Installation
place
2PN07176-1C
Installation Manual
97
BP Units
EDSG18-936
2. BP Units
System Layout
For installation of the indoor and outdoor units, follow the instructions in the Installation manual for each unit.
BP unit model
FOR 3 rooms : BPMKS967A3B, BPMKS967B3B
FOR 2 rooms : BPMKS967A2B, BPMKS967B2B
Indoor unit side piping
Do not connect more than 9 indoor units together.

Choose the BP unit type (2 rooms or 3 rooms)
according to the installation pattern.
Earth leakage
breaker
BP Unit
Outdoor unit
side piping
Branch switch
overcurrent
breaker (fuse)
Power
BP Unit
REFNET joint
KHRQ22M20T or
KHRP26M22T
(Can be purchased
separately.)
BP Unit
OUTDOOR UNIT
INDOOR UNIT Max. 9 rooms

Power
voltage
Power
Earth leakage
breaker
Outdoor
unit
Total capacity
of Indoor units
Maximum quantity
of Indoor units
RMX(K)S112
RMX(K)S140
RMX(K)S160
55-145.5
70-182
80-208
6
8
9
The number of indoor

units which can be
connected varies
depending on the power
of the outdoor unit. See
the table left for details.
Note that the total indoor capacity per

BP unit is as shown in the table below.
Branch switch
overcurrent
breaker (fuse)
Power
voltage
Power supply line (3 wires)
BP unit
Maximum capacity
BPMKS967A2B
BPMKS967B2B
142
BPMKS967A3B
BPMKS967B3B
208
[Example]
For FTXS50BVMB, the
capacity of this indoor
unit is 50.
~ 50Hz 230V
*Outdoor unit and all BP units

require their own power supply.
Piping
Transmission line (2 wires)
Brazing connection
Power supply and transmission line (4 wires)
Flare connection
98
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
BP Units
Accessories
6 For indoor unit side piping (gas)
1 Installation Manual
(pipe joint)
1pc.
2 For outdoor unit side piping (gas)
BPMKS967A3B
BPMKS967B3B
(For 3 rooms)
: 3pcs.
BPMKS967A2B
BPMKS967B2B
(For 2 rooms)
: 2pcs.
7 Hanger metal
(pipe joint)
1pc.
3 For outdoor unit side piping (gas)
4pcs.
8 Screws
(pipe joint)
1pc.
4 For outdoor unit side piping (liquid)
8pcs.
9 Binding band
(pipe joint)
1pc.
2pcs.
1pc.
BPMKS967A3B
BPMKS967B3B
(For 3 rooms)
: 4sets
BPMKS967A2B
BPMKS967B2B
(For 2 rooms)
: 3sets
5 For Mindoor unit side piping (liquid)
10 Heat insulation (2pcs. is 1set)
(pipe joint)
Items to be prepared in the field
Connecting wires between BP unit and indoor unit (H05VV(*), 4 wires, 1.6mm or 2.0mm)
Connecting wires (H05VV(*), 3 wires, 1.6mm or 2.0mm)
Transmission wires (H05VV(*), 2 wires, 0.75mm to 1.25mm)
Installation parts (hanging bolts: 4 M10 or M8; nuts: 8; flat washers: 8)
Screws for wall-mounting: 6 M5
Heat insulation (joint) [Thermal conductivity: 0.041 - 0.052W/mK (0.035 - 0.045kcal/mhC) / thickness 13mm
(1/2 inch) or more / Heat resistance: 100C or higher]
(*) Only in protected pipes, use H07RN-F when protected pipes are not use.
Specifications for local wiring power cord and branch wiring are in compliance with IEC60245.
Precautions for Selecting the Location

The BP unit is for indoor use.
Install in a location such as above a ceiling or behind a wall in accordance with the following conditions:
That the unit is fully supported, and is in a location with little or no vibration.
That the refrigerant pipes for the indoor and outdoor units can be repaired with ease, and that the units are placed well within
the distance from each other allowed by the pipe length.
That there is nothing nearby that produces heat or steam (gas).
When installing, that there is enough room for servicing the unit.
Do not install in location that is hot or humid for long periods of time.
A location where the dry-bulb (DB) temperature around the BP unit reaches 60C or higher.
A well-ventilated area.
Do not install near bedrooms. The sound of refrigerant flowing through the piping may sometimes be audible.
For restrictions on installation, refer to P5~6. Installation.
Installation Manual
99
BP Units
EDSG18-936
Installation
Branch with refnet joint
Example of connection
(Connection of 8 units heat pump system)
1
indoor unit
b
BP
1
A
BP unit
H2
refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint)
e
BP
H3
H1
BP
g
1
j
4
BP
k
5
m
7
H4
h
3
Maximum
allowable
length
Allowable
height
Pipe length between outdoor and BP units 55m
Between outdoor
and BP units
Total piping length
Between BP and
indoor units
Total piping length
Between BP and
indoor unit
1 room length
Between outdoor
and indoor units
Difference in height between outdoor and indoor units (H1) 30m
Between outdoor
and BP units
Difference in height between outdoor and BP units (H2) 30m
Between BP and
BP units
Difference in height between BP unit and BP units (H3) 15m
Between indoor
and indoor units
Difference in height between indoor and indoor units (H4) 15m
Piping length between BP and indoor unit 15m

[Example] f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m 15m
Pipe length between outdoor and first refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) 5m
Piping length
[Example] a 5m
Allowable length after the branch

2 Branch kit are recommended to
set as possible as near the BP
units.
c, d, e are recommended to be
as possible as short.
Piping length between BP and indoor units:

RMX(K)S112 60m / RMX(K)S140 80m / RMX(K)S160 90m
[Example] RMXS140: f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m 80m
Minimum allowable length

1 Since the sound of refrigerant may
be transferred from the outdoor
unit to the indoor unit, make the
pipe length from the outdoor unit
to the first junction 5m or longer.
[Example] a+b+c+d+e 55m
Piping length from first refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) to indoor unit 40m
Piping length
[Example] unit 8: b+c+m 40m

[Example] unit 6: b+e+k 40m
[Example] unit 3: d+h
40m
Refrigerant branch kit selection

(refrigerant branch kits can only be used with R410A)
Refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) name: KHRQ22M20T or KHRP26M22T
Piping size selection
Piping size (Outer diameter minimum thickness)

symbol
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Between outdoor unit and

first refrigerant branch kit
19.1 1.0
9.5 0.8
Between first refrigerant branch

kit and the other branch kit
15.9 1.0
9.5 0.8
Between refrigerant branch

kit and BP unit
c, d, e
Table A
Total indoor capacity Q
Qc, Qd, Qe 5.0kw
Qc, Qd, Qe > 5.0kw
Gas pipe
12.7 0.8
15.9 1.0
See the table A
Liquid pipe
6.4 0.8
9.5 0.8
Qc, Qd, Qe is total connected indoor capacity

Subscript c, d, e indicates the above symbol
[Example]
indoor 4: 2.5kW
indoor 5: 3.5kW Qe = 11.0kW
indoor 6: 5.0kW
=> (Gas pipe) 15.9 1.0 / (Liquid pipe) 9.5 0.8
100
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
BP Units
Installation
This unit may be installed suspended from the ceiling or mounted on the wall.
This unit may only be installed, as shown in the diagram below. (The side should be facing upwards.)
However, it may be freely installed in any direction forward or back, and to the sides.
Be sure to leave a 650mm square opening for service and inspection as shown in the diagram below, for both ceilingsuspended installation and wall-mounted installation.
This unit does not require drain treatment.
This unit may be installed with sides or
facing forward (servicing direction).
The piping for the indoor unit may be freely led around in directions , , or .
The inclination of side must be within 5 degrees forward or back or to the sides.
For 2 rooms
Wall-mounted
Manufacturers label
4-Suspension bolt
(M8-M10)
254
(304)
25
Indoor unit side

piping

22-Brazing
(304)
Terminal (For A room)

Terminal (For B room)
Wiring clamp
95
322
Wiring clamp
Electric box
(Top surface)
Terminal (For transmission)
2-I.D. 15.9 CuT
I.D. 19.1 CuT
Room B
Room A
73.5
2-I.D. 6.4 CuT

Earth (M4)
178
INDOOR UNIT SIDE
Terminal
(For Power supply)
294
(650)
Earth (M4)
178
2-Brazing
197
I.D. 9.5 CuT
23
23
73.5
(180)
57
45
113 (25)
(product dimensions and attachment bolt pitch)
107
OUTDOOR UNIT SIDE
Standard accessories
(Installation and service space)

(Servicing space)
Min 390
Min 390
68
163
For indoor unit side (Gas)
165
90
(125)
30
155
85 (70)
O.D. 15.9
For outdoor unit side (Gas)

O.D.
110
Dimple
19.1
65
I.D. 9.5
I.D. 19.1
45
Cut line for

I.D. 15.9
Cut line for

I.D. 12.7

Min 300
(Servicing space)
Cut line for
110
(Servicing space)

Servicing is needed opening
of 650mm square for
service and maintenance.
O.D.
15.9
90
I.D.
12.7
For indoor unit side (Liquid)

Cut line for O.D. 6.4
150
For outdoor unit side (Liquid)
O.D.
9.5
100
I.D.
6.4
I.D. 9.5
Installation Manual
101
BP Units
EDSG18-936
For 3 rooms
Wall-mounted
Manufacturers label
4-Suspension bolt
(M8-M10)
254
(304)
25
Indoor unit side

piping

23-Brazing
(304)
Wiring clamp
95 57
95
3-I.D. 15.9 CuT
322
Terminal (For A room)
Terminal (For B room)
Terminal (For C room)
Terminal (For transmission)
Wiring clamp
Electric box
(Top surface)
I.D. 19.1 CuT
Room C
Room B
Room A
73.5
3-I.D. 6.4 CuT

Earth (M4)
178
INDOOR UNIT SIDE
Terminal
(For Power supply)
294
(650)
Earth (M4)
178
2-Brazing
197
I.D. 9.5 CuT
23
23
73.5
(180)
57
45
113 (25)
(product dimensions and attachment bolt pitch)
107
OUTDOOR UNIT SIDE
Standard accessories
(Installation and service space)

For indoor unit side (Gas)
I.D. 9.5
I.D. 19.1
45
Cut line for

I.D. 15.9
Cut line for

I.D. 12.7

Min 300
(Servicing space)
Cut line for
110
165
90
O.D. 15.9

O.D.
110
Dimple
19.1
65
(125)
68
163
258
30
Min 390
85 (70)
(Servicing space)
Min 460
155
(Servicing space)

Servicing is needed opening
of 650mm square for
service and maintenance.
O.D.
15.9
90
I.D.
12.7
For indoor unit side (Liquid)

Cut line for O.D. 6.4
150
For outdoor unit side (Liquid)
O.D.
9.5
100
I.D.
6.4
I.D. 9.5
102
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
BP Units
Installation of the Unit

1.
Replacing the printed circuit board

This unit has two different installation types:
(1) ceiling-suspended type and (2) wall-mounted type.
Choose the proper installation pattern according to the
location of installation.
The installation location for the printed circuit board can
be changed.
Procedure for changing the installation location of
the printed circuit board.
If the installation location of the printed circuit board
needs to be changed because of the installation
conditions, perform the following:
Printed circuit board
To opposite
side
Printed
circuit board
Indoor
unit side
pipe
As-shipped condition
After-location is changed
Caution
Before doing any wiring on site, replace the printed circuit board.
1) Remove the screws and pull off the electrical equipment
cover.
Screw (M412L)
2) Remove 4 screws shown in the figure on the below, remove

the printed circuit board.
Electrical equipment
cover
Remove 4 screws. (M48L)
4
4
4
P
4
3) Remove the binding band (A) which holds the wires.

Binding band
(A)
(B)
Press on the protrusion

and pull out.
4) Remove the printed circuit board, and reattach as shown in

the figure.
Top surface of the unit

Lift the tabs.
To opposite side
5) Reattach the binding band to position (B).

(A)
(B)
Binding band
Installation Manual
103
BP Units
EDSG18-936
6) Attach the printed circuit board and electrical equipment

cover to the other side and secure with the screws.

Electrical
equipment
cover
Top surface of the unit
Insert the
tabs fully.
2.
Ceiling-suspended type
Hanger metal 7
Procedure:
15~20
1) Fix the furnished hanger metal 7 with two screws 8 .

(4 locations in total)
2) Using an insert-hole-in-anchor, hang the hanging bolt.
3) Install a hexagon nut and a flat washer (field supply) to
the hanging bolt as shown in the figure in the below,
and lift the unit to hang on the hanger metal.
4) After checking with a level that the unit is level, tighten
the hexagon nut.
* The tilt of the unit should be within 5 in front/ back
and left/right.
Screws 8
Ceiling side
Hanging bolt (M10 or M8)

Six-sided nut (M10 or M8)
Flat washer
Nut
Flat washer
Hanger metal 7
Hanging bolt
3.
Wall-mounted type
BP unit
Screws 8
Hanger metal 7
Procedure:
1) Fix the furnished hanger metal 7 with two screws 8 .
(4 locations in total)
2) Create a gap with the wall and screw in the temporary
screws (M5, field supply), and hang the BP unit.
3) After checking with a level that the unit is level, fix the
unit with screws (M5, field supply).
* The tilt of the unit should be within 5 in front/ back
and left/right.
Screws 8
Hanger
metal 7
Screws (M5)
(field supply)
CAUTION
Be sure to install the unit with the top surface up.
Do not install near bedrooms. The sound of refrigerant
flowing through the piping may sometimes be audible.
Temporary screw (M5, field supply):

Screw in temporarily after
opening a slight gap with
the wall.
Temporary screws:
attach and then hang the
unit on them. (2 screws)
Screws (M5)
(field supply)
: screw for fixing. (4 places)
104
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
BP Units
Connection of Refrigerant Piping

See the indoor and outdoor units installation manual for details on the size of connection piping to the indoor and outdoor units.
1.
About brazing pipes on site
1) Before brazing, remove the heat insulation.

2) Remove the blue-colored tape, and throw it out.
3
Heat
insulation 10
3) Wrap the pipes to be brazed with sufficient wet cloths so that brazing
does not affect the unit.
4) After brazing, use wet cloths or spray mist to sufficiently cool off all
pipes.
5) When brazing, be careful that the flame of the torch does not come in
contact with the unit.
(Since the inside of the unit is made of plastic, it may become
deformed or melt, destroying its heat-insulation performance.)
Wet cloth
brazing
Wet cloth
2.
Insulation of pipes
1) Attach heat insulation to each pipe.

2) When attaching insulation to the pipes, use one-sided adhesive tape or
similar materials to thoroughly prevent air from entering the heat
insulation.
3) Eliminate any gaps in the heat insulation.
One-sided adhesive tape

(field supply)
Heat insulation
(field supply)
Heat insulation 10
3.
Unconnected pipes
1) For pipes not yet connected to a room, pinch the end of the pipe and
braze them.
2) When brazing this area too, wrap the pipes with sufficient wet cloths to
protect the unit.
3) After brazing this area too, cool the pipes sufficiently.
Wet cloth
brazing
Wet cloth
brazing
4) Attach heat insulation, and use one-sided adhesive tape to thoroughly

prevent air from entering the heat insulation.
5) Cover the ends of the pipes with sufficient heat insulation.
One-sided adhesive tape

(field supply)
Heat insulation
(field supply)
Installation Manual
105
BP Units
EDSG18-936
After brazing and system leakage check, connect a

heat insulation (field supply), and let it cure
completely following the procedure illustrated right.
Use the heat insulation with the following
specifications:
Thermal conductivity: 0.041-0.052W/mK (0.0350.045kcal/mhC) / thickness 13mm or more
Heat resistance = 100C or higher
To ensure that the weight of the local interunit piping
does not bear on directly on the BP unit, secure it
near the BP unit using the clasp (field supply).
Heat insulation
(field supply)
Heat insulation
(field supply)
Heat insulation 10
Clasp
(field supply)
Clasp
(field supply)
BP unit
Indoor unit side piping
Outdoor unit side piping
Place the heat insulation up against the BP unit to

prevent any gaps from forming between the two, and
wrap with masking tape as shown in the figure.
When connecting indoor units, make sure to connect

refrigerant pipes and connection wires to the appropriate connection ports
marked with matching alphabets (A, B and C).
Hanger metal 7
Room A
(Gas)
Room B
(Gas)
Room C
(Gas)
Room A
(Liquid)
Room B
(Liquid)
Room C
(Liquid)
View from the indoor unit
When changing the routing direction, use the pipe joints 2 and 6 (accessories).
Use pipe joints 3 , 4 and 5 to connect refrigerant pipes with different diameters.
Indoor unit side (Gas)
Outdoor unit side (Gas)
30
Brazing
125
I.D 9.5
(125)
When straight.
Piping
Pipe joint 3 (field supply)
Piping
(field supply)
Brazing
I.D 12.7
Cut line for

I.D 15.9
110
Pipe joint 6
Brazing
Piping
(field supply)
Pipe joint 2
I.D 9.5
Cut line for
I.D 12.7
Pipe joint 6
Cut line for straight
(70)
85
Cut line for I.D 12.7
Piping
(field supply)
When the direction is changed.

Brazing
I.D 15.9
Brazing
Connection for 15.9 piping.
I.D 12.7
When straight.
45
Indoor unit side (Liquid)

Pipe joint 5
Piping
(field supply)
Pipe joint 2
Brazing
I.D 9.5
Piping
(field supply)
Cut line for

I.D 15.9
Piping
(field supply)
I.D 19.1
Pipe joint 3
Connecting 9.5
interunit piping
(65)
Brazing
45
Cut line
for O.D 6.4
Outdoor unit side (Liquid)
I.D 12.7
Brazing
Cut line for
I.D 15.9
Connection for 19.1 and 15.9 piping.
When the direction is changed.
Pipe joint 4
Piping
(field supply)
Brazing
I.D 6.4
Connecting 6.4
interunit piping
NOTE
When changing the direction of the piping to
something other than the above, bend the
piping on site.
10
106
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
BP Units
Connecting the Wiring

Connection example of total system wiring
Indoor unit
The following kind of wiring methods is okay for the power line.
Pattern 1
Indoor unit
BP unit
Power
Indoor unit
Earth leakage
breaker
N2
L2 BP unit
N1
3
L1
Pattern 2
Power
voltage
N2
L2 BP unit
N1
3
L1
Power
voltage
N2
L2 BP unit
N1
2
L1
Power
voltage
N2
L2 BP unit
N1
1
L1
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Branch switch
overcurrent
breaker (fuse)
N2
L2 BP unit
N1
2
L1
BP unit
Indoor unit
Power
voltage
Indoor unit
16V
BP unit
Indoor unit
Power
Ground Earth leakage
breaker
Indoor unit
Power
voltage
N2
L2 BP unit
N1
1
L1
Crossover wiring is possible

for the power line.
Branch switch
overcurrent
breaker (fuse)
Power
voltage
It is also possible to supply

power from the BP units
themselves.
CAUTION
Be sure to connect the power
line to L1 and N1.
For crossover wiring, take the
line from L2 and N2 and
connect it to L1 and N1 on the
other BP unit.
Ground
Work procedure
Electrical equipment
cover
1) Remove the screws and pull off the electrical equipment cover.
Screw (M412L)
2) Tape is attached to the wire binding band. The purpose of the tape is to prevent small animals from entering the unit.
Only remove the tape from places where wiring it to be passed through.
CAUTION
If the tape is not replaced for

places where wiring will not pass
through, small animals may enter,
causing product malfunction.
4
4
The tape to
prevent the entry
of small animals
The tape to
prevent
the entry of
small animals
Wire clamp
The tape to prevent the entry of small animals

(tape is attached when unit is shipped to
prevent animals from entering the unit)
Wire clamp
11
Installation Manual
107
BP Units
EDSG18-936
3) Follow the instructions on the wiring nameplate to connect the connection wires of indoor/outdoor units to terminal block
numbers. (1, 2, 3, F1 and F2) Always fix each ground wire separately with a ground screw. (See the figure below.)
NOTE: The terminal block numbers are arranged from top to bottom in order of 1, 2 and 3.
Peel the outer coating leaving
10mm from the wire clamp.
10mm
Example
For 3 rooms
Binding band 9
Secure the wires with binding band 9 to
prevent them from coming out if pulled
on from the outside.
Wire
clamp
Transmission wire (To other BP unit: F1, F2)
F2
F1
N2
L2
N1
L1
1
2 Room C
3
Ground
*Fix each wire

separately.
1
2 Room B
3
Transmission wire (To other BP unit: F1, F2 or to

outdoor unit: F1, F2)
H05VV(*), 2 wires
0.75mm2 to 1.25mm2
Wire clamp
For other BP unit (To L1, N1)
CAUTION
4
Connection wire for
indoor units.
H05VV(*), 4 wires
1.6mm or 2.0mm
1
2 Room A
3
Warning
Do not use tapped
wires,stand wires,
extensioncords, or
starbust connections,
as they may cause
overtheating, electrical
shock, or fire.
Mistakenly connecting the power

supply to this terminal block could
cause control operating malfunctions.
Power supply wire

for indoor units.
H05VV(*), 3 wires
1.6mm or 2.0mm
Safety breaker Earth leakage

16A or 15A
circuit breaker
When wire length exceed

10m, use 2.0mm wires.
Power supply
~50Hz
230V
(*) Only in protected pipes, use H07RN-F when protected pipes are not use.
Specifications for local wiring power cord and branch wiring are in compliance with IEC60245.
CAUTION
All local interunit wiring must be secured using the wire
binding band over the insulation, as shown in the figure.
Insulation
When connecting the connection wires to the terminal

block using a single core wire, be sure to perform curling.
Problems with the work may cause heat and fires.
Wire binding band
4) Allow 300mm for the pulling-out section of harness.

+300mm
of slack
+300mm
of slack
5) Return the electrical equipment cover to its original position, and fix it with the
screws.
Screw
(M412L)
Install the electrical
equipment cover.
12
108
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
BP Units
Operating Test
Follow the Operating test as described in the installation manual of the outdoor unit.
If the BP unit does not operate normally during the test run, the error can be checked on the remote controller display for the indoor
unit.
Error codes displayed on the remote controller

Malfunction code
Nonconformity during installation
A9
Electric expansion valve connector not

connected (BP unit)
Remedial action
E2
Printed circuit board faulty

(BP unit)
J0
Liquid and gas thermistor faulty

(BP unit)
U4
Transmission error between BP unit

and indoor unit
Connect correctly the interconnections between BP unit and

indoor unit.
U9
Transmission error between outdoor

unit and other BP unit
Connect correctly the interconnections between outdoor and

other BP unit.
UJ
Transmission error between outdoor

unit and this BP unit connecting with the
indoor unit of error code displayed
Connect correctly the interconnections between outdoor and

this BP unit connecting with the indoor unit of error code
displayed.
Please contact your dealer.
The BP Unit
Simple diagnosis can be done using the LEDs on the BP units circuit board.
For details, see the label on the inside of the BP units electrical equipment cover.
13
3P155380-1E
Installation Manual
109
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
3. Indoor Units
3.1
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
Read these Safety Precautions carefully to ensure correct installation.
This manual classifies the precautions into WARNING and CAUTION.
Be sure to follow all the precautions below: they are all important for ensuring safety.
WARNING
Failure to follow any of WARNING is likely to result in such grave consequences as death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Failure to follow any of CAUTION may result in grave consequences in some cases.
The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual:

Be sure to observe this instruction.
Be sure to establish an earth connection.
Never attempt.
After completing installation, test the unit to check for installation errors. Give the user adequate instructions
concerning the use and cleaning of the unit according to the Operation Manual.
WARNING
Installation should be left to the dealer or another professional. Improper installation may cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
Install the air conditioner according to the instructions given in this manual. Incomplete installation may cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
Be sure to use the supplied or specified installation parts. Use of other parts may cause the unit to come to lose, water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
Install the air conditioner on a solid base that can support the weight of the unit. An inadequate base or incomplete installation may cause injury in the event the unit falls off the base.
Electrical work should be carried out in accordance with the installation manual and the national electrical wiring
rules or code of practice. Insufficient capacity or incomplete electrical work may cause electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to use a dedicated power circuit. Never use a power supply shared by another appliance.
For wiring, use a cable length enough to cover the entire distance with no connection. Do not use an extension cord.
Do not put other loads on the power supply, use a dedicated power circuit. (Failure to do so may cause abnormal heat, electric shock or fire.)
The power supply wire class for the receptacle for the outdoor unit must be polychlorinated vinyl insulation or higher. (IEC60057: No. 245 wire)
Use the specified types of wires for electrical connections between the indoor and outdoor units. When installing
wiring for the outdoor unit, after cutting the wires for each connection point, a length of 3mm or longer is required.
Firmly clamp the interconnecting wires so their terminals receive no external stresses. Incomplete connections or clamping may cause terminal overheating or fire.
After connecting interconnecting and supply wiring be sure to shape the cables so that they do not put undue force on the electrical covers or panels.
Install covers over the wires. Incomplete cover installation may cause terminal overheating, electrical shock, or fire. When electrical appliances are connected in Y formation,
if the power supply is damaged in some way, to avoid danger the power supply must be replaced by the maker or by someone with an equivalent certification.
When installing or relocating the system, be sure to keep the refrigerant circuit free from substances other than the specified
refrigerant (R410A), such as air. (Any presence of air or other foreign substance in the refrigerant circuit causes an abnormal pressure rise or rupture, resulting in injury.)
The installation height from the floor must be over 1.8m.
If any refrigerant has leaked out during the installation work, ventilate the room.
(The refrigerant produces a toxic gas if exposed to flames.)
After all installation is complete, check to make sure that no refrigerant is leaking out.
(The refrigerant produces a toxic gas if exposed to flames.)
During pump-down, stop the compressor before removing the refrigerant piping. If the compressor is still running and the shut-off valve is open during
pump-down, air will be sucked in when the refrigerant piping is removed, causing abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.
During installation, attach the refrigerant piping securely before running the compressor. If the compressor is not attached and the shut-off valve
is open during pump-down, air will be sucked in when the compressor is run, causing abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.
Be sure to establish an earth. Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, arrester, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock, or fire. A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker. Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks, or fire.
CAUTION
Do not install the air conditioner in a place where there is danger of exposure to inflammable gas leakage.
If the gas leaks and builds up around the unit, it may catch fire.
Establish drain piping according to the instructions of this manual. Inadequate piping may cause flooding.
Note for installing the outdoor unit. (For heat pump model only.) In cold area where the outside air temperature keep below or around freezing-point for a few days, the outdoor
units drain may freeze. If so, it is recommended to install an electric heater in order to protect drain from freezing. It is recommended that you contact the after-sales service organization.
Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method such as with a torque wrench.
If the flare nut is tightened too hard, the flare nut may crack after a long time and cause refrigerant leakage.
110
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
3.2
Indoor Units
Wall Mounted Type FTKS25/35D
Accessories
A Mounting plate
B
Mounting platefixing screws

M4 25L
D Wireless remote controller
E Remote controller holder
J Insulation tape
Fixing screws for remote

F
controller holder M3 20L
K Operation manual
G AAA dry-cell batteries
L Installation manual
C Titanium Apatite
Photocatalytic
Indoor unit fixing screws

M4 12L
3
Choosing an Installation Site
Before choosing the installation site, obtain user approval.
1.
Indoor unit.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
The indoor unit should be sited in a place where:

the restrictions on installation specified in the indoor unit installation drawings are met,
both air intake and exhaust have clear paths met,
the unit is not in the path of direct sunlight,
the unit is away from the source of heat or steam,
there is no source of machine oil vapour (this may shorten indoor unit life),
cool (warm) air is circulated throughout the room,
the unit is away from electronic ignition type fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start type) as they may shorten the
remote control range,
8) the unit is at least 1 metre away from any television or radio set (unit may cause interference with the picture or sound).
9) install at the recommended height (1.8m).
2.
Wireless remote controller.

1) Turn on all the fluorescent lamps in the room, if any, and find the site where remote control signals are properly
received by the indoor unit (within 7 metres).
Installation Tips
<When there is no work space because the unit is close to ceiling>
1. Removing and installing front panel.
Removal method
Caution
Hook fingers on the panel protrusions on the left and right of the main body,
and open until the panel stops. Slide the front panel sideways to disengage
the rotating shaft. Then pull the front
panel toward you to remove it.
1) Push up.
Be sure to wear protection gloves.
Place both hands under the center of the front

grille, and while pushing up, pull it toward you.
2) Pull toward you.
Installation method
1) Install the front grille and firmly engage the upper hooks (3 locations).
2) Install 2screws of the front grille.
3) Install the air filter and then mount the front panel.
Installation method
Push the
rotating shaft
of the front
panel into the
groove.
3. How to set the different

addresses.
2. Removing and installing front grille.
Removal method
1) Remove front panel to remove the air filter.
2) Remove the front grille.
mark of the front grille,
3) In front of the
there are 3 upper hooks. Lightly pull the
front grille toward you with one hand, and
push down on the hooks with the fingers of
your other hand.
mark area
(3 locations)
Upper hook
Lightly pull the front

grille toward you with
one hand, and push
down on the hooks with
the fingers of your other
hand. (3 locations)
Push
down.
Upper hook
Upper hook
ADDRESS
When two indoor units are

installed in one room, the
two wireless remote
controllers can be set for
different addresses.
1) In the same way as when
connecting to an HA
system, remove the metal
plate electrical wiring
cover.
2) Cut the address jumper
(JA) on the pindted circuit
board.
(J4) in the remote control.
JA
Align the tabs of the front panel with the

grooves, and push all the way in. Then close
slowly. Push the center of the lower surface
of the panel firmly to engage the tabs.
JA ADDRESS
EXIST
CUT
1
2
J4
J4 ADDRESS
EXIST
CUT
Installation Manual
1
2
111
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Indoor Unit Installation Drawings

How to attach the indoor unit.
Hook the claws of the bottom frame
to the mounting plate.
If the claws are difficult to hook,
remove the front grille.
How to remove the indoor unit.
Push up the marked area (at the
lower part of the front grille) to
release the claws. If it is difficult to Front grille
release, remove the front grille.
A Mounting plate
A Mounting
plate
Clip
Bottom frame
Mark (rear side)
The mounting plate

should be installed on a
wall which can support the
weight of the indoor unit.
B Mounting platefixing
screws M4 25L (6)
Caulk
pipe hole
gap
with putty.
30 mm or more from ceiling
Cut thermal insulation

pipe to an appropriate
length and wrap it with
tape, making sure that no
gap is left in the insulation
pipes cut line.
Front panel
50 mm or more from walls

(on both sides)
Wrap the insulation pipe with

the finishing tape from bottom
to top.
Intelligent-eye sensor
Air filters
C Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic

Air-Purifying Filter (2)
Titanium Apatite
Photocatalytic
Service lid
Opening service lid
Service lid is opening/closing type.
Opening method
1) Remove the service lid screws.
2) Pull out the service lid diagonally
down in the direction of the arrow.
3) Pull down.
Air filter
Filter frame
Tab
D Wireless
remote controller
F Fixing screws for

remote controller
holder M3 20L (2)
Before screwing the remote

controller holder to the wall,
make sure that control
signals are properly
received by indoor unit.
E
Remote
controller holder
Intelligent-eye Sensor
Caution
1) Do not hit or violently push the intelligent-eye sensor. This can lead to damage and malfunction.
2) Do not place large objects near the sensor. Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the
sensors detection area.
112
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
Indoor Unit Installation

1.
Installing the mounting plate.

The mounting plate should be installed on a wall which can support the weight of the indoor unit.
1) Temporarily secure the mounting plate to the wall, make sure that the panel is completely level, and mark
the boring points on the wall.
2) Secure the mounting plate to the wall with screws.
Recommended mounting-plate retention spots and dimensions
3
450
Recommended
mounting - plate
retention spots
(6 spots in all)
100
400
(Bolt size : M10)
135
110
65
60
65
130
220
60
44.5
Use tape
measure
as shown.
Position the
end of a tape
measure at .
131.5
44.5 87
283
47.5
46.5
(Bolt size : M10)
50.5
80
141.5
b Place a leveler
on raised tab.
110
50
800
Drain hose
position
Throughthe-wall
hole 65mm
Liquid pipe end Keep here the piece cut out

from the unit for piping
Gas pipe end
* The removed pipe port cover can be

kept in the mounting plate pocket.
Removed pipe
port cover
A Mounting plate
2.
Boring a wall hole and installing wall embedded pipe.

For walls containing metal frame or metal board, be sure to use a wall
embedded pipe and wall cover in the feed-through hole to prevent
possible heat, electrical shock, or fire.
Be sure to caulk the gaps around the pipes with caulking material to
prevent water leakage.
1) Bore a feed-through hole of 65 mm in the wall so it has a down slope
toward the outside.
2) Insert a wall pipe into the hole.
3) Insert a wall cover into wall pipe.
4) After completing refrigerant piping, wiring, and drain piping, caulk pipe
hole gap with putty.
Installation Manual
Inside
Wall embedded pipe
(field supply)
Outside
Caulking
65
Wall hole cover

(field supply)
Wall embedded pipe
(field supply)
113
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936

3.
Installing indoor unit.

3-1. Right-side, right-back, or right-bottom piping.
1) Attach the drain hose to the
underside of the refrigerant pipes
with an adhesive vinyl tape.
2) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and
Remove pipe port cover
drain hose together with an
here for right-side piping. Right-bottom
piping
insulation tape.
here for right-bottom piping.
3) Pass the drain hose and

refrigerant pipes through the wall
hole, then set the indoor unit on
the mounting plate hooks by
using the markings at the top of
the indoor unit as a guide.
Right-back piping
Bind coolant pipe
and drain hose
together with
insulating tape.
A Mounting plate
4) Open the front panel, then

Hang indoor units hook here.
open the service lid. (Refer to
Installation tips)
5) Pass the interconnecting
A Mounting plate
wires from the outdoor unit
When stripping the
ends of interconnecting
in advance, bind
Interconnecting
through the feed-through wall wires
right ends of wires with
wires
insulating tape.
hole and then through the
Wire guide
back of the indoor unit. Pull
them through the front side.
Bend the ends of tie wires upward for easier work in advance.
(If the interconnecting wire ends are to be stripped first, bundle
wire ends with adhesive tape.)
6) Press the bottom frame of the indoor unit with both hands to
set it on the mounting plate hooks. Make sure that the wires do
not catch on the edge of the indoor unit.
3-2. Left-side, left-back, or left bottom piping.

underside of the refrigerant
pipes with adhesive vinyl
tape.
Remove pipe
port cover
here for leftside piping.
Remove pipe port cover here for left-bottom piping.
Left-side
piping
Left-back
piping
Left-bottom piping
2) Be sure to connect the drain

hose to the drain port in place
of a drain plug.
114
How to set drain plug

ap
No g
Do not apply lubricating

oil (refrigerant machine
oil) when inserting.
Application of causes
deterioration and drain
leakage of the plug.
Insert a hexagon wrench (4 mm)
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

3) Shape the refrigerant pipe along the pipe path marking on the
mounting plate.
4) Pass drain hose and refrigerant pipes through the wall hole,
then set the indoor unit on mounting plate hooks, using the
markings at the top of indoor unit as a guide.
Drain
hose
A Mounting plate
Caulk this hole

with putty or
caulking material.
Bind with plastic

tape.
Wrap insulating tape around the bent portion

of refrigerant pipe.
Overlap at least half the width of the tape
with each turn.
5) Pull in the interconnecting wires.

6) Connect the inter-unit piping.
7) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and drain hose together with insulation
tape as right figure, in case of setting the drain hose through the back
of the indoor unit.
8) While exercising care so that the
A
Mounting
Drain hose
plate
interconnecting wires do not catch
indoor unit, press the bottom edge of
Refrigerant
pipes
indoor unit with both hands until it is
firmly caught by the mounting plate
Bottom frame
hooks. Secure indoor unit to the
H M4 12L (2 point)
mounting plate with the screws (M4 12L).
3-3. Wall embedded piping.
Follow the instructions given under
Insert drain hose
to this depth so
it wont be pulled
out of drain pipe.
Left-side, left-back, or left bottom piping

1) Insert the drain hose to this
depth so it wont be pulled out
of the drain pipe.
4.
Inner wall
50 mm
or more
Outer wall
Drain hose
Vinyl chloride
drain pipe
(VP-30)
Wiring.
With a Multi indoor unit , install as described in the installation
manual supplied with the Multi outdoor unit.
1) Strip wire ends (15 mm).
Terminal block
Electrical component box
2) Match wire colours with
Shape wires so
terminal numbers on indoor
that the service
lid will fit securely.
and outdoor units terminal
blocks and firmly screw wires
Firmly secure wire retainer
so that wires sustain no
to the corresponding terminals.
Use the
external stress.
specified
3) Connect the earth wires to the
Wire retainer
wire type.
corresponding terminals.
4) Pull wires to make sure that they are securely latched up, then retain wires with wire retainer.
5) In case of connecting to an adapter system. Run the remote control
cable and attach the S21. (Refer to 5. When connecting to an HA
Firmly fix the wires with
system.)
the terminal screws.
Outdoor unit
6) Shape the wires so
When wire length exceeds
that the service lid
10 m, use 2.0-mm wires.
fits securely, then
Power
Safety
Indoor
close service lid.
Earth leakage
breaker
supply
unit
1 23
LN
1
2
3
15A

H05VV
circuit breaker
50Hz 220V - 240V

60Hz 220V - 230V
Earth
Warning
1) Do not use tapped wires, stand wires, extensioncords, or starbust
connections, as they may cause overtheating, electrical shock,or fire.
2) Do not use locally purchased electrical parts inside the product. (Do not branch the power
for the drain pump, etc., from the terminal block.) Doing so may cause electric shock or fire.
Installation Manual
115
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936

5.
When connecting to an HA system.

1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the front grille. (2 screws)

Remove the electrical wiring box. (1 screw)
Remove the metal plate electrical wiring cover. (3 tabs)
Attach the connection cord to the S21 connector and pull the
harness out through the notched part in the figure.
5) Replace the electrical wiring cover as it was, and pull the harness
around, as shown in the figure.
Tab
Notched part
Push
Slide
HA cord
HA connector
(S21)
Slide
3) Remove the metal
plate electrical
wiring cover.
6.
Screw
Pull
Tab
4) Attach the connection cord to

the S21 connector and pull the
harness out through the
notched part in the figure.
5) Replace the electrical

wiring cover as it was,
and pull the harness
around, as shown
in the figure.
Drain piping.
The drain hose should
be inclined downward.
1) Connect the drain hose, as described

right.
No trap is permitted.
Do not put the end
of the hose in water.
3) When drain hose requires extension,

obtain an extension hose commercially
available.
Be sure to thermally insulate the indoor
section of the extension hose.
Indoor unit
drain hose
18
2) Remove the air filters and pour some

water into the drain pan to check the water
flows smoothly.
Extension drain hose
Heat insulation tube

(Field supply)
18
4) When connecting a rigid polyvinyl chloride pipe (nominal diameter

13 mm) directly to the drain hose attached to the indoor unit as with
embedded piping work, use any commercially available drain
socket (nominal diameter 13 mm) as a joint.
Drain hose supplied with

the indoor unit
116
Commercially available drain

socket
(nominal diameter 13 mm)
Commercially available rigid

polyvinyl chloride pipe
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
Refrigerant Piping Work

With a Multi indoor unit
1.
, install as described in the installation manual supplied with the Multi outdoor unit.
Flaring the pipe end.

1) Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter.
2) Remove burrs with the cut surface facing downward
so that the chips do not enter the pipe.
3) Put the flare nut on the pipe.
4) Flare the pipe.
5) Check that the flaring is properly made.
(Cut exactly at
right angles.)
Remove burrs
Flaring
Set exactly at the position shown below.
A
Die
Flare tool for R410A
Conventional flare tool
Clutch-type
Clutch-type (Rigid-type) Wing-nut type (Imperial-type)
0 ~ 0.5 mm
1.0 ~ 1.5 mm
1.5 ~ 2.0 mm
Check
Flares inner
surface must
be flaw-free.
The pipe end must

be evenly flared in
a perfect circle.
Make sure that the
flare nut is fitted.
Warning
1) Do not use mineral oil on flared part.
2) Prevent mineral oil from getting into the system as this would reduce the lifetime of the units.
3) Never use piping which has been used for previous installations. Only use parts which are delivered with the unit.
4) Do never install a drier to this R410A unit in order to guarantee its lifetime.
5) The drying material may dissolve and damage the system.
6) Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
2.
Refrigerant piping.
CAUTION
1) Use the flare nut fixed to the main unit. (To prevent cracking of the flare nut by aged deterioration.)
2) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration oil only to the inner surface of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil for R410A.)
3) Use torque wrenches when tightening the flare nuts to prevent damage to the flare nuts and gas leakage.
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with the torque wrenches.
[Apply oil]
Do not apply refrigeration
oil to the outer surface.
[Tighten]
Apply refrigeration oil to the
inner surface of the flare.
Torque wrench
Flare nut tightening torque

Gas side
Liquid side
3/8 inch
1/4 inch
32.7-39.9N m
14.2-17.2N m
(333-407kgf cm)
(144-175kgf cm)
Flare nut
Spanner
Piping union
Do not apply refrigeration oil to the flare

nut avoid tightening with over torque.
Flare nut
2-1. Caution on piping handling.

1) Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture.
2) All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe
bender for bending.
Rain
If no flare cap is
available, cover
the flare mouth
with tape to keep
dirt or water out.
2-2. Selection of copper and heat insulation materials.

When using commercial copper pipes and fittings, observe the following:
1) Insulation material: Polyethylene foam
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052 W/mK (0.035 to 0.045 kcal/(mh C))
Refrigerant gas pipes surface temperature reaches 110C max.
Choose heat insulation materials that will withstand this temperature.
2) Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide
insulation dimensions as below.
Gas side
Liquid side
20/25/35 class
Gas pipe thermal insulation

20/25/35 class
O.D. 6.4mm
O.D. 9.5mm
Minimum bend radius
Wall
Be sure to
place a cap.
Gas pipe
Inter-unit wiring
Gas pipe
insulation
Liquid pipe
Liquid pipe
insulation
Finishing tape
Drain hose
Liquid pipe
thermal insulation
I.D. 12-15mm
I.D. 8-10mm
Thickness 10mm Min.
30mm or more
Thickness 0.8mm (C1220T-O)
3) Use separate thermal insulation pipes for gas and liquid refrigerant pipes.
Installation Manual
117
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Trial Operation and Testing

1.
Trial operation and testing.

1-1 Measure the supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range.
1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating mode.
For Heat pump
In cooling mode, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating mode, select the highest
programmable temperature.
1) Trial operation may be disabled in either mode depending on the room temperature.
Use the remote control for trial operation as described below.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C in cooling mode, 20C
to 24C in heating mode).
3) For protection, the system disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.
For Cooling only

Select the lowest programmable temperature.
1) Trial operation in cooling mode may be disabled depending on the room temperature.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C).
1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the operation manual to ensure that all functions and
parts, such as louver movement, are working properly.
The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is not to be used for
some time after installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate unnecessary power consumption.
If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the original
operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.
Trial operation from remote controller.

1) Press ON/OFF button to turn on the system.
2) Simultaneously press centre of TEMP button and MODE button.
3) Press MODE button twice.
( will appear on the display to indicate that Trial Operation mode is selected.)
4) Trial run mode terminates in approx. 30 minutes and switches into normal mode. To quit a trial
operation, press ON/OFF button.
2.
Test items.
Test items
Symptom
(diagnostic display on RC)
Indoor and outdoor units are installed properly on

solid bases.
Fall, vibration, noise
No refrigerant gas leaks.
Incomplete cooling/heating function
Refrigerant gas and liquid pipes and indoor drain

hose extension are thermally insulated.
Water leakage
Draining line is properly installed.
Water leakage
System is properly earthed.
Electrical leakage
The specified wires are used for interconnecting

wire connections.
Inoperative or burn damage
Indoor or outdoor units air intake or exhaust has

clear path of air. Shut-off valves are opened.
Indoor unit properly receives remote controller

commands.
Inoperative
Check
3P142640-4L
118
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
3.3
Indoor Units
Wall Mounted Type FTKS50/60/71F
Accessories
A Mounting plate

M4 12L
Mounting plate fixing

B
screws M4 25L
Insulation tape
K Operation manual
C Titanium Apatite
Photocatalytic

3
Choosing an Installation Site
1.
Indoor unit.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
2.

cool air is circulated throughout the room,
the unit is away from electronic ignition type fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start type) as they may shorten the remote controller range,
the unit is at least 1 metre away from any television or radio set (unit may cause interference with the picture or sound),
install at the recommended height (1.8m).

1) Turn on all the fluorescent lamps in the room, if any, and find the site where remote controller signals are
properly received by the indoor unit (within 7 metres).
Installation Tips
1. Removing and installing front panel.
Removal method
Hook fingers on the panel protrusions on the left and right
of the main body, and open until the panel stops. Slide
the front panel sideways to disengage
the rotating shaft. Then pull
the front panel toward you
to remove it.
CAUTION
1) Push up.

2) Pull toward you.
Installation method
2) Install 3 screws of the front grille.
Installation method
Push the
rotating shaft
of the front
panel into the
groove.
2. Removing and installing front grille.
Removal method
1)Remove front panel to remove
the air filter.
3) In front of the
mark of
the front grille, there are 3
upper hooks. Lightly pull the
front grille toward you with one
hand, and push down on the
hooks with the fingers of your
other hand.
Installation Manual
Upper hook
Lightly pull the front grille

toward you with one
hand, and push down on
the hooks with the fingers
of your other hand.
(3 locations)
mark area
(3 locations)
Push
down.
Upper hook
Upper hook

two wireless remote
connecting to an HA
cover.
(JA) on the prindted
circuit board.
(J4) in the remote
controller.
Address

addresses.
JA
Align the tabs of the front panel with

the grooves, and push all the way in.
Then close slowly. Push the center of
the lower surface of the panel firmly to
engage the tabs.
JA Address
EXIST
CUT
1
2
J4
J4 ADDRESS
EXIST
CUT
1
2
119
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936

How to attach the indoor unit.
Hook the claws of the bottom frame
to the mounting plate.
If the claws are difficult to hook,
remove the front grille.
A Mounting plate
How to remove the indoor unit.

Push up the marked area (at the
lower part of the front grille) to
Front grille
release the claws. If it is difficult to
release, remove the front grille.
A Mounting
plate
Clip
Bottom frame
Mark (rear side)
The mounting plate

B Mounting plate fixing

screws M4 25L (9)
Caulk
pipe hole
gap
with putty.
30mm or more from ceiling

pipes cut line.
Front panel
to top.
50mm or more from walls

(on both sides)
Air filters
M4 16L
C Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic

Air-Purifying Filter (2)
Service lid
Opening service lid
Opening method
2) Pull out the service lid diagonally
down in the direction of the arrow.
3) Pull down.
Tabs (upper 3 locations)

M4 16L
Tabs (lower 3 locations)

Insert the upper side of the C Titanium
Apatite Photocatalytic Air-purifying filter into
the tabs (upper 3 locations),push the lower
side of the filters up a little and into the tabs
(lower 3 locations).
D Wireless
remote controller
F Fixing screws for

remote controller
holder M3 20L (2)

controller holder to the wall,
E
Remote
controller holder
Intelligent-eye Sensor
CAUTION
1) Do not hit or violently push the intelligent-eye sensor. This can lead to damage and malfunction.
120
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
Indoor Unit Installation (1)

1.

1) Temporarily secure the mounting plate to the wall, make sure that the panel is completely level, and
mark the boring points on the wall.
Recommended mounting plate retention spots and dimensions
Recommended mounting plate retention

spots (9 spots in all)
Place a leveler on raised tab.
(Bolt size : M10)
(Bolt size : M10)
100
55
125
90
290
Use tape
measure
as shown.
Position the
end of a tape
measure at .
80
52
52
80
60
83
413.5
44.5
100
99.5
1050
Gas pipe end
Liquid pipe end
Through-the-wall
Drain hose position hole 80mm

(length: mm)
Removed pipe
port cover
A Mounting plate
2.

For walls containing metal frame or metal board, be sure to use a wall
embedded pipe and wall cover in the feed-through hole to prevent
possible heat, electrical shock, or fire.
Be sure to caulk the gaps around the pipes with caulking material to
prevent water leakage.
1) Bore a feed-through hole of 80mm in the wall so it has a down slope
toward the outside.
4) After completing refrigerant piping, wiring, and drain piping, caulk pipe
hole gap with putty.
Installation Manual
Inside
Wall embedded pipe
(Field supply)
Wall hole cover

(Field supply)
Outside
Caulking
80
Wall embedded pipe
(Field supply)
121
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936

3.

3-1. Right-side, right-back, or right-bottom piping.
1) Attach the drain hose to the underside of the refrigerant pipes
with an adhesive vinyl tape.
2) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and drain hose together with an
insulation tape.

here for right-side piping.
Right-back piping
Right-bottom
piping

here for right-bottom piping.
A Mounting plate
3) Pass the drain hose and refrigerant pipes through the wall
hole, then set the indoor unit on the mounting plate hooks by
using the markings at the top of the indoor unit as a guide.
4) Open the front panel, then open the service lid. (Refer to
Installation Tips.)
5) Pass the inter-unit wiring from the outdoor unit through the
feed-through wall hole and then through the back of the indoor
unit. Pull them through the front side.
Bend the ends of tie wires upward for easier work in advance.
(If the inter-unit wiring ends are to be stripped first, bundle wire
ends with adhesive tape.)
6) Press the bottom frame of the indoor unit with both hands to
set it on the mounting plate hooks. Make sure that the wires do
not catch on the edge of the indoor unit.
Bind coolant pipe

and drain hose
together with
insulating tape.
When stripping the

ends of inter-unit wiring
in advance, bind right
ends of wires with
insulating tape.
Inter-unit wiring
3-2. Left-side, left-back, or left-bottom piping.

1) Attach the drain hose to the underside of the refrigerant pipes
with adhesive vinyl tape.
Remove pipe port

cover here for
left-side piping.
Left-side
piping
Remove pipe port cover here for left-bottom piping.

Left-bottom piping
2) Be sure to connect the drain hose to the drain port in place of

a drain plug.
3) Shape the refrigerant pipe along the pipe path

marking on the mounting plate.
4) Pass drain hose and refrigerant pipes through
the wall hole, then set the indoor unit on
Drain
hose
mounting plate hooks, using the markings at
Caulk this hole
the top of indoor unit as a guide.
with putty or
caulking material.
5) Pull in the inter-unit wiring.
7) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and drain hose together with
insulation tape as right figure, in case of setting the drain hose
through the back of the indoor unit.
8) While exercising care so that the inter-unit wiring do not catch
indoor unit, press the bottom edge of indoor unit with both hands
until it is firmly caught by the mounting plate hooks. Secure
indoor unit to the mounting plate with the screws (M4 12L).
3-3. Wall embedded piping.
Left-side, left-back, or left-bottom piping .
1) Insert the drain hose to this depth so it wont be pulled out of
the drain pipe.
122
Mounting plate
Left-back
piping

ap
No g

oil (refrigerant oil) when
inserting.
leakage of the plug.
Insert a hexagon wrench (4mm)
A Mounting plate
Bind with plastic

tape.
Wrap insulating tape around the

bent portion of refrigerant pipe.
Overlap at least half the width
of the tape with each turn.
Drain hose
Mounting
plate
Refrigerant
pipes
Bottom frame
H M4 12L (2 point)
Insert drain hose to this

depth so it wont be
pulled out of drain pipe.
Inner wall
50mm
or more
Drain hose
Outer wall
Vinyl chloride
drain pipe
(VP-30)
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

4.
Wiring.
With a Multi indoor unit , install as described in the installation
manual supplied with the Multi outdoor unit.
1) Strip wire ends (15mm).
2) Match wire colours with terminal numbers on indoor and
outdoor units terminal blocks and firmly screw wires to the
3) Connect the earth wires to the corresponding terminals.
4) Pull wires to make sure that they are securely latched up,
then retain wires with wire retainer.
5) In case of connecting to an adapter system. Run the remote
controller cable and attach the S21. (Refer to 5. When
connecting to an HA system.)
6) Shape the wires so that the service lid fits securely, then close
service lid.
Terminal block
Shape wires so
that the service
Use the
specified
wire type.

external stress.

Outdoor unit
1 23

10m, use 2.0mm diameter wires.
Indoor
unit
Wire retainer
LN
1
2
3

H05VV
WARNING
1) Do not use tapped wires, stranded wires, extensioncords, or starburst connections, as they may cause
overtheating, electrical shock,or fire.
2) Do not use locally purchased electrical parts inside the product. (Do not branch the power for the drain pump, etc.,
from the terminal block.) Doing so may cause electric shock or fire.
5.

Tab
Push
(3 screws)
Notched part
Tab
Push
2) Remove the electrical
wiring box. (1 screw)
Slide
3) Remove the metal plate
HA connector
Main body
(S21)
electrical wiring cover.
(4 tabs)
Metal plate
4) Attach the connection
electrical cover
Screw
Push
cord to the S21 connector 3) Remove the metal
plate electrical
Tab
wiring cover.
and pull the harness out
through the notched part
in the figure.
around, as shown in the figure.

around, as shown
in the figure.
Drain piping.
1) Connect the drain hose, as described below.
3) When drain hose requires extension, obtain

an extension hose commercially available.
Indoor unit
drain hose
18
6.
HA cord
Do not put the end

(Field supply)
4) When connecting a rigid polyvinyl chloride pipe

(nominal diameter 13mm) directly to the drain
hose attached to the indoor unit as with embedded
piping work, use any commercially available drain
socket (nominal diameter 13mm) as a joint.
18
2) Remove the air filters and pour some water

into the drain pan to check the water flows
smoothly.

the indoor unit
Installation Manual

socket
(nominal diameter 13mm)

(nominal diameter 13mm)
123
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Refrigerant Piping Work

, install as described in the installation manual supplied with the Multi outdoor unit.
With a Multi indoor unit
1.

2) Remove burrs with the cut surface facing
downward so that the chips do not enter the
pipe.
4) Flare the pipe.
(Cut exactly at
right angles.)
Remove burrs
Flaring
A
Die
Clutch-type
0-0.5mm
1.0-1.5mm
1.5-2.0mm
Check
Flares inner
surface must
be flaw-free.
The pipe end must

be evenly flared in
a perfect circle.
Make sure that the
WARNING
1) Do not use mineral oil on flared part.
2) Prevent mineral oil from getting into the system as this would reduce the lifetime of the units.
3) Never use piping which has been used for previous installations. Only use parts which are delivered with the unit.
4) Do never install a drier to this R410A unit in order to guarantee its lifetime.
5) The drying material may dissolve and damage the system.
6) Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
2.
Refrigerant piping.
CAUTION
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with the torque wrenches.
[Apply oil]
[Tighten]
Apply refrigeration
oil to the inner
surface of the flare.

Torque wrench
Gas side
Spanner
Liquid side
1/2 inch
5/8 inch
1/4 inch
49.5-60.3N m
61.8-75.4N m
14.2-17.2N m
Flare nut
(505-615kgf cm) (630-770kgf cm) (144-175kgf cm)

oil to the flare nut avoid
tightening with over torque.
Piping union
Flare nut
Wall
2-1. Caution on piping handling.
Be sure to
place a cap.
If no flare cap is
2) All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe Rain
available, cover
the flare mouth
bender for bending.
with tape to keep
dirt or water out.
2-2. Selection of copper and heat insulation materials.
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045kcal/(mh C))
2) Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide insulation dimensions as below.
Gas side
50/60 class
71 class
O.D. 12.7mm O.D. 15.9mm
Liquid side
50/60/71 classs
O.D. 6.4mm
Minimum bend radius

40mm or more 50mm or more
30mm or more
Thickness 0.8mm Thickness 1.0mm

(C1220T-O)
(C1220T-O)
Thickness 0.8mm
(C1220T-O)

50/60 class
71 class
I.D. 14-16mm I.D. 16-20mm
Liquid pipe thermal insulation

50/60/71 class
Liquid pipe
I.D. 8-10mm
Thickness 10mm Min.
124
Inter-unit wiring
Gas pipe
Gas pipe
insulation
Liquid pipe
insulation
Finishing tape
Drain hose
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

1.
Trial operation and testing.

1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling mode.
Use the remote controller for trial operation as described below.
1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the operation manual to ensure that all functions and
If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the original
operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.
Trial operation from remote controller.

2) Simultaneously press centre of TEMP button and MODE button.
2.
Test items.
Test items
Symptom

solid bases.

Water leakage
Water leakage
Electrical leakage
The specified wires are used for inter-unit wiring

connections.

clear path of air. Stop valves are opened.
Indoor unit properly receives remote controller

commands.
Inoperative
Check
3P192027-1D
Installation Manual
125
Indoor Units
3.4
EDSG18-936
Wall Mounted Type FTKS50B
Accessories
1
J Insulation tape
50 class
K Operation manual
60, 71 class
A Mounting plate
B Mounting plate
fixing screws
M4 25L
C Air purifying filter with
photocatalytic deodorizing
function


H
M4 12L
Choosing a Site
1.
Indoor unit.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

cool air is circulated throughout the room,
the unit is away from electronic ignition type fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start type) as they may shorten the
remote control range,
8) the unit is at least 1 metre away from any television or radio set (unit may cause interference with the picture or sound).
2.

1) Turn on all the fluorescent lamps in the room, if any, and find the site where remote control signals are properly
received by the indoor unit (within 7 metres).
Installation Tips
1. Removing packaging material
Removal method
Lightly lift.
Removal method

2) Install 2screws(50class)or 3screws(60, 71class)of the front grill.

addresses
Push the
rotating shaft
of the front
panel into the
groove.
mark area
(3 locations)
Upper hook
Removal method
1) Remove front panel to remove the air filter.
2) Remove the front grille. (50 class 2 screws, 6071
class 3 screws)
Lightly pull the front
3) In front of the
mark of the front
grille toward you with
grille, there are 3 upper hooks. Lightly pull
one hand, and push
down on the hooks with
the front grille toward you with one hand,
the fingers of your other
hand. (3 locations)
and push down on the hooks with the
fingers of your other hand.
Push
down.
Upper hook
Upper hook

two wireless remote
connecting to an HA
cover.
(JA).
(J4).
Address
Installation method
JA Address
EXIST
CUT
1
2
J4
J4 Address
EXIST
CUT
126
2) Pull toward you.
Installation method
Hook fingers on the panel protrusions on the left and right of the main body,
and open until the panel stops. Slide the front panel sideways to disengage
the rotating shaft. Then pull the front
panel toward you to remove it.
3. Removing and installing front grille
1) Push up.

Lift the panel
slightly and pull
out.
2. Removing and installing front panel
Align the tabs of the front panel with the

grooves, and push all the way in. Then close
slowly. Push the center of the lower surface
of the panel firmly to engage the tabs.
Caution
JA
Grasp the packaging material which

is in the center of the front panel, with
one hand, and lightly pull the front
panel up and toward you.
Packaging material
1
2
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

A Mounting plate
M4 25L
The mounting plate

The figure shows a 50 class unit.

(See Indoor Unit Installation 1. Installing the mounting
plate for details regarding 60 and 71 class units.)
Caulk
pipe hole
gap
with putty.
30 mm or more from ceiling
Front grille

pipes cut line.

to top.
50 mm or more from walls

(on both sides)
Air filters
Only for 60 and

71 class units.
C Air purifying filter with photocatalytic

deodorizing function
50 class
Service lid
Opening service lid
Opening method
2) Lift the service lid upward.

60, 71 class
D Wireless
remote controller

Insert the upper side of the C Air purifying filter
with photocatalytic deodorizing function into the tabs
(upper 3 locations),push the lower side of the filters
up a little and into the tabs (lower 2 locations) (lower
3 locations).
F
(M3 X 20L)

control holder to the wall,
E
Remote
controller holder
Caution
1) Do not hit or violently push the Intelligent-eye sensor. This can lead to damage and malfunction.
Installation Manual
127
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936

1.

1) Temporarily secure the mounting plate to the wall, make sure that the panel is completely level, and mark
the boring points on the wall.
Recommended mounting-plate retention spots and Dimensions
60, 71 class
Recommended mounting - plate retention
spots (9 spots in all)
b Place a leveler on raised tab.
(Bolt size : M10)
(Bolt size : M10)
100
90
290
125
Use tape
measure
as shown.
Position the
end of tape
measure at
80
52
52
80
60
83
413.5
44.5
100
99.5
1050
Through-the-wall
Keep here the piece cut out

from the unit for piping
Gas pipe end

Liquid pipe end
Leveling mounting plate

b Place a leveler
on raised tab.
(Bolt size : M10)
125
(Bolt size : M10)
100
90
Recommended
mounting - plate
retention spots
(6 spots in all)
290
55
50 class
a Dangle a weighted thread and align thread with vertical arrow.
80
Use tape
measure
as shown.
Position the
end of tape
measure at
52
52
80
60
75
100
248.5
98
44.5
795
Through-the-wall

Gas pipe end

Liquid pipe end
Removed pipe
port cover
A Mounting plate
128
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

2.

For walls containing metal frame or metal board, be sure to use a
wall embedded pipe and wall cover in the feed-through hole to
prevent possible heat, electrical shock, or fire.
Be sure to caulk the gaps around the
Outside
pipes with caulking material to prevent Wall embedded pipeInside
(field supply)
Caulking
water leakage.
1) Bore a feed-through hole of 80 mm in
80
the wall so it has a down slope toward
Wall hole cover
(field supply)
the outside.
Wall embedded pipe
(field supply)
4) After completing refrigerant piping, wiring, and drain piping, caulk
pipe hole gap with putty.
3.

3-1. Right-Side, Right-Back, or Right-Bottom Piping
underside of the refrigerant pipes
with adhesive vinyl tape.
2) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and Remove pipe port cover
here for right-side piping
Right-bottom
drain hose together with
piping
insulation tape.
here for right-bottom piping
Right-back piping
Bind coolant pipe
and drain hose
together with
insulating tape.
A Mounting plate
3) Pass the drain hose and

refrigerant pipes through the wall
hole, then set the indoor unit on
the mounting plate hooks by
using the markings at the top of
the indoor unit as a guide.
4) Open the front grille, then

open the service lid. (Refer to
Installation tips)
A Mounting plate
5) Pass the interconnecting
When stripping the
wires from the outdoor unit
ends of interconnecting
in advance, bind
Interconnecting
through the feed-through wall wires
right ends of wires with
wires
insulating tape.
hole and then through the
Wire guide
back of the indoor unit. Pull
them through the front side.
Bend the ends of tie wires upward in advance for easier work.
(If the interconnecting wire ends are to be stripped first, bundle
wire ends with adhesive tape.)
6) Press the indoor units bottom panel with both hands to set it
on the mounting plate hooks. Make sure the wires do not catch
on the edge of the indoor unit.
3-2. Left-Side, Left-Back, or Left Bottom Piping
underside of the refrigerant
pipes with adhesive vinyl
tape.
Remove pipe
port cover
here for leftside piping
Remove pipe port cover here for left-bottom piping
Left-side
piping
Left-back
piping
Left-bottom piping
2) Be sure to connect the drain

hose to the drain port in place
of a drain plug.
Installation Manual

ap
No g

oil (refrigerant machine
oil) when inserting
leakage of the plug
Insert a hexagon wrench (4 mm)
129
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936

3) Shape the refrigerant pipe along the pipe path marking on the
mounting plate.
4) Pass drain hose and refrigerant pipes through the wall hole,
then set the indoor unit on mounting plate hooks, using the
markings at the top of indoor unit as a guide.
Drain
hose
A Mounting plate
Caulk this hole

with putty or
caulking material.
Bind with plastic

tape.
Wrap insulating tape around the bent portion

of refrigerant pipe.
Overlap at least half the width of the tape
with each turn.
5) Pull in the interconnecting wires.

7) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and drain hose together with insulation
tape as right figure, in case of setting the drain hose through the back
of the indoor unit.
8) While exercising care so that the
A
Mounting
Drain hose
plate
interconnecting wires do not catch
indoor unit, press the bottom edge of
Refrigerant
pipes
indoor unit with both hands until it is
firmly caught by the mounting plate
Bottom frame
hooks. Secure indoor unit to the
H M4 12L (2 point)
mounting plate with screws (M4 12L).
3-3. Wall Embedded Piping
Left-Side, Left-Back, or Left Bottom Piping
1) Insert the drain hose to this
depth so it wont be pulled out
of the drain pipe.
4.
Insert drain hose

to this depth so
it wont be pulled
out of drain pipe.
50 mm
or more
Outer wall
Inner wall
Drain hose
Vinyl chloride
drain pipe
(VP-30)
Wiring.
1) Strip wire ends (15 mm).
Terminal block
2) Match wire colours with terminal
numbers on indoor and outdoor units
Wire retainer
terminal blocks and firmly screw wires
external stress.
to the corresponding terminals.
Shape wires so that the service
3) Connect the earth wires to the
Use the specified wire type.
4) Pull wires to make sure that they are securely latched up, then
retain wires with wire retainer.
5) In case of connecting to an adapter system. Run the remote control
cable and attach the S21 connector as the illustration above.
6) Shape the wires so that the service lid fits securely, then close
service lid.
Outdoor unit
10 m, use 2.0-mm wires.
Indoor
unit
1 23
LN
1
2
3
Safety
breaker
20A
H05VV
Earth leakage
circuit breaker
Power
supply
50Hz 220V - 240V
60Hz 220V - 230V
Earth
Warning
Do not use tapped wires, stand wires, extensioncords, or starbust connections,
as they may cause overtheating, electrical shock,or fire.
130
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

5.

1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the front grille. (50 class 2 screws, 6071 class 3 screws)
Remove the electrical wiring box. (1 screw)
Remove the metal plate electrical wiring cover. (4 tabs)
Attach the connection cord to the S21 connector and pull the
harness out through the notched part in the figure.
around, as shown in the figure
HA cord
Tab
Push
Notched part
Tab
Push
Slide
Main body
HA connector
(S21)
Metal plate
electrical cover
Screw
3) Remove the metal
plate electrical
wiring cover.
6.
Push
Tab


around, as shown
in the figure.
Drain piping.
1) Connect the drain hose, as described

below.
Do not put the end
3) When drain hose requires extension,

obtain an extension hose commercially
available.
Indoor unit
drain hose
18
2) Remove the air filters and pour some

water into the drain pan to check the water
flows smoothly.

(Field supply)
18
4) When connecting a rigid polyvinyl chloride pipe (nominal diameter

13 mm) directly to the drain hose attached to the indoor unit as with
embedded piping work, use any commercially available drain
socket (nominal diameter 13 mm) as a joint.

the indoor unit
Installation Manual

socket

131
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Refrigerant piping work

1.
Check
1) Cut the pipe end with pipe cutterer.

2) Remove burrs with the cut surface facing
downward so that the chips do not enter the pipe.
4) Flare the pipe.
(Cut exactly at
right angles.)
Flares inner
surface must
be flaw-free.
Remove burrs
The pipe end must

be evenly flared in
a perfect circle.
Make sure that the
Flaring
A
Die
Clutch-type
0 ~ 0.5 mm
1.0 ~ 1.5 mm
1.5 ~ 2.0 mm
Warning
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
2.
Do not use mineral oil on flared part.

Prevent mineral oil from getting into the system as this would reduce the lifetime of the units.
Never use piping which has been used for previous installations. Only use parts which are delivered with the unit.
Do never install a drier to this R410A unit in order to guarantee its lifetime.
The drying material may dissolve and damage the system.
Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
Refrigerant piping.
Caution
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with
the torque wrenches.
[Apply oil]
[Tighten]
Apply refrigeration oil to the
inner surface of the flare.
Torque wrench
Gas side
1/2 inch
Flare nut
Liquid side
1/4 inch
5/8 inch
14.2-17.2N m
49.5-60.3N m
61.8-75.4N m
(505-615kgf cm) (630-770kgf cm) (144-175kgf cm)
Spanner
Piping union
Do not apply refrigeration oil to the flare

nut avoid tightening with over torque.
Flare nut
2-1. Caution on Piping Handling

Rain
2) All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe
bender for bending.
2-2. Selection of Copper and Heat Insulation materials
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045
kcal/mhC)
Refrigerant gas pipes surface temperature reaches 110 C max.
2) Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide
insulation dimensions as below.
Liquid side
Gas side
Wall
Be sure to
place a cap.
If no flare cap is
available, cover
the flare mouth
with tape to keep
dirt or water out.
Inter-unit wiring
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Gas pipe
insulation
Liquid pipe
insulation
Finishing tape
Drain hose
Liquid pipe thermal insulation
50/60 class
71 class
50/60/71 class
50/60 class
71 class
50/60/71 class
O.D. 12.7mm
O.D. 15.9mm
O.D. 6.4mm
I.D. 14-16mm
I.D. 16-20mm
I.D. 8-10mm
Minimum bend radius

40mm or more
50mm or more
Thickness 0.8mm Thickness 1.0mm

(C1220T-O)
(C1220T-O)
Thickness 10mm Min.
30mm or more
Thickness 0.8mm
(C1220T-O)
132
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

1.
Trial Operation and Testing.

1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating mode.
For Heat pump
In cooling mode, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating mode, select the highest
programmable temperature.
1) Trial operation may be disabled in either mode depending on the room temperature.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C in cooling mode, 20C
to 24C in heating mode).
For Cooling only

1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the Operation Manual to ensure that all functions and
If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the
original operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.
2.
Trial Operation from Remote Controller.

2) Simultaneously press centor of TEMP button and MODE button.
3.
Test Items.
Test Items
Symptom

solid bases.

Water leakage
Water leakage
Electrical leakage
The specified wires are used for interconnecting

wire connections.

clear path of air. Shut-off valves are opened.
Indoor unit properly receives remote control

commands.
Inoperative
Check
3P098801-18R
Installation Manual
133
Indoor Units
3.5
EDSG18-936
Duct Connected Type FDKS25/35CA
ACCESSORIES
Clamp metal
1 pc.
Insulation
for fitting
Washer for
Drain hose hanging bracket
Sealing pad
Large and small
3 pcs.
1 each
(only for 50-60 type)
1 each
1 pc.
1 pc.
Sealing
material
Clamp
2 pcs.
6 pcs.
8 pcs.
Screws for
Washer
fixing plate duct flanges
1 set
1 set
2 large
for gas pipe
Large
for liquid pipe
Small
Air fillter
1 pc.
Hanger (right)
1 small insulation
4 pcs.
Stored in outlet vent
Wireless
Remote controller
AAA
remote controller
holder
dry-cell batteries
1 pc.
1 pc.
1 set
24 pcs.
Receiver kit
1 pc.
1 pc.
Mounting frame
Decorative
cover
2 pcs.
Screws
M4 25
[ Other ]
Operation
manual
Installation
manual
2 pcs.
CHOOSING A SITE
Caution
When moving the unit during or after unpacking, make sure to lift it by holding its lifting lugs. Do not exert any pressure on
other parts, especially the refrigerant piping, drain piping and flange parts.
Wear protective gears (gloves and so on) when installing the unit.
If you think the humidity inside the ceiling might exceed 30C and RH80%, reinforce the insulation on the unit body.
Use glass wool or polyethylene foam as insulation so that the thickness is more than 10mm and fits inside the ceiling opening.
Optimum air distribution is ensured.

The air passage is not blocked.
Condensate can drain properly.
The ceiling is strong enough to bear the weight of the indoor unit.
A false ceiling does not seem to be at an incline.
Sufficient clearance for maintenance and servicing is ensured.
Piping between the indoor and outdoor units is within the allowable limits.
(Refer to the installation manual for the outdoor unit.)
T he indoor unit, outdoor unit, power supply wiring and transmission wiring is at least 1
meter away from televisions and radios. This prevents image interference and noise in
electrical appliances. (Noise may be generated depending on the conditions under
which the electric wave is generated, even if a one-meter allowance is maintained.)
Use suspension bolts to install the unit. Check whether or not the ceiling is
strong enough to support the weight of the unit. If there is a risk that the
ceiling is not strong enough, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is marked on the carton box for installation. Refer to it to check
for points requiring reinforcing.) Select the *H dimension such that a downward
slope of at least 1/100 is ensured as indicated in DRAIN PIPING WORK.
The installation pitch is listed on the packing material, and should be
checked when deciding whether to reinforce the location or not.
134
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
CHOOSING A SITE
Select the signal receiver mounting location according to the following conditions:
Install the signal receiver, which has a built-in temperature sensor, near the intake vent
where there is convection of air and it can get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature.
If the intake vent is in another room or the unit cannot be installed near the intake vent for any
other reason, install it 1.5m above the floor on a wall where there is convection.
In order to get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature, install the
signal receiver in a location where it is not exposed directly to cold or hot air
from the air discharge grille or to direct sunlight.
Since the receiver has a built-in light receptor to receive signals from the wireless remote
controller, do not mount it in a location where the signal may be blocked by a curtain, etc.
Caution
If the signal receiver is not installed in a location where there is convection of air, it may be unable to get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature.
Turn on all the fluorescent lamps in the room, if any, and find the site where remote controller signals are properly received
by the indoor unit (within 4 metres).
For outdoor unit installation, see the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.
PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION

Relation of the unit to the suspension bolt positions.
620
500
Control box
Open the installation hole. (Pre-set ceilings)

Once the installation hole is opened in the ceiling where the unit
is to be installed, pass refrigerant piping, drain piping,
transmission wiring, and remote controller wiring (unneeded if
using a wireless remote controller) to the units piping and
wiring holes.See REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK, DRAIN
PIPING WORK, and WIRING.
After opening the ceiling hole, make sure ceiling is level if
needed. It might be necessary to reinforce the ceiling frame to
prevent shaking.Consult an architect or carpenter for details.
Air inlet
<SERVICE SPACE>
620
(See the technical documentation for the range of the external

static pressure setting.)
Air discharge
Ceiling
Make sure the range of the units external static

pressure is not exceeded.
(length : mm)
Suspension
bolt pitch
(Suspension bolt pitch )
Install the inspection opening on the control box side where

maintenance and inspection of the control box are easy. Install the
inspection opening also in the lower part of the unit.
450450
(Inspection
opening size)
Model
25 35 50 type
60 type
(length: mm)
A
B
900
940
1100
1140
Allow view
Inspection door
(Ceiling opening)
Install the suspension bolts.

(Use W3/8 to M10 suspension bolts.)
Use a hole-in-anchor, sunken insert, sunken anchor for existing
ceilings, and a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other part to be
procured in the field to reinforce the ceiling to bearing the weight
of the unit. (Refer to Fig.)
Mount chamber lid and air filter

(accessory).
For bottom intake, replace the chamber lid
in the procedure listed in Fig.
(1)Remove the chamber lid. (7 locations)
(2)Reattached the removed chamber lid in
the orientation shown in Fig. (7 locations)
Installation Manual
135
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
(3)Attach sealing pad as shown in the figure below. (Stored in outlet vent)
(In order to take in the air inside the ceiling, and when not taking in air from outdoor air, it is not necessary to stick.)
Attach the sealing pad (accessory) to
the plate metal sections which are not
covered by anti-sweat material.
Make sure there are no gaps between
the different pieces of sealing pad.
(4)Attach the hanger (right) insulation to the right hanger. (Stored in outlet vent)
(See the below figure for the sticking base line.)
(5)Attach the air filter (accessory) in the manner shown in the diagram.
When two indoor units are installed in one room, one of the two wireless remote controllers can be easily
set for another addresses.
136
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION

As for the parts to be used for installation work, be sure to use the provided accessories and specified parts
designated by our company.
Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix
it securely by using a nut and washer from the upper and lower
sides of the hanger bracket. (Refer to Fig.)
[ PRECAUTION ]
Since the unit uses a plastic drain pan, prevent welding spatter
and other foreign substances from entering the outlet hole
during installation.
Adjust the height of the unit.

Check the unit is horizontally level.
Caution
Make sure the unit is installed level using a level or a plastic tube filled with water. In using a plastic tube instead of a level, adjust
the top surface of the unit to the surface of the water at both ends of the plastic tube and adjust the unit horizontally. (One thing to
watch out for in particular is if it is installed so that the slope is not in the direction of the drain piping, as this might cause leaking.)
Tighten the upper nut.

Mounting the receiver.
Mount the receiver as shown below.
1 Press the receiver into the

mounting frame.
2 Mount the completed

assembly using two screws.
3 Press the decorative cover into

the mounting frame.
Note) Mount the Remote controller cord far enough away from strong electrical wires (such as distribution wires for
electrical lights, air conditioners, etc.) and from weak electrical wires (such as wires for telephones, intercoms, etc.).
OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION

Install as described in the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.
Installation Manual
137
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK

See the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.
1.
FLARING THE PIPE END

4) Flare the pipe.
Warning
2.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
1) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration machine oil on both
inner and outer surfaces of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil for
R410A)
2) Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4
turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with the torque wrenches.
Use torque wrenches when tightening the flare nuts to prevent
damage to the flare nuts and escaping gas.

Gas side
3/8 inch
1/2 inch
32.7~39.9Nm
49.5~60.3Nm
(333~407kgfcm)
(505~615kgfcm)
Liquid side
1/4 inch
14.2~17.2Nm
(144~175kgfcm)
Caution
Overtightening may damage the flare and cause leaks.
138
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

3) After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no
gas leak.
4) After checking for gas leaks, be sure to insulate the pipe connections.
Insulate using the insulation for fitting included with the liquid and gas pipes. Besides, make sure the insulation for fitting
on the liquid and gas piping has its seams facing up.
(Tighten both edges with clamp.)
For the gas piping, wrap the medium sealing pad over the insulation for fitting (flare nut part).
Caution
Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit. Any exposed piping may cause
condensation or burns if touched.
Cautions on Pipe Handling

Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture.
All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe bender for
bending.
(Bending radius should be 30 to 40 mm or larger.)
Selection of Copper and Heat Insulation materials

Insulation material: Polyethylene foam
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045 kcal/mhC)
Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide insulation dimensions as below.
Also, when subject to high humidity, heat insulation of the refrigerant

piping (the unit piping and branch piping) must be further reinforced.
Reinforce the insulation when installing the unit near bathrooms,
kitchens, and other similar locations.
Refer to the following:
30C, more than 75% RH: 20 mm Min. in thickness
If the insulation is not sufficient, condensation may form on the surface
of the insulation.
Use separate thermal insulation pipes for gas and liquid refrigerant pipes.
Installation Manual
139
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
DRAIN PIPING WORK

Caution
Make sure all water is out before making the duct connection.
Install the drain piping.

The diameter of the drain pipe should be greater than or equal to the
diameter of the connecting pipe (vinyl tube; pipe size: 20 mm; outer
dimension: 26 mm).
Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at

least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from forming.
Caution
Water accumulating in the drain piping can cause the drain to clog.
To keep the drain tube from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5 m.
Use the drain hose and the metal clamp. Insert the drain hose fully into the drain socket and firmly tighten the metal clamp with
the upper part of the tape on the hose end. Tighten the metal clamp until the screw head is less than 4 mm from the hose.
The two areas below should be insulated because condensation may form there causing water to leak.
Drain piping passing indoors
Large sealing pad
Clamp metal
Drain sockets
(attached)
(attached)
Referring the figure below, insulate the
metal clamp and drain hose using the
Clamp metal
included large sealing pad.
(attached)
Tape
Drain hose
4mm
PRECAUTIONS
Drain piping connections
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage might enter the
indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
Do not twist or bend the drain hose, so that excessive force is not applied to it.
(This type of treatment may cause leaking.)
After piping work is finished, check drainage flows smoothly.

Gradually insert approximately 1,000 cc of water into the drain pan to
check drainage in the manner described below.
Gradually pour approximately 1,000 cc of water from the outlet
hole into the drain pan to check drainage.
Check the drainage.
140
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
INSTALLING THE DUCT

Connect the duct supplied in the field.
Air inlet side
Attach the duct and intake-side flange (field supply).
Connect the flange to the main unit with accessory screws (in 20 or 24 positions).
Wrap the intake-side flange and duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to prevent air escaping.
Caution
When attaching a duct to the intake side, be sure also to attach an air filter inside the air passage on the intake side. (Usean air
filter whose dust collecting efficiency is at least 50% in a gravimetric technique.)
Outlet side
Connect the duct according to the inside of the outlet-side flange.
Wrap the outlet-side flange and the duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to prevent air escaping.
Caution
Be sure to insulate the duct to prevent condensation from forming. (Material: glass wool or polyethylene foam, 25 mm thick)
Use electric insulation between the duct and the wall when using metal ducts to pass metal laths of the net or fence shape or
metal plating into wooden buildings.
Installation Manual
141
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
WIRING
HOW TO CONNECT WIRINGS.

Wire only after removing the control box lid as shown in the Fig.
Control box lid
Power supply wiring
Earth wire
Wiring Diagram
(Rear)
Remote controller wiring
Make sure to let a wire go through a wire penetration area.

After wiring, seal the wire and wire penetration area to
prevent moisture and small creatures from the outside.
Wrap the strong and weak electric lines with the sealing
material as shown in the figure below.
(Otherwise, moisture or small creatures such as insects from
the outside may cause short-circuit inside the control box.)
Attach securely so that there are no gaps.
Sealing material
(attached)
Wiring
through hole
(Control box side)

Wiring
Wire
Clasp
(Power supply side)
Clamp
(for fixing in place)
(attached)
Outside
unit
Inside
unit
[How to adhere it]
Caution
When clamping the wiring, use the included clamping material as shown in the Fig. to prevent outside pressure being exerted
on the wiring connections and clamp firmly.
When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not cause the control box lid to stick up, then close the cover
firmly. When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller wiring) and strong wiring (earth wire and power supply wiring) at least
50 mm so that they do not pass through the same place together. Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.
[ PRECAUTIONS ]
See also the Electrical Wiring Diagram Nameplate when wiring the unit for electrical power.
[ Connecting electrical wiring ]
Terminal block (4P)
Power supply wiring and Earth wire

Remove the control box lid.
Next, pull the wires into the unit through the wiring through hole and
connect to the power wiring terminal block (4P).
Power supply wiring

Earth wire
Wiring through hole
Indoor PCboard
(ASSY)
Power supply wiring

Earth wire
Clamp (for fixing in place)
(attached)
Warning
Do not use tapped wires, stand wires, extensioncords, or starbust connections, as they may cause overheating, electrical shock, or fire.
10
142
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
TRIAL OPERATION AND TESTING

(1) Measure the supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range.
(2) Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating mode.
3
For Heat pump.
In cooling mode, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating mode, select the highest programmable temperature.
Trial operation may be disabled in either mode depending on the room temperature.
After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C in cooling mode, 20C to 24C in
heating mode).
For protection, the system disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.
For Cooling only.
Trial operation in cooling mode may be disabled depending on the room temperature.
After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C).
For protection, the unit disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.
(3) Carry out the test operation in accordance with the Operation Manual to ensure that all functions and parts, are working
properly.
* The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is not to be used for some time after
installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate unnecessary power consumption.
* If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the original operation mode when
the circuit breaker is turned on again.
11
3P132003-2N
Installation Manual
143
Indoor Units
3.6
EDSG18-936
Duct Connected Type FDKS50/60C, FDKS25/35EA
ACCESSORIES
Insulation
for fitting
Clamp metal
1 pc.
1 each
Washer for
Drain hose hanging bracket
Sealing pad
Large and small
3 pcs.
1 each
(only for 50-60 type)
1 pc.
Sealing
material
Clamp
2 pcs.
6 pcs.
8 pcs.
1 pc.
Washer
Screws for
fixing plate duct flanges
1 set
1 set
4 pcs.
24 pcs.
2 large
for gas pipe
Large
for liquid pipe
Small
Air fillter
Hanger (right)
1 small insulation
Stored in outlet vent
Wireless
Remote controller
AAA
remote controller
holder
dry-cell batteries
1 pc.
1 pc.
1 pc.
Receiver kit
1 set
1 pc.
Mounting frame
1 pc.
Decorative
cover
[ Other ]
2 pcs.
Operation
manual
Screws
M4 25
Installation
manual
2 pcs.
CHOOSING A SITE
Indoor unit
Caution
When moving the unit during or after unpacking, make sure to lift it by holding its lifting lugs. Do not exert any pressure on
other parts, especially the refrigerant piping, drain piping and flange parts.
Wear protective gears (gloves and so on) when installing the unit.
If you think the humidity inside the ceiling might exceed 30C and RH80%, reinforce the insulation on the unit body.
Use glass wool or polyethylene foam as insulation so that the thickness is more than 10mm and fits inside the ceiling opening.
Use suspension bolts to install the unit. Check whether or not the ceiling is
strong enough to support the weight of the unit. If there is a risk that the
ceiling is not strong enough, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is marked on the carton box for installation. Refer to it to check
for points requiring reinforcing.) Select the *H dimension such that a downward
slope of at least 1/100 is ensured as indicated in DRAIN PIPING WORK.
The installation pitch is listed on the packing material, and should be
checked when deciding whether to reinforce the location or not.
300
or more
Maintenance
space
20 or more
Ceiling
If there is
no ceiling
Control box
*H=
2500 or more 240 or more
Optimum air distribution is ensured.

The air passage is not blocked.
Condensate can drain properly.
The ceiling is strong enough to bear the weight of the indoor unit.
A false ceiling does not seem to be at an incline.
Sufficient clearance for maintenance and servicing is ensured.
Piping between the indoor and outdoor units is within the allowable limits.
The indoor unit, outdoor unit, power supply wiring and transmission wiring is at least
1 meter away from televisions and radios. This prevents image interference and
noise in electrical appliances. (Noise may be generated depending on the conditions
under which the electric wave is generated, even if a one-meter allowance is
maintained.)
200
Floor surface
(length : mm)
144
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
CHOOSING A SITE
Select the signal receiver mounting location according to the following conditions:
Install the signal receiver, which has a built-in temperature sensor, near the intake vent
where there is convection of air and it can get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature.
If the intake vent is in another room or the unit cannot be installed near the intake vent for any
other reason, install it 1.5m above the floor on a wall where there is convection.
In order to get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature, install the
signal receiver in a location where it is not exposed directly to cold or hot air
from the air discharge grille or to direct sunlight.
Since the receiver has a built-in light receptor to receive signals from the wireless remote
controller, do not mount it in a location where the signal may be blocked by a curtain, etc.
Air discharge grille:

Wooden or plastic grille is recommended
because condensation may occur
depending on humidity conditions.
Caution
If the signal receiver is not installed in a location where there is convection of air, it may be unable to get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature.
Turn on all the fluorescent lamps in the room, if any, and find the site where remote controller signals are properly received
by the indoor unit (within 4 metres).
Outdoor unit
For outdoor unit installation, see the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.

Relation of the unit to the suspension bolt positions.
620
Install the inspection opening on the control box side where

maintenance and inspection of the control box are easy. Install
the inspection opening also in the lower part of the unit.
Air inlet
620
450450
(Inspection
opening size)
Model
25 35 type
50 type
60 type
(length: mm)
B
A
700
740
900
940
1100
1140
Install the suspension bolts.

(Use W3/8 to M10 suspension bolts.)
Use a hole-in-anchor, sunken insert, sunken anchor for existing
ceilings, and a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other part to be
procured in the field to reinforce the ceiling to bearing the weight
of the unit. (Refer to Fig.)
SERVICE SPACE
Control box
Open the installation hole. (Pre-set ceilings)

Once the installation hole is opened in the ceiling where the unit
is to be installed, pass refrigerant piping, drain piping,
transmission wiring, and remote controller wiring (unneeded if
using a wireless remote controller) to the units piping and
wiring holes.See REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK, DRAIN
PIPING WORK, and WIRING.
After opening the ceiling hole, make sure ceiling is level if
needed. It might be necessary to reinforce the ceiling frame to
prevent shaking.Consult an architect or carpenter for details.
Air discharge
Ceiling
(Suspension bolt pitch )
(See the technical documentation for the range of the external

static pressure setting.)
(length : mm)
Suspension
bolt pitch
Make sure the range of the units external static

pressure is not exceeded.
500
Allow view
Inspection door
(Ceiling opening)
Ceiling slab
Anchor bolt
Long nut or turn-buckle
Suspension bolt
Indoor unit
Note: All the above parts are field supplied.
Installation Manual
145
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Mount chamber lid and air filter
Protection net
(1)
(2)
(accessory).
Air inlet
For bottom intake, replace the chamber lid and
the protection net (only for 25-35 type) in the
procedure listed in Fig.
Chamber lid
(1)Remove the protection net.
Chamber lid
Protection net
(only for 25-35 type, 6 locations)
Remove the chamber lid. (7 locations)
Air discharge
Air inlet
Air discharge
(2)Reattach the removed chamber lid in the
orientation shown in Fig.(7 locations)
Reattach the removed protection net in the
orientation shown in Fig. (only for 25-35 type, 6 locations)
Refer to Fig.for the direction of the protection net.
(3)Attach sealing pad as shown in the figure below. (Stored in outlet vent) (only for 50-60 type)
(In order to take in the air inside the ceiling, and when not taking in air from outdoor air, it is not necessary to stick.)
Attach the sealing pad (accessory) to
Sealing pad (Small)
Sealing pad (Small)
the plate metal sections which are not
(3)
(accessory)
(accessory)
covered by anti-sweat material.
Air inlet
Make sure there are no gaps between
the different pieces of sealing pad.
Air inlet
Air
discharge
Sealing pad (Large)

(accessory)
Anti-sweat material
included with the product
Sealing pad
(Large)
(accessory)
Air
discharge
Anti-sweat material
included with the product
For rear intake type
For bottom intake type
(4)Attach the hanger (right) insulation to the right hanger. (Stored in outlet vent)
(See the below figure for the sticking base line.)
Hanger bracket (right)
Hanger (right) insulation

ine
el
as
gb
Slit
ARROW VIEW
in
tick
(5)Attach the air filter (accessory) in the manner shown in the diagram.
In case of bottom side
In case of back side

Main unit
Force
Filter
Force
Attach the
filter to the
main unit
while
pushing
down on
the bends.
(2 bends for
25-35 type,
3 bends for
50-60 type)
146
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

When two indoor units are installed in one room, one of the two wireless remote controllers can be easily
set for another addresses.
PCB in the indoor unit

Cut the jumper
JA on PCB.

Cut the jumper J4.
1
J4
Wireless
remote
controller
JA
ADDRESS
JB
JC
ADDRESS: JA
EXIST 1
CUT
2
J4
ADDRESS
EXIST
1
CUT
2
INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION

Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix
it securely by using a nut and washer from the upper and lower
sides of the hanger bracket. (Refer to Fig.)
[ Securing the hanger bracket ]
[ How to secure washers ]
Part to be procured
in the field
Washer for
hanging bracket
(accessory)
[ PRECAUTION ]
Since the unit uses a plastic drain pan, prevent welding spatter
and other foreign substances from entering the outlet hole
during installation.
Hanger
bracket
Insert
below washer
Washer
fixing plate
(accessory)
Tighten
(double nut)
Adjust the height of the unit.

Check the unit is horizontally level.
Level
Vinyl tube
Caution
Make sure the unit is installed level using a level or a plastic tube filled with water.In using a plastic tube instead of a level ,adjust
the top surface of the unit to the surface of the water at both ends of the plastic tube and adjust the unit horizontally.(One thing to
watch out for in particular is if it is installed so that the slope is not in the direction of the drain piping,as this might cause leaking.)
Tighten the upper nut.

Mounting the receiver.
Mount the receiver as shown below.
1 Press the receiver into the

mounting frame.
2 Mount the completed

assembly using two screws.
3 Press the decorative cover into

the mounting frame.
Note) Mount the Remote controller cord far enough away from strong electrical wires (such as distribution wires for
electrical lights, air conditioners, etc.) and from weak electrical wires (such as wires for telephones, intercoms, etc.).
Installation Manual
147
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
For heat pump: If your feet feel cold when using the heating function, it is
recommended that the air discharge grille shown at below be
attached.
45
(Adjustable angle)
OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION

Install as described in the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.

1.
FLARING THE PIPE END

4) Flare the pipe.
(Cut exactly at right angles.)
Remove burrs
Flaring
A
Die
Clutch-type
0-0.5mm
1.0-1.5mm
1.5-2.0mm
Check
Flares inner surface
must be flaw-free.
The pipe end must

be evenly flared in a
perfect circle.
Make sure that the

Warning
2.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
1) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration machine oil on both
inner and outer surfaces of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil for
R410A)
2) Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4
turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with the torque wrenches.
Use torque wrenches when tightening the flare nuts to prevent
damage to the flare nuts and escaping gas.

Gas side
3/8 inch
1/2 inch
32.7-39.9Nm
49.5-60.3Nm
(333-407kgfcm)
(505-615kgfcm)
Liquid side
1/4 inch
14.2-17.2Nm
(144-175kgfcm)
Caution
Overtightening may damage the flare and cause leaks.
148
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

3) After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no
gas leak.
Coat here with

refrigeration machine oil
Torque wrench
Spanner
Flare nut
Piping union
4) After checking for gas leaks, be sure to insulate the pipe connections.
Insulate using the insulation for fitting included with the liquid and gas pipes. Besides, make sure the insulation for fitting
on the liquid and gas piping has its seams facing up.
For the gas piping, wrap the medium sealing pad over the insulation for fitting (flare nut part).
Gas Piping Insulation Procedure
Piping insulation
material (main unit)
Attach to base
Insulation for fitting

(accessory)
Small sealing pad

(accessory)
Main unit
Main unit
Clamp
(accessory)
Liquid Piping Insulation Procedure
Measure the length of the gas

pipe as you will have to cover
it with the sealing tape.
Flare nut connection

Turn seams up
Piping insulation material

(Field supplied)

(accessory)
Piping insulation
material (main unit)
Flare nut connection
Attach to base
Liquid pipe
Gas pipe
Turn seams up
Main unit
Clamp (accessory)
Wrap the sealing

tape around the
gas pipe.
Piping insulation material

(Field supplied)
Caution
Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit. Any exposed piping may cause
condensation or burns if touched.
Cautions on Pipe Handling
Wall
Be sure to
place a cap.
Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture.
All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe bender for
bending.
(Bending radius should be 30 to 40mm or larger.)
Rain
If no flare cap is
available, cover
the flare mouth
with tape to keep
dirt or water out.
Selection of Copper and Heat Insulation materials

Insulation material: Polyethylene foam
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045kcal/mhC)
Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide insulation dimensions as below.
Gas side
Liquid side
25/35 class
50/60 class
O.D. 9.5mm
O.D. 12.7mm
O.D. 6.4mm

25/35 class
50/60 class
Liquid pipe
thermal insulation
I.D. 12-15mm
I.D. 14-16mm
I.D. 8-10mm
Thickness 0.8mm
Also, when subject to high humidity, heat insulation of the refrigerant
piping (the unit piping and branch piping) must be further reinforced.
Reinforce the insulation when installing the unit near bathrooms,
kitchens, and other similar locations.
Refer to the following:
30C, more than 75% RH: 20mm Min. in thickness
If the insulation is not sufficient, condensation may form on the surface
of the insulation.
Use separate thermal insulation pipes for gas and liquid refrigerant pipes.
Thickness 10mm Min.

Inter-unit wiring
Gas pipe
Gas pipe
insulation
Finishing tape
Liquid pipe
Liquid pipe
insulation
Drain hose
Installation Manual
149
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
DRAIN PIPING WORK

Caution
Make sure all water is out before making the duct connection.
Install the drain piping.

Drain pipe connection hole

The diameter of the drain pipe should be greater than or equal to the
diameter of the connecting pipe (vinyl tube; pipe size: 20mm; outer
dimension: 26mm).
Refrigerant pipes
Connect the drain pipe after

removing the rubber cap and
insulation tubing attached to
the connection hole.
Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at

least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from forming.
Caution
Water accumulating in the drain piping can cause the drain to clog.
To keep the drain tube from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5m.
Use the drain hose and the metal clamp. Insert the drain hose fully into the drain socket and firmly tighten the metal clamp with
the upper part of the tape on the hose end. Tighten the metal clamp until the screw head is less than 4mm from the hose.
The two areas below should be insulated because condensation may form there causing water to leak.
Drain piping passing indoors
Large sealing pad
Clamp metal
Drain sockets
(accessory)
(accessory)
Referring the figure below, insulate the
metal clamp and drain hose using the
Clamp metal
included large sealing pad.
(accessory)
Tape
Drain hose
4mm
PRECAUTIONS
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage might enter the
indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
Do not twist or bend the drain hose, so that excessive force is not applied to it.
(This type of treatment may cause leaking.)
After piping work is finished, check drainage flows smoothly.

Gradually insert approximately 1L of water into the drain pan to check
drainage in the manner described below.
Gradually pour approximately 1L of water from the outlet hole into
the drain pan to check drainage.
Check the drainage.
Air outlet
Portable pump
Bucket
Refrigerant pipes
Drain outlet
150
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
INSTALLING THE DUCT

Connect the duct supplied in the field.
Air inlet side
Attach the duct and intake-side flange (field supply).
Connect the flange to the main unit with accessory screws (in 16, 20 or 24 positions).
Wrap the intake-side flange and duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to prevent air escaping.
Caution
When attaching a duct to the intake side, be sure also to attach an air filter inside the air passage on the intake side. (Use an air
filter whose dust collecting efficiency is at least 50% in a gravimetric technique.)
Outlet side
Connect the duct according to the inside of the outlet-side flange.
Wrap the outlet-side flange and the duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to prevent air escaping.
Flange
(Field supply)
Main unit
Connection screw
(accessory)
Flange
Insulation material
(Field supply)
Aluminum tape
(Field supply)
Aluminum tape
(Field supply)
Air inlet side
Outlet side
Caution
Be sure to insulate the duct to prevent condensation from forming. (Material: glass wool or polyethylene foam, 25mm thick)
Use electric insulation between the duct and the wall when using metal ducts to pass metal laths of the net or fence shape or
metal plating into wooden buildings.
Installation Manual
151
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
WIRING
HOW TO CONNECT WIRINGS.
Wire only after removing the control box lid as shown in the Fig.
Control box lid
Make sure to let a wire go through a wire penetration area.
After wiring, seal the wire and wire penetration area to
prevent moisture and small creatures from the outside.
Wrap the strong and weak electric lines with the sealing
material as shown in the figure below.
(Otherwise, moisture or small creatures such as insects from
the outside may cause short-circuit inside the control box.)
Attach securely so that there are no gaps.
Power supply wiring

Earth wire
Wiring Diagram
(Rear)
Remote controller wiring
Sealing material
(accessory)
Wiring
through hole
(Control box side)

Wiring
Wire
Clasp
(Power supply side)
Clamp
(for fixing in place)
(accessory)
Outside
unit
Inside
unit
[How to adhere it]
Caution
When clamping the wiring, use the included clamping material as shown in the Fig. to prevent outside pressure being exerted
on the wiring connections and clamp firmly.
When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not cause the control box lid to stick up, then close the cover
firmly. When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller wiring) and strong wiring (earth wire and power supply wiring) at least
50mm so that they do not pass through the same place together. Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.
[ PRECAUTION ]
See also the Electrical Wiring Diagram Nameplate when wiring the unit for electrical power.
[ Connecting electrical wiring ]
Terminal block (4P)
Power supply wiring and Earth wire
Power supply wiring

Earth wire
Remove the control box lid.

Next, pull the wires into the unit through the wiring through hole and
connect to the power wiring terminal block (4P).
Be sure to put the part of the sheathed vinyl into the control box.
Wiring through hole

Indoor PCboard
(ASSY)
Power supply wiring

Earth wire
Clamp (for fixing in place)
(accessory)
Warning
Do not use tapped wires, stand wires, extensioncords, or starbust connections, as they may cause overheating, electrical shock, or fire.
To outdoor unit

10m, use 2.0mm wires.
Indoor
unit
1
2
3
1.6mm or 2.0mm
H05VV
10
152
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
TRIAL OPERATION AND TESTING

Trial operation and testing
(1) Measure the supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range.
(2) Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating mode.
Trial operation from remote controller

(1) Press ON/OFF button to turn on the system.
(2) Simultaneously press center of TEMP button and MODE button.
(3) Press MODE button twice.
(4) Trial run mode terminates in approx. 30 minutes and switches into normal mode. To quit a trial operation, press
ON/OFF button.
For Heat pump.

In cooling mode, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating mode, select the highest programmable temperature.
Trial operation may be disabled in either mode depending on the room temperature.
After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C in cooling mode, 20C to 24C in
heating mode).
For protection, the system disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.
For Cooling only.
Trial operation in cooling mode may be disabled depending on the room temperature.
After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C).
For protection, the unit disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.
(3) Carry out the test operation in accordance with the Operation Manual to ensure that all functions and parts, are working
properly.
* The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is not to be used for some time after
installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate unnecessary power consumption.
* If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the original operation mode when
the circuit breaker is turned on again.
Test items
Test items
Indoor and outdoor units are installed properly on solid bases.
Refrigerant gas and liquid pipes and indoor drain hose
extension are thermally insulated.
The specified wires are used for interconnecting wire
connections.
Indoor or outdoor units air inlet or discharge has clear path of air.
Shut-off valves are opened.
Indoor unit properly receives remote controller commands.
Symptom
Check

Incomplete cooling/heating
function
Water leakage
Water leakage
Electrical leakage
Incomplete cooling/heating
function
Inoperative
11
3P132003-3N
Installation Manual
153
Indoor Units
3.7
EDSG18-936
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FFQ25/35/50/60B

FFQ25BV1B
FFQ35BV1B
FFQ50BV1B
FFQ60BV1B
SPLIT SYSTEM Air Conditioners
Installation manual
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................................... 1

BEFORE INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 2
SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE ............................................................................ 5
PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION.............................................................. 6
INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION .................................................................................. 7
REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK ................................................................................. 9
DRAIN PIPING WORK.............................................................................................. 11
WIRING EXAMPLE ................................................................................................... 14
ELECTRIC WIRING WORK ...................................................................................... 15
INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL..................................................... 17
FIELD SETTINGS ..................................................................................................... 18
TEST OPERATION ................................................................................................... 19
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read these SAFETY PRECAUTIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be
sure to install it correctly.
After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and explain to the customer how to
operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation manual. Ask the customer to store
the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances not accessible to the general public.
Meaning of WARNING and CAUTION notices.
WARNING ........ Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION ......... Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or personal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
WARNING
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work.
Do not attempt to install the air conditioner yourself. Improper installation may result in water leakage,
electric shocks or fire.
Install the air conditioner in accordance with the instructions in this installation manual.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in the unit falling, water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Install the air conditioner on a foundation strong enough to withstand the weight of the unit.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the equipment falling and causing injury.
Carry out the specified installation work after taking into account strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Failure to do so during installation work may result in the unit falling and causing accidents.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this unit and that all electrical work is carried
out by qualified personnel according to local laws and regulations and this installation manual.
An insufficient power supply capacity or improper electrical construction may lead to electric shocks or fire.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires are used, and that there is no strain on the terminal connections or wires.
Improper connections or securing of wires may result in abnormal heat build-up or fire.
English
154
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
When wiring the power supply and connecting the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, position
the wires so that the control box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or overheating terminals.
If refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area immediately.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant comes into contact with fire.
After completing installation, check for refrigerant gas leakage.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas leaks into the room and comes into contact with a source
of fire, such as a fan heater, stove or cooker.
Be sure to switch off the unit before touching any electrical parts.
Be sure to earth the air conditioner.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead.
Imperfect earthing may result in electric shocks or fire.
A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks or fire.
CAUTION
While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping to ensure proper drainage and
insulate piping to prevent condensation.
Improper drain piping may result in indoor water leakage and property damage.
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televisions or radios to prevent picture interference and noise.
(Depending on the incoming signal strength, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient to eliminate
noise.)
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can be shorter than expected in rooms with electronic fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start types).
Install the indoor unit as far away from fluorescent lamps as possible.
1. Where there is a high concentration of mineral oil spray or vapour (e.g. a kitchen).
Plastic parts will deteriorate, parts may fall off and water leakage could result.
2. Where corrosive gas, such as sulphurous acid gas, is produced.
Corroding of copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage.
3. Near machinery emitting electromagnetic radiation.
Electromagnetic radiation may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of
the unit.
4. Where flammable gas may leak, where there is carbon fibre or ignitable dust suspensions in the air, or
where volatile flammables such as paint thinner or gasoline are handled.
The air conditioner is not intended for use in a potentially explosive atmosphere.
2. BEFORE INSTALLATION
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening
Be sure to check the type of R410A refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect
refrigerant will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
When opening the unit or moving it after opening, be sure to lift it by holding on to the lifting lugs without
exerting any pressure on other parts, especially, drain piping, and other resin parts.
Decide upon a line of transport.
Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Use a sling of soft
material, where unpacking is unavoidable or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid
damage or scratches to the unit.
Especially, do not unfasten packing case(top) guarding the control box until suspending the unit.
Refer to the installation manual of the outdoor unit for items not described in this manual.
Do not dispose of any parts necessary for installation until the installation is complete.
Installation Manual
English
155
Indoor Units
2-1
EDSG18-936
PRECAUTIONS
2-2
Be sure to read this manual before installing the indoor unit.

When selecting installation site, refer to the paper pattern.
This unit is suitable for installation in a household, commercial and light industrial environment.
Do not install or operate the unit in rooms mentioned below.
Laden with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapor or spray like in kitchens. (Plastic parts may deteriorate.)
Where corrosive gas like sulfurous gas exists. (Copper tubing and brazed spots may corrode.)
Where volatile flammable gas like thinner or gasoline is used.
Where machines can generate electromagnetic waves. (Control system may malfunction.)
Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage fluctuates
greatly such as that in factories. Also in vehicles or vessels.
ACCESSORIES
Check the following accessories are included with your unit.
Name
(1)Drain hose
(2)Metal clamp
(3)Washer for
hanger bracket
Quantity
1 pc.
1 pc.
8 pcs.
(4)Clamp
(Big)
6 pcs.
(5)Paper pattern
for installation
(Small)
1 pc.
1 pc.
Also used as
packing material
Shape
Name
(6)Screws
(M5)
Quantity
4 pcs.
(7)Washer
fixing plate
4 pcs.
For paper pattern

for installation
Sealing pad
1 each.
1 each.
(8)For gas pipe
(12)Sealing
material
2 pcs.
(10)Large
Operation
manual
Installation
manual
Shape
(11)Small
(9)For liquid pipe
2-3
(Other)
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
The optional decoration panel and remote controller are required for this indoor unit.(Refer to Table 1, 2)
Table 1
Unit model
Optional decoration panel

BYFQ60BW1
Color : White
FFQ25355060BV1B
These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from Table 2
according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 2
Remote controller type
Wired type
Wireless type
Cooling only type
Heat Pump type

BRC1C61
BRC7E531W
BRC7E530W
NOTE
If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in Table 2 on page 3, select a suitable remote controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials .
English
156
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND
CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
a. Items to be checked after completion of work
Items to be checked
If not properly done, what is likely to occur
Are the indoor and outdoor unit fixed firmly? The units may drop, vibrate or make noise.
The unit may malfunction or the compoIs the outdoor unit fully installed?
nents burn out.
Is the gas leak test finished?
It may result in insufficient cooling.
Is the unit fully insulated?
Condensate water may drip.
Does drainage flow smoothly?
Does the power supply voltage correspond The unit may malfunction or the compoto that shown on the name plate?
nents burn out.
The unit may malfunction or the compoAre wiring and piping correct?
nents burn out.
Is the unit safely grounded?
Dangerous at electric leakage.
The unit may malfunction or the compoIs wiring size according to specifications?
nents burn out.
Is something blocking the air outlet or inlet
of either the indoor or outdoor units?
Are refrigerant piping length and additional The refrigerant charge in the system is not
refrigerant charge noted down?
clear.
Check
b. Items to be checked at time of delivery
Also review the SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Items to be checked
Are the control box lid, air filter, suction grille attached?
Did you explain about operations while showing the instruction manual to your customer?
Did you hand the instruction manual over to your customer?
Check
c. Points for explanation about operations

The items with
WARNING and
CAUTION marks in the instruction manual are the items pertaining to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of
the product. Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents
and also ask your customers to read the instruction manual.
2-4
NOTE TO THE INSTALLER
Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the manual.
Installation Manual
English
157
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE

Hold the unit by the 4 lifting lugs when opening the box and moving it, and do not exert pressure on to any
other part piping (refrigerant, drain, etc.) or plastic parts.
If the temperature or humidity inside the ceiling might rise above 30C or RH 80%, respectively, use the
high-humidity kit (sold separately) or add extra insulation to the main unit body.
Use glass wool or polyethylene foam as insulation and make sure it is at least 10mm thick and fits inside the
ceiling opening.
The direction this product blows can be selected. However, a separately sold shut-off material kit is
needed in order to make the unit blow in two, three, or four (corner shut-off) directions.
(1) Select an installation location with the customers approval which matches the following conditions.
A location from which cool (warm) air will reach the whole room.
A location with no objects blocking the air passage.
A location where drainage can be done with no problem.
A location strong enough to support the weight of the indoor unit.
Locations where the wall is not significantly tilted.
A location which leaves enough room for installation and service work.
A location where there is no risk of flammable gas leaking.
A location where the length of the indoor-outdoor piping is no longer than the tolerated length (see the
installation manual that came with the outdoor unit for details).
[Space required for installation] (mm)

>
>
* 1500
Air
outlet
* 1500
1500
2500
>
>
>
For installation
in high places
* 1500
Air
Air outlet
inlet
>
* 1500
>
* 1500
Fig. 1
>
* 1500
Fig. 2
NOTE
Leave 200 mm or more space where marked with the *, on sides where the air outlet is closed.
Model
FFQ25355060
285 (Confirm the space of 295 or more)
CAUTION
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the
noise.)
(2) Air flow direction
The air direction shown is an example.
Select the appropriate number of directions according to the shape of the room and the location of the
unit. (Field settings have to be made using the remote controller and the outlet vents have to be shut off if
two, three, or four (corner shut-off) directions are selected. See the shut-off materials (sold separately)
installation manual for details.)
English
158
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
[Air flow direction] (Example)

Piping
Piping
Air outlet in
4 directions
Piping
Air outlet in
3 directions
Air outlet in
2 directions
(3) Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to support the
weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is maked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcing.)
4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION

(1) Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position.
Suspension
bolt ( 4)
533 (Suspension bolt pitch)

575 (indoor unit)
585-660 (Ceiling opening)
700 (Decoration panel)
(Ceiling opening dimension)

585 *660
Hanger
bracket
False
ceiling
20
20
(Ceiling-panel overlapping dimension)

View as seen from A
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
(180)
700 (Decoration panel)

585-660 (Ceiling opening)
575 (indoor unit)
533 (Suspension bolt pitch)
Refrigerant
piping
(mm)
A
NOTE
Installation is possible with a ceiling dimension of 660 mm (marked with *). However, to achieve a ceilingpanel overlapping dimension of 20 mm, the spacing between the ceiling and the unit should be 45 mm or
less. If the spacing between ceiling and the unit is over 45 mm, attach ceiling material to
part or
recover the ceiling.
False
ceiling
False
ceiling
Ceiling material
< 45
< 45
(mm)
Fig. 5
(2) Make the ceiling opening needed for installation where applicable. (For existing ceilings)
Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimensions.
Create the ceiling opening required for installation. From the side of the opening to the casing outlet,implement the refrigerant and drain piping and wiring for remote controller (unnecessary for wireless type) and wiring between units. Refer to each PIPING or WIRING section.
After making an opening in the ceiling, it may be necessary to reinforce ceiling beams to keep the ceiling level and to prevent it from vibrating. Consult the builder for details.
Installation Manual
English
159
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
(3) Install the suspension bolts.

(Use either a M8 ~ M10 size bolt)
Use a hole-in anchor for existing ceilings, and
a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other field
supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce
the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit.
Adjust clearance (50 100 mm) from the
ceiling before proceeding further.
<installation example>
Ceiling slab
Anchor
Suspension bolt
False ceiling
NOTE
All the above parts are field supplied.
(mm)
Fig. 6
5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION

Installing optional accessories (except for the decoration panel) before installing the indoor unit is
easier. However, for existing ceilings, install fresh air inlet component kit and branch duct before
installing the unit.
(1) For new ceilings
(1-1) Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix it securely by using a nut and
washer (3) from the upper and lower sides of the hanger bracket.
The washer fixing plate (7) will prevent the washer from falling.
Washer (3) (accessory)

Hanger bracket
Nut
(Field supplied)
Insert
Tighten
(double nuts)
Washer fixing plate (7)

(accessory)
[Securing the hanger bracket]
[Securing the washer]
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
(1-2) Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceilling opening dimension.
Consult the builder or carpenter for details.
The center of the ceiling opening is indicated on the paper pattern for installation.
The center of the unit is indicated on the paper pattern for installation.
Fix the paper pattern to the unit with screws (6) (4).
Ceiling height is shown on the side of the paper pattern for installation (5). Adjust the height of the
unit according to this indication.
Please perform one of the following, as the shape of the paper pattern for installation differs
according to the model.
Paper pattern for installation (5)
(accessory)
Screws (6)
(accessory)
Screws (6)
(accessory) [Installation of paper pattern for installation]
Fig. 9
English
160
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
<Ceiling work>
(1-3) Adjust the unit to the right position for installation.
(Refer to 4.PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1).)
(1-4) Check the unit is horizontally level.
The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float switch. Verify that it is level by using
a water level or a waterfilled vinyl tube.
CAUTION
If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float
switch may malfunction and cause water to drip.
(1-5) Remove the washer fixing plate (7) used for preventing the washer from falling and tighten the
upper nut.
(1-6) Remove the paper pattern for installation (5).
3
Water level
Vinyl tube
[Maintaining horizontality]
(2) For existing ceilings
Fig. 10
(2-1) Install the indoor unit temporarily.
washer (3) from the upper and lower sides of hanger bracket. The washer fixing plate (7) will prevent the washer from falling.
Washer (3) (accessory)

Hanger bracket
Insert
Nut
(Field supplied)
Tighten
(double nuts)
Fig. 11
Washer fixing plate (7)

(accessory)
[Securing the washer]
Fig. 12
(2-2) Adjust the height and position of the unit.

(2-3) Perform steps (1-4), (1-5) in (1) For new ceilings.
Installation Manual
English
161
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK

<For refrigerant piping of outdoor units, see the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.>
<Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping.
Otherwise, a water leakage can result sometimes.>
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can reach up to approximately 120 C, so use
insulation which is sufficiently resistant.)
<Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed
30 C or RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensation may form on
the surface of the insulating material.>
<Before refrigerant piping work, check which type of refrigerant is used. Proper operation is not possible if the types of refrigerant are not the same.>
CAUTION
Use a pipe cutter and flare suitable for the type of refrigerant.
Apply ester oil or ether oil around the flare portions before connectiong.
To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end
or cover it with tape.
Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant
circuit, such as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room
thoroughly right away.
The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant.
Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as
shown in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/
from the unit. (Refer to Fig. 13)
Refer to Table 3 for the dimensions of flare nut spaces.
When connecting the flare nut, coat the flare section (both inside and
outside) with ester oil or ether oil, rotate three or four times first,
then screw in. (Refer to Fig. 14)
Torque wrench
Spanner
Piping union
CAUTION
Flare nut
Over-tightening may damage the flare and cause a

refrigerant leakage.
Apply ester oil or

ether oil only inside
NOTE
Use the flare nut included with the unit main body.
Table 3
Pipe size
Tightening torque
6.4(1/4")
14.2 - 17.2 Nm
(144 - 175 kgfcm)
32.7 - 39.9 Nm
(333 - 407 kgfcm)
9.5(3/8")
12.7(1/2")
49.5 - 60.3 Nm
(505 - 615 kgfcm)
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Flare dimensions
A (mm)
Flare
8.7-9.1
12.8-13.2
16.2 - 16.6
Refer to Table 3 to determine the proper tightening torque.
English
162
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
Not recommendable but in case of emergency

You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench, you may follow the installation method mentioned below.
After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no gas leak.
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below:
Pipe size
6.4 (1/4")
9.5 (3/8")
12.7 (1/2")

60 90 degrees
60 90 degrees
30 60 degrees
Recommended arm length of tool

Approx. 150mm
Approx. 200mm
Approx. 250mm
CAUTION
CAUTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN BRAZING REFRIGERANT PIPING
Do not use flux when brazing refrigerant piping. Therefore, use the phosphor copper brazing filler metal
(BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/B-Cu93P-710/795: ISO 3677) which does not require flux.
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based
flux is used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the
refrigerant oil.)
Before brazing local refrigerant piping, nitrogen gas shall be blown through the piping to expel air from the
piping.
If your brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping, and could cause system malfunction.
When brazing the refrigerant piping, only begin brazing after having carried out nitrogen substitution or
while inserting nitrogen into the refrigerant piping. Once this is done, connect the indoor unit with a flared
or a flanged connection.
Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 MPa (0.2 kg/cm2) with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting
nitrogen into the piping. (Refer to Fig.15)
Taping
Refrigerant piping
Pressure-reducing valve
Part to be
brazed
hands valve
Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Fig. 15
Make absolutely sure to execute heat insulation works on the pipe-connecting section after checking gas
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for fitting (8) and (9). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (4).)
(Refer to Fig. 16)
Wrap the sealing pad (11) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side.
(Refer to Fig. 16)
10
Installation Manual
English
163
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Small sealing pad

(accessory) (11)
(Wrap the piping union
with the sealing pad.)
Clamp (4)
(Big 4)
(accessory)
Liquid piping

(accessory) (9)
(for liquid pipe)
Insulation for fitting (accessory) (8)
(for gas pipe)
Gas piping
Fig. 16
CAUTION
Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit. Any exposed piping
may cause condensation or burns if touched.
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK

(1) Carry out the drain piping
Lay pipes so as to ensure that drainage can occur with problems.
Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section)
than that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 20 mm, outside diameter 26 mm).
keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from
forming.
If the drain hose cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, refer to PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING on page 12.
To keep the drain hose from sagging, space hanger bracket every 1 to 1.5 m.
Hanger bracket
GOOD
1/100
gradient or more
WRONG
WRONG
Fig. 17
Fig. 18
CAUTION
Water pooling in the drainage piping can cause the drain to clog.
Use the attached drain hose (1) and metal clamp (2).
Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the clamp securely within the portion
of a gray tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the clamp until the screw head is less than 4 mm from the
hose.
Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water
leakage due to dew condensation.
Indoor drain pipe
Drain socket
Wrap the attached sealing pad (10) over the metal clamp (2) and drain hose to insulate.
English
164
11
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
Metal clamp (2)

(accessory)
Metal clamp (2)

(accessory)
Large sealing pad (10)

(accessory)
Drain hose (1)

(accessory)
Tape (Gray)
4mm
Fig. 19
Fig. 20
<PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING>

Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 545 mm.
Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300 mm from the unit.
Drain hose (1)

(accessory)
300
Drain hose (accessory)(1)
Hanger bracket
Adjustable
( 545)
1-1.5m
Metal clamp (2)

(accessory)
750
To prevent air bubbles in the

drain hose part, keep it level or
slightly tilted up. Any bubbles in
the hose might cause the unit to
make noise due to backflow
when the drain pump stops.
Ceiling slab
205
Level or
tilted
slightly up
(mm)
Drain raising pipe

Raising section
Fig. 21
NOTE
To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (1), do not bend or twist when
installing. (This may cause leakage.)
If converging multiple drain pipes, install according to the procedure shown below.
0 545mm
Central drain pipe

The drain pipe should have a downward
slope of at least 1/100 to prevent
air pockets from forming.
Fig. 22
Water accumulating in the drain

piping can cause the drain to clog.
Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of the unit.
(2) After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.
Add approximately 1000 cc of water slowly from the air outlet and check drainage flow.
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED
Check drainage flow during cooling operation, explained in HOW TO TEST OPERATION on page 19.
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED
CAUTION
Electrical wiring work should be done by a certified electrician.
If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after the
test run is complete.
Remove the control box lid. Connect the single phase power supply (SINGLE PHASE 50Hz 220-240V) to connections No.1 and No.2 on the power supply terminal block. Do not connect to No.3 of the power supply terminal block. (The drain pump will not operate.) When carrying out wiring work around the control box, make sure
none of the connectors come undone. Be sure to attach the control box lid before turning on the power.
After confirming drainage (Fig.23, Fig.24), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
Attach the control box lid as before.
12
Installation Manual
English
165
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Drain sockets
(Check the drainage now.)
Drain pump
location
100
(mm)
Plastic container
for pouring
(Tube should be
about 100 mm long.)
Service drain outlet (with rubber plug)

(Use this outlet to drain water from
the drain pan)
<Adding water through air outlet>
[Method of adding water]
Fig. 23
Control
box lid
Remove the
control box lid
(take off 2 screws)
Power supply
terminal block
No.3
No.1 No.2
Ground
Single phase
power supply
(50Hz 220-240V)
Fig. 24
CAUTION
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage
might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
Keep in mind that it will become the cause of getting drain pipe blocked if water collects on drain pipe.
English
166
13
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
8. WIRING EXAMPLE
For the wiring of outdoor units, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor units.
Confirm the system type.
Pair type: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system) (Refer to Fig. 25)
Multi system: 1 through 4 indoor units connect to 1 outdoor unit. The indoor unit is controlled by remote
controller connected to each indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 26)
However, the group control is not expected.
Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units. (All indoor units operate according to
the remote controller) (Refer to Fig. 27)
2 remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 28)
Multi system
Pair type
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
P1 P2
Indoor
unit
Indoor unit
P1 P2
Remote controller
(Optional accessories)
Fig. 25
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
P1 P2
Indoor
unit
P1 P2
Fig. 26
1 2 3
Indoor
unit
P1 P2
P1 P2
Remote controller
Group control
2 remote controllers control
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
P1 P2
Remote controller
Fig. 27
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P2
Indoor unit
Remote
controller 1 P P
(Optional
accessories)
1
P1 P2
Fig. 28
Remote
controller 2
(Optional
accessories)
NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires is polarized and must match the terminal
symbol.
2. In case a shielding wire is to be used, connect a shielded portion with the
of a remote controller terminal board.(Also, connect the ground for the remote control to a grounded metal part.)
3. For group control remote controller, choose the remote controller that suits the indoor unit which has the
most functions (as attached swing flap)
4. When controlling the simultaneous operation system with 2 remote controllers, connect it to the master
unit. (wiring to the slave unit is unnecessary)
14
Installation Manual
English
167
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK
All field supplied parts and materials and electric works must conform to local codes.
Use copper wire only.
For electric wiring work, refer to also Wiring diagram label attached to the Control box lid.
For remote controller wiring details, refer to the installation manual attached to the remote controller.
All wiring must be performed by an authorized electrician.
A circuit breaker capable of shutting down power supply to the entire system must be installed.
Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for the size of power supply electric wire connected to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
Be sure to ground the air conditioner.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas and water pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Gas pipes : might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
Water pipes : no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Telephone ground wires or lightning rods : might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
during lighting storms.
Specifications for field wire

The remote controller cord should be procured locally. Refer to the Table 4 when preparing one.
Table 4
Wire
Size(mm2)
Wiring between units
H05VV-U4G(NOTE 1)
2.5
Remote controller cord
Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (2 wire) (NOTE 2)
0.75-1.25
Max.500 *
Wiring to ground terminal
Ground wire conform to local codes
2.0
Length(m)
*This will be the total extended length in the system when doing group control.
NOTE
1. Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection.
2. Asian market : Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
For Australian regular : Shield wire (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
CAUTION
Arrange the wires and fix a lid firmly so that the lid does not float during wiring work.
Do not clamp remote controller cords together with wiring between units together. Doing so may cause
malfunction.
Remote controller cords and wiring between units should be located at least 50 mm from other electric
wires. Not following this guideline may result in malfunction due to electrical noise.
Connection of wiring between units, ground wire and for the remote control cord (Refer to Fig. 29)
Wiring between units and ground wire
Remove the control box lid and connect wires of matching number to the power supply terminal block
(4P)inside. And connect the ground wire to the terminal block. In doing this, pull the wires inside through
the hole and fix the wires securely with the included clamp (4).
Give enough slack to the wires between the clamp (4) and power supply terminal block. (Use Fig. 30 as a
guide and allow at least 80mm for removing the sheath.)
Remove the control box lid and pull the wires inside through the hole and connect to the terminal block for
remote controller (6P). (no polarity) Securely fix the remote controller cord with the included clamp (4).
Give enough slack to the wires between the clamp (4) and the terminal block for the remote controller.
After connection, attach sealing material (12)
Be sure to attach it to prevent the infiltration of water as well as any insects and other small creatures from
the outside. Otherwise a short circuit may occur inside the control box.
English
168
15
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
Wiring Remote controller cord
the shield part of shielded wire.

(Ground
Refer to Note 2 in "8. WIRING EXAMPLE")
Note
Terminal block for

remote controller (6P)
15
10~
mm
control box lid
After clamping
Clamp(4)(small)
(accessory)
to wire sheath,
Clamp(4)
clamp the wire
(accessory) sheath with
(Big)
Clamp(4) Clamp(4)(Big)
(Small)
to clamp
material.
Be sure to clamp
wire sheath.
After securing the
Clamp
clamp (4) to clamp
material
material, cut off
any extra material
Wiring diagram label

(Back side of control box lid)
Remove the
control box lid
(take off 2
screws)

Outdoor
unit
Note
Indoor
unit
(Wiring between units)

How to connect power
supply terminal block
(4P) with ground wire
10~15mm
Wiring between
units
Clamp(4)
(Big)
Power supply
terminal block
(accessory) Be sure to clamp
Clamp
material
wire sheath.
After securing the
clamp (4) to clamp material,
cut off any extra material
Fig. 29
Note)
Be sure to attach it to prevent the infiltration of water
as well as any insects and other small creatures from
the outside. Otherwise a short circuit may occur
inside the control box.
(accessory)
Sealing material (12)
Sealing
material(12)
Attach completely to
hole of wiring without
leaving any space
(accessory)
Wiring
(Outside)
(Inside)
Wiring to
outside
[How to attach sealing materials]
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the power supply terminal block.
Tightening torque for the terminal blocks.
Use the correct screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws. If the blade of screwdriver is too small, the
head of the screw might be damaged, and the screw will not be properly tightened.
If the terminal screws are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
Refer to the table below for the tightening torque of the terminal screws.
Terminal block for remote controller (6P)
Power supply terminal block (4P)
16
Installation Manual

0.79 - 0.97
1.18 - 1.44
English
169
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Precautions to be taken for power supply wiring

Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power supply terminal block. In case it cannot be
used due to unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the following instructions.
Be sure to peel off the sheath of wiring between units more than 80 mm.
(Refer to Fig. 30)
In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections, and fix the wires
so that external forces are not applied to the terminals.
Attach insulation sleeve

Round crimp-style terminal
or
rm
mm
80
Fig. 30
When none are available, follow the instructions below.

Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal.
Connect wires of the

same gauge to both
side.
Do not connect wires

of the same gauge to
one side.

of different gauges.
(Looseness in the connection may cause overheating.)

CAUTION
When clamping wiring, use the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on the
wiring connections and clamp firmly. When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not
cause the control box lid to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (procured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in,
they could cause short circuits in the control box.)
Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller cord) and strong wiring (interunit,
ground, and other power wiring) at least 50 mm so that they do not pass through the same place together.
Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.
10. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL

Caution:
With a wireless remote controller, field setting and test operation cannot be performed without
attaching the decoration panel.
<Read 12. TEST OPERATION before making a test run without attaching the decorated panels.>
Refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
After installing the decoration panel, ensure that there is no space between the unit body and decoration panel.
English
170
17
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
11. FIELD SETTINGS

CAUTION
When performing field setting or test operation without attaching the decoration panel, do not
touch the drain pump. This may cause electric shock.
(1) Make sure the control box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
(2) Field settings must be made from the remote controller and in accordance with installation conditions.
Setting can be made by changing the Mode No., FIRST CODE NO. and SECOND CODE NO..
The Field Settings included with the remote control lists the order of the settings and method of operation.
11-1 Setting air outlet direction

For changing air outlet direction (2 or 3 directions), refer to the optional installation manual of the sealing
member of air discharge outlet kit or the service manual.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for air outlet in 4 directions.)
11-2 Setting for options

For settings for options, see the installation instructions provided with the option.
11-3 Setting air filter sign

Remote controllers are equiped with liquid crystal display air filer signs to display the time to clean air filters.
Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to Table 5 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the
room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for air filter contamination-light.)
Table5
Setting
Air filter contamination-light
Air filter contamination-heavy
Spacing time of display air

filter sign (long life type)
Approx. 2500 hrs
Approx. 1250 hrs
Mode No.
FIRST CODE
NO.
10 (20)
SECOND
CODE NO.
01
02
When using wireless remote controllers

When using wireless remote controllers, wireless remote controller address setting is necessary. Refer to
the installation manual attached to the wireless remote controller for setting instructions.
11-4 When implementing group control

When using as a pair unit, you may control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote controller.
Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as possible.
Outdoor unit 1
Indoor unit 1
Outdoor unit 2
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit 3
Indoor unit 3
Group control remote controller
Wiring Method (See 9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page 15.)

(1) Remove the control box lid.
(2) Cross-wire the remote control terminal block (P1 P2) inside the control box. (There is no polarity.)
(Refer to Fig. 27 on page 14 and Table 4 on page 15)
11-5 Two remote Controllers (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)

When using 2 remote controllers, one must be set to MAIN and the other to SUB.
18
Installation Manual
English
171
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1) Insert a
screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and, working from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to the upper
part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 31)
(2) Turn the main/sub changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC boards to S. (Leave the
switch of the other remote controller set to M.) (Refer to Fig. 32)
Fig. 31
Fig. 32
Upper part of
remote controller
Insert the screwdriver

here and gently work
off the upper part of
remote controller.
Lower part of
remote controller
(Factory setting)
S
M
(Only one remote

controller needs S
to be changed if M
factory settings
have remained
untouched.)
Remote
controller
PC board
Wiring Method (See 9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page15. )

(3) Remove the control box lid.
(4) Add remote controller 2 to the remote control terminal block (P1, P2) in the control box.
(There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 28 on page 14 and Table 4 on page 15)
12. TEST OPERATION

CAUTION
When performing field setting or test operation without attaching the decoration panel, do not
touch the drain pump. This may cause electric shock.
Refer to the section of FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED on page 4.
After finishing the construction of refrigerant piping, drain piping, and electric wiring, conduct test operation accordingly to protect the unit.
12-1 HOW TO TEST OPERATION

1. Open the gas side stop valve.
2. Open the liquid side stop valve.
3. Electrify for 6 hours.
4. Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pressing ON/OFF button (
).
5. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button (
) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller) and
operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
6. Press AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST button (
) to make sure the unit is in operation.
) and operate normally.
8. Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
9. If the decoration panel has not been installed, turn off the power after the test operation.
PRECAUTIONS
1. Refer to 12-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION if the unit does not operate properly.
2. After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the unit in
inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is 00. (=normal)
If the code reads anything other than 00, refer to 12-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION.
NOTE
If a malfunction is preventing operation, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
English
172
19
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
12-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION

If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner, a malfunction shown in
the table below may happen.
Remote control display
No display
88*
88 flashing
Malfunction
Power supply trouble or Open phase connection
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Indoor PC board faulty
Power supply PCB assy faulty
Wrong remote control connection wiring
Remote control faulty
Fuse faulty
*After turning on the power, the maximun is 90 seconds, although it will only display 88. This is not a problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
Diagnose with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the wired remote controller. (Note 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashes, and
and the malfunction code
are indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referring to the
table on the malfunction code list in case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor unit
No. with the trouble can be recognized. (Note 2)
2. With the wireless remote controller.
(Refer also to the operation manual attached to the wireless remote controller)
When the operation stops due to trouble. the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case, diagnose
the fault contents with the table on the Error code list looking for the error code which can be found by following procedures. (NOTE 2)
(1)Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button,
is displayed and 0 flashes.
(2)Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps 3 short beeps ............................. Perform all the following operations
1 short beep............................... Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep ................................ No trouble
(3)Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the error code flashes.
(4)Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper code.
(5)Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the error code flashes.
(6)Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower code.
A long beep indicate the error code.
NOTE
1.In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,
starts flashing and changes the inspection mode.

2.Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble
history disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code 00(normal).
The display changes from the inspection mode to the normal mode.
Caution:
Check the items in b. Items to be checked at time of delivery on page 4 after a test operation.
12-3 Malfunction code list
For places where the Malfunction code is left blank, the
indication is not displayed. Though the system continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the Malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
Code
A0
A1
A3
A6
AF
20
Installation Manual
Malfunction/Remarks
Safety device operates
Indoor units PC board faulty
Drain water level abnormal
Indoor fan motor overloaded, overcurrent or locked
Humidifier faulty
English
173
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
AH
AJ
C4
C9
CC
CJ
E0
E1
E3
E4
E5
E7
E9
F3
H3
H4
H7
H9
JA
JC
J1
J2
J3
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
L1
L4
L5
L8
L9
LC
English
174
Air cleaner faulty

Only the air cleaner does not function.
Type set improper
Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.
Sensor for heat exchanger temperature is fault
Sensor for suction air temperature is fault
Humidity sensor abnormal
Sensor for remote controller is fault
The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is
possible.
Action of safety device (outdoor unit)
Outdoor units PC board faulty
High pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
Low pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
Compressor motor lock malfunction
Outdoor fan motor lock malfunction
Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction
Electronic expansion valve faulty (outdoor unit)
Discharge pipe temperature abnormal (outdoor unit)
High pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
Low pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
Outdoor motor position signal malfunction
Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Equipment operation in response to errors will vary according to model.
Discharge pipe pressure sensor faulty
Suction pipe pressure sensor faulty
Pressure sensor system error (batch) (outdoor unit)
Power sensor system error (outdoor unit)
Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Suction pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Heat exchanger thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Liquid piping temperature sensor system error (outdoor unit)
Intake temperature sensor error (outdoor unit)
Inverter system error (outdoor unit)
Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor unit)
Inverter cooling defect.
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor unit)
Possible earth fault or short circuit in the compressor motor.
Electric thermal (outdoor unit)
Possible electrical overload in the compressor or cut line in the compressor motor.
Stall prevention (outdoor unit)
Compressor possibly locked.
Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units inverters (outdoor unit)
21
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
P1
P3
P4
PJ
U0
U1
U2
U4
UF
U5
U8
UA
UC
UJ
22
Open-phase (outdoor unit)

P-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Type set improper (outdoor unit)
Suction pipe temperature abnormal
Reverse phase
Reverse two phase of the L1,L2and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction (outdoor unit)
Includes the defect in 52C.
Transmission error (indoor unit outdoor unit)
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
mounted on the indoor and the outdoor units.
Transmission error (indoor unit remote controller)
Transmission is improper between the indoor unit and the remote controller.
Malfunction in transmission between main and sub remote controls.
(Malfunction in sub remote controller.)
Miss setting for multi system
Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main
units PC board)
Central control address overlapping
Peripheral equipment transmission fault
English
3P184443-4D
Installation Manual
175
Indoor Units
3.8
EDSG18-936
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FCQ35/50/60/71B

1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and
be sure to install it correctly. After completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during
the start-up operation. Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store this installation manual along with the operation manual for
future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances not accesible to the general public.
WARNING .........Failure to observe a warning may result in death.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe a caution may result in injury or damage to the equipment.
WARNING
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work. Do not try to install the air conditioner
yourself.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in water leakage, electric shocks, fire or the unit falling.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the equipment falling and causing injuries.
Carry out the specified installation work after considering strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Improper installation work may result in the equipment falling and causing accidents.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires and used, and no external forces act on the terminal
connections or wires.
When wiring the power supply and connecting the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, position the
wires so that the terminal box lids can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the terminal box lids may result in electric shocks, fire or the terminals overheating.
If the refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area immediately.
After completing the installation work, check that the refrigerant gas does not leak.
Before touching electrical parts, turn off the unit.
176
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
CAUTION
Ground the air conditioner.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas or water pipes, lightning conductor or a telephone ground wire.
Incomplete grounding may result in electric shocks.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks.
While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping in order to ensure proper
drainage and insulate piping in order to prevent condensate.
Improper drain piping may result in water leakage and property damage.
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wiring at least 1 meter away from
televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the noise.)
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can result shorter than expected in rooms with electronic fluorescent lamps. (inverter or rapid start types)
(a) where a mineral oil mist or an oil spray or vapor is produced, for example in a kitchen
(b) where corrosive gas, such as sulfurous acid gas, is produced
(c) near machinery emitting electromagnetic waves
Electromagnetic waves may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of
the equipment.
(d) where flammable gases may leak, where there are carbon fiber or ignitable dust suspensions in the air,
or where volatile flammables such as thinner or gasoline are handled.
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening.
Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before installing the unit. (Using an incorrect refrigerant
will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
The accessories needed for installation must be retained in your custody until the installation work is completed. Do not discard them!
Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Where unpacking is
unavoidable, use a sling of soft material or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid damage or scratches to the unit.
For the installation of an outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
Do not use the unit in locations with high salt content in the air such as beachfront property, locations where
the voltage fluctuates such as factories, or in automobiles or marine vessels.
2-1 Precautions

Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage fluctuates greatly
such as that in factories. Also in vehicles or vessels.
Installation Manual
177
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
2-2 Accessories
Check the following accessories are included with your unit.
Name
1) Drain hose
2) Metal clamp
3) Washer for
hanger bracket
4) Clamp
5) Paper pattern
for installation
Quantity
1 pc.
1 pc.
8 pcs.
4 pcs.
1 pc.
Also used as
packing material
Shape
or
a corrugated sheet
Name
6) Screw (M5)
Quantity
3 pcs.
7) Washer
fixing plate
4 pcs.
For paper pattern

for installation
Insulation for
fitting
1 each
Sealing pad
1 each
8) for gas pipe
10) Large
9) for liquid pipe
11) Medium
2 pcs.
12) Small
Shape
Name
Quantity
Shape
13) Accessory piping

2 pcs.
9.5 - 12.7
(Other)
Installation
manual
Operation
manual
12.7 - 15.9
178
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
2-3 Optional accessories

The optional decoration panel and remote controller are required for this indoor unit. (Refer to Table 1, 2)
(However, the remote controller is not required for the slave unit of a simultaneous operation system.)
Table 1
Model
Optional decoration panel

Color
White
BYC125K-W1
FCQ35 50 60 71BVE
These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from Table 2
according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 2
Remote controller type
Wired type
Wireless type
Cooling only type
Heat pump type

BRC1C61
BRC7C613W
BRC7C612W
NOTE
If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in Table 2 on page 4, select a suitable remote controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND
CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
Items to be checked
Are the indoor unit and outdoor unit fixed
firmly?
Does the power supply voltage correspond
to that shown on the name plate?
Are wiring and piping correct?
Is wiring size according to specifications?
Are refrigerant piping length and additional
Check
The unit may drop, vibrate or make noise.

The unit may malfunction or the components burn out.
It may result in electric shock.
The refrigerant charge in the system is not
clear.

Also review the 1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Items to be checked
Check
Did you explain about operations while showing the operation manual to your customer?
Did you hand the operation manual over to your customer?
Installation Manual
179
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936

The items with
WARNING and
CAUTION marks in the operation manual are the items pertaining
to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the product.
Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents and also ask
your customers to read the operation manual.
2-4 Note to the installer

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different
functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the
manual.

Please attach additional thermal insulation material to the unit body when it is believed that the relative humidity in the ceiling exceeds 80%. Use glass wool, polyethylene foam, or similar with a thickness of 10 mm or
more as thermal insulation material.
(1) Select an installation site where the following conditions are fulfilled and that meets your customers approval.
In the upper space (including the back of the ceiling) of the indoor unit where there is no possible dripping of water from the refrigerant pipe, drain pipe, water pipe, etc.
Where optimum air distribution can be ensured.
Where nothing blocks air passage.
Where condensate can be properly drained.
Where the ceiling is strong enough to bear the indoor unit weight.
Where the false ceiling is not noticeably on an incline.
Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be ensured.
Where there is no risk of flammable gas leakage.
Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit.
CAUTION
Any vents, light fixtures, or other appliances which may disturb the airflow might cause the top side to
become dirty if located too nearby, so follow the figure below when installing.
Keep indoor unit, outdoor unit, power supply wiring and transmission wiring at least 1 meter away from
televisions and radios. This is to prevent image interference and noise in those electrical appliances.
(Noise may be generated depending on the conditions under which the electric wave is generated, even
if 1 meter is kept.)
(2) Ceiling height
Install this unit where the height of bottom panel is more than 2.5 m so that the user cannot easily touch.
This indoor unit may be installed on ceilings up to 3.5 m in height. However, it becomes necessary to
make field settings by remote controller and close the air outlet when installing the unit at a height over
2.7 m.
Refer to the section entitled, 10. FIELD SETTING and the decoration panel installation manual.
180
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
(3) Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to support the
weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is maked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcing.)
1500
Air
discharge
1000
2500
For installation
in high places.
240
[Space required for installation]
3
Air Air discharge
inlet
1500
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
NOTE
Leave 200 mm or more space where marked with the , on sides where the air outlet is closed.

(1) Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position
Installation Manual
181
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Installation is possible when ceiling opening dimensions is as follows

When installing the unit within the frame for fixing false ceiling.
860
(Opening dimension inside
the flame for ceiling)
Frame
False
ceiling
20
20
860~* 910
(ceiling opening dimension) (Ceiling-panel
overlapping dimension)
Fig. 6
NOTE
Installation is possible with a ceiling dimension of 910 mm (marked with ). However, to achieve a ceilingpanel overlapping dimension of 20 mm, the spacing between the ceiling and the unit should be 35 mm or
less. If the spacing between ceiling and the unit is over 35 mm, attach ceiling material to
part or
recover the ceiling.
(2) Make the ceiling opening needed for installation where applicable. (For existing ceilings)
Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimensions.
Create the ceiling opening required for installation. From the side of the opening to the casing outlet,
implement the refrigerant and drain piping and wiring for remote controller (unnecessary for wireless
type) and indoor-outdoor unit casing outlet. Refer to 6.REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK, 7.DRAIN PIPING WORK and 8.ELECTRIC WIRING WORK.
After making an opening in the ceiling, it may be necessary to reinforce ceiling beams to keep the ceiling
level and to prevent it from vibrating. Consult the builder for details.
NOTE
<installation example>
Ceiling slab
Anchor
50 ~100
(3) Install the suspension bolts.

(Use either a M8~M10 size bolt)
Use a hole-in anchor for existing ceilings, and
a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other field
supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce
the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit.
Adjust clearance (50~100mm) from the ceiling before proceeding further.
Suspension bolt
False ceiling
Fig. 8
182
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

Installing optional accessories (except for the decoration panel) before installing the indoor unit is
easier. However, for existing ceilings, install fresh air inlet component kit and branch duct before
<The two cushions provided on the top of the indoor unit serve to protect the floor from scratches or cracks
when it is directly placed on the floor with the topside down. Be sure to remove the cushions before installation.>
Some models have no cushions.
(1) For new ceilings

(1-1)Install the indoor unit temporarily.
washer (3) from the upper and lower sides of the hanger bracket.
The washer fixing plate (7) will prevent the washer from falling.
Field supply
Washer (3) (attached)
Hanger bracket
Tighten
(double nuts)
Fig. 10
(1-2)Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimension.
Consult the builder or carpenter for details.
The center of the ceiling opening is indicated on the paper pattern for installation.
The center of the unit is indicated on the label attached to the unit and on the paper pattern for installation.
After removing the packaging material from the 4 corners of the paper pattern for installation (5), fix the
paper pattern to the unit with screws (6) (3).
Ceiling height is shown on the side of the paper pattern for installation (5). Adjust the height of the unit
according to this indication.
Installation Manual
183
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Please perform one of the following, as the shape of the paper pattern for installation differs according to the model.
Only the corner where the pipes go out, the

screw is already fixed at the drain pan.
Only the corner where the pipes go out, the

screw is already fixed at the drain pan.
Center of ceiling opening
Center of
ceiling opening
False ceiling
LOWER surface
of ceiling
(Height adjustment of the unit.)
Paper pattern for
installation (5)
Screw (6)
(attached)
Screw (6)
(attached)
Paper pattern for

installation (5)
Screw (6)
(attached)
Screw (6)
(attached)
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
[Installation of paper pattern for installation]

<Ceiling work>
(1-3)Adjust the unit to the right position for installation.
(Refer to 4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1).)
(1-4)Check the unit is horizontally level.
CAUTION
The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float
switch. Verify that it is level by using a level or a water-filled vinyl
tube.
(If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float switch may
malfunction and cause water to drip.)
(1-5)Remove the washer fixing plate (7) used for preventing the
washer from falling and tighten the upper nut.
(1-6)Remove the paper pattern for installation (5).
Level
Vinyl tube
[Maintaining horizontality]
Fig. 14
(2) For existing ceilings

(2-1)Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix it securely by using nut and washer
from upper/lower sides of hanger bracket. If you use the washer fixing plate (7), it will prevent the falling
of the washer.
Field supply
Washer (3) (attached)
Hanger bracket
Tighten
(double nuts)
[Securing the hanger bracket
Fig. 15
(2-2)Adjust the height and position of the unit.
(2-3)Perform steps (2-4), (2-5) in (1) For new ceilings.
184
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

<For refrigerant piping of outdoor unit and BP unit, see the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit and BP unit.>
<Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping. Otherwise, a
water leakage can result sometimes.>
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can reach up to approximately 120C, so use
<Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed 30C or
RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensate may form on the surface of the
insulating material.>
<Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect refrigerant will
prevent normal operation of the unit.)>
CAUTION
Apply ester oil or ether oil around the flare section before connecting.
To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end or cover it
with tape.
Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant circuit, such
as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room thoroughly right away.
Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as
shown in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/
from the unit. (Refer to Fig. 17)
When connecting the flare nut, apply ester oil or ether oil to the flare
section (both inside and outside), and spin 3-4 times before screwing in. (Refer to Fig. 18)
Torque wrench
Spanner
Pipe union
Flare nut
NOTE
Fig. 17
Coat here with ester or ether oil
Fig. 18
Table 3
6.4
14.2 17.2N m (144 176 kgf cm)
8.7 9.1 (8.3 8.7)
9.5
32.7 39.9N m (333 407 kgf cm)
12.8 13.2 (12.0 12.4)
12.7
49.5 60.3N m (504 616 kgf cm)
16.2 16.6 (15.4 15.8)
15.9
61.8 75.4N m (630 770 kgf cm)
19.3 19.7 (18.6 19.0)
Flare
0
Flare dimensions
A (mm)
R0.4-0.8
A
90 0.5
Tightening torque
45 2
Pipe size
When refrigerant is R22, the dimensions in parentheses ( ) can also be used.

Refer to Table 3 to de termine the proper tightening torque.
CAUTION
Over-tightening the flare nut may break it and/or cause the refrigerant to leak.
10
Installation Manual
185
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936

You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench, you may
follow the installation method mentioned below
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the
tightening torque suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown
below:
Pipe size
6.4 (1/4)
9.5 (3/8)
12.7 (1/2)
15.9 (5/8)

60 to 90 degrees
60 to 90 degrees
30 to 60 degrees
30 to 60 degrees

Approx. 150mm
Approx. 200mm
Approx. 250mm
Approx. 300mm
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for
fitting (8) and (9). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (4).) (Refer to Fig. 19)
Wrap the sealing pad (11) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side.
(Refer to Fig. 19)
Medium sealing pad

(attached) (11)
(Wrap the piping union
with the sealing pad.)
Clamp (4)
(4)
Liquid piping

(attached) (9)
(for liquid line)
Insulation for fitting (attached) (8)
(for gas line)
Gas piping
Fig. 19
CAUTION
For local insulation, be sure to insulate local piping all the way into the pipe connections inside the
machine.
Exposed piping may cause condensation or burns on contact.
CAUTION
flux is used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the refrigerant oil.)
piping.
If you brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping,
and could cause system malfunction.
11
186
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
2
Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 Mpa (0.2 kg/cm ) with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting
nitrogen into the piping. (Refer to Fig. 20)
Refrigerant piping
Part to be
brazed
Taping
hands valve
Nitrogen
3
Nitrogen
Fig. 20
When refrigerant is R22 for 35 50 60

Since the piping connection sizes for the indoor unit and BP unit are different, the accessory
piping (13) should be used to make the connections shown in the figure below.
Indoor unit
piping union
Field piping
3512.7
50 6015.9
Accessory piping (13)

359.5-12.7
50 6012.7-15.9
359.5
50 6012.7
The accessory piping (13) is not used in cases other than those above.

(1) Rig drain piping
As for drain work, perform piping in such a manner that water can be drained properly.
As for drain piping, the connection can be made from three different directions.
Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section) than
that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 25 mm, outside diameter 32 mm).
Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from
forming.
If the drain pipe cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, execute the drain raising piping.
To keep the drain pipe from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5 m.
Hanger bracket
1~1.5 m
1/100 gradient or more
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
CAUTION
Use the attached drain hose (1) and Metal clamp (2).
Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the Metal clamp securely within the
portion of a white tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the Metal clamp until the screw head is less than
4 mm from the hose.
12
Installation Manual
187
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Wrap the attached sealing pad (10) over the Metal clamp and drain hose to insulate.
Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water leakage due to dew condensation.
Indoor drain pipe
Drain socket
Metal clamp (2)
Metal clamp (2)

(attached)

(attached)
Drain hose (1)

Tape (White)
4 mm
Fig. 23
Fig. 24

Ceiling slab
300 mm
1 ~ 1.5 m
To prevent air bubbles in the

drain hose part, keep it level
or slightly tilted up. Any
bubbles in the hose might
cause the unit to make noise
due to backflow when the
drain pump stops.
Adjustab
(550)
750
Level or
tilted
slightly up
Hanger bracket
Drain raising pipe

Metal clamp
(attached) (2)
200
Drain hose (1)

(accessory)
Raising section
Drain hose (attached) (1)
Fig. 25
100 mm
NOTE
To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (1), do not bend or twist when installing. (This may cause leakage.)
T-joint converging drain pipes

Fig. 26
(2) After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.
Add approximately 2000 cc of water slowly from the inspection opening or the air outlet (Refer to Fig. 27)
and check drainage flow.
13
188
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

Check drainage flow during COOL running, explained under 12. TEST OPERATION.
CAUTION
If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after
Remove the terminal box lid (2). Connect the single phase power supply (SINGLE PHASE 50/60Hz
220-240V/220V) to connections No.1 and No.2 on the terminal block for wiring the units. Do not connect to
No.3 of the terminal block for wiring the units. (The drain pump will not operate.) Connect the ground wire
firmly. When carrying out wiring work around the terminal box, make sure none of the connectors come
undone. Be sure to attach the terminal box before turning on the power.
After confirming drainage (Fig. 27, Fig. 28), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
Attach the terminal box lid (2) as before.
Drain pipe
Service cover
Portable pump
Inspection opening
Bucket
(Adding water from
inspection opening)
100
Plastic watering can
(Tube should be
about 100 mm long.)
Service drain outlet (with rubber plug)

(Use this outlet to drain
water from the drain pan)
Air outlet
<Adding water through air discharge outlet>

[Method of adding water]
Fig. 27
14
Installation Manual
189
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Terminal block for

wiring the units
Terminal box lid (2)
Terminal block for

wiring the units
Fig. 28
1 2 3
Power supply
Single phase
CAUTION
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
For electric wiring work, refer to also 9. WIRING EXAMPLE attached to the unit body.
Refer to the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit and BP unit for the size of power supply electric
wire connected to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
Be sure to ground the air conditioner.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, plumbing pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Gas pipes: might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
Plumbing: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Telephone ground wires or lightning rods: might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
Table 4
Wire
Wiring the units
H05VV U4G (NOTE 1)

NOTE 2 (2 wire)
Size (mm )
2.5
0.75 1.25
Length
Max. 500 m
This will be the total extended length in the system when doing group control.
15
190
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
NOTE
2. For Asian market : Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
PRECAUTION
Connection of wiring between units, ground wire and for the remote control cord (Refer to Fig. 31)
Wiring the units and ground wire
Remove the terminal box lid and connect wires of matching number to the terminal block for wiring the units
(4 P) inside. In doing this, pull the wires inside through rubber bush A and clamp the wires along with other
wires using clamp A, untightening the clip of clamp A by pressing. After the connection, tighten clamp A as
before.
Remote controller cords (not neccessary for slave unit of simultaneous operation system)
Remove the terminal box lid (1) and pull the wires inside through rubber bush B and connect to the terminal
board for remote controller (6 P). (no polarity)
After connection, attach sealing pad (12)
Be sure to attach it to prevent the infiltration of water from the outside.
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
CAUTION
When clamping wiring, use the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on
the wiring connections and clamp firmly. When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not
cause the terminal box lids to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
When attaching the terminal box lids, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (procured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in, they
could cause short circuits in the terminal boxs.)
Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal. (Looseness in the connection
may cause overheating.) (Refer to Fig. 30)
Observe the notes when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
(Use a round crimp-style terminal with insulation sleeve for connection to the terminal block for wiring the
units. In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, connect wires of the same gauge to the both
side as shown in Fig. 30 )
Round crimp-style terminal
Electric wire
Attach insulation sleeve
Fig. 29
Fig. 30
16
Installation Manual
191
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Be sure to attach it to prevent

the infiltration of water from the outside.
How to connect wiring

1 2 3
Note)Wrap it around the wire

without leaving any space
Rubber bush
(Wiring the units and ground wire)

How to connect terminal block for
wiring the units (4P)
Sealing pad (small) (12)

(Wrap it around the wire)
Fig. 32
Wiring
(Inside) (Outside)
Rubber bush A
[How to attach sealing pads]

Note) (If there are more than 2 pieces of power supply
wires, divide the sealing pad (small) (12) into
some pieces and wrap them around each wire.)
Clamp A
Terminal block for
wiring the units (4P)
Rubber bush B
Terminal block for

remote controller (6P)

WIRING DIAGRAM
Clamp A
Fig. 31
Clip
Blue Blue Green
Fig. 33
P1 P2
Noiseless earth

(Shield wire)
(In case a shield wire is used (P16 NOTE 2))
Follow the instructions below if the wiring gets very hot due to slack in the power wiring.
In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections, and fix the wires so
that outside forces are not applied to the terminals.
If the terminal screw are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
Terminal block for remote controller
Terminal block for wiring the units
0.79 to 0.97
1.18 to 1.44
17
192
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
9. WIRING EXAMPLE
For the wiring of outdoor unit and BP unit, refer to the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit and
BP unit.
1 remote controller control: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system)
(Refer to Fig. 34)
Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units. (All indoor units operate according to the
remote controller) (Refer to Fig. 35)
Fig. 34
1 remote controller control

BP unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P2
Remote controller
(Optional accessory)
Fig. 36
Fig. 35
Group control
BP unit

BP unit
BP unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
BP unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P 1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P 2
Remote controller
P1 P2
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
P1 P2
P1 P2
Remote
Remote
controller 1 controller 2
(Slave)
NOTE
symbol.
2. In case a shielding wire is to be used, connect a shielded portion with the of a terminal block for remote
controller. (Also, connect the ground for the remote control to a grounded metal part.)
18
Installation Manual
193
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
10. FIELD SETTING

Make sure the terminal box lids are closed on the indoor unit, BP unit and outdoor unit.
Field setting must be made from the remote controller and in accordance with installation conditions.
Settings can be made by changing the Mode No, FIRST CODE NO. and SECOND CODE NO..
For setting procedures and instructions, see Field settings provided with the remote controller.
10-1 Setting ceiling height

Select the SECOND CODE NO. that corresponds to the ceiling height Table 5.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for a ceiling height of less than 2.7m .)
Table 5
Ceiling height (m)
Less than 2.7 m
N
More than 2.7 m;
H
3.0 m or less
More than 3.0 m;
S
3.5 m or less
Mode No.
FIRST CODE NO.
13 (23)
SECOND CODE NO.

01
02
03
10-2 Setting when installing high performance filters

In case of installing high performance filters, refer to the option handbook of the high performance filters.
10-3 Setting air filter sign

Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal display air filter signs to display the time to clean air filters.
Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to Table 6 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the
room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for filter contamination-light.)
Table 6
Spacing time of display air filter
sign (long life type)
Setting
Air filter contaminationlight
Air filter contaminationheavy
Mode No.
FIRST CODE
NO.
10 (20)
Approx. 2500 hrs
SECOND
CODE NO.
01
Approx. 1250 hrs
02
10-4 When implementing group control

When using as a pair unit or as a parent unit for simultaneous operation multi, you may simultaneous start/
stop (group) control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote controller.
Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as possible.
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Indoor unit 3
Group control remote control

Fig. 37
19
194
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
Wiring Method
(1) Remove the terminal box lids. (See 8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK.)
(2) Cross-wire the terminal block for remote controller (P1 P2) inside the terminal box. (There is no
polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 35 on page 18 and Table 4 on page 15)
10-5 Control by 2 remote controllers (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)

MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1) Insert a
screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and, working from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to the upper
part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 38)
(2) Turn the main/sub changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC boards to S. (Leave the
switch of the other remote controller set to M.) (Refer to Fig. 39)
Fig. 38
Fig. 39
Wiring Method (See 8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page 15)

(3) Remove the terminal box lids.
(4) Add remote control 2 (slave) to the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) in the terminal box.
(There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 36 on page 18 and Table 4 on page 15)

<Read 12. TEST OPERATION before making a test run without attaching the decorated panel.>
After installing the decoration panel, ensure that there is no space between the unit body and decoration
panel.
12. TEST OPERATION

Refer to the section of FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED. on page 4.
After finishing the construction of refrigerant piping, drain piping, and electric wiring, conduct test operation
accordingly to protect the unit.
12-1 How to test operation

1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the gas side stop valve.

Open the liquid side stop valve.
Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours.
Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button (
).
20
Installation Manual
195
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936

) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller) and
operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
6. Press AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST button (
) to make sure the unit is in operation.
9. If the decoration panel has not been installed, turn off the power after the test operation.
TEST
TEST
PRECAUTIONS
1. Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
2. After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the unit in
inspection mode, and make sure the Malfunction code is 00. (=normal)
If the code reads anything other than 00, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
NOTE
12-2 Cautions for servicing

With the power on. Troubles can be monitored on the remote controller.
If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner.
a malfunction shown in the table below may happened.
No display
88
88 flashing
Malfunction
Wrong remote control conection wiring
Fuse faulty
After turning on the power, the maximum is 90 seconds, although it will only display 88. This is not a problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
Trouble shooting with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and
and the Malfunction code are
indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by refering to the table
on the Malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor unit no with
the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
2. With the wireless remote controller.
(Refer also to the operation manual attached to the wireless remote controller)
When the operation stops due to trouble. the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case, diagnose
the fault contents with the table on the Malfunction code list looking for the Malfunction code which can be
found by following procedures. (NOTE 2)
(1) Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button,
is displayed and 0 flashes.
(2) Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps 3 short beeps Perform all the following operations
1 short beep
Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep
No trouble
(3) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the Malfunction code flashes.
(4) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper
code.
(5) Press the Operation selector button and lower figure of the Malfunction code flashes.
(6) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower code.
A long beep indicate the Malfunction code.
21
196
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
NOTE
1. In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,

2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble history disappears, after the Malfunction code goes on and off twice, followed by the code 00 (normal).
The display changes from the inspection mode to the normal mode.
12-3 Malfunction code list

For plases where the Malfunction code is left blank, the
indication is not displayed. Though the system
continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
Code
A1
A3
A6
AF
AH
AJ
C4
C5
C9
CJ
E0
E1
E3
E4
E5
E7
E9
F3
H3
H4
H7
H9
J3
J5
J6
L4
L5
L8
Malfunction/Remarks
Humidifier faulty
Air cleaner faulty
Type set improper
Sensor (R2T) for heat exchanger temperature is fault
The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is
possible.
Outdoor units PC board faulty
High pressure abnormal(outdoor unit)
Compressor motor lock malfunction
Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction
Outdoor motor position signal malfunction
22
Installation Manual
197
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
L9
LC
P1
P3
P4
PJ
U0
U1
U2
U4
UF
U5
U8
UA
UC

P-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Reverse phase
Reverse two of the L1, L2 and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction
Includes the defect in 52C.
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
mounted on the indoor and the outdoor units.
If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly
wired. Therefore, immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring.
(The compressor and the fan mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation independent of the remote controller operation.)
(Malfunction in sub remote control.)
Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main
units PC board)
23
3P156215-2C
198
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
3.9
Indoor Units
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type FBQ60/71B

Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and
be sure to install it correctly. After completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during
the start-up operation. Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store this installation manual along with the operation manual for
future reference.
WARNING .........Failure to observe a warning may result in death.

CAUTION ..........Failure to observe a caution may result in injury or damage to the equipment.
WARNING
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work. Do not try to install the air conditioner
yourself.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the equipment falling and causing injuries.
Carry out the specified installation work after considering strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires and used, and no external forces act on the terminal
connections or wires.
When wiring the power supply and connecting the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, position the
wires so that the control box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or the terminals overheating.
If the refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area immediately.
After completing the installation work, check that the refrigerant gas does not leak.
Installation Manual
199
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
CAUTION
Ground the air conditioner.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas or water pipes, lightning conductor or a telephone ground wire.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks.
While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping in order to ensure proper
drainage and insulate piping in order to prevent condensate.
Improper drain piping may result in water leakage and property damage.
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wiring at least 1 meter away from
televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the noise.)
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can result shorter than expected in rooms with electronic fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start types).
(a)where a mineral oil mist or an oil spray or vapor is produced, for example in a kitchen
(b)where corrosive gas, such as sulfurous acid gas, is produced
Electromagnetic waves may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of the
equipment.
(d)where flammable gases may leak, where there are carbon fiber or ignitable dust suspensions in the air,
or where volatile flammables such as thinner or gasoline are handled.
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening.
Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before installing the unit. (Using an incorrect refrigerant
will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
The accessories needed for installation must be retained in your custody until the installation work is completed. Do not discard them!
Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Where unpacking is
unavoidable, use a sling of soft material or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid damage or scratches to the unit.
For the installation of an outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
Do not use the unit in locations with high salt content in the air such as beachfront property, locations where
the voltage fluctuates such as factories, or in automobiles or marine vessels.
1. Precautions

Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage fluctuates
greatly such as that in factories. Also in vehicles or vessels.
200
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
2. Accessories
Check if the following accessories are included with your unit.
Name
(1) Metal clamp
Quantity
1 pc.
(2) Paper pattern for

installation
1 pc.
(3) Drain hose
Insulation for
fitting
Sealing pad
1 pc.
1 each
1 each
(4) For gas pipe
(6) Large
Shape
(5) For liquid pipe
Name
Quantity
(8) Washer for

hanger bracket
8 pcs.
Clamp
6 pcs.
(9) Large
3 pcs.
(11) Screws for fixing

the paper pattern
for installation
6 pcs.
(7) Middle
(12) Duct companion

flange connection screw
12 pcs.
(10) Small
Shape
Name (13) Small sealing pad

Quantity
2 pcs.
Shape
(Other)
Operation manual
Installation manual
Screws for fixing panels are attached to decoration panel.
Installation Manual
201
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
3. Optional accessories
For this indoor unit, the optional remote controller is necessary. In case of downward air inlet, the decoration panel and the canvas for decoration panel are necessary.
(Refer to 4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION)
Remote controller
Remote controller
BRC1C61
NOTE
If the customer wishes to use a remote controller that is not listed on the table, select a suitable remote
controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
Use the decoration panel which apply to the below table.
Model
Min. height above ceiling
FBQ60BV1
FBQ71BV1
FBQ60BVL
FBQ71BVL
Decoration panel
Color
Canvas duct for

decoration panel
White
KSAJ25K80
BYBS71DJW1
35 cm or more
Installation not required
When using the canvas duct for the decoration panel, the decoration panel needs at least 42.5 cm
of ceiling space.
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER
INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
Items to be checked
Are the indoor unit and outdoor unit fixed

firmly?
The unit may drop, vibrate or make noise.
Does the power supply voltage correspond

to that shown on the name plate?
Are wiring and piping correct?
It may result in electric shock.
Is wiring size according to specifications?

Are refrigerant piping length and additional

The refrigerant charge in the system is not

clear.
Check

Also review the 1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Items to be checked
Check
Did you explain about operations while showing the operation manual to your customer?
Did you hand the operation manual over to your customer?
202
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

The items with
WARNING and
CAUTION marks in the operation manual are the items pertaining
to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the product.
Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents and also ask
your customers to read the operation manual.
4. Note to the installer

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while
looking at the manual.

Please attach additional thermal insulation material to the unit body when it is believed that the relative humidity in the ceiling exceeds 80%. Use glass wool, polyethylene foam, or similar with a thickness of 10 mm or
more as thermal insulation material.
1. Select an installation site where the following conditions are fulfilled and that meets
your customers approval.
In the upper space (including the back of the ceiling) of the indoor unit where there is no possible
dripping of water from the refrigerant pipe, drain pipe, water pipe, etc.
Where optimum air distribution can be ensured.
Where nothing blocks air passage.
Where condensate can be properly drained.
Where the ceiling is strong enough to bear the indoor unit weight.
Where the false ceiling is not noticeably on an incline.
Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be ensured.
Where there is no risk of flammable gas leakage.
Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit. (Refer to the
installation manual for the outdoor unit.)
CAUTION
Keep indoor unit, outdoor unit, power supply wiring and transmission wiring at least 1 meter away from
televisions and radios. This is to prevent image interference and noise in those electrical appliances.
(Noise may be generated depending on the conditions under which the electric wave is generated,
even if 1 meter is kept.)
Drain pipe
Liquid pipe
300 or
more
(Service space)
Gas pipe
Maintenance
drain hose
Floor
Power supply
wiring port
Transmission
wiring port
2500 or higher
from the floor
For installation
in high places
Required service space
2. Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to
support the weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before
(Installation pitch is marked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcement.)
Installation Manual
203
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
1000 (Indoor unit)

1050
(Suspension bolt pitch)
1. Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position. (Refer to Fig. 1)
Indoor unit
Pipe
145
630
Suspension bolt (4)
(Suspension
bolt pitch)
800 (Indoor unit)
Fig. 1
For standard installation (air inlet on the both side), choose one of the below two means of installation.
NOTE
For other than standard installation, contact your Daikin dealer for details.
Ceiling
surface
462
(Ceiling opening)
120
Indoor unit
(Back side)
(120-300)
180
Canvas duct for

decoration panel
425 or more
For mounting decoration panel with canvas duct
Decoration panel
1060
(Ceiling opening)
350
or more
For mounting decoration panel directly
180
Ceiling
surface
462
Decoration panel
(Ceiling opening)
Indoor unit
(Back side)
1060
(Ceiling opening)
2. The fan speed for this indoor unit is preset to provide standard external static pressure.
If higher or lower external static pressure is required, reset the external static pressure by changing
the initial setting from the remote controller. Refer to the section entitled 10. FIELD SETTING.
204
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
3. Install the suspension bolts. (Refer to Fig. 2)

(Use M10 size bolt for the suspension bolt)
Use anchors for existing ceilings, and a sunken insert,
sunken anchor or other field supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit.
<Installation example>
Ceiling slab
Anchor
Long nut or
turn-buckle
NOTE
Suspension bolt
Indoor unit
Fig. 2

<When installing optional accessories (except for the decoration panel), read also the installation
manual for optional accessories.
Depending on the field conditions, it may be easier to install optional accessories before the indoor
unit is installed.>
Be sure to use the furnished accessories or ones that match the specifications when installing.
1. Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Field supply
(8)Washer for hanger
bracket (attached)
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to

fix it securely by using a nut and washer (8) from the upper
and lower sides of the hanger bracket. (Refer to Fig. 3)
Tighten (double nuts)
2. Check the unit is horizontally level. (Refer to Fig. 4)
Fig. 3
Level
Fig. 4
Vinyl tube
CAUTION
The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float switch. Verify that it is level by using a level
or a water-filled vinyl tube.
(If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float switch may malfunction and cause water to drip.)
3. Tighten the upper nut.

4. Fix the installation paper pattern
The paper pattern for installation corresponds with the measurements of the ceiling opening. Consult the builder for details.
Attach the paper pattern for installation to
the unit with the attached screws.
(Refer to Fig. 5)
The paper pattern for installation is marked
for 3 types of ceiling openings. Read the
notations carefully when installing.
(2) Paper pattern

for installation
(attached)
Fig. 5
(11) Screws for fixing

the paper pattern
for installation
(6 attached)
Installation Manual
205
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936

<For refrigerant piping of outdoor unit and BP unit, see the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit and BP unit.>
<Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping. Otherwise, a
water leakage can result sometimes.>
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can reach up to approximately 120C, so use
<Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed 30C or
RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensate may form on the surface of the
insulating material.>
<Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect refrigerant will
prevent normal operation of the unit.)>
CAUTION
Apply ester oil or ether oil around the flare section before connecting.
To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end or cover it
with tape.
Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant circuit, such as
air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room thoroughly right away.
Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as shown
in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/from the
unit. (Refer to Fig. 6)
When connecting the flare nut, apply ester oil or ether oil to the flare
section (both inside and outside), and spin 3-4 times before screwing
in. (Refer to Fig. 7)
Torque wrench
Spanner
Pipe union
Flare nut
NOTE
Fig. 6
Coat here with ester or ether oil
Fig. 7
Table 1
6.4
14.2 17.2N m (144 176 kgf cm)
8.7 9.1
9.5
32.7 39.9N m (333 407 kgf cm)
12.8 13.2
12.7
49.5 60.3N m (504 616 kgf cm)
16.2 16.6
15.9
61.8 75.4N m (630 770 kgf cm)
19.3 19.7
Flare
0
Flare dimensions
A (mm)
R0.4-0.8
A
90 0.5
Tightening torque
45 2
Pipe size
Refer to Table 1 to determine the proper tightening torque.

CAUTION
Over-tightening the flare nut may break it and/or cause the refrigerant to leak.
206
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench, you may
follow the installation method mentioned below
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the
tightening torque suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown
below:
Pipe size
6.4 (1/4)
9.5 (3/8)
12.7 (1/2)
15.9 (5/8)

60 to 90 degrees
60 to 90 degrees
30 to 60 degrees
30 to 60 degrees

Approx. 150mm
Approx. 200mm
Approx. 250mm
Approx. 300mm
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for
fitting (4) and (5). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (9).) (Refer to Fig. 8)
Wrap the sealing pad (7) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side. (Refer to Fig. 8)
(7) Middle sealing pad (attached)

(Wrap from the bottom up)
(4) Insulation for fitting (attached)
(for gas line)
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
(5)Insulation for fitting (attached)
(for liquid line)
Attach to the bottom

(For both gas piping
and liquid piping)
(9) Clamp (attached) (4)

Fig. 8
CAUTION
For local insulation, be sure to insulate local piping all the way into the pipe connections inside the machine.
Exposed piping may cause condensation or burns on contact.
CAUTION
flux is used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the refrigerant oil.)
piping.
If you brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping,
and could cause system malfunction.
Installation Manual
207
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 Mpa (0.2 kg/cm ) with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting
nitrogen into the piping. (Refer to Fig. 9)
Refrigerant piping
Part to be
brazed
Taping
hands valve
Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Fig. 9

1. Rig drain piping (Refer to Fig. 10, Fig. 11)
As for drain work, perform piping in such a manner that water can be drained properly.
As for drain piping, the connection can be made from three different directions.
Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section)
than that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 25 mm, outside diameter 32 mm).
Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets
from forming.
If the drain pipe cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, execute the drain raising piping.
To keep the drain pipe from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5 m.
Hanger bracket
1~1.5 m
1/100 gradient or more
Fig. 11
Fig. 10
CAUTION
Use the attached drain hose (3) and Metal clamp (1).
Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the Metal clamp securely within
the portion of a white tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the Metal clamp until the screw head is less
than 4 mm from the hose.
Wrap the attached sealing pad (6) over the Metal clamp and drain hose to insulate.
Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water
leakage due to dew condensation.
Indoor drain pipe
Drain socket
Metal clamp (1)
Metal clamp (1)

(attached)

(attached)
Drain hose (3)

Tape (White)
4 mm
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
10
208
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units

Ceiling slab
300 mm or less 1~1.5m
Hanging bracket
Adjustable (0~250mm)
(1) Metal clamp

(attached)
Drain raising pipe

(Field supplied parts)
(3) Drain hose(attached)
Fig. 14
A
When canvas duct
350 - 530
is installed
When decoration panel
275
is directly installed
100 mm
NOTE
To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (3), do not bend or twist when
installing. (This may cause leakage.)
T-joint converging drain pipes

Fig. 15
2. After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.

Open the water inlet lid, add approximately 1000 cc of water gradually and check drainage flow.
(Refer to Fig. 16)
Water inlet
Portable pump
Water inlet lid
Refrigerant pipes
Drain outlet for maintenance
(with rubber plug)
Fig. 16
Close
Open
Bucket
NOTE
Use the drain outlet for maintenance to drain water from the drain pan.
Check drainage flow during cool running, explained in the section entitled. 12. TEST OPERATION
11
Installation Manual
209
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936

CAUTION
If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after
Remove the control box lid. Connect the single phase power supply (SINGLE PHASE 50/60Hz
220-240V/220V) to connections No.1 and No.2 on the terminal block for wiring the units. Do not connect to No.3 of the terminal block for wiring the units. (The drain pump will not operate.) Connect the
ground wire firmly. When carrying out wiring work around the control box, make sure none of the connectors come undone. Be sure to attach the control box before turning on the power.
After confirming drainage (Fig. 16, Fig. 17), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
Attach the control box lid as before.
Terminal block for wiring
1 2 3
Control box
Single phase power supply

Fig. 17
For electric wiring work, refer also to 13. WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit and BP unit for the size of power supply electric
wire connected to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
Be sure to ground the air conditioner
Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, plumbing pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Gas pipes: might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
Plumbing: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Telephone ground wires or lightning rods: might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
Table 2
Wire
Wiring the units
H05VV - U4G (NOTE 1)
(NOTE 2) (2 wires)
Size (mm )
Length
2.5
0.75 - 1.25
Max. 500 m
NOTE
2. For Asian market : Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
12
210
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
PRECAUTION
Connection of wiring units, ground wire and remote controller cord. (Refer to Fig. 18 and 19)
Wiring the units and ground for the wire
Remove the control box lid and pull out the control box. (Refer to Fig. 18)
Next, pull the wires inside through the rubber bush A and connect them to their respective terminals on the
terminal block for wiring the units (4P) inside. Also, connect the ground wire to the ground terminal. In doing
this, pull the wiring through the rubber bush A and fix it in place with the clamp.
Connect the cord to the terminal block for remote controller (2P) (no polarity). In doing this, pull the wiring
through the rubber bush B and fix it in place with the clamp.
Rubber bush A
Rubber bush B
CAUTION
After wiring, adhere the attached

small sealing pad (13) around the
wires as shown below.
(Be sure to adhere it to avoid
water from outside unit.)
*Wiring the units

*Do not clamp remote
controller cords together with
wires connecting the units.
Doing so may cause
malfunction.
Note) No gap are allowed.

(Between rubber bush
and sealing material.)
Rubber bush
*Remote controller cord
Wire
Inside unit
Control box
Outside unit
Small sealing pad (13)
(Adhere it around the wire)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control box lid
Fig. 18
[ How to adhere it ]
Note) In case of two wires or more,
adhere sealing material to
each wire separately.
Grounding terminal for

the remote controller
Control box Motor lead wire

Terminal block for
wiring the units
Clamp material
Wiring the
units
123
Ground the shield

part of shield wire.
If using shield wire.
Refer to NOTE of
9. WIRING EXAMPLE
Grounding
terminal
Ground
wire
(10) Clamp (attached)
Clamp material
P1 P2
Shield part
C-cup
washer
Remote
controller
cord
(10) Clamp (attached)
Indoor PC board Terminal block for remote controller
Arrow view A
Fig. 19
13
Installation Manual
211
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
CAUTION
When clamping wiring, use the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on
the wiring connections and clamp firmly. When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not
cause the control box lid to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (procured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in, they
could cause short circuits in the control box.)
Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal. (Looseness in the connection
may cause overheating.) (Refer to Fig. 20)
Observe the notes when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
(Use a round crimp-style terminal with insulation sleeve for connection to the terminal block for wiring the
units. In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, connect wires of the same gauge to the both
side as shown in Fig. 20.)
Round crimp-style
terminal
Attach insulation
sleeve
Connect wires of the

same gauge to both
side. (GOOD)

of the same gauge to
one side. (WRONG)
Do not connect
wires of different
gauges. (WRONG)
Electric wire
Fig. 20
Follow the instructions below if the wiring gets very hot due to slack in the power wiring.
In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections, and fix the wires so
that outside forces are not applied to the terminals.
If the terminal screw are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
Tightening torque (N m)
Terminal block for remote controller
Terminal block for wiring the units
Ground terminal
0.79 to 0.97
1.18 to 1.44
1.44 to 1.94
14
212
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
9. WIRING EXAMPLE
For the wiring of outdoor unit and BP unit, refer to the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit and
BP unit.
1 remote controller control: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit (standard system). (Refer to Fig. 21)
Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units.
(All indoor units operate according to the remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 22)
Fig. 21
1 remote controller control

BP unit
1 2 3
Indoor unit
1 2 3
P1 P2
(NOTE.2)
Remote controller
P1 P2
Fig. 23
Fig. 22
Group control
BP unit
BP unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
Indoor unit
BP unit
BP unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
P1 P2
P 1 P2
P1 P2
(NOTE.2)
(NOTE.2)
P1 P2
(NOTE.2) (NOTE.2)
Remote controller
(NOTE.2)
(NOTE.2)
(NOTE.2)
P1 P2
P1 P2
Remote controller
NOTE
symbol.
2. In case a shielding wire is to be used, connect a shielded portion with the grounding terminal for remote
controller inside the control box. (Also, connect the ground for the remote control to a grounded metal part.)
15
Installation Manual
213
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
10. FIELD SETTING

<Field setting must be made from the remote controller in accordance with the installation condition.>
Setting can be made by changing the Mode No., FIRST CODE NO. and SECOND CODE NO..
For setting procedures and instructions, refer to the FIELD SETTING in the installation manual of the
remote controller.
1. Setting external static pressure

Change the SECOND CODE No. according to Table 3 depending on the resistance of the connecting duct.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 normal.)
Table 3
Mode No.
FIRST CODE NO.
FIRST CODE NO.
Normal: 49Pa (5 mmH2O)
01
High static pressure:

88/108Pa (9/11 mmH2O)
13 (23)
02
Low static pressure: 20Pa

(2 mmH2O)
03
2. Setting with installing optional accessories

Refer to the installation manual of the optional accessories for the optional accessories installation.
3. Setting air filter sign

Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal display air filer signs to display the time to clean air
filters.
Change the SECOND CODE No. according to Table 4 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for filter contamination-light)
Table 4
Setting
Air filter
contamination-light
Air filter
contamination-heavy
Spacing time of display air filter

sign (long life type)
Mode No.
FIRST CODE
NO.
Approx. 2500 hrs
SECOND
CODE NO.
01
10 (20)
Approx. 1250 hrs
0
02
4. When implementing group control

When using as a pair unit or as a parent unit for simultaneous operation multi, you may simultaneous
start/stop (group) control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote
controller.
Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as
possible.
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Indoor unit 3
Group control remote control

Fig. 24
Wiring Method
(1)Remove the control box lids. (See 8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK.)
(2)Cross-wire the terminal block for remote controller (P1 P2) inside the control box. (There is no
polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 22 on page 15 and Table 2 on page 12)
16
214
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
5. Control by 2 remote controllers

(Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1)Insert a
screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and,
working from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to
the upper part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 25)
(2)Turn the MAIN/SUB changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC board to S.
(Leave the switch of the other remote controller set to M.) (Refer to Fig. 26)
Upper part of remote controller

S
M
(Factory setting)
Lower part of
remote
controller
Insert the screwdriver here and gently
work off the upper part of remote controller.
Fig. 25
S
M
Remote controller
PC board
(Only one remote controller

needs to be changed
if factory settings have
remained untouched.)
Fig. 26
Wiring Method (See 8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page 12)

(3)Remove the control box lids.
(4)Add remote control 2 (slave) to the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) in the control
box. (There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 23 on page 15 and Table 2 on page 12)

After installing the decoration panel, ensure that there is no space between the unit body and decoration
panel.
12. TEST OPERATION

Refer to the section of FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED .
After finishing the construction of refrigerant piping, drain piping, and electric wiring, conduct test operation
accordingly to protect the unit.
1. How to test operation

1. Open the gas side stop valve.
2. Open the liquid side stop valve.
3. Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours (Not required in case of a unit exclusively designed for cooling
only).
4. Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button (
).
) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller) and operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
TEST
TEST
17
Installation Manual
215
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
PRECAUTIONS
Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the
unit in inspection mode, and make sure the Malfunction code is 00 (=normal).
If the code reads anything other than 00, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
NOTE
2. Cautions for servicing

With the power on. Troubles can be monitored on the remote controller.
If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner.
a malfunction shown in the table below may happened.
No display
88
88 flashing
Malfunction
Wrong remote control connection wiring
Fuse faulty
After turning on the power, the maximum is 90 seconds, although it will only display 88. This is not
a problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
Trouble shooting with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and
and the Malfunction
code are indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by refering to the table on the Malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that
the indoor unit no with the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
NOTE
1. In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,
2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble
history disappears, after the Malfunction code goes on and off twice, followed by the code 00(normal). The display changes from the inspection mode to the normal mode.
3. Malfunction code
For places where the Malfunction code is left blank, the
indication is not displayed. Though the
system continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
Code
Malfunction/Remarks
A1
A3
A6
A7
Swing flap motor locked

Only the air flow direction can not be controlled.
AF
Humidifier faulty
AH
Air cleaner faulty

18
216
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Indoor Units
AJ
Type set improper

C4
C5
C9
CJ

The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is possible.
E0
E1
Outdoor units PC board faulty (outdoor unit)
E3
High pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
E4
E5
Compressor motor lock malfunction (outdoor unit)
E7

Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction (outdoor unit)
E9
F3
H3
H4
H7
Outdoor motor position signal malfunction (outdoor unit)
H9
J3
J5
J6
L4
L5
L8
L9

LC
P1
P3
PC board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
P4
PJ

U0
U1
U2
Reverse phase
Reverse two of the L1, L2 and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction (outdoor unit)
Includes the defect in K1M.
19
Installation Manual
217
Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
U4
UF
U5
U8
UA
UC

Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board mounted
on the indoor and the outdoor units.
If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly wired.
Therefore, immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring. (The compressor and the fan mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation independent of the
remote controller operation.)
(Malfunction in sub remote control.)
Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system.
(see switch SS2 on the main units PC board)
20
3P156215-4C
218
Installation Manual
EDSG18-936
Part 4
Operation Manual
1. Operations...........................................................................................220
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RMKS112/140/160E Series .................................................................220

FTKS, FDKS Series .............................................................................221
FFQ25/35/50/60B Series......................................................................275
FCQ35/50/60/71B Series .....................................................................288
FBQ60/71B Series ...............................................................................299
Operation Manual
219
Operations
EDSG18-936
1. Operations
1.1
RMKS112/140/160E Series
REGARDING USE
Super Multi Plus System air conditioner
POINTS THE CUSTOMER SHOULD BE AWARE OF

COMFORT
At startup
After the power is initially turned on, it will take approx. 10 minutes until startup. Usually the unit will start
in 3 minutes.
Heating operation (Not for a unit for cooling only)

The colder it is outside or the greater the number of indoor units, the longer the time required from the
start of operation until the emission of warm air (around 35C). When the outside temperature is -5 to
2C, the inside temperature is 5 to 10C, and total indoor unit combination is 100% capacity, the first startup of all indoor units in the morning will take approximately 20 to 30 minutes.
Oil return operation will be performed once every 8 hours to preserve the lubrication of oil to the compressor.
Since operation is switched to cooling cycle during heating operation in order to return the oil, heating
operation will not be possible for around 5 to 10 minutes.
When the outside temperature is 28C or higher, the unit will be set to the standby mode for protection.
OPERATING NOISE
At startup
During startup, in order to emit warm or cool air as quickly as possible, the sound of refrigerant flowing
will be heard for a short time (1 to 2 minutes) from the outdoor unit.
At shutdown
In order to ensure smooth startup the next time this unit is operated, the outdoor unit will continue to oper-
ate for around 1 minutes after shutdown. (The time of continued operation depends on the outside temperature, capacity of connected indoor units, and connection pipe length.)
Cooling at low outside temperatures

During cooling operation when the outside temperature is 20C or less, the fan of the outdoor unit will
operate at low speed to preserve capacity and the outdoor unit valve will be opened depending on the
pressure conditions, making it more likely that the sound of refrigerant flowing will be heard.
Defrost (Not for a unit for cooling only)

When the outside unit is performing defrosting operation, the fan of the indoor unit will stop temporarily,
and the slight sound of refrigerant flowing will be heard.
Excessive heating load (Not for a unit for cooling only)

During heating operation when the outside temperature is high (15 to 24C), the fan of the outdoor unit
will be operated at low speed, making it more likely that the sound of refrigerant flowing will be heard from
the outdoor unit.
3PN07192-3
220
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
1.2
FTKS, FDKS Series
1.2.1
Manual Contents and Reference Page

Wall Mounted Type
Model Series
Duct Connected Type
FTKS25/35D
FTKS50/60/71
FTKS50B
FDKS25/35CA
FDKS50/60C
FDKS25/35EA
222
222
222
222
222
Read before Operation

Safety Precautions
Names of Parts
224
227
230
233
233
Preparation before Operation
236
236
236
236
236
DRY, COOL, FAN Operation
239
239
239
239
239
Adjusting the Airflow Direction
241
243
243
POWERFUL Operation
245
245
245
245
245
OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation
246
246
246
246
246
ECONO Operation
247
MOLD PROOF Operation
248
249
Operation
249
249
249
251
253
253
TIMER Operation
255
255
255
255
255
Note for Multi System
257
257
257
257
257
259
262
265
268
270
Care
Care and Cleaning
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Drawing No.
272
272
272
272
272
3P194550-4C
3P192025-1
3P098595-11P
3P196326-8C
3P196326-9C
: Illustrations are for wall mounted type FTKS50/60/71F as representative.
Operation Manual
221
Operations
1.2.2
EDSG18-936
Safety Precautions
Safety precautions
Keep this manual where the operator can easily find them.
Read this manual attentively before starting up the unit.
For safety reason the operator must read the following cautions carefully.
This manual classifies precautions into WARNING and CAUTION. Be sure to follow all precautions below: they are all
important for ensuring safety.
WARNING
CAUTION
If you do not follow these instructions exactly, the unit may

cause property damage, personal injury or loss of life.
If you do not follow these instructions exactly, the unit may

cause minor or moderate property damage or personal injury.
Never do.
Be sure to follow the instructions.
Be sure to earth the air conditioner.
Never cause the air conditioner (including the remote

controller) to get wet.
Never touch the air conditioner (including the remote

controller) with a wet hand.
WARNING
In order to avoid fire, explosion or injury, do not operate the unit when harmful, among which flammable or
corrosive gases, are detected near the unit.
It is not good for health to expose your body to the air flow for a long time.
Do not put a finger, a rod or other objects into the air outlet or inlet. As the fan is rotating at a high speed, it will
cause injury.
Do not attempt to repair, relocate, modify or reinstall the air conditioner by yourself. Incorrect work will cause electric
shocks, fire etc.
For repairs and reinstallation, consult your Daikin dealer for advice and information.
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner is safe. Although leaks should not occur, if for some
reason any refrigerant happens to leak into the room, make sure it does not come in contact
with any flame as of gas heaters, kerosene heaters or gas range.
If the air conditioner is not cooling (heating) properly, the refrigerant may be leaking, so call your dealer.
When carrying out repairs accompanying adding refrigerant, check the content of the repairs with our service staff.
Do not attempt to install the air conditioner by your self. Incorrect work will result in water leakage, electric shocks or
fire. For installation, consult the dealer or a qualified technician.
In order to avoid electric shock, fire or injury, if you detect any abnormally such as smell of fire, stop the operation and
turn off the breaker. And call your dealer for instructions.
CAUTION
The air conditioner must be earthed. Incomplete earthing may result in electric shocks. Do not connect the
earth line to a gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod, or a telephone earth line.
In order to avoid any quality deterioration, do not use the unit for cooling precision instruments, food, plants,
animals or works of art.
Never expose little children, plants or animals directly to the air flow.
Do not place appliances which produce open fire in places exposed to the air flow from the unit or under the
indoor unit. It may cause incomplete combustion or deformation of the unit due to the heat.
Do not block air inlets nor outlets. Impaired air flow may result in insufficient performance or trouble.
222
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Do not stand or sit on the outdoor unit. Do not place any object on the unit to avoid injury, do not remove the fan guard.
Do not place anything under the indoor or outdoor unit that must be kept away from moisture. In certain conditions,
moisture in the air may condense and drip.
After a long use, check the unit stand and fittings for damage.
Do not touch the air inlet and aluminum fins of outdoor unit. It may cause injury.
The appliance is not intended for use by young children or infirm persons without supervision.
Young children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
To avoid oxygen deficiency, ventilate the room sufficiently if equipment with burner is used together with the
air conditioner.
Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation, turn the breaker off or pull out the supply cord.
Do not connect the air conditioner to a power supply different from the one as specified. It may cause trouble or fire.
Depending on the environment, an earth leakage breaker must be installed. Lack of an earth leakage breaker may
result in electric shocks.
Arrange the drain hose to ensure smooth drainage. Incomplete draining may cause wetting of the building, furniture
etc.
Do not place objects in direct proximity of the outdoor unit and do not let leaves and other debris accumulate around
the unit.
Leaves are a hotbed for small animals which can enter the unit. Once in the unit, such animals can cause malfunctions, smoke or fire when making contact with electrical parts.
Do not operate the air conditioner with wet hands.
Do not wash the indoor unit with excessive water, only use a slightly wet cloth.
Do not place things such as vessels containing water or anything else on top of the unit. Water may penetrate into the unit and degrade electrical insulations, resulting in an electric shock.
Installation site.
To install the air conditioner in the following types of environments, consult the dealer.
Places with an oily ambient or where steam or soot occurs.
Salty environment such as coastal areas.
Places where sulfide gas occurs such as hot springs.
Places where snow may block the outdoor unit.
The drain from the outdoor unit must be discharged to a place of good drainage.
Consider nuisance to your neighbours from noises.

For installation, choose a place as described below.
A place solid enough to bear the weight of the unit which does not amplify the operation noise or vibration.
A place from where the air discharged from the outdoor unit or the operation noise will not annoy
your neighbours.
Electrical work.
For power supply, be sure to use a separate power circuit dedicated to the air conditioner.
System relocation.
Relocating the air conditioner requires specialized knowledge and skills. Please consult the dealer if relocation is necessary for moving or remodeling.
Operation Manual
223
Operations
1.2.3
EDSG18-936
Names of Parts
FTKS25/35D
Names of parts
Indoor Unit
1
5
7
11
10
8
16
14
13
15
ON/OFF
224
12
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Outdoor Unit
17
22
19
20
18
21
Indoor Unit
1. Air filter
2. Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic
Air-Purifying Filter:
These filters are attached to the inside of the air
filters.
12. Indoor Unit ON/OFF switch:

Push this switch once to start operation.
Push once again to stop it.
The operation mode refers to the following
table.
3. Air inlet
Mode
4. Front panel
COOL
5. Panel tab
6. Room temperature sensor:
It senses the air temperature around the unit.
7. INTELLIGENT EYE sensor:
It detects the movements of people and automatically switches between normal operation
and energy saving operation.
8. Display
9. Air outlet
10. Flaps (horizontal blades)
11. Louvers (vertical blades):
The louvers are inside of the air outlet.
Temperature
setting
22C
Air flow
rate
AUTO
This switch is useful when the remote controller

is missing.
13. Operation lamp (green)
14. TIMER lamp (yellow)
15. INTELLIGENT EYE lamp (green)
16. Signal receiver:
It receives signals from the remote controller.
When the unit receives a signal, you will hear a
short beep.
Operation start .............beep-beep
Settings changed..........beep
Operation stop ..............beeeeep
Outdoor Unit
17. Air inlet: (Back and side)
18. Air outlet
19. Refrigerant piping and inter-unit cable
20. Drain hose
21. Earth terminal:

It is inside of this cover.
22. Outside air temperature sensor:
It senses the ambient temperature around the
unit.
Appearance of the outdoor unit may differ from some models.
Operation Manual
225
Operations
EDSG18-936
Remote Controller
1
ECONO
ON/OFF
3
POWERFUL
TEMP
4
7
8
13
MODE
FAN
SWING
QUIET MOLD PROOF SENSOR
ON
CANCEL
9
10
12
11
16
OFF
TIMER
18
17
15
14
<ARC433B47>
1. Signal transmitter:
It sends signals to the indoor unit.
2. Display:
It displays the current settings.
(In this illustration, each section is shown
with all its displays ON for the purpose of
explanation.)
3. ECONO button:
ECONO operation.
4. POWERFUL button:
POWERFUL operation
5. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons:
It changes the temperature setting.
6. ON/OFF button:
Press this button once to start operation.
Press once again to stop it.
7. MODE selector button:
It selects the operation mode.
(DRY/COOL/FAN)
226
8. QUIET button: OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET

operation.
9. FAN setting button:
It selects the air flow rate setting.
10. SWING button:
Adjusting the Air Flow Direction.
11. MOLD PROOF button:
MOLD PROOF operation.
12. SENSOR button: INTELLIGENT EYE
operation.
13. ON TIMER button
14. OFF TIMER button
15. TIMER Setting button:
It changes the time setting.
16. TIMER CANCEL button:
It cancels the timer setting.
17. CLOCK button
18. RESET button:
Restart the unit if it freezes.
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
FTKS50/60/71F
Names of parts
Indoor Unit
3
2
5
6
10
11
7
8
12
16
13
15
14
Operation Manual
227
Operations
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Unit
17
19
20
21
18
Indoor Unit
1. Air filter
2. Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic
3. Air inlet
4. Front panel
5. Panel tab
14. HOME LEAVE lamp (red):

Lights up when you use HOME LEAVE
Operation.
The operation mode refer to the following table.

It detects the movements of people and
automatically switches between normal operation
Mode
COOL
9. Air outlet
10. Flap (horizontal blade):
The Louvers are inside of the air outlet.
Air flow rate

AUTO

is missing.

8. Display
Temperature
setting
22C

short beep.
13. TIMER lamp (yellow):
Outdoor Unit
20. Drain hose
18. Air outlet
21. Earth terminal:

228
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Remote Controller
1
3
6
9
11
7
8
13
ON
CANCEL
12
10
16
OFF
TIMER
18
17
15
14
< ARC433B71 >

2. Display:
(In this illustration, each section is shown with all
its displays ON for the purpose of explanation.)
3. HOME LEAVE button:
4. POWERFUL button:
POWERFUL operation
6. ON/OFF button:
(DRY/COOL/FAN)
Operation Manual

operation
10. SENSOR button: INTELLIGENT EYE
operation
11. SWING button:
Flap (Horizontal blade)
12. SWING button:
Louver (Vertical blades)
13. ON TIMER button:
14. OFF TIMER button:
17. CLOCK button:
18. RESET button:
Use a thin object to push.
229
Operations
EDSG18-936
FTKS50B
Indoor Unit
4
2
10
15
6
7
11
12
14
13
Main unit control panel
17
16
230
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Outdoor Unit
18
20
21
22
19
Indoor Unit
1. Air filter
2. Air purifying filter with photocatalytic
deodorizing function:
These filters are attached to the inside of the air
filters.

The operation mode refer to the following table.
3. Air inlet
FTKS
FTXS
4. Front grille
5. Grille tab
It detects the movements of people and
automatically switches between normal operation
7. Display
8. Air outlet
9. Flap (horizontal blade)
The Louvers are inside of the air outlet.
Lights up when you use HOME LEAVE
Operation.
Temperature
setting
COOL
22C
25C
AUTO
Mode
Air flow
rate
AUTO
AUTO

is missing.
15. Packaging materials: 50 class only
If any packaging materials are included,
please remove before operating.
short beep.
Outdoor Unit
21. Drain hose
19. Air outlet
22. Earth terminal:

Operation Manual
231
Operations
EDSG18-936
Remote Controller
1
ON
HOME LEAVE
ON/OFF
3
POWERFUL
TEMP
4
7
MODE
SILENT
FAN
SENSOR SWING
8
13
ON
CANCEL
OFF
9
11
12
10
16
17
TIMER
15
14
< ARC433A21, A22 >

2. Display:
(In this illustration, each section is shown with all
its displays ON for the purpose of explanation.)
for HOME LEAVE operation
4. POWERFUL button:
for POWERFUL operation
It changes the temperature of time setting.
6. ON/OFF button:
(AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/FAN)
232
8. SILENT button: for OUTDOOR UNIT

SILENT operation
10. SENSOR button: for INTELLIGENT EYE
operation
11. SWING button:
Flap (Horizontal blade)
12. SWING button:
Louver (Vertical blades)
13. ON TIMER button
17. CLOCK button
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
FDKS25/35CA, FDKS50/60C, FDKS25/35EA
Names of parts
Indoor Unit
1
3
6
8
7
9
10
Operation Manual
233
Operations
EDSG18-936
Outdoor Unit
11
12
13
15
14
Indoor Unit
1. Air outlet
2. Air outlet grille: (Field supply)
Appearance of the Air outlet grille and Air inlet
grille may differ with some models.
3. Display, Control panel

is missing.
4. Suction grille: (Option)

Appearance of the suction grille and Air inlet
grille may differ with some models.
The operation mode refers to the following table.
5. Air inlet
F(C)DKS COOL
F(C)DXS AUTO

Mode
Temperature
setting
22C
25C
Air flow
rate
AUTO
AUTO

LIghts up when you use HOME LEAVE
operation.
Outdoor Unit
14. Earth terminal:

13. Drain hose
15. Air outlet
234
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Remote Controller
1
3
6
9
7
8
13
10
15
14
12
11
ARC433B69, B76
2. Display:
(In this illustration, each section is shown
with all its displays ON for the purpose of
explanation.)
4. POWERFUL button:
POWERFUL operation
6. ON/OFF button:
Operation Manual

(AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/FAN)
operation
10. ON TIMER button
14. CLOCK button
15. RESET button:
Use a thin object to push.
235
Operations
1.2.4
EDSG18-936
Preparation before Operation
Preparation Before Operation

To set the batteries
1. Slide the front cover to take it off.
Position + and
correctly!
2. Set two dry batteries (AAA).
3. Set the front cover as before.
3
1
ATTENTION
About batteries
When replacing the batteries, use batteries of the same type, and replace the two old batteries
together.
When the system is not used for a long time, take the batteries out.
We recommend replacing once a year, although if the remote controller display begins to fade or if
reception deteriorates, please replace with new alkali batteries. Using manganese batteries reduces
the lifespan.
The attached batteries are provided for the initial use of the system.
The usable period of the batteries may be short depending on the manufactured date of the air
conditioner.
236
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Preparation Before Operation

To operate the remote
controller
To use the remote controller, aim the transmitter at
the indoor unit. If there is anything to block signals
between the unit and the remote controller, such
as a curtain, the unit will not operate.
Do not drop the remote controller. Do not get it wet.
The maximum distance for communication is
about 7m.
Receiver
To fix the remote controller

holder on the wall
1. Choose a place from where the
signals reach the unit.
2. Fix the holder to a wall, a pillar, or
similar location with the screws
procured locally.
3. Place the remote controller in the
remote controller holder.
Remote controller
holder
Set.
To remove, pull it upwards.
ATTENTION
About remote controller
Never expose the remote controller to direct sunlight.
Dust on the signal transmitter or receiver will reduce the sensitivity. Wipe off dust with soft cloth.
Signal communication may be disabled if an electronic-starter-type fluorescent lamp (such as
inverter-type lamps) is in the room. Consult the shop if that is the case.
If the remote controller signals happen to operate another appliance, move that appliance to
somewhere else, or consult the shop.
Operation Manual
237
Operations
EDSG18-936
To set the clock

1. Press CLOCK button.
is displayed.
blinks.
2. Press TIMER setting button to

set the clock to the present time.
Holding down or button
rapidly increases or decreases the time
display.
3. Press CLOCK button.

blinks.
Turn the breaker ON

Turning ON the breaker opens the flap, then
closes it again. (This is a normal procedure.)
2
ON
CANCEL
1, 3
OFF
TIMER
NOTE
Tips for saving energy
Be careful not to cool the room too much.
Keeping the temperature setting at a moderate level helps save energy.
Cover windows with a blind or a curtain.
Blocking sunlight and air from outdoors increases the cooling effect.
Clogged air filters cause inefficient operation and waste energy. Clean them
once in about every two weeks.
Recommended temperature setting

For cooling:26C 28C
Please note
The air conditioner always consumes 15-35 watts of electricity even while it is not operating.
If you are not going to use the air conditioner for a long period, for example in spring or autumn, turn the breaker OFF.
Use the air conditioner in the following conditions.
Mode
Operating conditions
If operation is continued out of this range
COOL
Outdoor temperature:
<3MKS50/4MKS71> 10 to 46C
<4MKS80> 10 to 46C
<RKS> 10 to 46C
Indoor temperature: 18 to 32C
Indoor humidity: 80% max.
A safety device may work to stop the operation.

(In multi system, it may work to stop the operation of the
outdoor unit only.)
Condensation may occur on the indoor unit and drip.
DRY
Outdoor temperature:
<3MKS50/4MKS71> 10 to 46C
<4MKS80> 10 to 46C
<RKS> 10 to 46C
Indoor temperature: 18 to 32C
Indoor humidity: 80% max.
A safety device may work to stop the operation.

Condensation may occur on the indoor unit and drip.
Operation outside this humidity or temperature range may cause a safety device to disable the system.
238
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
1.2.5
Operations
DRY COOL FAN Operation
DRY COOL FAN Operation

The air conditioner operates with the operation mode of your
choice.
From the next time on, the air conditioner will operate with the
same operation mode.
To start operation
1. Press MODE selector button
and select a operation mode.
Each pressing of the button advances the
mode setting in sequence.
: DRY
2, 3
1
: COOL
: FAN
5
ON
CANCEL
2. Press ON/OFF button.

OFF
The OPERATION lamp lights up.
TIMER
To stop operation
3. Press ON/OFF button again.
Then OPERATION lamp goes off.
To change the temperature setting

4. Press TEMPERATURE adjustment button.
DRY or FAN mode
COOL mode
Press
The temperature setting is not variable.
Operation Manual
to raise the temperature and press
to lower the temperature.
Set to the temperature you like.
239
Operations
EDSG18-936
To change the air flow rate setting

5. Press FAN setting button.
DRY mode
COOL or FAN mode

Five levels of air flow rate setting from
plus
to
are available.
The air flow rate setting is not variable.
Indoor unit quiet operation

When the air flow is set to , the noise from the indoor unit will become quieter.
Use this when making the noise quieter.
The unit might lose capacity when the air flow rate is set to a weak level.
NOTE
Note on COOL operation
This air conditioner cools the room by blowing the hot air in the room outside, so if the
outside temperature is high, performance drops.
Note on DRY operation
The computer chip works to rid the room of humidity while maintaining the temperature as
much as possible. It automatically controls temperature and fan strength, so manual
adjustment of these functions is unavailable.
Note on air flow rate setting
At smaller air flow rates, the cooling effect is also smaller.
240
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
1.2.6
Operations
Adjusting the Airflow Direction
FTKS25/35D
Adjusting the Air Flow Direction

You can adjust the air flow direction to increase your comfort.
To adjust the horizontal

blades (flaps)
1. Press SWING button.
is displayed on the LCD and the flaps
will begin to swing.
2. When the flaps have reached the

desired position, press SWING
button once more.
The display will go blank.
The flaps will stop moving.
4
ECONO
POWERFUL
ON/OFF
TEMP
MODE
SWING
FAN
ON
1, 2
CANCEL
OFF
TIMER
Operation Manual
241
Operations
EDSG18-936
To adjust the vertical blades

(louvers)
Hold the knob and move the louvers.
(You will find a knob on the left-side and the right-side blades.)
When the unit is installed in the corner of a room,
the direction of the louvers should be facing away
from the wall.
If they face the wall, the wall will block off the wind,
causing the cooling efficiency to drop.
Notes on flaps and louvers angles

When SWING button is selected, the
flaps swinging range depends on the
operation mode. (See the figure.)
If the unit is operated after being stopped
with the flaps pointed down in cooling or dry
operation, the flaps will automatically move
to a horizontal position after about one hour
to prevent condensation from forming on
them.
ATTENTION
Always use a remote controller to adjust the
flaps angle. If you attempt to move it forcibly
with hand when it is swinging, the
mechanism may be broken.
Be careful when adjusting the louvers.
Inside the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high
speed.
242
In DRY mode or COOL mode

When stop operation
10
Upper limit
50
Lower limit
In FAN mode
When stop operation 5

Upper limit
70
Lower limit
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
FTKS50/60/71F, FTKS50B
Adjusting the Air Flow Direction

You can adjust the air flow direction to increase your
comfort.
To adjust the horizontal

blade (flap)
1. Press SWING button

is displayed on the LCD and the
flaps will begin to swing.
2. When the flap has reached the

desired position,
press SWING button
once
more.
1, 2
The flap will stop moving.

3, 4
disappears from the LCD.

ON
CANCEL
OFF
TIMER
To adjust the vertical blades (louvers)

3. Press SWING button

is displayed on the LCD.
4. When the louvers have reached the desired position, press the
SWING button
once more.
The louvers will stop moving.

12
Operation Manual
243
Operations
EDSG18-936
To 3-D Airflow
1. 3. Press the SWING button
and the SWING button
:
the and
display will light up and the flap and louvers will
move in turn.
To cancel 3-D Airflow

2. 4. Press either the SWING button
or the SWING button
Notes on louvers angles

ATTENTION
Always use a remote controller to adjust the louvers angles. In side the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a
high speed.
Notes on flap angle

When SWING button is selected, the flaps swinging
range depends on the operation mode. (See the figure.)
Three-Dimensional (3-D) Airflow
Using three-dimensional airflow circulates cold air,
which tends to collected at the bottom of the room, and
hot air, which tends to collect near the ceiling,
throughout the room, preventing areas of cold and hot
developing.
ATTENTION
Always use a remote controller to adjust the flaps angle.
If you attempt to move it forcibly with hand when it is
swinging, the mechanism may be broken.
Be careful when adjusting the louvers. Inside the air
outlet, fan is rotating at a high speed.
In COOL or DRY mode
STOP
COOL
approx. 10~40
DRY
approx. 5~35
In FAN mode
STOP
FAN
approx. 5~55
13
244
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
1.2.7
Operations
POWERFUL Operation
POWERFUL Operation
POWERFUL operation quickly maximizes the cooling effect
in any operation mode. You can get the maximum capacity.
To start POWERFUL
operation
1. Press POWERFUL button.
POWERFUL operation ends in 20 minutes.
Then the system automatically operates
again with the settings which were used
before POWERFUL operation.
When using Powerful operation, there are
some functions which are not available.

4
1, 2
To cancel POWERFUL
operation
2. Press POWERFUL button
again.

ON
CANCEL
OFF
TIMER
NOTE
Notes on POWERFUL operation
POWERFUL Operation cannot be used together with QUIET Operation. Priority is given to
the function of whichever button is pressed last.
POWERFUL Operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing the operation stop button
causes the settings to be canceled, and the disappears from the LCD.
In COOL mode
To maximize the cooling effect, the capacity of outdoor unit must be increased and the air
flow rate be fixed to the maximum setting.
The temperature and air flow settings are not variable.
In DRY mode
The temperature setting is lowered by 2.5C and the air flow rate is slightly increased.
In FAN mode
The air flow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.
When using priority-room setting
See Note for multi system
Operation Manual
245
Operations
1.2.8
EDSG18-936

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation lowers the noise
level of the outdoor unit by changing the frequency and
fan speed on the outdoor unit. This function is
convenient during night.
To start OUTDOOR UNIT

QUIET operation
1. Press QUIET button.

To cancel OUTDOOR UNIT

QUIET operation
2. Press QUIET button again.

1, 2
ON
CANCEL
OFF
TIMER
NOTE
Note on OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation
If using a multi system, this function will work only when the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
operation is set on all operated indoor units.
However, if using priority-room setting, see Note for multi system.
This function is available in COOL mode.
(This is not available in FAN and DRY mode.)
POWERFUL operation and OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation cannot be used at the
same time.
Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.
If operation is stopped using the remote controller or the main unit ON/OFF switch when
using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation,
will remain on the remote controller
display.
246
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
1.2.9
Operations
ECONO Operation
ECONO Operation
ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by lowering the maximum power consumption value.
To start ECONO operation

1. Press ECONO button .
To cancel ECONO operation
2. Press ECONO button again.
1, 2
ECONO
POWERFUL
ON/OFF
TEMP
MODE
FAN
SWING
ON
CANCEL
OFF
TIMER
NOTE
ECONO Operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing the operation stop
button causes the settings to be canceled, and the disappears from the LCD.
ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by limiting the power
consumption of the outdoor unit (operating frequency).
ECONO operation functions in COOL and DRY modes. The fan strength does not change
in ECONO operation.
POWERFUL operation and ECONO operation cannot be used at the same time.
Priority is given to POWERFUL operation.
Power consumption may not drop even if ECONO operation is used, when the level of
power consumption is already low.
Operation Manual
247
Operations
EDSG18-936
1.2.10 MOLD PROOF Operation
MOLD PROOF Operation

MOLD PROOF operation is a function which reduces the spread of mold by using Fan mode to lower
the humidity inside the indoor unit.
To set MOLD PROOF

operation
1. Press and hold the MOLD PROOF
button for two seconds.
To cancel MOLD PROOF

operation
2. Press and hold the MOLD PROOF
button for two seconds one more
time.
ECONO
POWERFUL
ON/OFF
TEMP
MODE
SWING
FAN
1, 2
ON
CANCEL
OFF
TIMER
NOTE
MOLD PROOF operation will operate for approximately one hour after dry or cooling mode
is turned off.
This function is not designed to remove existing dust or mold.
MOLD PROOF operation is not available when the unit is turned off using the OFF TIMER.
248
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
1.2.11 HOME LEAVE Operation

HOME LEAVE operation is a function which allows you to record your preferred temperature and air
flow rate settings.
To start HOME LEAVE

operation
1. Press HOME LEAVE button.

The HOME LEAVE lamp lights up.
4
1, 2
To cancel HOME LEAVE

operation
2. Press HOME LEAVE button again.


ON
The HOME LEAVE lamp goes off.
CANCEL
OFF
TIMER
Before using HOME LEAVE operation.

To set the temperature and air flow rate for HOME LEAVE operation
When using HOME LEAVE operation for the first time, please set the temperature and air flow rate
for HOME LEAVE operation. Record your preferred temperature and air flow rate.
Initial setting
temperature
Cooling
25C
Selectable range
Air flow rate
temperature
18-32C
Air flow rate

5 step,
and
1. Press HOME LEAVE button. Make sure is displayed in the remote

controller display.
2. Adjust the set temperature with
or
as you like.
3. Adjust the air flow rate with FAN setting button as you like.
Home leave operation will run with these settings the next time you use the unit. To change
the recorded information, repeat steps 1 3.
Operation Manual
249
Operations
EDSG18-936
Whats the HOME LEAVE operation?

Is there a set temperature and air flow rate which is most comfortable, a set temperature and air flow rate which
you use the most? HOME LEAVE operation is a function that allows you to record your favorite set temperature
and air flow rate. You can start your favorite operation mode simply by pressing the HOME LEAVE button on the
remote controller. This function is convenient in the following situations.
Useful in these cases

1.Use as an energy-saving mode.
Set the temperature 2-3C higher (cooling) than normal. Setting the fan strength to the lowest setting allows the
unit to be used in energy-saving mode. Also convenient for use while you are out or sleeping.
Every day before you leave the house...
When you go out, push the HOME LEAVE

Operation button, and the air conditioner
will adjust capacity to reach the preset
temperature for HOME LEAVE Operation.
When you return, you will be

welcomed by a comfortably air
conditioned room.
Push the HOME LEAVE Operation

button again, and the air conditioner
will adjust capacity to the set
temperature for normal operation.
The unit will maintain the

temperature in the room at a
comfortable level while you sleep.
When you enter the living room in the

morning, the temperature will be just right.
Before bed...
Set the unit to HOME LEAVE

Operation before leaving the living
room when going to bed.
Disengaging HOME LEAVE Operation

will return the temperature to that set
for normal operation. Even the coldest
winters will pose no problem!
2.Use as a favorite mode.

Once you record the temperature and air flow rate settings you most often use, you can retrieve them by
pressing HOME LEAVE button. You do not have to go through troublesome remote control operations.
NOTE
Once the temperature and air flow rate for HOME LEAVE operation are set, those settings will be
used whenever HOME LEAVE operation is used in the future. To change these settings, please refer
to the Before using HOME LEAVE operation section above.
HOME LEAVE operation is only available in COOL mode. Cannot be used in DRY, and FAN mode.
HOME LEAVE operation runs in accordance with the previous operation mode (COOL) before using
HOME LEAVE operation.
HOME LEAVE operation and POWERFUL operation cannot be used at the same time.
Last button that was pressed has priority.
The operation mode cannot be changed while HOME LEAVE operation is being used.
When operation is shut off during HOME LEAVE operation, using the remote controller or the indoor
unit ON/OFF switch, will remain on the remote controller display.
250
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
1.2.12 INTELLIGENT EYE Operation

FTKS25/35D

INTELLIGENT EYE is the infrared sensor which
detects the human movement.
To start INTELLIGENT
EYE operation
1. Press SENSOR button.

To cancel the
INTELLIGENT EYE
operation
2. Press SENSOR button again.

[EX.]
When somebody in the room
Normal operation.
4
ECONO
POWERFUL
ON/OFF
TEMP
MODE
FAN
SWING
1, 2
ON
CANCEL
OFF
TIMER
When nobody in the room

20 min. after, start energy saving
operation.
Somebody back in the room

Back to normal operation.
Operation Manual
251
Operations
EDSG18-936
INTELLIGENT EYE is useful for Energy Saving.

Energy saving operation
Change the temperature +2C in cooling / +2C in dry mode from set temperature.
Decrease the air flow rate slightly in fan operation. (In FAN mode only)
Notes on INTELLIGENT EYE

Application range is as follows.
Vertical angle 90
(Side View)
Horizontal angle 110

(Top View)
90
7m
55 55
7m
Sensor may not detect moving objects further than 7m away. (Check the application range)
Sensor detection sensitivity changes according to indoor unit location, the speed of passersby, temperature range, etc.
The sensor also mistakenly detects pets, sunlight, fluttering curtains and light reflected off of
mirrors as passersby.
INTELLIGENT EYE operatipon will not go on during powerful operation.
Night set mode will not go on during you use INTELLIGENT EYE operation.
CAUTION
Do not place large objects near the sensor.
Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the sensors detection area. This sensor can
detect objects it shouldnt as well as not detect objects it should.
Do not hit or violently push the INTELLIGENT EYE sensor. This can lead to damage and
malfunction.
252
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
FTKS50/60/71F, FTKS50B

INTELLIGENT EYE is the infrared sensor which
detects the human movement.
To start INTELLIGENT
EYE operation
1. Press SENSOR button.

To cancel the
INTELLIGENT EYE
operation
2. Press SENSOR button again.

[EX.]
1, 2
ON
When somebody in the room
CANCEL
OFF
TIMER
Normal operation
When nobody in the room

20 min. after, start energy
saving
operation.
Somebody back in the room

Back to normal operation.
18
Operation Manual
253
Operations
EDSG18-936
INTELLIGENT EYE is useful for Energy Saving.

Energy saving operation
Change the temperature +2C in cooling / +1C in dry mode from set temperature.
Decrease the air flow rate slightly in fan operation. (In FAN mode only)
Notes on INTELLIGENT EYE

Application range is as follows.
Vertical angle 90
(Side View)
Horizontal angle 110

(Top View)
90
7m
55 55
7m
Sensor may not detect moving objects further than 7m away. (Check the application range)
Sensor detection sensitivity changes according to indoor unit location, the speed of
passersby, temperature range, etc.
The sensor also mistakenly detects pets, sunlight, fluttering curtains and light reflected off of
mirrors as passersby.
INTELLIGENT EYE operation will not go on during powerful operation.
Night set mode (page 20.) will not go on during you use INTELLIGENT EYE operation.
CAUTION
Do not place large objects near the sensor.
Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the sensors detection area. This sensor can
detect objects it shouldnt as well as not detect objects it should.
Do not hit or violently push the INTELLIGENT EYE sensor. This can lead to damage and
malfunction.
19
254
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
1.2.13 TIMER Operation
TIMER Operation
Timer functions are useful for automatically switching the
air conditioner on or off at night or in the morning. You can
also use OFF TIMER and ON TIMER in combination.
To use OFF TIMER

operation
Check that the clock is correct.
If not, set the clock to the present time.
1. Press OFF TIMER button.

is displayed.
blinks.
2. Press TIMER Setting button

until the time setting reaches the
point you like.
Every pressing of either button increases
or decreases the time setting by 10
minutes. Holding down either button
changes the setting rapidly.
ON
CANCEL
2
4
OFF
TIMER
3. Press OFF TIMER button

again.
1, 3
The TIMER lamp lights up.
To cancel the OFF TIMER Operation

4. Press CANCEL button.
The TIMER lamp goes off.
NOTE
When TIMER is set, the present time is not displayed.
Once you set ON, OFF TIMER, the time setting is kept in the memory. (The memory is canceled when
remote controller batteries are replaced.)
When operating the unit via the ON/OFF Timer, the actual length of operation may vary from the time
entered by the user. (Maximum approx. 10 minutes)
NIGHT SET MODE
When the OFF TIMER is set, the air conditioner automatically adjusts the temperature setting (0.5C
up in COOL) to prevent excessive cooling for your pleasant sleep.
Operation Manual
255
Operations
EDSG18-936
To use ON TIMER operation

Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the
clock to the present time.
1. Press ON TIMER button.

is displayed.
blinks.
2. Press TIMER Setting button

until the time setting reaches the
point you like.
Every pressing of either button increases or
decreases the time setting by 10 minutes.
Holding down either button changes the
setting rapidly.
3. Press ON TIMER button again.

The TIMER lamp lights up.
1, 3
ON
CANCEL
4
OFF
TIMER
To cancel ON TIMER operation

4. Press CANCEL button.
The TIMER lamp goes off.
To combine ON TIMER and OFF TIMER

A sample setting for combining the two timers is shown below.
Display
(Example)
Present time: 11:00 p.m.
(The unit operating)
OFF TIMER at 0:00 a.m.
ON TIMER at 7:00 a.m.
Combined
ATTENTION
In the following cases, set the timer again.
After a breaker has turned OFF.
After a power failure.
After replacing batteries in the remote controller.
256
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
1.2.14 Note for Multi System
Note for Multi System
What is a Multi System?
This system has one outdoor unit connected to

multiple indoor units.
A
room
Outdoor
unit
When the simultaneous

operational capacity is
exceeded
B
room
D
room
C
room
If the simultaneous operational capacity is exceeded

for outdoor unit capacity, the indoor unit enters
Standby Mode, and the operation light flashed; this is
not a malfunction.
<Example>
When the units in rooms A, B, and C are being used, and the D is used, causing an overload:
The room (from A to D) which is closest to the set temperature will go into standby mode.
The room in standby mode will resume operation once operation in the other rooms is
stopped.
NIGHT QUIET Mode

NIGHT QUIET Mode requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your retailer
or dealer for assistance.
NIGHT QUIET Mode reduces the operation noise of the outdoor unit during the night time hours to
prevent annoyance to neighbors.
The NIGHT QUIET Mode is activated when the temperature drops 5C or more below the
highest temperature recorded that day. Therefore, when the temperature difference is less than
5C, this function will not be activated.
NIGHT QUIET Mode reduces slightly the cooling efficiency of the unit.

1. With the Priority Room Setting present but inactive or not present.
When using the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation feature with the Multi system, set all
indoor units to OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation using their remote controllers.
When clearing OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation, clear one of the operating indoor units
using their remote controller.
However OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation display remains on the remote controller for other
rooms.
We recommend you release all rooms using their remote controllers.
2. With the Priority Room Setting active.

See Priority Room Setting on the next page.
Operation Manual
257
Operations
EDSG18-936
Priority Room Setting

The Priority Room Setting requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your
retailer or dealer for assistance.
The room designated as the Priority Room takes priority in the following situations;
1. Operation Mode Priority.

As the operation mode of the Priority Room takes precedence, the user can select a different
operation mode from other rooms.
Example
* Room A is the Priority Room in the examples.
When COOL mode is selected in Room A while operating the following modes in Room
B,C and D:
Operation mode in Room B, C and D
COOL or DRY or FAN
Status of Room B, C and D when the unit in Room A is in COOL mode

Current operation mode maintained
2. Priority when POWERFUL operation is used.

Example
The indoor units in Rooms A,B,C and D are all operating. If the unit in Room A enters
POWERFUL operation, operation capacity will be concentrated in Room A. In such a case,
the cooling efficiency of the units in Rooms B,C and D may be slightly reduced.
3. Priority when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation.

Example
Just by setting the unit in Room A to QUIET operation, the air conditioner starts OUTDOOR
UNIT QUIET operation.
You dont have to set all the operated indoor units to QUIET operation.
258
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
1.2.15 Care and Cleaning

FTKS25/35D
Care and Cleaning

CAUTION
Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation and

turn the breaker OFF.
Units
Indoor unit, Outdoor unit and Remote controller
1. Wipe them with dry soft cloth.
Front panel
1. Open the front panel.
Hold the panel by the tabs on the two sides and lift
it unitl it stops with a click.
2. Remove the front panel.

Lift the front panel up, slide it slightly to the right,
and remove it from the horizontal axle.
3. Clean the front panel.

Wipe it with a soft cloth soaked in water.
Only neutral detergent may be used.
In case of washing the panel with water, dry it with
cloth, dry it up in the shade after washing.
4. Attach the front panel.

Set the 2 keys of the front panel into the slots
and push them in all the way.
Close the front panel slowly and push the
panel at the 3 points.
(1 on each sides and 1 in the middle.)
Fit the key

into the slot.
CAUTION
Dont touch the metal parts of the indoor unit. If you touch those parts, this may cause an injury.
When removing or attaching the front panel, use a robust and stable stool and watch your steps carefully.
When removing or attaching the front panel, support the panel securely with hand to prevent it from falling.
For cleaning, do not use hot water above 40 C, benzine, gasoline, thinner, nor other volatile oils, polishing compound, scrubbing brushes, nor other hand stuff.
After cleaning, make sure that the front panel is securely fixed.
Operation Manual
259
Operations
EDSG18-936
Filters
2. Pull out the air filters.
Push a little upwards the tab at the center of each air
filter, then pull it down.
3. Take off the Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter.

Hold the recessed parts of the frame and unhook
the four claws.
4. Clean or replace each filter.
Titanium Apatite
Photocatalytic
See figure.
Air filter
Filter frame
Tab
5. Set the air filter, Titanium Apatite

Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter as
they were and close the front panel.
Push
Insert claws of the filters into slots of the front panel.

Close the front panel slowly and push the panel at the
3 points. (1 on each sides and 1 in the middle.)
Air Filter
1. Wash the air filters with water or clean them with
vacuum cleaner.
If the dust does not come off easily, wash them with neutral detergent
thinned with lukewarm water, then dry them up in the shade.
It is recommended to clean the air filters every two weeks.

Tab
The Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter can be renewed

by washing it with water once every 6 months. We recommend replacing
it once every 3 years.
[ Maintenance ]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove dust with a vacuum cleaner and wash lightly with water.
If it is very dirty, soak it for 10 to 15 minutes in water mixed with a neutral cleaning agent.
Do not remove filter from frame when washing with water.
After washing, shake off remaining water and dry in the shade.
Since the material is made out of polyester, do not wring out the filter when removing water from it.
[ Replacement ]
1. Remove the tabs on the filter frame and replace with a new filter.
Dispose of the old filter as non-flammable waste.
260
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
NOTE
Operation with dirty filters:
(1) cannot deodorize the air.
(2) cannot clean the air.
(3) results in poor cooling.
(4) may cause odour.
To order Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter contact to the service shop
there you bought the air conditioner.
Item
Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter.
(without frame) 1 set
Part No.
KAF970A46
Check
Check that the base, stand and other fittings of the outdoor unit are not decayed or corroded.
Check that nothing blocks the air inlets and the outlets of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Check that the drain comes smoothly out of the drain hose during COOL or DRY operation.
If no drain water is seen, water may be leaking from the indoor unit. Stop operation and consult the service shop if this is the case.
Before a long idle period

1. Operate the FAN only for several hours on a fine day to dry out the
inside.
Press MODE selector button and select fan operation.
Press ON/OFF button and start operation.
2. Clean the air filters and set them again.

3. Take out batteries from the remote controller.
4. Turn OFF the breaker for the room air conditioner.
When a multi outdoor unit is connected, make sure the heating operation is not used at the
other room before you use the fan operation.
Operation Manual
261
Operations
EDSG18-936
FTKS50/60/71F
Care and Cleaning

CAUTION

Units
Front panel
Hold the panel by the tabs on the two
sides and lift it until it stops with a
click.
2. Remove the front panel.

Open the front panel further while sliding
it to either the left or right and pulling it
toward you. This will disconnect the
rotation dowel on one side. Then
disconnect the rotation dowel on the
other side in the same manner.
3. Clean the front panel.

In case of washing the panel with water, dry it with cloth, dry it up in the shade after washing.
4. Attach the front panel.

Align the rotation dowels on the left and right of the front panel
with the slots, then push them all the way in.
Close the front panel slowly. (Press the panel at both sides
and the center.)
CAUTION
Dont touch the metal parts of the indoor unit. If you touch those parts, this may cause an injury.
When removing or attaching the front panel, use a robust and stable stool and watch your steps carefully.
When removing or attaching the front panel, support the panel securely with hand to prevent it from falling.
For cleaning, do not use hot water above 40C, benzine, gasoline, thinner, nor other volatile oils,
polishing compound, scrubbing brushes, nor other hand stuff.
After cleaning, make sure that the front panel is securely fixed.
262
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Filters
Push a little upwards the tab at the
center of each air filter, then pull it
down.
3. Take off the Titanium

Apatite Photocatalytic
Air-Purifying Filter.
Press the top of the aircleaning filter onto the tabs
(3 tabs at top). Then press
the bottom of the filter up
slightly, and press it onto
the tabs (3 at bottom).
tabs (3 tabs at top)
4
tabs (3 at bottom)

See figure.
5. Set the air filter and the Titanium

Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying
Filter as they were and close the
front panel.
Press the front panel at both sides and the
center.
Air Filter
1. Wash the air filters with water or clean them with
vacuum cleaner.
If the dust does not come off easily, wash them with neutral
detergent thinned with lukewarm water, then dry them up in the
shade.
Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-purifying Filter

The Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter can be renewed by washing it with water
once every 6 months. We recommend replacing it once every 3 years.
[ Maintenance ]
1.
2.
3.
4.
Since the material is made out of polyester, do not wring out the filter when removing water
from it.
[ Replacement ]
Operation Manual
263
Operations
EDSG18-936
NOTE
(3) results in poor cooling.
To order Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter contact to the service shop
there you bought the air conditioner.
Dispose of old filters as non-flammable waste.
Item
Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter
(without frame) 1 set
Part No.
KAF952B42
Check
If no drain water is seen, water may be leaking from the indoor unit. Stop operation and consult the
service shop if this is the case.

inside.
Press MODE button and select FAN operation.
2. After operation stops, turn off the breaker for the room air conditioner.
264
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
FTKS50B
Care and Cleaning

CAUTION

Units
Front grille
1. Open the front grille.
Hold the grille by the tabs on the two sides
and lift it until it stops with a click.
2. Remove the front grille.

Open the front panel further while
sliding it to either the left or right and
pulling it toward you. This will disconnect
the rotation dowel on one side. Then
disconnect the rotation dowel on the
other side in the same manner.
3. Clean the front grille

In case of washing the grille with water, dry it with cloth, dry it up in the shade after washing.
4. Attach the front grille

Align the rotation dowels on the left and right of the front panel with
the slots, then push them all the way in.
Close the front panel slowly. (Press the panel at both sides and the
center.)
CAUTION
When the packaging materials are attached to the front panel, please remove
them.
Dont touch the metal parts of the indoor unit. If you touch those parts,
this may cause an injury.
When removing or attaching the front grille, use a robust and stable stool
and watch your steps carefully.
When removing or attaching the front grille, support the grille securely with
hand to prevent it from falling.
For cleaning, do not use hot water above 40 C, benzine, gasoline,
thinner, nor other volatile oils, polishing compound, scrubbing brushes, nor other hand stuff.
After cleaning, make sure that the front grille is securely fixed.
Operation Manual
265
Operations
EDSG18-936
Filters
1. Open the front grille.
Push a little upwards the tab at the center of
each air filter, then pull it down.
3. Take off the air

purifying filter with
photocatalytic
deodorizing function.
Press the top of the air-cleaning
filter onto the tabs (3 tabs at top).
Then press the bottom of the filter
up slightly, and press it onto the
tabs (2 at bottom)(3 at bottom).
tabs (2 at bottom)
50class
tabs (3 at bottom)
60,71class

See figure.
5. Set the air filter and the air purifying filter

with photocalytic deodorizing function as
they were and close the front grille.
Press the front panel at both sides and the center.
Air Filter
1. Wash the air filters with water or clean them with vacuum cleaner.
If the dust does not come off easily, wash them with neutral detergent
thinned with lukewarm water, then dry them up in the shade.
Air purifying filter with photocatalytic deodorizing function. (gray)

The air purifying capacity of the photocatalytic purifying filter can be renewed by washing it with
water once every 6 months. We recommend replacing it once every 3 years.
[ Maintenance ]
1.
2.
3.
4.
Since the material is made out of paper, do not wring out the filter when removing water from it.
[ Replacement]
Dispose of the old filter as flammable waste.
266
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Check
If no drain water is seen, water may be leaking from the indoor unit. Stop operation and consult the
service shop if this is the case.

inside.
Press MODE button and select FAN operation.

NOTE
(3) results in poor heating or cooling.
To order air purifying filter with photocatalytic deodorizing function contact to the service shop there
you bought the air conditioner.
Dispose of old air filter as non-burnable and photocatalytic deodorizing filters as burnable
waste.
Item
Air purifying filter with photocatalytic deodorizing
function. (without frame) 1 set
Operation Manual
Part No.
KAF952A42
267
Operations
EDSG18-936
FDKS25/35CA
Care and Cleaning

CAUTION
Only a qualified service person is allowed to

perform maintenance.
Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation
and turn the breaker OFF.
Cleaning the air filter

1.Removing the air filter.
Rear suction
Pull the bottom side of the air filter backwards, over the 3 bends.
Bottom suction
Pull the filter over the 3 bends situated at the backside of the unit.
2.Cleaning the air filter.

Remove dust from the air filter using a vacuum cleaner and
gently rinse them in cool water. Do not use detergent or hot
water to avoid filter shrinking or deformation. After cleaning
dry them in the shade.
3.Replacing the air filter.

Rear suction
Hook the filter behind the flap situated at the top of the unit
and push the other side gently over the 3 bends.
Bottom suction
Hook the filter behind the flap situated at the middle of the unit and push the other side gently
over the 3 bends.
Main unit
Force
Filter
Force
268
Attach the filter to the

main unit while
pushing down on the
tabs.
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Cleaning the drain pan

Clean the drain pan periodically, or drain piping may be clogged with dust and may result in water leakage.
Ask your DAIKIN dealer to clean them.
Prepare a cover locally to prevent any dust in the air around the indoor unit from getting in the drain pan, if
there is a great deal of dust present.
CAUTION
Do not operate the air conditioner without filters, this to avoid dust accummulation inside the
unit.
Do not remove the air filter except when cleaning.
Unnecessary handling may damage the filter.
Do not use gasoline, benzene, thinner, polishing powder, liquid insecticide, It may cause discoloring or
warping.
Do not let the indoor unit get wet. It may cause an electric shock or a fire.
Operation with dusty air filters lowers the cooling and heating capacity and wastes energy.
The suction grille is option.
Do not use water or air of 50C or higher for cleaning air filters and outside panels.
Check

1. Operate the FAN only for several hours on a fine day to dry out the inside.
Press MODE selector button and select FAN operation.
Operation Manual
269
Operations
EDSG18-936
FDKS50/60C, FDKS25/35EA
Care and Cleaning

CAUTION
Only a qualified service person is allowed to

perform maintenance.
Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation
and turn the breaker OFF.
Cleaning the air filter

1.Removing the air filter.
Rear suction
Pull the bottom side of the air filter backwards, over the bends. (2 bends for 25/35 type, 3 bends
for 50/60 type)
Bottom suction
Pull the filter over the bends (2 bends for 25/35 type, 3 bends for 50/60 type) situated at the
backside of the unit.
2.Cleaning the air filter.

Remove dust from the air filter using a vacuum cleaner and
gently rinse them in cool water. Do not use detergent or hot
water to avoid filter shrinking or deformation. After cleaning
dry them in the shade.
3.Replacing the air filter.

Rear suction
Hook the filter behind the flap situated at the top of the unit
and push the other side gently over the bends. (2 bends for 25/35 type, 3 bends for 50/60 type)
Bottom suction
Hook the filter behind the flap situated at the middle of the unit and push the other side gently
over the bends. (2 bends for 25/35 type, 3 bends for 50/60 type)
Main unit
Force
Filter
Force
270
Attach the filter to the

main unit while
pushing down on the
bends. (2 bends for
25/35 type, 3 bends
for 50/60 type)
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Cleaning the drain pan

Clean the drain pan periodically, or drain piping may be clogged with dust and may result in water leakage.
Ask your DAIKIN dealer to clean them.
Prepare a cover locally to prevent any dust in the air around the indoor unit from getting in the drain pan, if
there is a great deal of dust present.
CAUTION
Do not operate the air conditioner without filters, this to avoid dust accumulation inside the
unit.
Do not remove the air filter except when cleaning.
Unnecessary handling may damage the filter.
Do not use gasoline, benzene, thinner, polishing powder, liquid insecticide, It may cause discoloring or
warping.
Do not let the indoor unit get wet. It may cause an electric shock or a fire.
Operation with dusty air filters lowers the cooling and heating capacity and wastes energy.
The suction grille is option.
Ask your DAIKIN dealer how to clean it.
Check

1. Operate the FAN only for several hours on a fine day to dry out the inside.
Press MODE selector button and select FAN operation.

4. Turn OFF the breaker for the room air conditioner.
Operation Manual
271
Operations
EDSG18-936
1.2.16 Troubleshooting
Trouble Shooting
These cases are not troubles.
The following cases are not air conditioner troubles but have some reasons. You may just continue using it.
Case
Explanation
Operation does not start soon.

When ON/OFF button was
pressed soon after
operation was stopped.
When the mode was
reselected.
This is to protect the air conditioner.

You should wait for about 3 minutes.
The outdoor unit emits water or

steam.
In COOL or DRY mode

Moisture in the air condenses into water on the cool
surface of outdoor unit piping and drips.
Mists come out of the indoor

unit.
This happens when the air in the room is cooled into mist by
the cold air flow during cooling operation.
The indoor unit gives out odour. This happens when smells of the room, furniture, or
cigarettes are absorbed into the unit and discharged with the
air flow.
(If this happens, we recommend you to have the indoor unit
washed by a technician. Consult the service shop where you
bought the air conditioner.)
272
The outdoor fan rotates while

the air conditioner is not in
operation.
After operation is stopped:

The outdoor fan continues rotating for another 60
seconds for system protection.
While the air conditioner is not in operation:
When the outdoor temperature is very high, the out door
fan starts rotating for system protection.
The operation stopped

suddenly.
(OPERATION lamp is on.)
For system protection, the air conditioner may stop

operating on a sudden large voltage fluctuation.
It automatically resumes operation in about 3 minutes.
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Check again.
Please check again before calling a repair person.
Case
The air conditioner does not
operate.
(OPERATION lamp is off.)
Check
Hasn't a breaker turned OFF or a fuse blown?
Isn't it a power failure?
Are batteries set in the remote controller?
Is the timer setting correct?
Cooling effect is poor.
Are the air filters clean?

Is there anything to block the air inlet or the outlet of the
indoor and the outdoor units?
Is the temperature setting appropriate?

Are the windows and doors closed?
Are the air flow rate and the air direction set appropriately?
Is the unit set to the INTELLIGENT EYE mode?
Operation stops suddenly.
(OPERATION lamp flashes.)
Are the air filters clean?

Is there anything to block the air inlet or the outlet of the
indoor and the outdoor units?
Clean the air filters or take all obstacles away and turn the
breaker OFF. Then turn it ON again and try operating the air
conditioner with the remote controller. If the lamp still flashes,
call the service shop where you bought the air conditioner.
Are operation modes all the same for indoor units
connected to outdoor units in the multi system?
If not, set all indoor units to the same operation mode and
confirm that the lamps flash.
An abnormal functioning
happens during operation.
Operation Manual
The air conditioner may malfunction with lightning or radio

waves. Turn the breaker OFF, turn it ON again and try
operating the air conditioner with the remote controller.
273
Operations
EDSG18-936
Call the service shop immediately.
WARNING
When an abnormality (such as a burning smell) occurs, stop operation and turn the breaker OFF.
Continued operation in an abnormal condition may result in troubles, electric shocks or fire.
Consult the service shop where you bought the air conditioner.
Do not attempt to repair or modify the air conditioner by yourself.
Incorrect work may result in electric shocks or fire.
Consult the service shop where you bought the air conditioner.
If one of the following symptoms takes place, call the service shop immediately.
The power cord is abnormally hot or damaged.

An abnormal sound is heard during operation.
The safety breaker, a fuse, or the earth leakage breaker
cuts off the operation frequently.
A switch or a button often fails to work properly.
There is a burning smell.
Water leaks from the indoor unit.
After a power failure

The air conditioner automatically resumes
operation in about 3 minutes. You should just
wait for a while.
Turn the breaker

OFF and call the
service shop.
Lightning
If lightning may strike the neighbouring area,
stop operation and turn the breaker OFF for
system protection.
We recommend periodical maintenance.

In certain operating conditions, the inside of the air conditioner may get foul after several seasons of
use, resulting in poor performance. It is recommended to have periodical maintenance by a specialist
aside from regular cleaning by the user. For specialist maintenance, contact the service shop where
you bought the air conditioner.
The maintenance cost must be born by the user.
274
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
1.3
Operations
FFQ25/35/50/60B Series
5 12
3
7
hr
C
hr
6
8
NOT
AVAILABLE
TEST
9
11
10
13
L H
14
21
20
TEST
19
17
15
16
18
22
e
d
h
f
g
b
d
c
hr
l
2
[1]
[1]
Operation Manual
275
Operations
EDSG18-936
CONTENTS
ILLUSTRATIONS .............................................. [1]
1. WHAT TO DO BEFORE
OPERATION ................................................. 1
2. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.............................. 2
3. OPERATION RANGE.................................... 4
4. INSTALLATION SITE .................................... 4
5. NAME AND FUNCTION OF EACH SWITCH
AND DISPLAY ON THE REMOTE
CONTROLLER .............................................. 5
6. OPERATION PROCEDURE ......................... 5
7. OPTIMUM OPERATION ............................... 8
8. MAINTENANCE
(FOR SERVICE PERSONNEL)..................... 8
9. NOT MALFUNCTION OF THE AIR
CONDITIONER ........................................... 10
10. TROUBLE SHOOTING ............................... 11
OPERATION
This operation manual is for the following systems
with standard control. Before initiating operation,
contact your Daikin dealer for the operation that
corresponds to your sysem.
Pair system
Indoor unit
Heat pump type

This system provides cooling, heating, automatic,
program dry, and fan operation modes.
Cooling only type
This system provides cooling, program dry, and
fan operation modes.
PRECAUTIONS FOR GROUP CONTROL

SYSTEM OR TWO REMOTE CONTROLLER
CONTROL SYSTEM
This system provides two other control systems
beside individual control (one remote controller controls one indoor unit) system. Confirm the following
if your unit is of the following control system type.
Group control system
One remote controller controls up to 16 indoor
units.
All indoor units are equally set.
Two remote controllers control system
Two remote controllers control one indoor unit
(In case of group control system, one group of
indoor units)
The unit is individually operated.
NOTE
Contact your Daikin dealer in case of changing
the combination or setting of group control and
two remote controllers control system.
Names and functions of parts

Refer to figure 2 on page [1]
a
Outdoor unit
Unit with
remote
controller
Multi system
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Unit with
remote
controller
Unit with
remote
controller
NOTE
If the unit you purchased is controlled by a wireless remote controller, also refer to the wireless
remote controllers operation manual.
If your installation has a customized control system,
ask your Daikin dealer for operation that corresponds to your system.
276
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
The external appearance of the outdoor
unit varies depending on its capacity
class. The outdoor unit shown in the figure is for reference to indicate features.
Contact your Daikin Dealer and verify
which outdoor unit you have.
Remote controller
Depending on the system configuration,
the remote controller is not provided.
Inlet air
Discharged air
Air outlet
Air flow flap (at air outlet)
Refrigerant piping, connection electric wire
Drain pipe
Air inlet
The built-in air filter removes dust and dirt.
Drain pumping out device (built-in)
Drains water removed from the room during cooling.
Ground wire
Wire to ground from the outdoor unit to prevent electrical shocks.
English
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
2. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
To gain full advantage of the air conditioners functions and to avoid malfunction due to mishandling,
we recommend that you read this instruction manual carefully before use.
This air conditioner is classified under appliances
not accessible to the general public.
The precautions described herein are classified as WARNING and CAUTION. They both
contain important information regarding
safety. Be sure to observe all precautions
without fail.
WARNING ...Failure to follow these instructions
properly may result in personal
injury or loss of life.
CAUTION ....Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or personal injury,
which may be serious depending
on the circumstances.
After reading, keep this manual in a convenient place so that you can refer to it whenever necessary. If the equipment is
transferred to a new user, be sure also to
hand over the manual.
WARNING
Be aware that prolonged, direct exposure to
cool or warm air from the air conditioner, or
to air that is too cool or too warm can be
harmful to your physical condition and
health.
When the air conditioner is malfunctioning
(giving off a burning odour, etc.) turn off
power to the unit and contact your local
dealer.
Continued operation under such circumstances
may result in a failure, electric shocks or fire hazards.
Consult your local dealer about installation
work.
Doing the work yourself may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire hazards.
Consult your local dealer regarding modification, repair and maintenance of the air conditioner.
Improper workmanship may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire hazards.
Do not place objects, including rods, your
fingers, etc., in the air inlet or outlet.
Injury may result due to contact with the air conditioners highspeed fan blades.
Beware of fire in case of refrigerant leakage.
If the air conditioner is not operating correctly,
i.e. not generating cool or warm air, refrigerant
leakage could be the cause.
Consult your dealer for assistance.
The refrigerant within the air conditioner is safe
and normally does not leak.
English
Operation Manual
Operations
However, in the event of a leakage, contact with

a naked burner, heater or cooker may result in
generation of noxious gas.
Do not longer use the air conditioner until a qualified service person confirms that the leakage
has been repaired.
Consult your local dealer regarding what to
do in case of refrigerant leakage.
When the air conditioner is to be installed in a
small room, it is necessary to take proper measures so that the amount of any leaked refrigerant does not exceed the concentration limit in the
event of a leakage. Otherwise, this may lead to
an accident due to oxygen depletion.
Contact professional personnel about attachment of accessories and be sure to use only
accessories specified by the manufacturer.
If a defect results from your own workmanship, it
may result in water leaks, electric shock or fire.
Consult your local dealer regarding relocation and reinstallation of the air conditioner.
Improper installation work may result in leakage,
electric shocks or fire hazards.
Be sure to use fuses with the correct ampere
reading.
Do not use improper fuses, copper or other wires
as a substitute, as this may result in electric
shock, fire, injury or damage to the unit.
Be sure to earth the unit.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning
conductor or telephone earth lead. Imperfect
earthing may result in electric shocks or fire.
A high surge current from lightning or other
sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may
result in electric shocks or fire.
Consult the dealer if the air conditioner submerges owing to a natural disaster, such as a
flood or typhoon.
Do not operate the air conditioner in that case, or
otherwise a malfunction, electric shock, or fire
may result.
Do not start or stop operating the air conditioner with the power supply breaker turned
ON or OFF.
Otherwise, fire or water leakage may result. Furthermore, the fan will rotate abruptly if power failure compensation is enabled, which may result
in inlury.
Do not use the product in the atmosphere
contaminated with oil vapor, such as cooking
oil or machine oil vapor.
Oil vapor may cause crack damage, electric
shocks, or fire.
Do not use the product in places with excessive oily smoke, such as cooking rooms, or
in places with flammable gas, corrosive gas,
or metal dust.
Using the product in such places may cause fire
or product failures.
277
Operations
Do not use flammable materials (e.g., hairspray or insecticide) near the product.
Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as paint thinner.
The use of organic solvents may cause crack
damage to the product, electric shocks, or fire.
Be sure to use a dedicated power supply for
the air conditioner.
The use of any other power supply may cause
heat generation, fire, or product failures.
CAUTION
Do not use the air conditioner for purposes
other than those for which it is intended.
Do not use the air conditioner for cooling precision instruments, food, plants, animals or works
of art as this may adversely affect the performance, quality and/or longevity of the object
concerned.
Do not remove the outdoor units fan guard.
The guard protects against the units high speed
fan, which may cause injury.
Do not place objects that are susceptible to
moisture directly beneath the indoor or outdoor units.
Under certain conditions, condensation on the
main unit or refrigerant pipes, air filter dirt or
drain blockage may cause dripping, resulting in
fouling or failure of the object concerned.
To avoid oxygen depletion, ensure that the
room is adequately ventilated if equipment
such as a burner is used together with the air
conditioner.
After prolonged use, check the unit stand
and its mounts for damage.
If left in a damaged condition, the unit may fall
and cause injury.
Do not place flammable sprays or operate
spray containers near the unit as this may
result in fire.
Before cleaning, be sure to stop unit operation, turn the breaker off or remove the power
cord.
Otherwise, an electric shock and injury may
result.
To avoid electric shocks, do not operate with
wet hands.
Do not place appliances that produce naked
flames in places exposed to the air flow from
the unit as this may impair combustion of the
burner.
Do not place heaters directly below the unit,
as resulting heat can cause deformation.
Do not allow a child to mount on the outdoor
unit or avoid placing any object on it.
Falling or tumbling may result in injury.
Do not block air inlets nor outlets.
Impaired air flow may result in insufficient performance or trouble.
278
EDSG18-936
Be sure that children, plants or animals are

not exposed directly to airflow from the unit,
as adverse effects may ensue.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water,
as this may result in electric shocks or fire.
Do not install the air conditioner at any place
where there is a danger of flammable gas
leakage.
In the event of a gas leakage, build-up of gas
near the air conditioner may result in fire hazards.
Do not put flammable containers, such as
spray cans, within 1 m from the blow-off
mouth.
The containers may explode because the warm
air output of the indoor or outdoor unit will affect
them.
Arrange the drain hose to ensure smooth
drainage.
Imperfect drainage may cause wetting.
The appliance is not intended for use by
unattended young children or infirm persons.
Impairment of bodily functions and harm to
health may result.
Children should be supervised to ensure that
they do not play with the unit or its remote
controller.
Accidental operation by a child may result in
impairment of bodily functions and harm health.
Do not let children play on or around the outdoor unit.
If they touch the unit carelessly, injury may be
caused.
Consult your dealer regarding cleaning the
inside of the air conditioner.
Improper cleaning may cause breakage of plastic parts, water leakage and other damage as
well as electric shocks.
To avoid injury, do not touch the air inlet or
aluminium fins of the unit.
Do not place objects in direct proximity of the
outdoor unit and do not let leaves and other
debris accumulate around the unit.
Leaves are a hotbed for small animals which can
enter the unit. Once in the unit, such animals can
cause malfunctions, smoke or fire when making
contact with electrical parts.
Never touch the internal parts of the controller.
Do not remove the front panel. Touching certain
internal parts will cause electric shocks and
damage to the unit. Please consult your dealer
about checking and adjustment of internal parts.
Do not leave the remote controller wherever
there is a risk of wetting.
If water gets into the remote controller there is a
risk of electrical leakage and damage to electronic components.
English
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Watch your steps at the time of air filter

cleaning or inspection.
High-place work is required, to which utmost
attention must be paid.
If the scaffold is unstable, you may fall or topple
down, thus causing injury.
3. OPERATION RANGE
If the temperature or the humidity is beyond the following conditions, safety devices may work and the
air conditioner may not operate, or sometimes,
water may drop from the indoor unit.
COOLING
OUTDOOR
UNIT
RKS25 35
50 60
RXS25 35
50 60
INDOOR
TEMPERA- HUMIDTURE
ITY
D
B 21 to 32
W 14 to 23
B
RMXS112 140 D
160
21 to 32
RMKS112 140 B
160
3MKS58 75
W 14 to 23
4MKS90
B
3MXS52 68
4MXS80
80% or
below
OUTDOOR
TEMPERATURE
D 10 to 46
B (5)
80% or
below
INDOOR
TEMPERATURE
RXS25 35
DB
10 to 30
RXS50 60
DB
10 to 30
RMXS112 140
160
3MXS52 68
4MXS80
DB
10 to 30
D 10 to 46
B
OUTDOOR
TEMPERATURE
DB
14 to 24
WB
15 to 20
DB
14 to 24
WB
15 to 18
DB
14 to 21
WB
15 to 15.5
DB: Dry bulb temperature (C)

WB: Wet bulb temperature (C)
The setting temperature range of the remote controller is 16 C to 32 C.
The numerical value in a parenthesis shows the
operation range of the model for Australia.
Tips for saving energy
Be careful not to cool (heat) the room too much.
Keeping the temperature setting at a moderate
level helps save energy.
Cover windows with a blind or a curtain.
Blocking sunlight and air from outdoors increases
the cooling (heating) effect.
Recommended temperature setting
For cooling
26 to 28 C
For heating
20 to 24 C
English
Operation Manual
Regarding places for installation

Is the air conditioner installed at a well-ventilated place where there are no obstacles
around?
Do not use the air conditioner in the following
places.
a. Filled with much mineral oil such as cutting oil
b. Where there is much salt such as a beach
area
c. Where sulfured gas exists such as a hot-spring
resort.
d. Where there are considerable voltage
fluctuations such as a factory or plant
e. Vehicles and vessels
f. Where there is much spray of oil and vapor
such as a cookery, etc.
g. Where there are machines generating
electromagnetic waves.
h. Filled with acid and/or alkaline steam or vapor
Is a snow protection measure taken?
For details, consult your dealer.
Regarding wiring
HEATING
OUTDOOR
UNIT
4. INSTALLATION SITE

To do wiring, ask your dealer. Never do it by
yourself.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit
is provided for this air conditioner and that all
electrical work is carried out by qualified personnel according to local laws and regulations.
Pay attention to running noises, too

Are the following places selected?
a. A place that can sufficiently withstand the
weight of the air conditioner with less running
noises and vibrations.
b. A place where the hot wind discharged from
the air outlet of outdoor unit and the running
noises.
Are you sure that there are no obstacles near
the air outlet of the outdoor unit?
Such obstacles may result in declined performance and increased running noises.
If abnormal noises occur in use, stop the
operation of the air conditioner, and then consult your dealer or our service station.
Regarding drainage of drain piping

Is the drain piping executed to perform complete drainage?
If proper drainage is not carried out from the outdoor drain pipes during air-conditioning operation, chances are that dust and dirt are clogged
in the pipe. This may result in a water leakage
from the indoor unit. Under such circumstances,
stop the operation of the air conditioner, and then
con sult your dealer or our service station.
279
Operations
EDSG18-936
5. NAME AND FUNCTION OF

EACH SWITCH AND DISPLAY
ON THE REMOTE
CONTROLLER
The illustrations in this operating manual correspond to the remote control format BRC1C type.
1
ON/OFF BUTTON
Press the button and the system will start.
Press the button again and the system will
stop.
OPERATION LAMP (RED)
The lamp lights up during operation.
DISPLAY
(UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL)
When this display shows, the system is
UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL.
(This is not a standard specification)
DISPLAY
(VENTILATION/AIR CLEANING)
This display shows that the total heat
exchange and the air cleaning unit are in
operation (These are optional accessories).
DISPLAY
(OPERATION MODE)
This display shows the current OPERATION
MODE. For cooling only type,
(Auto)
and
(Heating) are not installed.
DISPLAY TEST (INSPECTION/TEST
OPERATION)
When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION
BUTTON is pressed, the display shows the
system mode is in.
DISPLAY
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
NON-FUNCTIONING DISPLAY
If that particular function is not available,
pressing the button may display the words
NOT AVAILABLE for a few seconds.
When running multiple units simultaneously
The NOT AVAILABLE message will only be
appear if none of the indoor units is equipped
with the function. If even one unit is equipped
with the function, the display will not appear.
TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON
Refer to PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION.
TIMER ON/ OFF BUTTON
Refer to PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION
INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
This button is used only by qualified service
persons for maintenance purposes.
PROGRAMMING TIME BUTTON
Use this button for programming START and/
or STOP time.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER.
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON
Press this button to select the fan speed,
HIGH or LOW, of your choice.
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
Press this button to select OPERATION MODE.
AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
Refer to AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST.
NOTE
For the sake of explanation, all indications are
shown on the display in figure 1 contrary to
actual running situations.
(PROGRAMMED TIME)
7
This display shows the PROGRAMMED
TIME of the system start or stop.
DISPLAY
(SET TEMPERATURE)
8
This display shows the set temperature.
DISPLAY
(FAN SPEED)
9
This display shows the set fan speed.
DISPLAY
(AIR FLOW FLAP)
10
DISPLAY
(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FIL11 TER)
DISPLAY
(DEFROST/HOT
12 START)
Refer to DEFROST OPERATION".
280
6. OPERATION PROCEDURE
Operating procedure varies with heat pump type
and cooling only type. Contact your Daikin dealer
to confirm your system type.
To protect the unit, turn on the main power switch
6 hours before operation.
If the main power supply is turned off during
operation, operation will restart automatically
after the power turns back on again.
English
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
COOLING, HEATING, AUTOMATIC, FAN,

AND PROGRAM DRY OPERATION
Operate in the following order.
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR
Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button several times and select the OPERATION MODE of your choice as follows.
COOLING OPERATION ........................
HEATING OPERATION .........................
AUTOMATIC OPERATION ....................
In this operation mode,COOL/HEAT

changeover is automatically conducted.
FAN OPERATION .................................
DRY OPERATION .................................

The function of this program is to decrease
the humidity in your room with the minimum
temperature decrease.
Micro computer automatically determines
TEMPERATURE and FAN SPEED.
This system dose not go into operation if the
room temperature is below 16 C.
For cooling only type, COOLING , FAN and
DRY operation are able to select.
(3) OPERATION START

For ordinary heating, it will take longer for the
room temperature to reach the set temperature than with cooling. We therefore recommend starting the unit ahead of time using the
timer operation.
Regarding outside air temperature and

heating capacity
The heating capacity of the air conditioner
declines as the outside air temperature falls.
In such a case, use the air conditioner in combination with other heating systems.
A warm air circulating system is employed, and
therefore it takes some time until the entire room
is warmed up after the start of operation.
An indoor fan runs to discharge a gentle wind
automatically until the temperature inside the air
conditioner reaches a certain level. At this time,
the remote controller displays
. Leave it
as it stands and wait for a while.
When the warm air stays under the ceiling and
your feet are cold, we recommend that you use a
circulator (a fan to circulate the air inside the
room). For details,consult your dealer.
ADJUSTMENT
For programming TEMPERATURE, FAN SPEED
and AIR FLOW DIRECTION, follow the procedure
shown below.
TEMPERATURE SETTING
ON/OFF
Press ON/OFF button

OPERATION lamp lights up or goes off and the system starts or stops OPERATION.
[EXPLANATION OF HEATING OPERATION]

(1) DEFROST OPERATION
As the frost on the coil of an outdoor unit
increase, heating effect decreases and the
system goes into DEFROST OPERATION.
The indoor unit fan stops and the remote controller display shows
.
After 6 to 8 minutes (maximum 10 minutes) of
DEFROST OPERATION, the system returns
to HEATING OPERATION.
(2) HOT START
In order to prevent cold air from blowing out of
an indoor unit at the start of heating operation,
the indoor fan is automatically stopped. The
display of the remote controller shows
(DEFROST/HOT START).
English
Operation Manual
Press TEMPERATURE SETTING button and

program the setting temperature.
Each time this button is pressed,setting
temperature rises 1 C.
Each time this button is pressed, setting temperature lowers 1 C.
The setting is impossible for fan operation.
NOTE
The setting temperature range of the remote controller is 16 C to 32 C.
FAN SPEED CONTROL

Press FAN SPEED CONTROL button.
High or Low fan speed can be selected.
Micro computer may sometimes control the fan
speed in order to protect the unit.
281
Operations
EDSG18-936
AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST

Press the AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST button
to adjust the air flow angle.
Programming the start time (

) .... The system starts operating after the set time has
elapsed.
The timer can be programmed a maximum of
72 hours.
The start and the stop time can be simultaneously programmed.
1
Up and down adjustment
The movable limit of the flap is changeable.
Contact your Daikin dealer for details.
Press the AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST

button to select the air direction as following.
The AIR FLOW FLAP display
swings as shown left and the
air flow direction continuously
varies. (Automatic swing setting)
swing
TIMER MODE START/STOP
Press the TIMER MODE START/STOP button several times and select the mode on
the display.
The display flashes.
For setting the timer stop ....
For setting the timer start ....
PROGRAMMING TIME
Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and

set the time for stopping or starting the system.
Press AIR FLOW DIRECTION

ADJUST button to select the air
direction of your choice.
When this button is pressed, the time

advances by 1 hour.
goes backward by 1 hour.

stops swinging and the air
flow direction is fixed (Fixed
air flow direction setting).
TIMER ON/OFF
MOVEMENT OF THE AIR FLOW FLAP
Press the TIMER ON/OFF button.
For the following conditions, micro computer controls the air flow direction so it may be different from
the display.
The timer setting procedure ends.

The display
or
changes from flashing light to a constant light.
Operation
mode
Operation
condition
Heating
When starting operation
When room temperature is higher
than the set temperature
At defrost operation
(Air is blown horizontally to prevent
the cool air from being blown
directly onto anyone in the room.)
Operation mode includes automatic operation.

ATTENTION:
The movable limit of the flap is changeable. Contact your Daikin dealer for details.
Avoid operating in the horizontal direction
which may cause dew or dust to settle on ceiling.
PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION
For example:
When the timer is programmed to
stop the system after 3 hours and
start the system after 4 hours, the
system will stop after 3 hours and
then 1 hour later the system will
start.
NOTE
When setting the timer Off and On at the same
time, repeat the above procedure from 1 to 3
once again.
After the timer is programmed, the display shows
the remaining time.
Press the TIMER ON/OFF button once again to
cancel programming. The display vanishes.

The timer is operated in the following two ways.
Programming the stop time (
) .... The system stops operating after the set time has elapsed.
7
282
English
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
7. OPTIMUM OPERATION
Observe the following precautions to ensure the
system operates.
Adjust the room temperature properly for a comfortable environment. Avoid excessive heating or
cooling.
Prevent direct sunlight from entering a room during cooling operation by using curtains or blinds.
Ventilate the room regularly.
Using the unit for long periods of time requires
attentive ventilation of the room.
Do not place items that might be damaged by
water under the indoor unit.
Water may condensate and drip if the humidity
reaches 80% or if the drain exit gets clogged.
Keep doors and windows closed. If the doors and
windows remain open, room air will flow out and
cause to decrease the effect of cooling and heating.
Do not place other heaters directly below the
indoor unit.
They may deform due to the heat.
Never place objects near the air inlet and the air
outlet of the unit. It may cause deterioration in the
effect or stop in the operation.
Turn off the main power supply switch when it is
not used for long periods of time. When the main
power switch is turned on, some watts of electricity is being used even if the system is not operating. Turn off the main power supply switch for
saving energy. When reoperating, turn on the
main power supply switch 6hours before operation for smooth running (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
When the display shows
(TIME TO
CLEAN AIR FILTER), ask a qualified service person to clean the filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
Fully use the function of air flow direction adjust.
Cold air gathers on the floor, and warm air gathers in the ceiling.
Set the air flow direction parallel during cooling or
dry operation, and set it downwards during heating operation.
Do not let the air blow directly to a person.
It takes time for the room temperature to reach
the set temperature.
We recommend starting the operation in advance
using timer operation.
English
Operation Manual
Operations
8. MAINTENANCE
(FOR SERVICE PERSONNEL)
ONLY A QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSON IS
ALLOWED TO PERFORM MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Before touching any of connection wirings, be
sure to turn off all power supply switches.
Contact professional personnel about attachment of accessories and be sure to use only
accessories specified by the manufacturer.
If a defect results from your own workmanship, it
may result in water leaks, electric shock or fire.
CAUTION
Before cleaning, be sure to stop unit operation, turn the breaker off or remove the power
cord.
result.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water, as
this may result in electric shocks or fire.
Consult your dealer regarding cleaning the
inside of the air conditioner.
Improper cleaning may cause breakage of plastic
parts, water leakage and other damage as well as
electric shocks.
Take care of scaffolding and exercise caution
when working high above ground level.
HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER

Clean the air filter when the display shows
(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER).
It will display that it will operate for a set amount of

time.
Increase the frequency of cleaning if the unit is
installed in a room where the air is extremely contaminated.
If the dirt becomes impossible to clean, change the
air filter (Air filter for exchange is optional)
1. Open the suction grille.
Push it downward slowly while pressing horizontally the buttons provided on two spots.
(Follow the same procedure for closing.)
283
Operations
EDSG18-936
2. Detach the air filter.

Pull the hook of the air filter out diagonally downward, and remove the filter.
3. Clean the air filter.

Use vacuum cleaner A) or wash the air filter with
water B).
A) Using a vacuum cleaner
When the flap is extremely contaminated,

remove it as below and clean or exchange it.
(For changing the flap, please contact your
dealer.)
NOTE
Do not use gasoline, benzene, thinner, polishing
powder, liquid insecticide. It may cause discoloring or warping.
Do not let the indoor unit get wet. It may cause an
electric shock or a fire.
Do not scrub firmly when washing the blade with
water.
The surface sealing may peel off.
Do not use water or air of 50C or higher for
cleaning air filters and outside panels.
HOW TO CLEAN THE SUCTION GRILLE

Push it downward slowly while pressing horizontally the buttons provided on two spots. (Follow
the same procedure for closing.)
B) Washing with water

When the air filter is very dirty, use
soft brush and neutral detergent.
Remove water and dry in the shade.
NOTE
Do not wash the air conditioner with hot water of
more than 50C, as doing so may result in discoloration and/or deformation.
Do not expose it to fire, as doing so may result in
burning.
4. Fix the air filter.
(1) Hook the air filter to a protrusion on the suction grille.
(2) Push the lower part of the air filter onto the
protrusion at the lower part of the suction
grille, and fix the air filter there.
2. Detach the suction grille.

Open the suction grille 45 degrees and lift it
upward.

Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTERitem No.2.
5. Shut the suction grille.
Refer to item No.1.
6. After turning on the power, press FILTER
SIGN RESET button.
The TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER display vanishes.
HOW TO CLEAN AIR OUTLET AND OUTSIDE PANELS

Clean with soft cloth.
When it is difficult to remove stains, use water or
neutral detergent.
284
4. Clean the suction grille.

Wash with a soft bristle brush and
neutral detergent or water, and dry
throughly.
When very grimy
Directly apply the type of detergent
used for cleaning ventilation fans or ovens, wait
10 minutes, and then rinse with water.
Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTERitem No.4.
English
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
6. Fix the suction grille.

Refer to item No. 2.
START UP AFTER A LONG STOP

Confirm the following
Check that the air inlet and outlet are not
blocked. Remove any obstacle.
Check if the earth is connected.
Might there be a broken wire somewhere?
Contact your dealer if there are any problems.
Clean the air filter and outside panels
After cleaning the air filter, make sure to attach it.
Turn on the main power supply switch
The display on the remote controller will be
shown when the power is turned on.
at least 6 hours before operation.
WHAT TO DO WHEN STOPPING THE SYSTEM FOR A LONG PERIOD

Turn on FAN OPERATION for a half day and dry
the unit.
Refer to 6.OPERATION PROCEDURE.
Cut off the power supply.
When the main power switch is turned on, some
watts of electricity is being used even if the system is not operating.
Turn off the main power supply switch for saving
energy.
The display on the remote controller will vanish
when the main power switch is turned off.
Clean the air filter and the exterior.
Be sure to replace the air filter to its original place
after cleaning. Refer to MAINTENANCE.
9. NOT MALFUNCTION OF THE

AIR CONDITIONER
The following symptoms do not indicate air conditioner malfunction
I. THE SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE
The system does not restart immediately
after the ON/OFF button is pressed.
If the OPERATION lamp lights, the system is in
normal condition.
It does not restart immediately because a safety
device operates to prevent overload of the system. After 3 minutes, the system will turn on
again automatically.
when TEMPERATURE SETTING button is
returned to the former position after pushing
the button.
normal condition.
English
Operation Manual
Operations

device operates to prevent overload of the system. After 3 minutes, the system will turn on
again automatically.
The system does not start when the display
shows
(UNDER CENTRALIZED
CONTROL) and it flashes for few seconds
after pressing an operation button.
This is because the system is under centralized
control. Flashes on the display indicates that the
system cannot be controlled by the remote controller.
The system does not start immediately after
the power supply is turned on.
Wait one minute until the micro computer is prepared for operation.
The outdoor unit is stopped
This is because the room temprerature has
reached the set temprerature. The indoor unit
switches to fan operation.
II. The display shows

(UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL) and the unit operates
in a mode different to what is shown on the
remote controller display.
When using a unit in a multi system, the operation condition of that unit is controlled by a micro
computer as described below, according to the
operation condition of other indoor units connected to the system.
If the operation mode does not match other
indoor units that are already running, the indoor
unit will assume the STANDBY state (the fan is
stopped and the air flow flap is positioned horizontally).
If HEATING mode is set together with COOLING,
DRY or FAN mode, the above mentioned condition will occur.
NOTE
Normally, the operation mode in the room where
the unit is first run is given priority, but the following situations are exceptions, so please keep this
in mind.
a. If the operation mode of the first room is FAN
Mode, then using Heating Mode in any room
after this will give priority to heating. In this situation, the air conditioner running in FAN
Mode will go on standby.
b. With the Priority Room Setting active.
Contact your Daikin dealer for the operation
that corresponds to your system.
If the total capacity of operating indoor units
exceeds the limit, the indoor unit will assume the
STANDBY state (FAN and AIR FLOW DIRECTION will be left as set). (This only applies to
cooling only type.)
If another indoor unit commences a HEATING
operation after this indoor unit is running in
COOLING mode, this indoor unit may switch to
DRY operation (fan on low, air flow flap set at horizontal).
10
285
Operations
III. The fan speed is different from the setting.

Pressing the fan speed control button does
not change the fan speed.
When the room temperature reaches the set
temperature in heating mode, the power supply
from the outdoor unit is stopped and the indoor
unit will operate on the low fan setting. (If using
the multi system, the fan will alternate between
off and low.)
This is to prevent the cool air from being blown
directly onto anyone in the room.
IV. AIR BLOW DIRECTION IS NOT AS SPECIFIED.
Actual air blow direction is not as shown on
the remote contoller.
Automatic swing setting does not work.
V. WHITE MIST COMES OUT OF A UNIT
When humidity is high during cooling operation (In oily or dusty places)
If the inside of an indoor unit is extremely contaminated, the temperature distribution inside a
room becomes uneven. It is necessary to clean
the inside of the indoor unit. Ask your Daikin
dealer for details on cleaning the unit. This operation requires a qualified service person.
When the system is changed over to HEATING
OPERATION after DEFROST OPERATION.
Moisture generated by DEFROST becomes
steam and exists.
VI.NOISE OF AIR CONDITIONERS
A ringing sound after the unit is started.
This sound is generated by the temperature regulator working.
It will quiet down after about a minute.
A continuous flow Shuh sound is heard
when the systems is in COOLING or
DEFROST OPERATION.
This is the sound of refrigerant gas flowing
through both indoor and outdoor units.
A Shuh sound which is heard at the start or
immediately after the stop of operation or
which is heard at the start or immediately
after the stop of DEFROST OPERATION.
This is the noise of refrigerant caused by flow
stop and flow change.
A continuous flowing sound "Shah"or a trickling sound "Jyuru Jyuru"are heard when the
system is in COOLING OPERATION or at a
stop.
The noise is heard when the drain pump is in
operation.
A Pishi-pishi squeaking sound is heard
when the system is in operation or after the
stop of operation.
Expansion and contraction of plastic parts
caused by temperature change makes this noise.
VII.DUST FROM THE UNITS
Dust may blow out from the unit after starting
operation from long resting time.
Dust absorbed by the unit blows out.
11
286
EDSG18-936
VIII.THE UNITS GIVE OFF ODORS

The unit absorbs the smell of rooms, furniture,
cigarettes, etc., and then emits them.
IX.THE LIQUID CRYSTAL OF THE REMOTE
CONTROLLER SHOW
It happens immediately after the main power

supply switch is turned on.
This shows that the remote controller is in normal condition.
This continues temporary.
X. THE ROOM TEMPERATURE DOES NOT DROP
The air conditioner is in program dry operation.
The air conditioner in program dry operation
does not drop the room temperature as much as
possible. See page 5-6 OPERATION PROCEDURE.
10. TROUBLE SHOOTING

I. If one of the following malfunctions occurs,
take the measures shown below and contact
your Daikin dealer.
The system must be repaired by a qualified service
person.
WARNING
When the air conditioner is in abnormal conditions (smell of something burning, etc),
unplug the power cord from the outlet, and
contact your dealer
may result in a failure, electric shock, and fire.
If a safety device such as a fuse, a breaker or an
earth leakage breaker frequently actuates;
Measure: Do not turn on the main power switch.
If the ON/OFF switch does not properly work;
Measure: Turn off the main power switch.
If water leaks from unit.
Measure: Stop the operation.
If the display
(INSPECTION), UNIT No.,
and the OPERATION lamp flash and the MALFUNCTION CODE appears.
OPERATION lamp
UNIT No.
INSPECTION
display
L H
INDOOR UNIT No. in which

a malfunction occurs
MALFUNCTION CODE
Measure: Notify and inform the model name

and what the malfunction code indicates to your Daikin dealer.
English
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
II. If the system does not properly operate

except for the above mentioned case, and
none of the above mentioned malfunctions is
evident, investigate the system according to
the following procedures.
1. If the system does not operate at all.
Check if there is a power failure.
Wait until power is restored. If power failure
occurs during operation, the system automatically restarts immediately after the power supply
recovers.
Check if no fuse has blown.
Turn off the power supply.
Check if the breaker is blown.
Turn the power on with the breaker switch in the
off position.
Do not turn the power on with the breaker switch
in the trip position.
(Contact your dealer.)
ON
Switch
Trip position
Breaker
OFF
2. If the system stops operating after operating

the system.
Check if the air inlet or outlet of outdoor or indoor
unit is blocked by obstacles.
Remove the obstacle and make it well-ventilated.
Check if the air filter is clogged.
Ask a qualified service person to clean the air filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
3. The system operates but it does not sufficiently cool or heat.
If the air inlet or outlet of the indoor or the outdoor
unit is blocked with obstacles.
If the air filter is clogged.
Ask a qualified service person to clean the air filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
If the set temperature is not proper (Refer to
ADJUSTMENT).
If the FAN SPEED button is set to LOW SPEED
(Refer to ADJUSTMENT).
If the air flow angle is not proper (Refer to AIR
FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST).
If the doors or the windows are open.
Shut doors or windows to prevent wind from coming in.
If direct sunlight enters the room (when cooling).
Use curtains or blinds.
When there are too many inhabitants in the room
(when cooling).
Cooling effect decreases if heat gain of the room
is too large.
If the heat source of the room is excessive (when
cooling).
Cooling effect decreases if heat gain of the room
is too large.
English
12
3P184442-4D
Operation Manual
287
Operations
1.4
EDSG18-936
FCQ35/50/60/71B Series
2
4 11
3
6
hr
C
hr
5
7
NOT
AVAILABLE
TEST
8
10
9
12
L H
13
20
19
18
15
14
17
16
21
g
e
3
f
d
hr
[1]
288
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
OPERATION
This operation manual is for the system with standard control. Before initiating operation, contact
your Daikin dealer for the operation that corresponds to your system.
NOTE
If the unit you purchased is controlled by a wireless remote controller, also refer to the wireless
remote controllers operation manual.
ask your Daikin dealer for the operation that corresponds to your system.
Heat pump type
Cooling only type
Operations

SYSTEM OR TWO REMOTE CONTROLLERS CONTROL SYSTEM
beside individual control (one remote controller controls one indoor unit) system. Confirm the following if
your unit is of the following control system type.
One remote controller controls up to 16 indoor
units.
Two remote controllers control one indoor unit (In
case of group control system, one group of indoor
units)
NOTE

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Operation Manual
Indoor unit
Remote controller
Inlet air
Discharge air
Air outlet
Air flow flap (at air outlet)
Drain pipe
Air inlet
The built-in air filter removes dust and dirt.
Drain pumping out device(built-in)
Condensate removed from the room during
cooling.
289
Operations
We recommend that you read this instruction manual carefully before use to gain full advantage of the
function of the air conditioner, and to avoid malfunction due to mishandling.
The precautions described below are WARNING and CAUTION. These are very important
precautions concerning safety. Be sure to
observe all of them without fail.
WARNING ...These are the matters with possibilities leading to serious consequences such as death or serious
injury due to erroneous handling.
CAUTION ....These are the matters with possibilities leading to injury or material
damage due to erroneous handling including probabilities leading to serious consequences in
some cases.
After reading, keep this manual at a place
where any user can read at any time. Furthermore, make certain that this operation manual
is handed to a new user when he takes over
the operation.
WARNING
Avoid exposure of your body directly to the
cold air for a long time, or avoid excessive
exposure of your body to the cold air.
Otherwise, your physical condition may be deteriorated and/or your health may be ruined.
turn off power, and contact the dealer where
you purchased the air conditioner.
Ask your dealer for installation of the air conditioner.
Incomplete installation performed by yourself
may result in a water leakage, electric shock,
and fire.
Ask your dealer for improvement, repair, and
maintenance.
Incomplete improvement, repair, and maintenance may result in a water leakage, electric
shock, and fire.
Do not insert your finger, a stick, etc., into the
air inlet, outlet, and fan blades.
A fan in high-speed running may result in injury.
The refrigerant in the air conditioner is safe
and normally does not leak. If the refrigerant
leaks inside the room, the contact with a fire
of a burner, a heater or a cooker may result in
a harmful gas.
Do not use the air conditioner until when a service person confirms to finish repairing the portion where the refrigerant leaks.
290
EDSG18-936
For refrigerant leakage, consult your dealer.

small room, it is necessary to take proper measures so that the amount of any leaked refrigerant does not exceed the limiting concentration
even when it leaks. If the refrigerant leaks
exceeding the level of limiting concentration, an
oxygen deficiency accident may happen.
For installation of separately sold component parts, ask a specialist.
Be sure to use the separately sold component
parts designated by our company.
Incomplete installation performed by yourself may
result in a water leakage, electric shock, and fire.
Ask your dealer to move and reinstall the air
conditioner.
Incomplete installation may result in a water
leakage, electric shock, and fire.
Do not use any fuse with improper capacity.
The use of a piece of wire and whatnot may
result in a failure and fire.
CAUTION
Do not use the air conditioner for other purposes.
Do not use the air conditioner for a special application such as the storage of foods, animals and
plants, precision machines, and art objects as
otherwise the deterioration of quality may result.
Do not remov e the air outlet of the ou tdoor unit.
The fan may get exposed and result in injury.
When the air conditioner is used in combination with burners or heaters, perform sufficient ventilation.
Insufficient ventilation may result in an oxygen
deficiency accident.
Check and make sure that foundation blocks
are not damaged after a long use.
If they are left in a damaged condition, the unit
may fall and result in injury.
Neither place a flammable spray bottle near
the air conditioner nor perform spraying.
Doing so may result in a fire.
To clean the air conditioner, stop operation,
and unplug the power cord from the outlet.
result.
Do not operate the air conditioner with a wet
hand.
An electric shock may result.
Do not place a burner or heater at a place
directly exposed to the wind from the air conditioner.
Incomplete combustion of the burner or heater
may result.
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Adverse influence to little children, plants or
animals may result.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water.
Electric shock or fire may result.
where flammable gas may leak out.
If the gas leaks out and stays around the air conditioner, a fire may break out.
Unless it is installed, an electric shock or fire may
result.
Be sure the air conditioner is electrically
grounded.
Do not connect the grounding conductor to a gas
pipe, water pipe, lightning arrester, and the
grounding conductor for a telephone.
Imperfect grounding work may result in an electric shock.
Execute complete drain piping for perfect
drainage.
Incomplete piping may result in a water leakage.
young children or infirm persons without
supervision.
Young children should be supervised to
ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
3. OPERATION RANGE
COOLING ONLY TYPE
TEMPERATURE[C]
OUTDOOR
INDOOR
21 to 32(DB)/
5 to 46(DB)
14 to 23(WB)
HEAT PUMP TYPE
OPERATION
COOLING
HEATING
TEMPERATURE[C]
OUTDOOR
INDOOR
21 to 32(DB)/
5 to 46(DB)
14 to 23(WB)
14 to 21(DB)/
14 to 28(DB)
15 to 15.5(WB)
D B: Dry bulb temperature

WB: Wet bulb temperature
The setting temperature range of the remote controller is 16C to 32C.
Operation Manual
Is the air conditioner installed at a well-ventilated place where there are no obstacles
around?
places.
b. Where there is much salt such as a beach area
resort
d. Where there are considerable voltage fluctuations such as a factory or plant
f. Where there is much spray of oil and vapor
g. Where there are machines generating electromagnetic waves
Regarding wiring
All wiring must be performed by an authorized
electrician.
To do wiring, ask your dealer. Never do it by yourself.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this air conditioner and
that all electrical work is carried out by qualified personnel according to local laws and
regulations.

b. A place where the hot wind discharged from
the air outlet of the outdoor unit and the running
noises.
If abnormal noises occur in use, consult your
dealer.

If proper drainage is not carried out from the outdoor drain pipes during air-conditioning operation,
chances are that dust and dirt are clogged in the
pipe. This may result in a water leakage from the
indoor unit. Under such circumstances, stop the
operation of the air conditioner, and then consult
your dealer or our service station.
291
Operations
EDSG18-936
5. NAME AND FUNCTION OF EACH

SWITCH AND DISPLAY ON THE
REMOTE CONTROLLER
Although the display and shape of the buttons on
the BRC1B type are slightly different, they may be
operated in the same manner.
ON/OFF BUTTON
stop.
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
(OPERATION MODE)
MODE. For cooling only type, (Auto)
and (Heating) are not installed.
DISPLAY
TEST (INSPECTION/TEST
OPERATION)
system mode is in.
hr
DISPLAY
7
8
9

DISPLAY
(SET TEMPERATURE)
DISPLAY
(FAN SPEED)
DISPLAY (AIR FLOW FLAP)
C
DISPLAY
(TIME TO CLEAN AIR
10 FILTER)
DISPLAY
(DEFROST)
11
Refer to DEFROST OPERATION.
12 If that particular function is not available,
13
292
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
TIMER ON/OFF BUTTON

or STOP time.
Press this button to select OPERATION
MODE.
NOTE
(PROGRAMMED TIME)
hr
14

If the main power supply is turned off during operation, operation will restart automatically after the
power turns back on again.

Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
COOLING OPERATION ................................

HEATING OPERATION .................................
AUTOMATIC OPERATION............................
In this operation mode, COOL/HEAT

FAN OPERATION..........................................
DRY OPERATION .........................................
The function of this program is to decrease the
humidity in your room with the minimum temperature decrease.
This system does not go into operation if the
room temperature is below 16C.
For cooling only type, COOLING , FAN and
ON/OFF
Press ON/OFF button


DEFROST OPERATION
As the frost on the coil of an outdoor unit increase,
heating effect decreases and the system goes
into DEFROST OPERATION.
.
DEFROST OPERATION, the system returns to
HEATING OPERATION.
ADJUSTMENT
shown below.
TEMPERATURE SETTING
Each time this button is pressed, setting
temperature rises 1C.
temperature lowers 1C.

NOTE
FAN SPEED CONTROL

The microchip may sometimes control the fan speed
in order to protect the unit.

Press the AIR FLOW DIRECTION button to adjust
the air flow angle.
Regarding outside air temperature and heating capacity

declines as the outside air temperature falls. In
such a case, use the air conditioner in combination with other heating systems.
. Leave it
room). For details, consult your dealer.
Operation Manual
Up and down adjustment

The movable limit of the flap is changeable.
Contact your Daikin dealer for details.
293
Operations
EDSG18-936
Press the AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST

button to select the air direction as shown
below.
swing

swings as shown below and
the air flow direction continuously varies. (Automatic swing
setting)
Press AIR FLOW DIRECTION
ADJUST button to select the air
direction of your choice.
stops swinging and the air flow
direction is fixed (Fixed air flow
direction setting).
Press the TIMER MODE START/STOP button

several times and select the mode on the
display.
Operation
mode
Cooling
Heating
When room
When room
temperature is
temperature is
lower than the
higher than the
Operation
set temperature
set temperature
condition When operating At defrost operacontinuously at
tion
horizontal air
flow direction
Operation mode includes automatic operation.

) .... The system stops
operating after the set time has elapsed.
) .... The system starts
operating after the set time has elapsed.
72 hours.
The start and the stop time can be simultaneously
programmed.
294
PROGRAMMING TIME

advances by 1 hour.
MOVEMENT OF THE AIR FLOW FLAP

For the following conditions, micro computer controls the air flow direction so it may be different from
the display.
TIMER ON/OFF

The display
or
NOTE
When setting the timer Off and On at the same
time, repeat the above procedure from 1 to 3
once again.
When the timer is programmed to stop the system
after 3 hours and start the system after 4 hours, the
system will stop after 3 hours and then 1 hour later
the system will start.
the remaining time.
system operates.
Adjust the room temperature properly for a comfortable environment. Avoid excessive heating or
cooling.
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936

indoor unit.
Operations


It will display that it will operate for a set amount of
time.
Increase the frequency of cleaning if the unit is
installed in a room where the air is extremely
contaminated.
air filter. (For changing air filter, please contact your
dealer.)
Pull it downward slowly while pressing the
buttons provided on two spots.
(Do the same procedure for closing.)
Fig. 1

(TIME TO CLEAN
AIR FILTER), ask a qualified service person to
clean the filter (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
8. MAINTENANCE
2. Remove the air filters.

Pull the hook of the air filter out diagonally
downward, and remove the filter.
Fig. 2
IMPORTANT!
BEFORE OBTAINING ACCESS TO TERMINAL
DEVICES, ALL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
MUST BE INTERRUPTED
To clean the air conditioner, be sure to stop operation, and turn the power switch off. Otherwise, an
electric shock and injury may result.
Doing so may result in an electric shock.
Be careful with a scaffold or staging.
Caution must be exercised because of work at a
high place.

water B).
A)Using a vacuum cleaner
B)Washing with water

When the air filter is very
dirty, use soft brush and
neutral detergent.
Operation Manual
295
Operations
NOTE
burning.
EDSG18-936
HOW TO CLEAN THE SUCTION GRILLE

Push it downward slowly while pressing the buttons provided on two spots. (Follow the same
procedure for closing.)
Fig. 4

(1)Hook the air filter to a protrusion on the suction grille.
(2)Push the lower part of the air filter onto the
protrusion at the lower part of the suction
grille, and fix the air filter there.
Fig. 3
2. Detach the suction grille.

Open the suction grille 45 degrees and lift it
upward.
Fig. 5
SIGN RESET button.
The TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER display
vanishes.
HOW TO CLEAN AIR OUTLET AND OUTSIDE PANELS

Clean with soft cloth
neutral detergent.
When the flap is extremely contaminated, remove
it as below and clean or exchange it.
(For changing the flap, please contact your
dealer.)
NOTE
Do not scrub firmly when washing the blade with
water.
The surface sealing may peel off.
296

(Refer to Fig. 2)
4. Clean the suction grille.
Wash with a soft bristle brush
and neutral detergent or
water, and dry throughly.
5. Reattach the air filter.
Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER
(Refer to Fig. 3)
6. Reattach the suction grille.
7. Close the suction grille.

Check that the air inlet and outlet are not blocked.
Remove any obstacle.
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936

The display on the remote controller will be shown
when the power is turned on.

the unit.
Refer to FAN OPERATION.
energy.

CONDITIONER
The following symptoms do not indicate air conditioner malfunction.
The system does not restart immediately after
the ON/OFF button is pressed.
normal condition.
device operates to prevent overload of the system. After 3 minutes, the system will turn on again
automatically.
the button.
normal condition.
automatically.
Operations

shows
(UNDER CENTRALIZED
CONTROL) and it flashes for a few seconds
This is because the system is under centralized
control. Flashes on the display indicates that the
system cannot be controlled by the remote controller.
II. WHITE MIST COMES OUT OF A UNIT
When humidity is high during cooling operation. (In oily or dusty places)
If the inside of an indoor unit is extremely contaminated, the temperature distribution inside a room
becomes uneven. It is necessary to clean the
inside of the indoor unit. Ask your Daikin dealer
for details on cleaning the unit. This operation
requires a qualified service person.
steam and exists.
III.NOISE OF AIR CONDITIONERS

DEFROST OPERATION.
which is heard at the sta rt or immediately after
the stop of DEFROST OPERATION.
This is the noise of refrigerant caused by flow stop
and flow change.
A continuous low Shah sound is heard
when the system is in COOLING OPERATION
or at a stop.
operation.
stop of operation.
Expansion and contraction of plastic parts caused
by temperature change makes this noise.
IV.DUST FROM THE UNITS
Operation Manual
297
Operations
EDSG18-936
V. THE UNITS GIVE OFF ODORS

VI.THE LIQUID CRYSTAL OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER SHOW

This shows that the remote controller is in normal
condition.

your Daikin dealer.
person.
WARNING
turn off power, and contact your dealer
If a safety device such as a fuse, a breaker, or an
earth leakage breaker frequently actuates, or ON/
OFF switch does not properly work.
Measure: Turn off the main power switch
If the display
OPERATION lamp
INDOOR UNIT No. in which a

malfunction occurs
MALFUNCTION
CODE
Measure: Notify your Daikin dealer and inform
him/her of the display.
INSPECTION
display

occurs during operation, the system automatically restarts immediately after the power supply recovers.
Check if the fuse has blown or breaker has
worked.
Change the fuse or set the breaker.
the system.
Check if the air inlet or outlet of outdoor or
indoor unit is blocked by obstacles.
Ask a qualified service person to clean the air
filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
If the air inlet or outlet of the indoor or the outdoor unit is blocked with obstacles.
ADJUSTMENT).
If the FAN SPEED button is set to LOW
SPEED (Refer to ADJUSTMENT).
If the air flow angle is not proper
(Refer to AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST).
If the doors or the windows are open. Shut
doors or windows to prevent wind from coming
in.
When there are too many inhabitants in the
room (when cooling).
Cooling effect decreases if heat gain of the
room is too large.
If the heat source of the room is excessive
(when cooling).
room is too large.
3P156215-1
298
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
1.5
Operations
FBQ60/71B Series
2
4 10
3
6
hr
C
hr
5
7
NOT
AVAILABLE
TEST
8
9
L H
11
12
19
18
TEST
14
17
13
16
15
e
g
c
hr
[1]
Operation Manual
299
Operations
1. WHAT TO DO BEFORE OPERATION

This operation manual is for the system with standard control. Before initiating operation, contact
your Daikin dealer for the operation that corresponds to your system.
ask your Daikin dealer for the operation that corresponds to your system.
Heat pump type
Cooling only type

SYSTEM OR TWO REMOTE CONTROLLERS CONTROL SYSTEM
beside individual control (one remote controller controls one indoor unit) system. Confirm the following if
your unit is of the following control system type.
One remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units.
Two remote controllers control one indoor unit (In case
of group control system, one group of indoor units)
EDSG18-936
NOTE

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Indoor unit
Remote controller
Inlet air
Discharge air
Drain pipe
Suction panel (optional)
Equipped with an air filter that removes dust
and dirt.
Drain pumping out device (built-in)
Drains water removed from the room during
cooling.
We recommend that you read this instruction manual carefully before use to gain full advantage of the
function of the air conditioner, and to avoid malfunction due to mishandling.
The precautions described below are WARNING and CAUTION. These are very important
precautions concerning safety. Be sure to
observe all of them without fail.
WARNING .. These are the matters with possibilities leading to serious consequences such as death or serious
injury due to erroneous handling.
CAUTION ... These are the matters with possibilities leading to injury or material
damage due to erroneous handling including probabilities leading to serious consequences in
some cases.
After reading, keep this manual at a place
where any user can read at any time. Furthermore, make certain that this operation manual
is handed to a new user when he takes over
the operation.
300
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
WARNING
Avoid exposure of your body directly to the
cold air for a long time, or avoid excessive
exposure of your body to the cold air.
Otherwise, your physical condition may be deteriorated and/or your health may be ruined.
turn off power, and contact the dealer where
you purchased the air conditioner.
and fire.
Ask your dealer for improvement, repair, and
maintenance.
Incomplete improvement, repair, and maintenance may result in a water leakage, electric
shock, and fire.
Do not insert your finger, a stick, etc., into the
air inlet, outlet, and fan blades.
A fan in high-speed running may result in injury.
The refrigerant in the air conditioner is safe
and normally does not leak. If the refrigerant
leaks inside the room, the contact with a fire
of a burner, a heater or a cooker may result in
a harmful gas.
Do not use the air conditioner until when a service person confirms to finish repairing the portion where the refrigerant leaks.
For refrigerant leakage, consult your dealer.
small room, it is necessary to take proper measures so that the amount of any leaked refrigerant does not exceed the limiting concentration
even when it leaks. If the refrigerant leaks
exceeding the level of limiting concentration, an
oxygen deficiency accident may happen.
For installation of separately sold component parts, ask a specialist.
Be sure to use the separately sold component
parts designated by our company.
and fire.
Ask your dealer to move and reinstall the air
conditioner.
Do not use any fuse with improper capacity.
The use of a piece of wire and whatnot may
result in a failure and fire.
CAUTION
Do not use the air conditioner for other purposes.
Do not use the air conditioner for a special application such as the storage of foods, animals and
plants, precision machines, and art objects as
otherwise the deterioration of quality may result.
Operation Manual
Operations
Do not remove the air outlet of the outdoor unit.

The fan may get exposed and result in injury.
When the air conditioner is used in combination with burners or heaters, perform sufficient ventilation.
Insufficient ventilation may result in an oxygen
deficiency accident.
Check and make sure that foundation blocks
are not damaged after a long use.
If they are left in a damaged condition, the unit
may fall and result in injury.
Neither place a flammable spray bottle near
the air conditioner nor perform spraying.
Doing so may result in a fire.
To clean the air conditioner, stop operation,
and unplug the power cord from the outlet.
result.
Do not operate the air conditioner with a wet
hand.
An electric shock may result.
Do not place a burner or heater at a place
directly exposed to the wind from the air conditioner.
Incomplete combustion of the burner or heater
may result.
Adverse influence to little children, plants or
animals may result.
where flammable gas may leak out.
Unless it is installed, an electric shock or fire may
result.
Be sure the air conditioner is electrically
grounded.
Do not connect the grounding conductor to a gas
pipe, water pipe, lightning arrester, and the
grounding conductor for a telephone.
Imperfect grounding work may result in an electric shock.
Execute complete drain piping for perfect
drainage.
Incomplete piping may result in a water leakage.
supervision.
Young children should be supervised to
ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
301
Operations
EDSG18-936
3. OPERATION RANGE
COOLING ONLY TYPE
TEMPERATURE[C]
OUTDOOR
INDOOR
21 to 32(DB)/
5 to 46(DB)
14 to 23(WB)
HEAT PUMP TYPE
OPERATION
COOLING
HEATING
TEMPERATURE[C]
OUTDOOR
INDOOR
21 to 32(DB)/
5 to 46(DB)
14 to 23(WB)
14 to 21(DB)/
14 to 28(DB)
15 to 15.5(WB)
D B: Dry bulb temperature

WB: Wet bulb temperature
Is the air conditioner installed at a well-ventilated
place where there are no obstacles around?
places.
b. Where there is much salt such as a beach area
resort
d. Where there are considerable voltage fluctuations such as a factory or plant
f . Where there is much spray of oil and vapor
g. Where there are machines generating electromagnetic waves
302
Regarding wiring
All wiring must be performed by an authorized
electrician.
To do wiring, ask your dealer. Never do it by yourself.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this air conditioner and
that all electrical work is carried out by qualified personnel according to local laws and
regulations.

b. A place where the hot wind discharged from the
air outlet of the outdoor unit and the running
noises.
If abnormal noises occur in use, consult your
dealer.

If proper drainage is not carried out from the outdoor drain pipes during air-conditioning operation,
chances are that dust and dirt are clogged in the
pipe. This may result in a water leakage from the
indoor unit. Under such circumstances, stop the
operation of the air conditioner, and then consult
your dealer or our service station.
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
5. NAME AND FUNCTION OF EACH

SWITCH AND DISPLAY ON THE
REMOTE CONTROLLER
Although the display and shape of the buttons on
the BRC1B type are slightly different, they may be
operated in the same manner.
1
ON/OFF BUTTON
Press the button and the system will start. Press
the button again and the system will stop.
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
(OPERATION MODE)
MODE. For cooling only type, (Auto)
DISPLAY
OPERATION)
system mode is in.
DISPLAY
hr
(PROGRAMMED TIME)
hr
6
7
DISPLAY
(SET TEMPERATURE)
DISPLAY
(FAN SPEED)
DISPLAY
(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER)
10
If that particular function is not available,
11 When running multiple units simultaneously
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

TIMER ON/OFF BUTTON
or STOP time.
MODE.
NOTE
DISPLAY
(DEFROST)
Refer to DEFROST OPERATION.
Operation Manual
If the main power supply is turned off during operation, operation will restart automatically after the
power turns back on again.
303
Operations
EDSG18-936

COOLING OPERATION .........................
HEATING OPERATION ..........................
AUTOMATIC OPERATION.....................
In this operation mode, COOL/HEAT

FAN OPERATION...................................
DRY OPERATION ..................................
The function of this program is to decrease the
humidity in your room with the minimum temperature decrease.
This system does not go into operation if the
room temperature is below 16C.
For cooling only type, COOLING, FAN and
ON/OFF
Press ON/OFF button


DEFROST OPERATION
As the frost on the coil of an outdoor unit increase,
heating effect decreases and the system goes
into DEFROST OPERATION.
.
DEFROST OPERATION, the system returns to
HEATING OPERATION.
Regarding outside air temperature and heating capacity

declines as the outside air temperature falls. In
such a case, use the air conditioner in combination with other heating systems.
304

. Leave it
room). For details, consult your dealer.
ADJUSTMENT
shown below.
TEMPERATURE SETTING
temperature rises 1C.
temperature lowers 1C.
NOTE
FAN SPEED CONTROL

The microchip may sometimes control the fan speed
in order to protect the unit.

) ....
The system stops operating after the set time has
elapsed.
) ....
The system starts operating after the set time has
elapsed.
72 hours.
The start and the stop time can be simultaneously
programmed.
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Operations
Press the TIMER MODE START/STOP button

several times and select the mode on the
display.
PROGRAMMING TIME

advances by 1 hour.

indoor unit.
(TIME TO CLEAN
AIR FILTER), ask a qualified service person to
clean the filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
TIMER ON/OFF

The display
or
NOTE
When setting the timer Off and On at the same time,
repeat the above procedure from 1 to 3 once again.
When the timer is programmed to stop the system
after 3 hours and start the system after 4 hours, the
system will stop after 3 hours and then 1 hour later
the system will start.
the remaining time.
8. MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT!
BEFORE OBTAINING ACCESS TO TERMINAL
DEVICES, ALL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
MUST BE INTERRUPTED
To clean the air conditioner, be sure to stop operation, and turn the power switch off. Otherwise, an
electric shock and injury may result.
Doing so may result in an electric shock.
Be careful with a scaffold or staging.
Caution must be exercised because of work at a
high place.
system operates.
Adjust the room temperature properly for a comfortable environment. Avoid excessive heating or cooling.
Operation Manual

It will display that it will operate for a set amount of time.
Increase the frequency of cleaning if the unit is installed
in a room where the air is extremely contaminated.
air filter. (For changing air filter, please contact your
dealer.)
305
Operations
EDSG18-936

Slide both knobs simultaneously as shown and
then pull them downward.
(Do the same procedure for closing.)
(Refer to Fig.1)
NOTE
burning.
Align the two hangers and push the air filter up.
Confirm that four hangers are fixed.
(Refer to Fig.4)
Fig. 1
(If chains are present. Unhook the chains.)
(Refer to Fig.2)
Fig. 4
Fig. 2
2. Remove the air filters.
Remove the air filters by pulling its cloth forward.
(Refer to Fig.3)
5. Close the suction grille.

SIGN RESET button.
The display
(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER) vanishes.
HOW TO CLEAN AIR OUTLET, SUCTION

GRILLE AND OUTSIDE PANELS
Clean with soft cloth.
neutral detergent.
Clean the suction grille when it is shut.
Fig. 3
water B).
A)Using a vacuum cleaner
NOTE
B)Washing with water

When the air filter is very
dirty, use soft brush and
neutral detergent.

Check that the air inlet and outlet are not blocked.
Remove any obstacle.
306
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936

The display on the remote controller will be shown
when the power is turned on.

the unit.
Refer to FAN OPERATION.
energy.

CONDITIONER
The following symptoms do not indicate air conditioner malfunction
The system does not restart immediately after
the ON/OFF button is pressed.
normal condition.
automatically.
the button.
normal condition.
automatically.
Operation Manual
Operations

shows
(UNDER CENTRALIZED
CONTROL) and it flashes for few seconds
This is because the system is under centralized control. Flashes on the display indicates that the system
cannot be controlled by the remote controller.
II. WHITE MIST COMES OUT OF A UNIT
When humidity is high during cooling operation (In oily or dusty places)
If the inside of an indoor unit is extremely contaminated, the temperature distribution inside a room
becomes uneven. It is necessary to clean the
inside of the indoor unit. Ask your Daikin dealer
for details on cleaning the unit. This operation
requires a qualified service person.
steam and exists.
III.NOISE OF AIR CONDITIONERS

DEFROST OPERATION.
which is heard at the start or immediately after
the stop of DEFROST OPERATION.
This is the noise of refrigerant caused by flow stop
and flow change.
A continuous low Shah sound is heard
when the system is in COOLING OPERATION
or at a stop.
operation.
stop of operation.
Expansion and contraction of plastic parts caused
by temperature change makes this noise.
IV.DUST FROM THE UNITS
307
Operations
EDSG18-936
V. THE UNITS GIVE OFF ODORS

VI.THE LIQUID CRYSTAL OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER SHOW

This shows that the remote controller is in normal
condition.

your Daikin dealer.
person.
WARNING
turn off power, and contact your dealer
If a safety device such as a fuse, a breaker, or an
earth leakage breaker frequently actuates, or ON/
OFF switch does not properly work.
Measure: Turn off the main power switch
If the display
OPERATION lamp
UNIT No.
INSPECTION
display
L H
INDOOR UNIT No. in

which a malfunction occurs
MALFUNCTION CODE
Measure: Notify your Daikin dealer and inform

him/her of the display.

occurs during operation, the system automatically restarts immediately after the power supply recovers.
Check if the fuse has blown or breaker has
worked.
Change the fuse or set the breaker.
the system.
Check if the air inlet or outlet of outdoor or
indoor unit is blocked by obstacles.
If the air inlet or outlet of the indoor or the outdoor unit is blocked with obstacles.
ADJUSTMENT).
If the FAN SPEED button is set to LOW
SPEED (Refer to ADJUSTMENT).
If the doors or the windows are open. Shut
doors or windows to prevent wind from coming
in.
When there are too many inhabitants in the
room (when cooling).
room is too large.
If the heat source of the room is excessive
(when cooling).
room is too large.
3P156215-3
308
Operation Manual
EDSG18-936
Part 5
Options
1. Option List ...........................................................................................310
1.1 Outdoor Units .......................................................................................310
1.2 BP Units ...............................................................................................310
1.3 Indoor Units ..........................................................................................310
2. Options for Outdoor & BP Units ..........................................................314

2.1 Options for Outdoor Units.....................................................................314
2.2 Options for BP Units.............................................................................315
3. Options for Indoor Units ......................................................................318

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Duct Connected Type...........................................................................318

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type ..............................................................345
4. Control Devices...................................................................................355
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
Options
<DCS302CA61> Central Remote Controller .......................................355

<DCS301BA61> Unified ON/OFF Controller .......................................387
<DST301BA61> Schedule Timer .........................................................395
Combinations of Optional Controllers for Centralized Control..............414
<KRP928B2S> Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET
(Residential Air Conditioner) ................................................................417
<DTA112BA51> Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (SkyAir).....................419
<KRC72> Centralized Control Board-up to 5 Rooms...........................421
<KRP413A1S> Wiring Adaptor for Timer Clock / Remote Controller...423
<KRP4AA51/53> Wiring Adaptor for Electrical Appendices.................427
<KRP1BA54/57> Adaptor for Wiring ....................................................432
<KRP1BA101> Installation Box for Adaptor PCB ................................433
<KRCS01-1B> Remote Sensor............................................................435
<BRC1C61> Wired Remote Controller for SkyAir................................438
<BRC7C613W> Wireless Remote Controller.......................................445
<BRC7E531W> Wireless Remote Controller.......................................450
309
Option List
EDSG18-936
1. Option List
1.1
Outdoor Units
Option Name
1.2
Cool/Heat Selector
Cool/Heat Selector Fixing Box
KRC19-26A
Drain Plug
KKPJ5F180
Fixture for Preventing Overturning
KPT-60B160
Wire Type Fixture for Preventing Overturning
K-KYZP15C
REFNET Joint
KJB111A
BP Units
Option Name
1.3
RMKS112/140/160E
BPMKS967B2(3)B
KHRP26A22T
Indoor Units
Wall Mounted Type

Option Name
Note:
Centralized Control Board-up to 5 Rooms 1
Wiring Adaptor for Timer Clock/Remote Controller 2

(Normal Open Pulse Contact / Normal Open Contact)
FTKS25/35D
KRC72
KRP413A1S
Central Remote Controller 3
DCS302CA61
Unified ON/OFF Controller 3
DCS301BA61
Schedule Timer 3
DST301BA61
Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (Residential Air Conditioner)
KRP928B2S
Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air Purifying Filter

(without Frame)
Remote Controller Loss Prevention with Chain
KAF970A46
310
KAF952B42
KKF917A4
1 A wiring adaptor (KRP413A1S) is also required for each indoor unit.

2 Time clock and other devices ; obtained locally.
3 An interface adaptor (KRP928B2S) is also required for each indoor unit.
Option Name
Note:
FTKS50/60/71F

FTKS50B
KRC72
KRP413A1S
DCS302CA61
DCS301BA61
Schedule Timer 3
DST301BA61
KRP928B2S
Air Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function

(without Frame)
KAF952A42
KKF917A4

Options
EDSG18-936
Option List
Duct Connected Type

FDKS25/35CA
FDKS50C
Option Name
Note:

FDKS60C
KRC72
KRP413A1S
DCS302CA61
DCS301BA61
DST301BA61
Schedule Timer 4
KRP928B2S
Suction Grille
KDGF19A45
Insulation Kit for High Humidity
FDKS25/35EA
KDT25N50
KDT25N63
KDT25N32
KKF917A4


Option Name
Note:
Options
FFQ25/35/50/60B
Decoration Panel (required)
BYFQ60B8W1
Remote Controller
(required)
Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet
KDBHQ44BA60 (KDBHQ44B60)
Panel Spacer
KDBQ44BA60A (KDBQ44B60A)
Fresh Air Intake Kit
Longlife Filter
DCS302CA61
DCS301BA61
Schedule Timer 3
DST301BA61
10
Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (SkyAir)
DTA112BA51
Wired Type 1
Wireless
Type
BRC1C61
Cooling Only
Direct Installation Type
BRC7E531W
KDDQ44XA60 (KDDQ44X60)
KAFQ441BA60 (KAFQ441B60)
11
Wiring Adaptor for Electrical Appendices 2
12
Adaptor for Wiring 2
KRP1BA57
13
Installation Box for Adaptor PCB
KRP1BA101
14
Remote Sensor
KRCS01-1B
KRP4AA53
1 Wiring for wired remote controller should be obtained locally.

2 Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1BA101) is necessary.
3 An interface adaptor (DTA112BA51) is also required for each indoor unit.
311
Option List
EDSG18-936

Option Name
1
2
Remote Controller
(required)
Panel Spacer
Note:
FCQ35/50/60/71B
Fresh Air Intake Kit
High Efficiency Filter
BYC125K-W1
Wired Type
Wireless
Type
BRC1C61
Cooling Only
BRC7C613W
KDBP55H160WA
Chamber
Type
Without T-shaped
Pipe and Fan 1
With T-shaped Pipe,
without Fan 2
KDDP55D160
KDDP55D160K
Direct Installation Type 3
KDDJ55X160
(Colorimetric Method 65%)
KAFP556D80
KAFP557D80
KAFP552H80
Replacement High
Efficiency Filter
High Efficiency Filter Chamber
KDDF55DA160
Replacement Longlife Filter
KAF551KA160
Branch Duct Chamber
KDJ55K80
10
Wiring Adaptor for Electrical Appendices 4
KRP4AA53
11
Adaptor for Wiring 4
KRP1BA57
12
Installation Box for Adaptor PCB
13
DCS302CA61
KAFP553H80
KRP1B98
14
DCS301BA61
15
Schedule Timer 5
DST301BA61
16
DTA112BA51
1 With a suction chamber. Fresh air is intaken from 2 holes on the sides of the connection chamber.
(This method should be selected if a wireless remote controller is used.)

2 Without a suction chamber. Fresh air is intaken from 2 holes on the connection chamber via a T-
shaped pipe connection. (A wireless remote controller can not be used in this case.)
3 Without a suction chamber. Fresh air is intaken directly from a hole on the main unit.
4 Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1B98) is necessary
312
Options
EDSG18-936
Option List

Option Name
1
Remote Controller
(required)
Service Access Panel
Options
Wired Type
BRC1C61
KTB25KA80W
KAF252LA80
KAF253LA80
Resin net
KAFJ251K80
Replacement
Longlife Filter
Filter Chamber for Rear Suction
KAJ25L80B
Filter Chamber for Bottom Suction
KAJ25L80D
Canvas Duct (Air Suction Canvas)
KSA-25KA80
Note:
FBQ60/71B
BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1)
Discharge Grille
10
Discharge Chamber
11
Branch Duct
150
K-DG5DW
200
K-DG9DW
150
K-DGC5D
200
K-DGC9D
200150
K-DDV20A
150
K-FDS151C(1m)/K-FDS152C(2m)/
K-FDS155C(5m)/K-FDS156C(6m)
200
K-FDS205C(5m)/K-FDS206C(6m)
12
Flexible Duct
13
Blind Board
KBBJ25KA80
14
Adaptor for Discharge
KDAJ25KA71
15
Flange for Suction
KDJ2507K80
16
Wiring Adaptor for Electrical Appendices
17
Adaptor for Wiring (Interlock for Fresh Air Intake Fan)
18
DCS302CA61
KRP4AA51
KRP1BA54
19
DCS301BA61
20
Schedule Timer 1
DST301BA61
21
DTA112BA51
313
Options for Outdoor & BP Units
EDSG18-936
2. Options for Outdoor & BP Units

2.1
Options for Outdoor Units
2.1.1
<KKPJ5F180> Drain Plug
Installation Manual
Use this plug to connect a drain hose to dispose the drain from the outdoor unit.
3P066795-1B
314
Options
EDSG18-936
2.2
Options for BP Units
2.2.1
<KHRP26A22T> REFNET Joint
Dimensions
GAS SIDE JOINT

I.D12.7
I.D15.9
I.D19.1
I.D22.2
O.D19.1
INSULATION
I.D15.9
I.D12.7
O.D15.9
I.D19.1
I.D15.9
80
80
100
I.D12.7
338
(42)
380
LIQUID SIDE JOINT

ACCESSORY
REDUCER : GAS SIDE : 2pcs
INSULATION : 2pcs
INSTALLATION MANUAL
INSULATION
I.D9.5
I.D9.5
I.D6.4
80
5
I.D9.5
I.D6.4
250
(40)
290
D3K05234A
Installation Manual
THIS KIT INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING PARTS.

KIT NAME
KHRP26A
22T
SHAPE
GAS SIDE JOINT
KHRP26A
33T
KHRP26A
72T
KHRP26A
73T
LIQUID SIDE JOINT INSULATION
REDUCER (FOR GAS PIPE)
2 pcs.
19.1
22.2
2 pcs.
19.1
22.2
2 pcs.
22.2
2 pcs.
12.7 22.2 28.6 31.8 38.1
REDUCER (FOR LIQUID PIPE)
25.4
25.4/22.2 28.6 2 PCS.
15.9
19.1
6.4 19.1 22.2
Make sure gas side joint and liquid side joint are for R410A. (Label for R410A is attached on each part.)
SELECTION PROCEDURE
According to the INSTALLATION MANUAL of outdoor unit.
Options
315
EDSG18-936
The pipe size of each parts are shown below.
KIT NAME
GAS SIDE JOINT

I.D12.7
I.D19.1
KHRP26A
22T
LIQUID SIDE JOINT

I.D15.9
I.D12.7
I.D15.9
Inlet
I.D31.8
I.D25.4
Inlet
I.D19.1
I.D15.9
I.D15.9
I.D12.7
Outlet
Outlet
Inlet
I.D12.7
I.D15.9
I.D28.6
I.D31.8
I.D25.4
KHRP26A
73T
I.D25.4
I.D15.9
I.D19.1
I.D19.1
I.D19.1
I.D15.9
Outlet
Inlet
Inlet
I.D6.4
I.D9.5
I.D12.7
I.D19.1
I.D38.1
I.D31.8
I.D6.4
I.D9.5
I.D12.7
I.D9.5
I.D12.7
I.D25.4
I.D28.6
Outlet
Inlet
Outlet
Inlet
I.D9.5
I.D6.4
I.D12.7
I.D9.5
I.D19.1
I.D15.9
I.D15.9
KHRP26A
72T
I.D6.4
I.D9.5
I.D12.7
I.D22.2
I.D19.1
KHRP26A
33T
Outlet
Inlet
Outlet
I.D15.9
I.D9.5
I.D6.4
I.D9.5
I.D12.7
I.D15.9
I.D15.9
I.D12.7
Outlet
I.D9.5
According to SELECTION PROCEDURE, cut the pipe with a pipe cutter for use.
(Ex.) FOR KHRP26A33T
1 GAS SIDE JOINT
To next joint or
indoor unit
Outlet (1)
Inlet
To outdoor unit
Inlet
Field pipe
22.2 or 19.1
Part A
ns
Outlet (2)
To outdoor unit
Note) For the size of outlet (1) is 22.2 or
the size of outlet (2) is 19.1.
Joint
Field pipe
19.1 or 15.9
To next joint or
indoor unit
Outlet (1)
Field pipe
15.9 or 12.7
Outlet (2)
Note) For the size of inlet is 19.1 or

the size of outlet (1) is 19.1,
Cut the pipe with a pipe cutter.
Joint
2 LIQUID SIDE JOINT
Field pipe
19.1 or 15.9
Part B
Field pipe
12.7 or 9.5
Note) For the size of inlet is 9.5 or

the size of outlet (1) is 9.5,
Cut the pipe with a pipe cutter.
Joint
Part A
Field pipe
22.2 or 19.1
ns
Field pipe
9.5 or 6.4
ns
Field pipe
9.5
tio
ec
nn
o
C
Cut in the center of the connections.
Pipe size reducer

tio
ec
(Supplied)
nn
o
C
tio
ec
nn
o
C
Cut in the center of the part A

and connect a field pipe.
Cut in the center of the part B,

use Pipe size reducer (supplied)
Cut in the center of the part A

Make sure to flow nitrogen gas through the pipe when brazing.
316
Options
EDSG18-936
Insulation of Joint
Be sure to insulate the gas and liquid side Joint.
Note) The insulation of the refrigerant piping must be reinforced based on the environment of installation.
Otherwise, dew may condensate on the surface of the insulation. For details, see Engineering Data.
GAS SIDE
LIQUID SIDE
Set the insulation matching the joint and wind the field supplied tape from the center
without any clearances on the matching face of insulation.
Seal the insulation and field piping insulation joint with the field supplied tape.
Insulate by the same method as gas side joint.
Tape
(Field supply)
Insulation
(Supplied)
Field piping
insulation
Joint
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
Install the Joint so that it is branched vertically or horizontally.
Horizontal
(Inclination 30 Max.)
Vertical
30
Max.
30
"A" ARROW VIEW
Do not apply extra force on the piping part. The brazed part may be damaged and
it may result in gas leakage.
2P182411-1
Options
317
Options for Indoor Units
EDSG18-936
3. Options for Indoor Units

3.1
Duct Connected Type
3.1.1
<KDT25N32/50/63> Insulation Kit for High Humidity

Caution
This kit can be installed to the Ceiling mounted Built-in Type Air Conditioners. <Slim duct type>
When the Installation box for adapter PCB(KPP1B101) is used together, mount this kit before Installation box.
It is recommended to mount this kit before installing the indoor unit.
Details of parts
Number of
pieces
Kit name
KDT25N32
KDT25N50
KDT25N63
5 Bottom plate insulation
B-1
6
(mm)
Slit
420
Shape
(mm) Score
A
700
900
1100
Kit name
KDT25N32
KDT25N50
KDT25N63
380
Number of
pieces
Designation
A
700
900
1100
Kit name
KDT25N32
KDT25N50
KDT25N63
7 Hanger (right) insulation

390
4 Side plate insulation
S-2
240
(mm)
Chamber cover insulation

A
C-1
(mm)
Slit
A
704
904
1104
S-1
Slit (mm)
3 Side plate insulation
200
Designation
T-2
Slit
207
380
Shape
(mm)
Slit
207
2 Top plate insulation
T-1
1 Top plate insulation
240
Designation
Kit name
KDT25N32
KDT25N50
KDT25N63
A
621
821
1021
H-1
8 Hanger (left) insulation
(mm)
H-2
9 Installation manual
(mm)
390
Slit
Number of
pieces
90
90
Shape
Slit
(This instruction)
When moving the unit at or after opening, hold the unit by the hanger brackets.
Do not apply force to the refrigernat piping, drain piping or flange parts.
How to attach
<Procedure> Stick the insulations carefully according to the following procedures

and do not make a gap between the adjacent thermal insulations.
(1) Stick the top plate insulation T-1 , T-2 to the indoor unit top plate.
(2) Cut off the side plate insulation S-1 following the score.(See the right figure)
(3) Stick the side plate insulation S-1 to the indoor unit right side plate.
(4) Stick the side plate insulation S-1 to the indoor unit left side plate
without cutting off the area surrounded by the score.
(5) Stick the side plate insulation S-2 to the indoor unit left side plate.
(6) Stick the bottom plate insulation B-1 to the indoor unit bottom plate.
(7) Stick the chamber cover insulation C-1 to the indoor unit chamber cover.
(8) Stick the hanger (left) insulation H-2 and the hanger (right) insulation H-1
respectively to the left and right hangers respectively.
(See the right figure for the sticking base line.)
Cut off the area shown with oblique lines and throw it away.
VRV model only
VRV and Room Airconditioners
KDT25N50, KDT25N63 model only
T-2
T-1
g
kin
se
ba
lin
Stic
S-2
H-2
ARROW VIEW
S-1
Hanger brackets(right)
Hanger bracket (left)
H-2
H-1
Side plate(right)
Side plate(left)
C-1
S-1
H-1
DETAIL B
DETAIL C
B-1
C: 3P131323-1E
318
Options
EDSG18-936
3.2
3.2.1
<BYFQ60B8W1> Decoration Panel
1.
BEFORE INSTALLATION
1. PRECAUTIONS
Refer also to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
2. ACCESSORIES
Installation manual.
Screw (4 pcs.)
3. NOTE TO INSTALLER
Be sure to instruct the customer how to properly operate the system showing him/her the attached operation
manual to the indoor unit or the outdoor unit.
2.
PREPARATION OF DECORATION PANEL
For this unit, you are able to select air flow directions. To discharge air in 2 or 3 directions, it is necessary to
purchase optional kit Sealing member of air discharge outlet.
HANDLING OF DECORATION PANELS

Never place the panel facing down nor lean it against a wall nor leave it on a projecting object.
Never touch or put pressure on the swing flap.
(The swing flap may malfunction)
(1) Remove the suction grille from the decoration panel.

1 Open the suction grille by sliding the 2 suction grille tabs in the direction of the arrow. (Refer to Fig. 1)
Fig. 1
2 Detach the suction grille from the decoration panel by lifting the grille up approximately 45 degrees. (Refer to Fig. 2)
45
Fig. 2
3PA64319-12N-1
Options
319
3.
EDSG18-936
INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL TO THE INDOOR UNIT BODY
Refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit for the installation of the indoor unit.
(1) Match the PIPING SIDE and DRAIN SIDE displays on the decoration panel with the position of the piping section
and drain section on the indoor unit.
(2) Install the decoration panel.
1 Make sure the wire has not come out of the groove for the wiring route inside the indoor unit. (3 locations)
If it has, put it back in.
(Connecting the panel with wires out of the groove may cause water leakage.)
2 Temporarily tighten the attached screws approximately 5mm into the opposing sides of the control box in
the indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 3)
Attached screws
Wiring route grooves
(2 locations)
(3 locations)
Fig. 3
Control box
3 Slide the panel in the direction of the arrow, passing the 2 attachment holes (the
temporarily tight ened screws. (Refer to Fig. 4)
shapes parts) over the
Panel temporary suspension

Fig. 4
4 Hang the panel temporary suspension on the hook located on the control box of indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 5)
Control box
Hook
Fig. 5
5 Attach the remaining 2 screws, and tighten all 4 screws until the sealant between the decoration panel and indoor
unit is compressed to between 6 and 8 mm thick. (Refer to Fig. 6)
Indoor unit
6 - 8 mm
Ceiling material
Sealant
Decoration panel
Section of air outlet
Fig. 6
Horizontal blade
3PA64319-12N-2
320
Options
EDSG18-936
[ PRECAUTIONS ]
Improper screwing of the screws may cause the troubles
shown in Fig. 7, Screw them properly.
Air leak
Air leak from ceiling
Contamination
If gap is still left between the ceiling and the decoration

panel after screwing the screws, readjust the indoor unit
body height.
Dew formation, dew dripping
Fig. 7
(3) Wiring of the decoration panel (Refer to Fig. 8)

6 Remove the control box lid after making sure the power to the unit is off.
7 Connect the connectors for swing flap motor lead wire installed on the decoration panel.
Failing to connect the connectors will prevent the swing flap from working, so be sure to connect them.
8 Replace the control box lid reversing the procedure to remove it.
Make sure that the swing flap motor lead wire is not caught between the indoor unit and the decoration panel.
Control box lid
Screws
(2 locations)
Hang the swing motor lead wire
on this tab.
Pass the swing motor lead wire through

the clamp material as shown in the diagram.
After connection, store the connector inside
the control box.
Clamping material
Swing motor lead wire

Indoor unit side
Swing motor lead wire

Decoration panel side
Fig. 8
4.
INSTALLATION OF SUCTION GRILLE

Install the suction grille
Install by reversing the procedure shown in PREPARATION OF DECORATION PANEL.
It is possible to install the suction grille in 4 directions by turning the suction grille.
Change the direction when adjusting the direction of the suction grille of multiple units or in meeting
g customers demands.
NOTE
Be careful not to get swing flap motor lead wire get caught when installing the suction grille.
3PA64319-12N-3
Options
321
3.2.2
EDSG18-936
<KDBH44BA60 (KDBHQ44B60)> Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet

Caution
Refer to the installation manual for both indoor unit and the decoration panel.
Contents of kit
Check the following parts are include with your kit.
Name
Sealing material
Tape for fixing the

sealing material
Quantity
2 pieces
2 pieces
Moisture absorber
for bell-mouth
Insulation for side plate

1 piece
1 piece
-1
1 piece
-2
Moisture absorber
for swing flap
1 piece
3 pieces
-3
Shape
100mm179mm
Name
Moisture absorber
for swing flap
Quantity
Moisture absorber
for panel edge
3 pieces
3 pieces
6
100mm370mm
Moisture absorber
for attached point
1 piece
100mm1538mm
25mm361mm
Moisture absorber
for flesh air intake
2 pieces
Shape
8mm450mm
50mm20mm
The direction of air discharge and the positioning of sealing material

(1) Selection of the air outlet
Select the direction of air discharge from the following table according to the location of the indoor unit.
Refer to
Setting for indoor unit
for setting position number.
Refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit for selection of installation location.
Caution
Never select the direction of air discharge other than the following pattern.
(You may have a condensation problem.)
Air
outlet 3
Air
outlet 2
Closed
3-way air
discharge
Closed Closed
Closed
1
Air
outlet 1
Air
outlet 4
2-way air
discharge
Closed
4
Closed
(2) Prepare the sealing material 1 and the tape for fixing the sealing material 2 according to the air outlet No. to be closed.
Cut off the sealing material 1 and the tape for fixing the sealing material 2 along the perforated lines (marked---).
Adhere the sealing material 1 to tape for fixing the sealing material 2 .
(Make sure that the sealing material 1 is placed at the center of the tape for fixing the sealing material 2 .)
Example) For closing the air outlet 3
<How to prepare the sealing material 1 and tape for fixing the sealing material 2 >
Sealing material
Step 2
Peel off the

release paper.
3
1
Sealing material
(10mm)
Step 1
Cut off these pieces.
Tape for fixing the

sealing material
Released paper
Tape for fixing the

sealing material 2
Step 3
Adhere the sealing material 1 to the center
of tape for fixing the sealing material 2 .
(10mm)
Sticking reference
*When closing the air outlet 2 ,it is not required to cut off the sealing material 1 and tape for fixing the sealing material 2 .
(3) Adhere the sealing material 1 and tape for fixing the sealing material 2
prepared according to the procedure (2) to the indoor unit air outlet.
The sealing material 1 and

tape for fixing the sealing material
Indoor unit
2
Air
outlet
Adhering the sealing material for air outlet
1P109292B
322
Options
EDSG18-936
Setting for indoor unit

It is required to make a field setting from the remote controller according to how the indoor units are installed.
The direction of air discharge must also be set by the remote controller.
The 3 different kinds of setting such as "Mode number" , "The setting switch number" and "The setting position number" must be made by
the remote controller.
Refer to the item of "Field setting" in the operation manual of the remote controller for the setting procedure.
Setting according to number of use of the air discharge.
Check the setting position number corresponding to the direction of air discharge in a table, below.
(Content of setting)
(Number of use
of air outlets)
3-way air discharge
Mode number
2-way air discharge
13(23)
The setting
position number
The setting
switch number
02
03
Installation of the insulation

Please turn off the power supply for safety absolutely, before you do installation of the decoration panel and
affixation of insulation and connected work of swing conector.
(1) Adhere the insulations for side plate 3 in position, referring
Fig.1
Fig.2
.
(2) Adhere the moisture absorber forbell-mouth 4 on the inner surface of the bell-mouth.
Fig.2
Fig.3 .
See Fig.1
Bell-mouth
Fig.1
Insulation for
3
side plate
Insulation for
side plate
3 -3
Fig.3
-1
Moisture absorber
for bell-mouth
4
Insulation for
side plate
3 -2
Section of the bell-mouth
Sticking
4 reference
Moisture absorber
for bell-mouth
4
Fig.2
*Adhere the insulations for side plate
3 -1, 3 -2and 3 -3inturn.
Moisture absorber
4
for bell-mouth
Sticking
-1 reference
Insulation for
side plate
3 -3
Sticking
reference
Insulation for
side plate
3
3 -3
Insulation for
side plate
3 -2
Sticking reference
-1
3 -2
1P109292B
Options
323
EDSG18-936
Fig.4 .
(3) Confirm the air outlet and NO. not to be closed on the panel. See
(4) Confirm the air outlet and NO. not to be closed on the panel. See 5 6 aligning with the upper edgeof
the swing flap on the air outlet. And, adhere the moisture absorbers for panel edge 7
with the panel edge on the air outlet. See Fig.5 .
(5) Confirm the air outlet and NO. not to be closed on the panel. See 8 with the attached point to indoor unit
between the airoutlet 2 and 3 .And, adhere the moisture absorbers for flesh air intake 9
with the flesh air intake hole. See Fig.6 .
Fig.4
Air
outlet
Air
outlet
Air
outlet
Air
outlet
Swing connector
Swing motor
Fig.5
Moisture absorber
for swing flap
6
Align it with the upper
edge of swing flap
Moisture absorber
5 for swing flap
Align it with the upper
edge of swing flap
Upper edge
Swing flap
Sticking
6 reference
Sticking
6 reference
Swing flap
Closed
Not closed
Moisture absorber
7
for panel edge
Moisture absorber
7
for panel edge
Sticking
7 reference
)
mm
(30
Panel
*All air outlets which

are not closed.
Section of the panel edge
Fig.6
Sticking
9 reference
Sticking
9 reference
Air
outlet
Air
outlet
Swing connector
Moisture absorber
for flesh air intake 9
Moisture absorber
for attached point 8
Moisture absorber
for flesh air intake 9
Section of the attached point
Air
outlet
Air
outlet
1P109292B
324
Options
EDSG18-936
3.2.3
<KDBQ44BA60A (KDBQ44B60A)> Panel Spacer

Contents of kit
Combination table
Check if following parts are included with your kit.

Panel spacer
Decoration
panel
KDBQ44B60
KDBQ44B60A
KDBQ44BA60A
Name
Panel spacer frame Resin corner part
Quantity
BYFQ60BW1
BYFQ60BAW1
BYFQ60B8W1
4 PCS.
1
Screw
Fixing metal
4 PCS.
4 PCS.
28 PCS.
Shape number
M412
Caution
Tapping screw
(Class 2)
When the Panel Spacer is installed, it is not possible

to have 2-way air outlet.
Refer to the installation manual for both indoor
unit and the Panel spacer for its installation.
Name
Sealing material
Quantity
2 PCS.
5
2 PCS.
6
Shape number
Preparation of the decoration panel

Handle the decoration panel with care.
Never place the panel face down, or lean the panel against wall or place on the
projective object.
(It causes the dent or damage of the surface of the panel or damage of swing motor.)
(1) Remove the suction grill from the decoration panel.

(Refer to the installation manual of the decoration panel how to remove.)
(2) Place the panel face down on the corrugated board or the vinyl sheet
to protect the surface of the panel.
Installation of the indoor unit

Adjust the height of the indoor unit.
Be sure the piping will not contact with the ceiling joist etc. after adjusting the height.
Standard installation
When the Panel spacer is installed
Options
245mm
False ceiling
255mm or more
285mm
(180mm)
False ceiling
(140mm)
Hanger
bracket
Hanger
bracket
325
EDSG18-936
Assembly of panel spacer

(1) Assemble the panel spacer frame 1 and the plastic corner joint 2 temporarily.
(2) Fix with the screws 4 from the top. (4 screws in each corner)
2
1
4
2
1
1
1
2
Insert
Insert
1
Fixing to the decoration panel

(1) Set the fixing metal 3 on each corner
with screws 4 .
(2) Place the panel spacer assembled in item 3 Assembly of panel spacer
of the above on the outer frame of the decoration panel.
(3) Fix the panel spacer to the fixing metal

3 with screws 4 (4 portions).
Decoration panel
Adhesion of the sealing material

Adhere the sealing material 5
6 on the upper face of the panel spacer in the order of 5 and
6 .
5
6
Sticking reference
(Adhere it along
the inner rib.)
Sealing material
5
Panel spacer
Decoration panel
Installation of the decoration panel

Install the decoration panel to the indoor unit according to the installation manual of decoration panel.
The panel spacer is not firmly fixed to the decoration panel, so that never hold the panel spacer directly or lean
the decoration panel extremely.
1P107764-1C
326
Options
EDSG18-936
3.2.4
<KDDQ44XA60 (KDDQ44X60)> Fresh Air Intake Kit
Remarks :
1. This kit can be installed to the Ceiling mounted cassette type (Multi-flow).
2. When installing this kit, duct (Nominal dia. : 100) is required on site.
In case that metal duct is penetrated through wooden walls, make sure the duct and the
wall electrically insulated.
Install the duct inclined downwardly to outdoor so that the rain may not get into the duct.
(Inclination 1/100 to 1/50)
To avoid birds, small animals or insects getting inside the duct, make sure to install net
where it contacts the outside air.
Contents
Prior to installation, make sure you have the complete kit of parts.
Name
1 Duct flange
Q'ty
1 piece
2 Screws
3 Insulation for duct flange
4 pieces
4 Insulation for opening of

unit
1 piece
1 piece
5 Installation manual
1 piece
Shape
M412
Necessary tools
Philips head screw driver, nipper, cutter etc.
Installation procedures of duct flange
1. Cut off the knockout hole on the side plate. (Fig.1)

The knockout hole is opposite to ref. pipe.
Ref. pipe
Knockout hole
Drain pipe
Side plate
Fig.1
Cut it off
with nipper.
Slit
Side plate
Options
327
EDSG18-936
2. Adhere the insulation 4 for opening of unit to the opening. (Fig. 2)

Put the insulation 4 to be suitable for the hole of the insulation 4
and hole of the indoor unit.
However, put the insulation 4 so as not to conceal the screw hole of the indoor unit.
Insulation 4
Fig. 2
3. Install the duct flange 1 with screws 2 (M412, 4 screws) to the opening and adhere the insulation 3 (Fig. 3)
Duct flange 1
Screws 2
(M412, 4screws)
Insulation 3
Fig. 3
Installation procedures of duct <Nominal diameter of duct : 100>

1. Connect the duct to the duct flange. (Flange fits inside the duct.) (Fig. 4)
2. After connection, wrap vinyl tape (field supply) around the duct connection to prevent
air leak.
Duct flange
Wrap the tape around the duct to avoid air leak.
Indoor unit
Tape
Fig. 4
100 Duct (Field supply)
Precaution
All ducts must be completely insulated.
Do not do the followings when installing duct.
A) To bend the duct excessively
B) To bend the duct too many times
WRONG
WRONG
C) To reduce the duct diameter
WRONG
2P108307-1A
328
Options
EDSG18-936
3.3
3.3.1
<BYC125K-W1> Decoration Panel
Options
329
330
EDSG18-936
Options
EDSG18-936
Options
331
332
EDSG18-936
Options
EDSG18-936
Options
333
3.3.2
EDSG18-936
<KDBP55H160WA> Panel Spacer

Contents of kit
Combination table
Check if following parts are included with your kit.

Panel spacer
KDBP55H160FA
KDBP55H160WA
KDB55K160WA
Decoration
panel
BYCP125K-W1
BYCP125D-W1
BYC125K-W1
BYC125KJW1
Name
Quantity
Panel spacer frame

4 PCS.
Resin corner part

4 PCS.
Fixing metal
4 PCS.
Screw
28 PCS.
4
Shape number
M410
Tapping screw
Caution
(Class 2)
When the Panel Spacer is installed, it is not possible

to have 2-way air outlet.
Refer to the installation manual for both indoor
unit and the Panel spacer for its installation.
Name
Sealing material
Quantity
2 PCS.
5
Caution label
2 PCS.
6
Others
1 PC.
z
Shape number
This
Installation
Manual
Preparation of the Decoration panel

Handle the decoration panel with care.
Never place the panel face down, or lean the panel against wall or place on the
projective object.
(It causes the dent or damage of the surface of the panel or damage of swing motor.)
(1)Remove the suction grill from the decoration panel.

(Refer to the installtion manual of the decoration panel how to remove.)
(2)Place the panel face down on the corrugated board or the vinyl sheet
to protect the surface of the panel.
Installation of the indoor unit

Adjust the height of the indoor unit.
Be sure the piping will not contact with the ceiling joist etc. after adjusting the height.
When the Panel spacer is installed
Standard installation
Suspension
bracket
Ceiling surface
Suspension
bracket
Ceiling surface
Decoration panel
334
A[mm]
Decoration panel
A[mm]
BYCP125D-W1
BYC125K-W1
BYC125KJW1
145~150
BYCP125D-W1
BYC125K-W1
BYC125KJW1
105~110
BYCP125K-W1
125~130
BYCP125K-W1
85~90
Options
EDSG18-936
Assembly of panel spacer

(1)Assemble the panel spacer frame 1 and the plastic corner joint 2 temporarily.
(2)Fix with the screws 4 from the top.(4 screws in each corner)
2
1
1
1
1
2
Insert
Insert
1
Fixing to the Decoration panel

(1)Set the fixing metal 3 on each corner
with screws 4 .
(Screw positions change with
decoration panels,
as shown in the following figure.)
In the case of BYCP125K-W1
(3)Fix the panel spacer to the fixing metal

3 with screws 4 (4 portions).
(2)Place the panel spacer assembled in item 3 Assembly of panel spacer

of the above on the outer frame of the Decoration panel.
3
In the cases of other than the above.
Adhesion of the sealing material

Adhere the sealing material 5
6 on the upper face of the panel spacer in the order of
5 and 6 .
5
6
Sticking reference
(Adhere it along
the inner rib.)
Sealing material
5
Installation of the Decoration panel

(1) install the decoration panel to the indoor unit according to
the installation manual of decoration panel.
The panel spacer is not firmly fixed to the decoration panel, so
that never hold the panel spacer directly or lean the decoration
panel extremely.
(2)After installation of the Decoration panel, adhere the caution sticker
7 next to the name plate of the indoor unit as shown on the right.
Name plate for

indoor unit
7
upper
1P136564E
Options
335
3.3.3
EDSG18-936
<KDDP55D160(K)> Fresh Air Intake Kit (Chamber Type)

Caution
REMARKS
Before starting the installation work, carefully read the following

safety precautions and observe them to ensure safety during work.
This kit can be installed to the Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type

Air Conditioner <Multi-flow type>.
Before installation, make sure the indoor unit number.
Refer to the installation manuals for the indoor unit and
the decoration panel.
Components C h e c k i f t h e f o l l o w i n g p a r t s a r e i n c l u d e d w i t h y o u r k i t
Shaded part
is separately packed.
Make sure to use the attached or specified components to install the products.
Otherwise, it may cause air leak or the product may fall.
After installation, check whether there is no abnormality during the trial operating.
1 Suction
Name
Chamber
2 C o n n e c t i n g 3 C o n n e c t i n g 4 S c r e w 5 Closing 6 T J o i n t 7 F l e x i b l e 8 C l a m p 9 Installation
Chamber
(Right)
Chamber
(Left)
1PC.
1PC.
1PC.
1PC.
Material
Manual
Duct
Shape
M4 12
1PC.
1PC.
Q' KDDP55D160
ty KDDP55D160K
4PCS.
4PCS.
1PC.
1PC.
2PCS.
4PCS.
1PC.
1PC.
Selection of Location and Access Door

1. Refer to the following table.
Duct (Field supply) In case of KDDP55D160
Indoor unit
Inspection hatch
2. Inspection hatch (lager than 450
When the intake from both sides can not be obtained due to an obstacle,
one side intake is acceptable.
In this case, make sure to close the opening with the material 5 .
In case of one side intake, the noise will be larger than intake from both sides.
[Example of one side intake]
Close the opening with closing material
Inspection hatch
Inspection hatch
Indoor unit
25 ~ 80
100 ~ 140
306
348
Inspection hatch
725
Install either one of hatches
Connecting chamber (Right)
When installing the wireless receiver kit on the indoor unit, the duct
must be led from right side as shown. In this case, use KDDP55D160.
Installation of the Suction chamber

1. Remove the decoration panel. (This is not required for the new installation)
Remove the decoration panel in the reverse step when the panel is installed.
(Refer to the installation manual of the decoration panel for the details.)
2 . Temporarily install the suction chamber to the indoor unit by hanging the latch on the opposite side of the suction chamber to the hook of the indoor body. (2 portions)
Temporarily hang the remaining 2 hooks of the suction chamber to the hooks on the sides of the indoor unit. f i g . 1 ~ f i g . 3
(When the indoor unit is already installed, hang the hook to the suspension bracket temporarily and fix the hook.)
Installation set outline of the indoor unit
fig.2
3 . Tighten 2 hexahead screws located beneath the lutches until the thickness of the sealing material of chamber reduces to 5~8mm.
fig.4 fig.5
Latch
f i g . 2 When installing
f i g . 3 After installation
fig.1
(2 portions)
Hook
Suction chamber
Hook
Suction chamber
Suspension
bracket
fig.4
Hook
(2 portions)
Hook
Indoor unit
Lead wire Suspension bracket
Set outline of the indoor unit

Indoor unit
Suction chamber
f i g . 5 When completed
When installing
fig.2
Suspension bracket
(4 portions)
336
Refrigerant
pipe
Indoor unit
Options
EDSG18-936
Installation of the Indoor Unit and the Suction Chamber
Indoor unit
[ Attachment of
the paper pattern ]
Paper pattern
(included in the indoor unit)
Suction chamber
Screw
(included in the indoor unit)
(200)
Install the indoor unit and the suction chamber.

Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit.
(For the height of the unit, refer to the drawing on the right.)
Be complete installed refrigerant piping, and drain piping.
Attach the paper pattern for installation to the indoor unit with screws to protect the indoor unit from dirt. [See below]
(When the indoor unit is newly installed)
(See below)
In case of attaching the chamber after installed indoor unit.
suspension bracket
For the height of the unit, change the height shown on the right drawing.
(Level of the indoor unit)
Ceiling surface
Installation of Connecting duct

1 . Install the Connecting chamber (right & left) in accordance with the procedure shown In case of KDDP55D160K
in fig.5.
2. Connect the T Joint and Connecting
Connecting chamber
(right)
2
<Procedure 1>
Hook the square hole of connecting
chamber 2 to suspension bracket of
suction chamber 1 .
Screw 4
Fresh air intake
Suction chamber 1
Connecting chamber (Left) 3
Duct (Field supplied)
(150)
<Procedure 2>
Install the connecting chamber with
the attached screw 4 .(2 portions)
Connecting chamber (Right) 2
fig.5 Installation of the connecting chamber (right)
(Same as the left side)
<How to tighten the clamp>

(1)
(2)
(3)
Wrong
(4)
fig.6
[ Installation of closing material in case of one side intake ] (for KDDP55D160)

Install the closing material in accordance with the following procedures.
Closing material can be used either right or left side opening.
Correct
Closing material 5
( 1 ) Wrap the clamp ( 2 ) Install the edge ( 3 )Make sure the tightening ( 4 ) Completed.
around the
of clamp between
direction and tighten the
Screw 4
duct.
the sit of the pin. clamp with standard tools
Suction chamber 1
Tighten the clamp (ex.Screwdriver or pliers)
by hand.
as shown.
Caution
Do not turn the slit pin reversely.

If turned reversely, ratchet part many break down.
Duct connection
Clamp 8
Suspension band for duct
(Field supplied)
Hang the T Joint with suspension band
for duct to reduce the weight of
duct to the chamber.
7 Flexible duct
Slip pin
chamber. fig.6
Flexible duct 7
T Joint 6
fig.7
<Procedure 1>
Hook the square hole of connecting
chamber 5 to suspension bracket of
suction chamber 2 .
<Procedure 2>
Install the connecting chamber with
the attached screw 4 .(2 portions)
fig.7
<Duct: diameter 150>
1) Attach the duct to the outside of the Branch duct chamber.

Wrap the duct tape (Field supplied) around the connection to prevent air leak. To bend excessively To bend too many times
To reduce the diameter
Insulate the duct to prevent condensate.
2) Do not perform the following duct work.
Caution
follow the local code or regulation to install the duct.
In case that metal duct is penetrated through wooden wall, make sure the duct and the wall are electrically insulated.
Install the outdoor unit duct inclined downwardly so that the rain will not get into the duct. (Inclination 1/100 to 1/50)
Where it contact the outside air, make sure to install screen to avoid birds, small animals or insects getting inside the duct.
Where it contact the outside air, make sure to install air filter to protect heat exchanger for indoor unit.
Installation of Decoration panel

Install the Decoration panel in accordance with the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
Suction chamber
Decoration panel
Fixing metal
Rubber bush
Lead wire of Decoration panel

:Wire from Decoration panel to suction chamber
(Before fixing the Chamber, put the lead wire through Rubber bushing hole.)
In case of the panel for Wireless remote controller

Put the Connector for receiver lead wire through rubber bush and connect to the indoor PC board.
Refer to the installation manual attached to the wireless remote controller kit (optional) for the detail.
3K011144-1A
Options
337
338
EDSG18-936
Options
EDSG18-936
3.3.4
<KDDJ55X160> Fresh Air Intake Kit (Direct Installation Type)
The fresh air is taken into the unit by the indoor unit fan or duct fan, which is field supplied. The location of fresh air intake port will be
changeable by installing the duct fan.
KDDJ55X160
Remarks :
1. This kit can be installed to the Ceiling mounted cassette type (Multi-flow).
2. When installing this kit, duct (Nominal dia. : 75) is required on site.
Contents
Prior to installation, make sure you have the complete kit of parts.
Name
1 Duct Flange
2 Screws
Q'ty
1 piece
4 pieces
3 Insulation for Duct Flange
4 Insulation for Opening of

Unit
5 Installation Manual
1 piece
1 piece
1 piece
Shape
M412
Necessary tools
Philips head screw driver, nipper, cutter etc.
Installation procedures of Duct flange

The method of installation varies with indoor unit type.
The unit type can be distinguished by the position of knockout hole.
1. Cut off the knockout hole on the side plate. (Fig. 1)
Ref. pipe
Knockout hole
Drain pipe
Fig.1
Side plate
There is no inner insulation.

Cut off only side plate.
Cut it off
with nipper.
Slit
Side plate
Options
339
EDSG18-936
2. Adhere the insulation
for opening of unit to the opening. (Fig. 2)
Adhere to cover the edge

of opening.
Side plate
Insulation 4
Fig.2
insulation 4
3. Install the duct flange 1 with screws 2 (M412, 4 screws) to the opening and adhere the insulation 3 (Fig. 3)
Duct flange 1
Screws 2
(M412, 4screws)
Fig.3
insulation 3
<Nominal diameter of duct : 75>
Installation procedures of Duct
1. Connect the duct to the duct flange. (Flange fits inside the duct.) (Fig. 4)
2. After connection, wrap vinyl tape (field supply) around the duct connection to prevent
air leak.
Duct flange
Wrap the tape around the duct to avoid air leak.
indoor unit
Tape
Fig.4
75 Duct (Field supply)
Precaution
ALL ducts must be completely insulated.
Do not do the followings when installing duct.
A) To bend the duct excessively
WRONG
B) To bend the duct too many times
WRONG
C) To reduce the duct diameter
WRONG
C : 2P066796-1C
340
Options
EDSG18-936
3.3.5
<KAFP556/557D80, KAFP552/553H80> High Efficiency Filter
KAFP556D80 High Efficiency Filter (Including Filter Chamber)

KAFP557D80 High Efficiency Filter (Including Filter Chamber)
Combination table
High Efficiency Filter (Set)
Filter Chamber
KAFP556D80
KAFP557D80
KAFP552H80
KAFP553H80
KDDF55DA160
KAFP552H80 High Efficiency Filter (Replacement)

KAFP553H80 High Efficiency Filter (Replacement)
Specifications
High Efficiency Filter (Replacement) KAFP552H80
Filter Chamber
KAFP553H80
KDDF55DA160
Collecting Efficiency (%)
65% (NBS Calorimetric method)
90% (NBS Calorimetric method)
Initial Pressure Loss (Pa)
34 or less
Final Pressure Loss (Pa)
98 or less
Filter
Non-woven Fabric of Synthetic Fiber

2,500 h
(Dust Concentration 0.15 mg / m3)
Life (h)
1,800 h
(Dust Concentration 0.15 mg / m3)
Precaution at use
1. The high efficiency filter, and the other filter can not be installed together.
2. The unit should be operated with 4-way discharge when the high efficiency filter is installed.
It can not be applied to the high ceiling room.
3. Field setting by remote controller is necessary when the high efficiency filter is installed.
Dimension
Options
Model
KAFP552H80, 553H80
25
341
3.3.6
342
EDSG18-936
<KDDF55DA160> High Efficiency Filter Chamber
Options
EDSG18-936
Options
343
3.3.7
EDSG18-936
<KAF551KA160> Replacement Longlife Filter

Specifications
Life
2,500 h (Dust concentration 0.15 mg / m3)
Average collection efficiency
65% (Gravimetric method)
Filter material
Mildew proof resin net
Quantity per unit
Dimensions
23
542
560
Filter Frame
(HIPS)
Filter
(R4929)
3.3.8
<KDJ55K80> Branch Duct Chamber

Purpose
This chamber is the parts which connects indoor unit and duct (field supply) when a part of the wind (cool/
warm) which blows from decoration panel is sent to the another room with the duct.
Caution
1. Choose either left or right side of the indoor unit.
2. Close the branch duct chamber side air outlet of decoration panel.
Indoor Unit
Screw (11 pcs)
Branch Duct Chamber

1P012634B
344
Options
EDSG18-936
3.4
Screening Door
Air Suction Flange
Filter Chamber (For Rear Suction)
Filter Chamber (For Bottom Suction)

Air Suction Canvas
Half Panel
Access Panel
High Efficiency Filter (65%, 95%)
Long Life Replacement Filter
(R4915)
3.4.1
<KTB25KA80W> Service Access Panel

Specifications
Model
Item
KTB25KA80W
Color
White
Dimension
Options
345
EDSG18-936
Installation
[Before installation]
1. Make an opening on the ceiling
2. Install ceiling joist supports to fit the ceiling opening
[Installation of the ceiling board]

The ceiling board can be installed into the inner frame assembly as follows.
1. Remove decoration panel retainer from the inner frame assembly.
2. Remove the decoration panel and substitute with the ceiling board.
3. Set the ceiling board by retainer removed in step 1 of above.
Cautions
When the ceiling board is installed, the decoration panel is not needed.
346
Options
EDSG18-936
3.4.2
<KAF252/253LA80> High Efficiency Filter

Specifications
Model
KAF252LA80
KAF253LA80
Colorimetric method 65%
Colorimetric method 90%
Initial Pressure Loss (Pa)
49 or less
49 or less
Final Pressure Loss (Pa)
98
98
Non-woven fabric of synthetic fiber
Non-woven fabric of synthetic fiber
Items
Dust Collection
Efficiency (%)
Filter
Life Time (h)
2,500 hours (Dust density 0.15mg/m)
1,800 hours (Dust density 0.15mg/m)

Chamber
(for the Bottom Suction)
KAJ25L80D
KAJ25L80D

Chamber
(for the Rear Suction)
KAJ25L80B
KAJ25L80B
(25475360)2
(25475360)2
External Dimension
(mm) (TWD)
Installation
Characteristics of Filter
65% type
Options
90% type
347
3.4.3
EDSG18-936
<KAFJ251K80> Replacement Longlife Filter

Specifications
Model
KAFJ251K80
Item
Average Efficiency (%)
Pressure Loss
(Pa)
50% (Gravity method)
Initial
9.8
Final
49
Materials
Mildew Proof Resin Net
Number Required per Model

Life Time (h)
2
2,500 hours (dust particle concentration at 0.15 mg/m)
Characteristics of filter
3.4.4
<KSA-25KA80> Canvas Duct (Air Suction Canvas)

Specifications
Model
KSA-25KA80
Item
Dimensions
(mm)
255
1000
405
Canvas Duct
TOYOBOSL1000SIMVERFlame resistant
Installation
3.4.5
<KDAJ25KA71> Adaptor for Discharge

Specifications
Model
Item
Connection Dia. (mm)
348
KDAJ25KA71
2002 port
Options
EDSG18-936
3.4.6
<KAJ25L80B> Filter Chamber for Rear Suction

This kit will be used for the rear-suction type when the high efficiency filter or the long life filter will be built
in.
Installation
Be sure to remove the long life filter and attach the rear-suction type's sealing plate there
when the filter chamber (for the rear-suction type) must be installed.
Note:
Refer to the appearance figure of optional accessory describing later for further details.
Options
349
3.4.7
EDSG18-936
<KAJ25L80D> Filter Chamber for Bottom Suction

Dimension
Installation
Note:
Refer to the appearance figure of optional accessory describing later for further details.
350
Options
EDSG18-936
3.4.8
<KDJ2507K80> Flange for Suction

When this kit will be used, the rear suction type's sealing plate will be required separately.
Specifications
Model
Item
Dimensions (mm)
Size of Connecting
Duct (mm)
KDJ2507K80
977
278
25
927
228
Materials
Galvanized steel plate
Example of Installation
5
3.4.9
<KBBJ25KA80> Blind Board

Specifications
Model
Item
Dimensions (mm)
Materials
KBBJ25KA80
985
404
10
Galvanized Steel Plate
Dimension
Installation
Options
351
EDSG18-936
3.4.10 <K-DG5/9DW> Discharge Grille

K-DG5DW
344
SPECIFICATION
MATERIAL : RESIN (ABS)
(INSULATION STICKED)
WEIGHT : 0.6Kg
COLOR : WHITE
152
72
(FIXING
SCREW PITCH)
ACCESSORIES
INSTALLATION MANUAL
370
(CEILING OPENING SIZE)
40
294
(FIXING SCREW PITCH)
160
400
PRESSURE LOSS [Pa]
190
PRESSURE LOSS CURVE

m/s:DISCHARGE VELOCITY
10
4.0m/s
4-M5 SCREW
2.6m/s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIR FLOW RATE [m3/min]
D3K03307A
K-DG9DW
152
72
(FIXING
SCREW PITCH)
ACCESSORIES
INSTALLATION MANUAL
40
614
564
(FIXING SCREW PITCH)
SPECIFICATION
MATERIAL : RESIN (ABS)
(INSULATION STICKED)
WEIGHT : 1.0Kg
COLOR : WHITE
640
160
4-M5 SCREW
PRESSURE LOSS CURVE

m/s : DISCHARGE VELOCITY
10
PRESSURE LOSS [Pa]
190
670
3.6m/s
5
2.9m/s
0
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
D3K03309B
352
Options
EDSG18-936
3.4.11 <K-DGC5/9D> Discharge Chamber

K-DGC5D
160
3-SUSPENSION BOLT HOLE

(M10 OR W3/8)
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL : FUSION GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET
(OUTSIDE INSULATION STICKED)
WEIGHT : 1.6Kg
ACCESSORIES
WING NUT : 1 pcs.
PLAIN WASHER : 2 pcs.
INSULATION PIPE COVER : 1 pcs.
INSTALLATION MANUAL
DAMPER
NOTE) 1. DUCT FLANGE ATTACHABLE

148
50
110
225
160
35~40
370
294
148
340
72
4-M5
D3K03301B
K-DGC9D
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL : FUSION GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET
(OUTSIDE INSULATION STICKED)
WEIGHT : 3.0Kg
3-SUSPENSION BOLT HOLE

(M10 OR W3/8)
400
ACCESSORIES
WING NUT : 1 pcs.
PLAIN WASHER : 2 pcs.
INSULATION PIPE COVER : 1 pcs.
INSTALLATION MANUAL
NOTE) 1. DUCT FLANGE ATTACHABLE
DAMPER
50
160
135
290
4-M5
72
564
35~40
640
148
198
610
D3K03303C
Options
353
EDSG18-936
3.4.12 <K-DDV20A> Branch Duct

K-DDV20A
62
250
3
1 10
48
SPECIFICATIONS
1. MATERIAL
CASING : STEEL SHEET
INSULATION : FLEXIBLE URETHANE FOAM (OUTER CASING)
FOAM POLYSTHYRENE (INNER CASING)
POLYETHYLENE FOAM (INNER FLANGE)
2. WEIGHT : 3.0Kg
3. ACCESSORIES
WASHER
INSULATION COVER
INSULATION
WING NUT
INSTALLATION MANUAL
PRESSURE LOSS CURVE
62
360
198
[Pa]
16
65
62
4
1
15 SUSPENSION
BOLT HOLE
(M10 OR W3/8)
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
10
20
30
40
D3K1966C
354
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
4. Control Devices
4.1
<DCS302CA61> Central Remote Controller

64 groups (zones) of indoor units can be controlled
individually same as LCD Remote controller.
Max.64 groups (128 indoor units controllable)
Max. 128 groups (128 indoor units) are controllable
by using 2 central remote controllers, which can
control from 2 different places.
Zone control
Malfunction code display
Max. wiring length 1,000 m (Total : 2,000 m)
Combination with Unified ON/OFF controller,
schedule timer and BMS system
Airflow volume and direction can be controlled
individually for indoor units in each group operation.
Ventilation volume and mode can be controlled for
Heat Reclaim Ventilation (HRV).
Up to 4 Operation/Stop pairs can be set per day by
connecting a schedule timer.
4.1.1
Applied Model
Applied model
Remark
SkyAir series
Interface adaptor (DTA112BA51) is required for each indoor unit.
Wiring adaptor (KRP928B2S) is required for each indoor unit.
4.1.2
Specifications / Dimensions
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Power supply
1 ~ 50/60Hz, 100V 240V
Power consumption
Max. 8W
Forced ON/OFF input
Continuous a contact
Contact current: approximately 10mA
Size
180 (W) 120 (H) 64.5 (D)
Weight
420g
Outline drawings
48.5
71
16
120
180
When using this unit, an electric parts box of KJB311AA is required.

For installation, a steel electric parts box to be embedded is mandatory.
Options
355
Control Devices
4.1.3
EDSG18-936
Installation Manual
Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be sure to install it correctly. After
completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during the start-up operation.
Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store this installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
Meaning of warning, caution and note symbols.

WARNING ...... Indication a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION ....... Indication a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be
used to alert against unsafe practices.
NOTE ............. Indication situation that may result in equipment or property-damage-only accidents.
WARNING
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work. Do not try to install the machine by yourself.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this unit and that all electrical work is carried out by qualified
personnel according to local laws and regulations and this installation manual.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires and used, and no external forces act on the terminal connections or wires.
When wiring the power supply and connecting the remote controller wiring and transmission wiring, position the wires so that
the electric parts box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the electric parts box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or the terminals overheating.
Ground the air conditioner. Do not connect the ground wire to gas or water pipes, lightning rod or a telephone ground wire.
When installing or relocating the system, be sure to keep the refrigerant circuit free from substances other than the specified
refrigerant (R410A), such as air.
Do not reconstruct or change the settings of the protection devices.
If the pressure switch, thermal switch, or other protection device is shorted and operated forcibly, or parts other than those specified by
Daikin are used, fire or explosion may result.
Do not touch the switch with wet fingers.
Touching a switch with wet fingers can cause electric shock.
Install an leak circuit breaker, as required.
If an leak circuit breaker is not installed, electric shock may result.
Do not install the air conditioner or the remote controller in the following locations:
(d) where flammable gases may leak, where there are carbon fiber or ignitable dust suspensions in the air, or where volatile flammables
such as thinner or gasoline are handled.
CISPR 22 Class A Warning.
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required
to take adequate measures.
356
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
CAUTION
Be very careful about product transportation.
Safely dispose of the packing materials.
Packing materials, such as nails and other metal or wooden parts, may cause stabs or other injuries.
Tear apart and throw away plastic packaging bags so that children will not play with them. If children play with a plastic bag which was not
torn apart, they face the risk of suffocation.
Do not turn off the power immediately after stopping operation.
Always wait at least five minutes before turning off the power. Otherwise, water leakage and trouble may occur.
NOTE
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wires at least 3.5ft. away from televisions or radios
in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 3.5ft. may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the noise.)
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can result shorter than expected in rooms with electronic fluorescent lamps.
(inverter or rapid start types)
This unit is a class A product.
In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Dismantling of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and eventual other parts, should be done in accordance with the relevant
local and national regulations.
Options
357
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
1 COMPONENTS
Check the following components are included in this optional accessory before
installation.
Installation screw (M4 16)

Operation manual
Installation manual*
4
1
4
Body
When using this optional accessory an electric parts box of KJB311AA is required.
For installation, a steel electric parts box to be embedded is necessary.
* DCS302CA61 includes only one installation manual.
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
With the central remote controller, unified operation/stop is possible with up to a maximum 64 groups of indoor units.
When using 2 central remote controllers, unified operation is possible with up to a maximum 128 groups.
With this optional accessory, setting of control modes including operation, stop, operation controlled by timer, and ON/OFF control possible/impossible by remote controller can
be set individually by zones while it enables to control and display the operation state such as set temperature.
It can be connected with the external key system, host computer monitor panel, etc., through forced OFF input (no-voltage normally open contactor).
A zone is a one or more groups together. In general, the same settings are used throughout a zone.
Outdoor
unit
Forced OFF
input
When using 1 central

remote controller
Host computer
monitor panel
Group No.
1-00
Central remote
controller
Group No.
1-15
Group No.
2-00
Group No.
4-15
Max. of 64 groups
Outdoor
unit
When using 2 central
remote controller
Host computer
monitor panel
Forced ON/OFF command

should be connected to
one of the two units.
Central
remote
controller
Outdoor
unit
Group No.
1-00
Group No.
1-15
Group No.
2-00
Group No.
4-15
Group No.
5-00
Group No.
5-15
Group No.
6-00
Group No.
8-15
Max. of 128 groups
Forced OFF input
The central remote controller and the separately sold remote control adapter circuit board or group remote control adapter cannot
be used together. See the D-BACS design guide for details.
3 INSTALLATION
(1) Open the upper part of remote controller.
Insert a screwdriver(2 locations) into the recess between the
upper part and the lower part of remote controller and twist the
screwdriver lightly.
screwdriver
PC board is attached with both the upper and lower part of remote
controller. Do not damage the board with the screwdriver.
(2 locations)
Power supply wire
(2) Open the upper part of remote controller and install the
Electric parts box with the attached installation screws
(M4 16).
Conduit tube
Do not contain the strong

current electric wire and the
weak current electric wire in
the same conduit tube.
Installation screws
(4)
Electric parts box
(KJB311AA)
Approx. 160mm
Electric parts box
NOTE) Suitable length of the electric wire is about 160mm. (from electric parts box)
If it is difficult to contain a long wiring, strip the sheathed part of the wiring.
358
Weak current
electric wire
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
4 INITIAL SETTING
Setting (1) through (3) are initialized when power is turned ON, therefore complete settings BEFORE activating the
power. (The positions of connectors and switches used for settings in this section are shown in Fig. 1.)
(1) Connector for setting master controller (X1A) (Provided with connector at factory set)
When using only 1 central remote controller, do not disconnect the connector for setting master controller. (Use the unit with the
connector in the state in which it was delivered.)
When using multiple central remote controllers, or using the central remote controller in conjunction with the optional controllers for
centralized control, makes settings as indicated in the below table.
Connector for setting master controller (X1A) Setting, Removed
Pattern of connection of optional controllers for centralized control

Central remote controller
Unified ON/OFF controller
Schedule timer
Schedule timer
Set one to Used and all

Set all to Not used
the rest to Not used
Not used
1
Not used
1
(Remove all the connectors for the central remote controller, the on/off controller, and the schedule timer when using the unit together
with the intelligent Touch Controller, BACnet Gateway, the DMS interface, or the parallel interface station.)
1 to 4
1 to 16
(2) Address setting

Two central remote controllers can be used as shown in 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION , to control anywhere up to a max. 128 groups of indoor
units. In this case, group address must be set. This is done with the switch for setting each address (SS3).
SS3 setting
SETTING EACH ADDRESS
5-00
~ 8-15
Indoor unit address
SS3 setting
SETTING EACH ADDRESS
5-00
~ 8-15
To control indoor units

from group Nos. 1-00
through 4-15
Indoor unit address

To control indoor units
from group Nos. 5-00
through 8-15
(3) MAIN/SUB changeover switch setting

With two central remote controllers, centralized control (indoor units) is possible from different locations. In this kind of set-up, it is
necessary to set the MAIN/SUB changeover switch.
Outdoor
unit
Central remote Central remote

controller (1)
controller (2)
Group No.
1-00
Group No.
1-15
Group No.
2-00
Group No.
4-15
Max. 64 groups
One of the two central remote controllers (1) . (2) is set to MAIN while the other is set to SUB.
(4) Setting of the sequential operation function
The central remote controller is equipped with a sequential operation function that sequentially turns indoor units on in 2-second
intervals during unified operation. (Sequential operation is factory set to ON.) To switch sequential operation ON or OFF, set as
follows.
While holding down the unified stop button,
perform forced reset.
Sequential operation
ON
OFF
While holding down the unified start button,
(Factory set)
perform forced reset.
NOTE: The sequential operation function is designed to reduce the load on the power supply equipment, but does not guarantee
that compressors will not be started simultaneously. You cannot therefore count on a capacity reduction effect by power
supply equipment breaker selection.
Options
RESET
OFF ON
Connector for setting

master controller
RESET
OFF ON
(5) Forced reset switch

When changing the setting of the connector for
setting master controller, etc., you can reset
simply by setting it to the reset side once and
returning to the normal side, without turning the
power OFF.
(For normal operation, set the switch to the
normal side.)
Normal side
(Factory set)
Reset side
Switch for setting

each address
MAIN/SUB
changeover switch
Forced reset switch
Fig. 1
359
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
5 ELECTRIC WIRING
WIRING OUTLINE
Power supply
~
L
100-240V N
50/60 Hz
Switch
Fuse
(15A)
Central remote
Outdoor
controller
unit
F1, F2
F1, F2
F1, F2
F1, F2
F1, F2
F1, F2
Max. 16 groups
WIRING TO THE INDOOR UNIT AND OUTDOOR UNIT
Outdoor unit
In-Out Out-Out
F1, F2 F1, F2
Outdoor unit
In-Out Out-Out
F1, F2 F1, F2
See the installation manual which came with the air conditioner
for details on its transmission wiring specifications.
TO OUTDOOR unit
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
N P F1 F2
N P F1 F2
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
N P F1 F2
N P F1 F2
Indoor unit
N P F1 F2
Power terminal block

Batch remote control adapter Connector (X2A)
Separately sold batch remote control adapter.
Used for DCS302A52 connections.
See the instruction manual included with the batch remote control
adapter for details.
F1
Power supply
(AC100V-240V)
F2
CN2
Between AC100V
and 240V
Wiring specifications
Power supply wiring
2mm2
Transmission wiring
for control
0.75 1.25 mm2 sheathed vinyl cord or cable (balanced type) maximum length 1000 m
(total overall wiring length 2000 m)
Wire the indoor units to the outdoor units and between all power, indoor units, and remote controllers. See the instruction manual
included with the indoor and outdoor units for details.
CONTROL TERMINAL STRIP
*1 For connecting Indoor unit (F1, F2)
*2 Forced OFF input (T1, T2)
None of the indoor units connected to the forced OFF input contact (non-voltage contact with
minimal current) willoperate when it is shut off.
Use only contactors which guarantee the minimum applicable load DC 16V, 10mA.
T1
NOTE) Use instantanecous contactor of over 200m sec. energizing time,
DC16V
when necessary.
T2
F1 F2 T1 T2 D1 D2
*3 For schedule timer (D1, D2)

Power can be supplied to the schedule timer (DST301BA51. 61) separately sold. For details,
refer to the installationmanual of the schedule timer.
Wire *2 and *3 only when necessary.
(NOTE)
Do not connect the power supply wiring (100 to 240V) to the control terminal strip. If connected by mistake, it may damage or burn
electrical parts of optional controllers for centralized control and indoor unit. It may result in serious danger. Be sure to check wirings
before turning the power ON.
360
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
6 SETTING GROUP NO. FOR CENTRALIZED CONTROL

Set the group number of each group of the indoor unit from the remote controller. (In case of no remote controller, also connect the
remote controller and set the group No. Then, remove the remote controller.)
(1) Turn ON the power of the indoor unit and central remote controller.
(Unless the power is ON, no setting can be made.)
Check that the installation and electrical wiring are correct before turning the power supply ON.
(When the power supply is turned ON, all LCD appear once and the unit may not accept the operation for about one minute with the
display of .)
(2) While in the normal mode, hold down the
button for a
minimum of 4 seconds.
The remote controller will enter the FIELD SET MODE.
TEST
(3) Select the MODE No.

(4) Use the
with the
MODE NO.
button.
button to select the group No. for each group.
(Group numbers increase in the order of 1-00,1-01,...1-15, 2-00,

...8-15.)
(5) Press
(6) Press
GROUP NO.
FIELD SET
MODE
SETTING
to set the selected group No.

TEST
to return to the NORMAL MODE.

TEST
2.6
z For simplified remote controller, see the installation table.

z See the instruction manuals which came with the Ventiair and adapters (i.e., multi-purpose adapters) for details on their
Group No. settings.
NOTES)
Enter the group No. and installation place of the indoor unit into the installation table in the operation manual.
Be sure to keep the operation manual for maintenance.
NOTICE
7 TEST OPERATION (Perform a test operation in the individual screen before registering zones.)
Before starting test operation, check that the power is supplied to the indoor and outdoor units, and central remote controller.
(1) Select the display INDIVIDUALLY
Press
button to display INDIVIDUALLY
(2) Select the group to be tested.

Select the group No. with
(3) Press
button.
button to select the test operation mode.
TEST is displayed.
(4) Press
is displayed on the remote controller.

button within 10 seconds after entering into the test operation mode.
Operation the unit for 30 minutes.

When pressing the
button, the unit stops operating.

3
If the operation lamp flashes, it indicates a malfunction.
Call the group of flashing display, confirm malfunction code, and check the source of malfunction.
(The operation manual lists all error codes, so refer to it.)
NOTES
z For test operation, refer to the installation manual of the outdoor unit.
z After turning the power supply ON, if the unit does not accept operation for two minutes or more with the display of
check the following points.
z Check that setting of the connector for setting master controller is correct.
z Check that the group No. for centralized control has been set.
2P162816-1
Options
361
Control Devices
4.1.4
EDSG18-936
Operation Manual
" # $
%
' !

!
"

&
$
%
#
'
&
Fig. 1
"
#
$
&
'
!
!
!!
!
!
!%
!$
!#
%
!"
Fig. 2
"
!
%
#
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
362
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
"
&
%
Fig. 5
'
#
$
"
%
&
Fig. 6
"
%
#
Fig. 7
"
!
$
Fig. 8
Options
363
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
2
4
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
25
364
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
"
Fig. 13
Operation lamp
5
!
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
26
Options
365
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
BEFORE USE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
This central remote controller can monitor and control up to 64 indoor unit groups.
Using two central remote controllers allows monitoring and controlling of up to 128 indoor unit groups.
Main Functions
1. Batch starting and stopping of indoor units connected to the central remote controller.
2. Handling of operation settings such as start/stop, timer operation, remote controller prohibition/permission, etc.,
and operation status settings such as temperature.
3. Operation status monitoring of operation mode, set temperature, etc.

4. Can be connected to an external central monitor panel and key system using the forced stop input
(non-voltage a connector).
When using 1 central remote controller

!
"

!

When using 2 central remote controllers

!
"##
! !

"$
"##
!
%"$
!
$"##
! !

$"$
&"##
!
"$

(The central remote controller and the separately sold remote control adapter circuit board or group remote control adapter cannot be used together.)
GROUP OF INDOOR UNIT refers to the below.
1. A single indoor unit without remote controller
1. A single indoor unit without
2. A single indoor unit controlled by
remote controller
one or two remote controllers

Indoor unit
Remote
controller
Two remote
controllers
Remote controller not used
3. Maximum of 16 indoor units, group-controlled by one or two remote controllers
Remote
controller
A maximum of 16 units
A maximum of 16 units
Two remote
controllers
366
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
Zone control from the central remote controller

Zone control is available from the central remote controller. With it, it is possible to make unified settings for multiple groups, so setting operations are greatly simplified.

Any setting you make within a given zone will apply to all groups in the said zone.
A maximum of 64 zones can be set from a single central remote controller.
(Each zone contains a maximum of 64 groups.)
Zones can be set randomly from the central remote controller.
Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
carefully before installing air conditioning equipment
and be sure to install it correctly.
After completing the installation, make sure that the
unit operates properly during the start-up operation.
Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit
and keep it maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store this installation
manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances
not accessible to the general public.
WARNING ....Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION .... Indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury. It
may also be used to alert against
unsafe practices.
NOTE........... Indicates situation that may result
in equipment or property-damageonly accidents.
Keep these warning sheets handy so that you can
refer to them if needed.
Also, if this equipment is transferred to a new user, make
sure to hand over this operation manual to the new user.
WARNING
In order to avoid electric shock, fire or injury, or if
you detect any abnormality such as smell of fire, turn
off power and call your dealer for instructions.
Incomplete installation performed by yourself may
Ask your dealer for improvement, repair, and maintenance.

Incomplete improvement, repair, and maintenance may
Improper installation or attachment of equipment or
accessories could result in electric shock, short-circuit,
leaks, fire or other damage to the equipment. Be sure only
to use accessories made by Daikin which are specifically
designed for use with the equipment and have them
installed by a professional.
Ask your dealer to move and reinstall the air conditioner or the remote controller.
Incomplete installation may result in a water leakage,
electric shock, and fire.
Never let the indoor unit or the remote controller get wet.
It may cause an electric shock or a fire.
Never use flammable spray such as hair spray,
lacquer or paint near the unit.
It may cause a fire.
Never replace a fuse with that of wrong ampere
ratings or other wires when a fuse blows out.
Use of wire or copper wire may cause the unit to
break down or cause a fire.
Never inspect or service the unit by yourself.
Ask a qualified service person to perform this work.
Cut off all electric waves before maintenance.
Do not wash the air conditioner or the remote
controller with excessive water.
Do not install the air conditioner or the remote controller
at any place where flammable gas may leak out.
CISPR 22 Class A Warning:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may
be required to take adequate measures.
Options
367
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
CAUTION
After a long use, check the unit stand and fitting
for damage.
If they are left in a damaged condition, the unit may
fall and result in injury.
Do not allow a child to mount on the unit or avoid
placing any object on it.
Do not let children play on and around the unit.
If they touch the unit carelessly, it may result in injury.
Do not place a flower vase and anything containing water.
Water may enter the unit, causing an electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the front panel. Some parts inside are dangerous to touch, and a machine trouble may happen.
For checking and adjusting the internal parts, contact
your dealer.
Avoid placing the controller in a spot splashed
with water.
Water coming inside the machine may cause an electric
leak or may damage the internal electronic parts.
Do not operate the air conditioner when using a
room fumigation - type insecticide.
Failure to observe could cause the chemicals to become
deposited in the unit, which could endanger the health of
those who are hypersensitive to chemicals.
Packing materials, such as nails and other metal or
wooden parts, may cause stabs or other injuries.
Tear apart and throw away plastic packaging bags so
that children will not play with them. If children play
with a plastic bag which was not torn apart, they face
the risk of suffocation.

Always wait at least five minutes before turning off the
power. Otherwise, water leakage and trouble may occur.
The appliance is not intended for use by young
children or infirm persons without supervision.
The remote controller should be installed in
such a way that children cannot play with it.
NOTE
Never press the button of the remote controller
with a hard, pointed object.
The remote controller may be damaged.
Never pull or twist the electric wire of the remote
controller.
It may cause the unit to malfunction.
Do not place the controller exposed to direct sunlight.
The LCD display may get discolored, failing to display the data.
Do not wipe the controller operation panel with
benzine, thinner, chemical dustcloth, etc.
The panel may get discolored or the coating peeled
off. If it is heavily dirty, soak a cloth in water-diluted
neutral detergent, squeeze it well and wipe the panel
clean. And wipe it with another dry cloth.
Dismantling of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and eventual other parts, should be done
in accordance with the relevant local and
national regulations.
CONTENTS
BEFORE USE ..................................................... 1
OPERATION MODE ........................................ 13
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM .............. 1

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS ....................... 2
FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS .................... 6
Setting operation mode .........................................16

Group monitoring ..................................................16
Error diagnosing function .....................................17
Setting master remote controller ..........................20
Display of time to clean .........................................21
INSTALLATION TABLE ................................ 22
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ......................... 23
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF THE

OPERATING SECTION .................................. 7
OPERATION........................................................ 8
Individual screen, all screen, zone screen ............. 8
Batch operation and stop method ......................... 9
Group operation and stop method.......................... 9
Registering zones................................................... 9
Zone operation and stop method ......................... 10
Changing the fan direction and fan strength ........ 11
Changing the ventilation mode and
ventilation strength .............................................. 11
Timer Number Setting ......................................... 11
Setting the Operation Code.................................. 12
DOUBLE CENTRAL REMOTE

CONTROLLERS ............................................... 23
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................ 24
Specifications .......................................................24
Outline drawings ..................................................24
Fig. 1, 2, 3, 4...............................................................3
Fig. 5, 6, 7, 8...............................................................4
Fig. 9, 10, 11, 12.......................................................25
Fig. 13, 14, 15, 16.....................................................26
368
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS

Operation menu
This central remote controller can operate and stop machines by
either group or zone.
Batch operation and batch stop functions are also available. When
used in combination with the schedule timer (optional accessory),
timer operation and stop functions are available.
See page
812.
Various operation modes.

You can operate the system from both this unit and the remote
controller, so to enable various operation control patterns. Twenty
different operation modes are available including five operation
patterns:
1. Start/stop:
remote controller prohibition, remote
controller stop-only permission, central
priority, after-press priority, remote controller
permission timer
2. Operation modes: remote controller prohibition, remote
controller permission
3. Set temperature: remote controller prohibition, remote
controller permission
See page
1315.
Zone control for simpler setting procedures

You can control a maximum of 64 groups of indoor units by using
this central remote controller. You dont have to repeat the same
setting operations by group because you can make each of the
following settings by zone.
A functions is available for setting all groups in one batch.
Operation mode
Control mode
Setting temperature
Programming time No. (Used in conjunction with the
schedule timer)
See page
816.
Monitoring all indoor unit information

The following information can be displayed by group.
Operation information such as operation mode, set
temperature, etc., for indoor units
Maintenance information such as cleaning signs for filters
or elements
Error codes and other malfunction diagnosis information
See page
1621.
Function of refrigerant system display

This display helps you understand, at a glance, the indoor units
sharing the same outdoor unit and the particular indoor unit
among them that is set as the master remote controller.
See page 20.
Room air conditioners and multi-purpose air conditioners may also be connected by using separately-sold
adapter boards.
This may limit functionality, so consult the manuals that come with each adapter board.
Options
369
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF THE OPERATING SECTION (Fig. 1, 2)

1
2
UNIFIED OPERATION BUTTON
DISPLAY (COOLING/HEATING
SELECTION PRIVILEGE NOT SHOWN)
Press to operate all indoor units.
13 For zones or individual units (groups) for which
UNIFIED STOP BUTTON
this is displayed, cooling and heating cannot be

selected.
Press to stop all indoor units.

3 Lit white any of the indoor units under control is
in operation.
DISPLAY (REFRIGERANT
4 SYSTEM DISPLAY)
DISPLAY (UNDER HOST

COMPUTER INTEGRATED CON14 TROL)
While this display is lit up, no settings can be
made. It lights up when the upper central
machines are present on the same air
conditioning network.
This indication in the square is lit while the

refrigerant system is being displayed.
DISPLAY
15 (PRESET TEMPERATURE)
DISPLAY (ZONE SETTING)
The lamp is lit while setting zones.
Displays the preset temperature.
DISPLAY (OPERATION
6 MONITOR)
CODE)
The lamp is lit while operation is being monitored.
16 This displays (flashes) the content of errors
INDIVIDUALLY DISPLAY
when an error failure has occurred.

In maintenance mode, it displays the latest error
content.
7 The status displays indicates either batch

functions or which zone or individual unit
(or group) are being used.
OPERATION MONITOR
8 Each square displays the state corresponding to
NOT AVAILABLE DISPLAY

(NO FUNCTION DISPLAY)
17 If a function is not available in the indoor unit
even if the button is pressed, NOT AVAILABLE
is may be displayed for a few seconds.
each group.

9 DISPLAY (OPERATION MODE)
DISPLAY (MALFUNCTION
Displays operating state.
DISPLAY
18 (FAN DIRECTION SWING DISPLAY)
This displays whether the fan direction is fixed
or set to swing.
DISPLAY
(VENTILATION CLEANING DISPLAY)
10 This is displayed when a Ventiair total enthalpy

heat exchanger unit or other such unit is
connected.
DISPLAY (INSPECTION/TEST)
11 Pressing the maintenance/test run button
(for service) displays this. This button should not
normally be used.
DISPLAY (TIME TO CLEAN)

12 It lights up when any individual unit (group) has
DISPLAY (VENTILATION
19 STRENGTH/SET FAN STRENGTH
DISPLAY)
This displays the set fan strength.
20
DISPLAY (TIME NO.)
Displays the operation timer No. when used in

conjunction with the schedule timer.
reached the time for the filter or element to be

cleaned.
370
Options
EDSG18-936
DISPLAY (OPERATION
CODE AND UNIT NUMBER DISPLAY)
21 The method of operation (remote controller
prohibited, central operation priority after-press
operation priority, etc.) is displayed by the
corresponding code.
This displays the numbers of any indoor units
which have stopped due to an error.
DISPLAY (TIME TO
CLEAN AIR CLEANER ELEMENT/
22 TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER)
Displayed to notify the user it is time to clean the
air filter or air cleaner element of the group
displayed.
VENTILATION MODE BUTTON

23 This is pressed to switch the ventilation mode of
the total enthalpy heat exchanger.
Control Devices
33
34
35
25 This button is pressed when calling an individual

indoor unit or a zone.
ON/OFF BUTTON
26 Starts and stops ALL, ZONE, and INDIVIDUAL
units.
TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT
BUTTON (ZONE NUMBER BUTTON)
27 This button is pressed when setting the
temperature. Select the zone number if any
zones have been registered.
28
29
FAN DIRECTION ADJUSTMENT

BUTTON
This button is pressed when setting the fan
direction to fixed or swing.

BUTTON
This sets the operation mode. The dry setting
cannot be done.
TIME NO. BUTTON

30 Selects time No. (Use in conjunction with the
schedule timer only).
31
CONTROL MODE BUTTON

Selects control mode.

32 This button is pressed to erase the clean filter
display after cleaning or replacement.
Pressing this button scrolls through weak,

strong, and fast.
Zone registration mode can be turned on and off
by pressing the start and stop buttons simultaneously for at least four seconds.
INSPECTION/TEST RUN BUTTON

(FOR SERVICE)
36 Pressing this button scrolls through inspection,
test run, and system display.
This button is not normally used.
VENTILATION STRENGTH
ADJUSTMENT BUTTON
37 This button is pressed to switch the ventilation

strength (fresh up) of the total enthalpy heat
exchanger.
24 Pressing this button scrolls through the all

ARROW KEY BUTTON
FAN STRENGTH ADJUSTMENT

BUTTON
ZONE SETTING BUTTON
ALL/INDIVIDUAL BUTTON
screen, zone screen, and individual screen.
SET BUTTON
Sets control mode and time No.
(Notes)
1. Please note that all the displays in the figure
appear for explanation purposes or when the
cover is open.
2. If the unit is used in conjunction with other optional
central controllers, the OPERATION LAMP of the
unit that is not under operation control may light
up and go out a few minutes behind schedule.
This shows that the signal is being exchanged,
and does not indicate any failure.
OPERATION
Individual screen, all screen,
zone screen (Fig. 3)
This controller can perform operations in the individual
screen, all screen, or zone screen.
Individual screen The individual screen is used
when performing group operations.
All screen
The all screen is used when performing operations for all units at
once.
Zone screen
The zone screen is used when
performing zone operations.
1.

Select the screen by pressing the
ALL/INDIVIDUAL button.
Every time the ALL/INDIVIDUAL button is

pressed, the selection scrolls through INDIVIDUAL
ALL ZONE.
If nothing is done in the all or zone screens for one
minute, it automatically goes to the individual
screen.
Options
371
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
If the zone number in the zone screen is displayed as ---, this indicates that no units are
registered in a zone.
Please perform zone registration before proceeding in the zone screen. (See page 9)
Batch operation and stop method

(Fig. 4)
Group operation and stop method

(Fig. 5)
This is for operating or stopping connected units in
groups.
[Group operation]
1. Press the
to enter the
This is for operating or stopping all connected units at

once.
A. What to do when operating or stopping all

connected units at once.
1. Press either
2.
Press the ALL/INDIVIDUAL button to

enter the all screen.
The
2.
"
Press the RESET button.
Press the TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT button.

The temperature rises 1 every time
the ( ) button is pressed.
The temperature drops 1 every time
the ( ) button is pressed.
Set to
when you do not wish to use batch
setting for the temperature setting.
Setting to 1 above or below the temperature
4.
Call up the desired mode by pressing

the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button.
"
move the
4.
in this screen has selected unit 1-04.
Press the SELECT button.
The
display lights up in the group.

display goes off in the group.

The temperature rises 1 every time the
( ) button is pressed.
The temperature drops 1 every time the
( ) button is pressed.
Temperature adjustment cannot be done if the
selected groups air conditioners are in fan mode.
display lights up on all connected units.
setting range displays
3.
display lights up on all registered units.
The
display goes off on all connected units.
Operation and stop in the batch screen are done
the same as with the batch operation and batch
stop buttons.
3.
Using the arrow keys,
The
The
The
individual screen.
to select the units to operate or stop.

Keeping the button pressed down will move it
rapidly.
B. Batch Operation
1.
ALL/INDIVIDUAL button
The unit will enter the individual screen automatically if nothing is done for one minute.
or
Operation can be performed from the individual screen, the all screen, or the zone
screen.
The TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT and
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR buttons
cannot be used.
To set the temperature and operation mode,
use B. batch operation.
5.
&

Registering zones (Fig. 6)

It is possible to set multiple groups as one zone and
control each zone separately.
No zones are registered when the unit is shipped from
the factory.
Zone registration can be done in the individual screen,
all screen, or zone screen.
[Registration]
1.
Pressing the ALL/INDIVIDUAL

button for four seconds.
Displays
ZONE SET.
Zone Number 1 will be displayed, and if there are
any groups already registeredd displayed zone, a
will light up on the operation monitor.
Set to
when you do not wish to use batch setting for the operation setting.
372
Options
EDSG18-936
2.
Control Devices
Select the Zone Number to be registered using the ZONE NUMBER button.
[Batch deletion of zone registration]
1.

rapidly.
3.
to the group you wish to
"
reg-
ister using the arrow keys.

rapidly.
4.
Press the SELECT button to register

that group to the zone.
The
units.
display lights up on all the selected
Pressing the RESET button

removes the group from that zone, and
goes off.
'
Pressing the
for at least
four seconds while & pressing the FILTER SIGN RESET button when
ZONE SET is displayed will delete all
zone registrations.
The zone registrations for all units will be lost.
Zone operation and stop method

(Fig. 7)
This is for operating or stopping connected units in
zones.
[Zone operation]
1.
2.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the units you wish to

register to the zone have been added.

enter the zone screen.
!
Using the arrow keys, select the zone

number to operate or stop.
Pressing
and
reduces the zone number
while
and
raise the number.
rapidly.
If the zone number is displayed as ---, this
indicates that no units are registered in a
zone. Please perform zone registration
before using a zone. (See page 9)
3.
In this example, a screen is shown with
units 1-00, 1-02, 1-03, and 2-00 registered
to Zone Number 1.
6. Once zone registration is complete,
4.
display lights up in the group.
The

press the ALL/INDIVIDUAL button
to turn off ZONE SET display and return
to the individual screen.
display goes off in the group.

The temperature rises 1 every time the ( ) button is pressed.
The temperature drops 1 every time the ( ) button is pressed.
The display returns to the normal screen if nothing

is done for one minute when in zone registration
mode.
(NOTE)
It is impossible to register one group to several
different zones.
If this is done, the last zone registered to will be
valid.
The
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to register to the next

zone.
"
Set to
when you do not wish to use zone
setting for the temperature setting.
Setting to 1 above or below the temperature
setting range displays
5.
%
Set to
when you do not wish to use zone setting for the operation mode.
10
Options
373
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
Changing the fan direction and fan

strength (Fig. 8)
3.
This changes the fan direction and strength settings in

the air conditioner.
Changing the fan direction and strength is done in the
individual screen.
It will scroll through
to enter the
2.
"
move the
to select the units to fan direction
adjustment or fan strength adjustment.

rapidly.
3.
Press the FAN DIRECTION ADJUSTMENT button.

This sets fixed or swing for the fan direction.
$
Press the FAN STRENGTH ADJUSTMENT button.

Pressing this button scrolls through
and
Depending on the indoor unit, only
and
The functions included in the indoor units may vary.

Pressing a button for a function which is not available
will cause NOT AVAILABLE to be displayed.
This changes the ventilation mode and strength settings in the total enthalpy heat exchanger.
Changing the ventilation mode and strength is done in
the individual screen.
[Registration]
enter the
individual screen.
2.
The fresh up function may not be available

depending on the connected unit model.
The functions included in the indoor units may vary.
Pressing a button for a function which is not available
will cause NOT AVAILABLE to be displayed.
Ventilation Mode and Amount
If these are changed using the remote controller
depending on the unit model, they cannot be displayed on the central remote controller.
To monitor the ventilation mode and amount, check
the values on the remote controller.
Timer Number Setting (Fig. 10)

(Only when used with the schedule timer)
Using this together with the schedule timer makes it
possible to set on and off times four times a day.
1.
"
move the
to select the units to ventilation

mode or ventilation strength adjustment.
Pressing the TIMER NO. button

causes the number set for timer number 1
to blink.

If no timer setting has been made
Changing the ventilation mode and

ventilation strength (Fig. 9)
[Registration]
may be available.
1.
It will scroll through
individual screen.
Press the VENTILATION STRENGTH

ADJUSTMENT button.
Press the ALL/INDIVIDUAL button
[Registration]
1.
#
Press the VENTILATION MODE
button.
will be displayed.
Select the desired timer number
by pressing the TIMER
NO. button.
2.
Once the desired timer number is

displayed, press the SET button.
Press the
SET button
within 10 seconds after the timer
number is displayed.
The display will return to how it
was after 10 seconds.
The display for timer number 1
will stop blinking and then timer number 2 will start
blinking.

rapidly.
11
374
Options
EDSG18-936
3.
Control Devices
When using timer operation, make sure the

times do not overlap when setting the program of
the schedule timer.
Select the desired timer number by

pressing the TIMER NO. button.

Once the desired timer number is

displayed,
press the SET
button.
The display for timer number 2
will stop blinking.
The
Setting the Operation Code (Fig. 11)

[Registration]
1.
display will disappear
after 3 seconds.
Select in the timer number when you do not
wish to set a timer number.
It is possible to set only one timer number.
(The times for turning the unit(s) on and off twice a
day can be set with a single timer number.)
Timer Number Setting
Group control: select the unit in the individual
screen and set the timer number.
Batch control: set the timer numbers for all connected units.
Zone control: set the timer numbers for all
zone-registered units.
Call up the zones which you wish
to set in the zone screen and set
the timer numbers.
Since the timer number will be set to afterpress priority, the timer number in the last
screen set will be valid for the connected
units.
Example 1
Setting timer number 1 for unit 1-00 to 1 and
timer number 2 to 2 in the individual screen and
then setting timer number 1 to 3 and timer
number 2 to 4 in the batch screen causes the
timer numbers for all units to be set, so timer
number 1 for unit 1-00 will be 3 and timer number 2 will be 4.
Pressing the CONTROL MODE

button causes the currently set operation
code to blink.
Call up the desired code number by pressing the

CONTROL MODE button.
Scroll through the code numbers.
2.
Once the code number is displayed,

press the SET button.
The display will stop blinking.
The operation code display will disappear after
3 seconds.
[The Operation Code Setting]

Group control: select the unit in the individual screen
and set the operation code.
Batch control: set the operation code for all connected units.
Zone control: set the operation code for all zone-registered units.
Call up the zones which you wish to set
in the zone screen and set the operation code.
Since the operation code will be set for after-press priority, setting the operation code in the zone and individual screens after setting the operation code in the
batch screen, will cause the operation codes set afterwards to be valid.
Example 2
To prevent leaving units on, timer number 1 is
set to 5 in the batch screen.
Setting timer number 1 in zone number 1 to
in the zone screen after that will change the
timer number for zone number 1, so the setting
to prevent leaving the units on will be lost for
zone number 1 only.
If a timer number is set incorrectly by accident,
redo the setting in the desired screen.
What happens when the timer number on
time and off time are set to the same time
When the on time and off time are set to the
same time for the same timer number, operation
does not change.
When the on time and off time are set to the
same time for different timer numbers, the off
time is given priority.
12
Options
375
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
OPERATION MODE
The following five operation control modes can be selected along with the temperature setting and operation mode
by remote controller, for a total of twenty different modes. These twenty modes are set and displayed with control
modes of 0 to 19. (For further details, see EXAMPLE OF OPERATION SCHEDULE on the next page.)
ON/OFF control impossible by remote controller..... Use this mode when operating and stopping from the
central remote controller only. (ON/OFF control by the
remote controller is disabled.)
Only OFF control possible by remote controller ...... Use this mode when executing the operation only by the
central remote controller, and executing only the stop by
remote controller.
Centralized .............................................................. Use this mode when executing the operation only by the
central remote controller, and executing start/stop freely
by remote controller during the preset hours.
Individual ................................................................. Use this mode when executing start/stop both by central
remote controller and remote controller.
Timer operation possible by remote controller......... Use this mode when executing start/stop by remote controller during the preset hours, and not starting operation
by the central remote controller at the programmed time
of system start.
[HOW TO SELECT THE CONTROL MODE]

Select whether to accept or to reject the operation from the remote controller regarding the operation, stop, temperature setting and operation mode setting, respectively, and determine the particular control mode from the
rightmost column of the table below.
Example
Operation by remote
controller (at time of
unified operation by
centralized control)
[Rejection]
Operation by remote Stop by

controller (at time of remote
unified operation by controller
centralized control)
[Rejection]
Temperature
control by
remote
controller
Operation
mode setting
by remote
controller
[Rejection] [Acceptance] [Acceptance]
The control
mode is 1 .
13
376
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
Control by remote controller

Operation
Operation
mode
Unified operation, individual operation by central

remote controller, or operation controlled by timer
Unified stop, individual

stop by central remote
controller, or timer
stop
Temperature control
Stop
Rejection
ON/OFF control
impossible by
remote controller
Rejection
(Example)
Acceptance
(Example)
Rejection
(Example)
Rejection
Rejection
(Example)
Only OFF control

possible by
remote controller
Acceptance
Rejection
Centralized
Acceptance
Acceptance
Acceptance
Rejection
Individual
Acceptance
Acceptance
Timer operation
possible by
remote controller
Acceptance
(During timer at
ON position only)
Rejection
Rejection
(During timer at OFF
position)
Acceptance
Control
mode
Operation
mode setting
Acceptance
Rejection
10
Acceptance
(Example)
1 (Example)
Rejection
11
Acceptance
Rejection
12
Acceptance
Rejection
13
Acceptance
Rejection
14
Acceptance
Rejection
15
Acceptance
Rejection
16
Acceptance
Rejection
17
Acceptance
Rejection
18
Acceptance
Rejection
19
Note) Do not select the timer operation possible without the remote controller. In this case, timer operation is disabled.
When the operation, stop, temperature

setting and operation mode setting by
remote controller are rejected,
is displayed on the remote controller.

EXAMPLE OF OPERATION SCHEDULE
Operation schedule is possible only in conjunction with the schedule timer (optional accessory).
Liquid crystal display of schedule timer
ON/OFF control impossible by remote controller

Centralized
Programmed
to stop at
5:00
Programmed
to operate at
8:45
Remote
controller
Centralized
Individual operation
except to the preset
hours
Stop controlled
by timer
Operation controlled
by timer
------
Operation
Start/stop by remote
controller cannot be made.
Individual
stop
Stop
Forced and unified stop.

Power reminder stops.
---------
Stop
14
Options
377
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
Only OFF control possible by remote controller
Programmed to
operate at 8:45
Remote
controller
Stop
---
Programmed to
stop at 5:00
Programmed to
operate at 5:20
---
Only stopping possible by

the remote controller.
Individual operation once
the unit is stopped.
Centralized
Stop
Remote
controller
Operation
controlled by
timer
Timer stops even

if you forget to
turn off the unit.
Operation
controlled
by timer
Centralized
---
Timer stops. Power reminder stops.
Stop
Operation
---
Programmed to
stop at 10:00
Only stopping possible by the remote controller.
Centralized
Operation
controlled
by timer
Centralized
Timer stops.
Programmed to
operate at 8:45
Remote
controller
Stop
---
Operation
Stop
Programmed to
stop at 7:00
---
Start/stop is possible by the remote controller

during the hours programmed for timer operation.
Individual
Operation starts
without fail at the
timer-programmed
time.
Centralized
Programmed to
operate at 9:00
Operation
Remote
controller
---
Stop
Operation
Start/stop is possible by the remote controller at any time

regardless of the hours programmed by the timer.
Stops temporarily at the
timer-programmed stop time.
Centralized
Stop
Remote
controller
---
Programmed to
stop at 5:00
---
Timer stops.
Stop
Operation
---
Programmed to
stop at 10:00
Start/stop is possible by the remote controller at any time

regardless of the hours programmed by the timer.
Timer operation possible by remote controller

Timer operation possible
by remote controller at
preset times.
8:30
Remote
controller
---
Stops for a time at

timer-programmed time.
Stop
Operation
---
Programmed to
stop at 5:00
Startn/stop is possible by the remote controller

----
--------
Centralized
---------
------------------------------------------
Centralized
------
Timer operation possible by remote controller

at preset times.
Programmed to
operate at 5:20
Remote
controller
---
Timer stops. Power

reminder stops.
Operation
Stop
---
Programmed to
stop at 10:00
Start/stop is possible by the remote controller

Air conditioner now operating.

- - - - - Air conditioner now stopping.
Command by central remote controller
Command by remote controller
15
378
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
Setting operation mode (Fig. 12)

[Registration]
1.
Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON. Each time you press this
button, the display rotates as shown on
the below list.

List of operations which can be set

In the below list, refers to the acceptable setting, while refers to the not acceptable setting.
)

!

* !

"
#

$

$

1: Setting may not be acceptable depending on the

type of indoor unit with which this unit is connected.
2: In zone control, the units run in temperature adjustment mode (heating or cooling) for the outdoor system for the groups registered to those zones.
Heating or cooling selection is not available.
*3:
or
or
Changing the ventilation mode cannot be done in
the zone screen. Changing the ventilation mode
should be done in the individual screen.
4: In group control, the units run in temperature adjustment mode (heating or cooling) for the group outdoor
system. Heating or cooling selection is not available.
The Zone consists of the following two cases.
A. Zone without display
The group with master remote controller setting

exists in this zone.
Setting the master remote controller enables cool/
heat selection.
Operations other than cool/heat operations can also
be set for some operations. For further details, see
the list on the left.
B. Zone with display
No group with master remote controller setting

exists in this zone.
The cool/heat selection is not available because the
master remote controller has not been set.
Some operations other than cool/heat operations
can be set. For further details, see the list in the left.
See page 20 if the display
is flashing.
Fan operation can be performed for each zone using

the central remote controller even if there is no cooling/heating selection right during cooling or heating.
Also, if a Ventiair is connected in the zone, ventilation
and ventilation cleaning operation is possible. See
the included operating manuals for details.
When the indoor unit is in heat operation, change the setting to FAN operation through the central remote controller; then, you can switch the fan speed to the extremely
low fan speed. Warm air may blow if any other indoor unit
belonging to the same system is in heat operation.
The indoor fan stops during defrost/hot start.
DRY cannot be set from the central remote controller.
Group monitoring (Fig. 13)

Utilize the group monitor function in each of the following cases:
1. Check the malfunction code.
(See the next page.)
2. Check the group that requires cleaning of the air
filter and air cleaner element. (See page 21.)
3. Change the setting of the master remote controller. (See page 20.)
4. Check the group(s) sharing the same outdoor
unit. Or, check the particular group(s) with the
master remote controller setting. (See page 20.)
5. Check the conditions of other individual groups.
16
Options
379
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
When in zone screen

The zone screen will revert to the individual screen
automatically if nothing is done in it for one minute.
[Registration]
1.
2.
Press the ALL/INDIVIDUAL button

to switch to the
INDIVIDUAL screen.

Using the arrow key,
"
move the
to select the unit to be monitored.

rapidly.
"
The
lights up and the status of that unit
is displayed in the LCD. The cursor in the screen
Fig. 13 has selected unit 2-06.
code is displayed. Check the contents of the display,

and contact your DAIKIN dealer because the above
signs can give you the idea on the trouble area.
The display
flashes under
the group No. where the indoor
unit that has stopped due to malfunction.
[Registration]
1.

Press the ARROW KEY BUTTON to
call up the group that has stopped due to
malfunction.
The unit No. ! the malfunction code is

flashing because of an error failure.
Error diagnosing function

(Fig. 14)
This central remote controller is provided with a diagnosing function, for when an indoor unit stops due to
malfunction. In case of actuation of a safety device,
disconnection in transmission wiring for control or failure of some parts, the operation lamp, inspection display and unit No. start to flash; then, the malfunction
Operation
lamp
Maintenance
display
Unit No.
Malfunction
code
Error content
64
Indoor air thermistor error
65
Outdoor air thermistor error
68
HVU error (Ventiair dust-collecting unit)
6A
Dumper system error
6A
Dumper system error + Thermistor error
6F
Simple remote controller error
6H
94
Door switch (Ventiair dust-collecting unit), relay harness fault

(Ventiair dust-collecting/humidifier unit)
Ventiair internal transmission error
(between total enthalpy fan unit)
A0
Indoor unit external safety device error
A1
Indoor unit BEV unit (Sky-Air connection unit) PC board

assembly fault
A1
Indoor unit PC board assembly fault
A3
Indoor unit Drain level error (33H)
A6
Indoor unit Fan motor (51F) lock, overload
A7
Indoor unit Fan direction adjustment motor (MA) error
A9
Indoor unit BEV unit, electric expansion valve motor (20E) error
AF
Indoor unit Malfunctioning drain
AH
Indoor unit Dust-collector error
AJ
Indoor unit Insufficient capacity setting, address setting fault
17
380
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
C4
C5
C9
CA
Indoor unit Liquid piping thermistor (Th2) Error (faulty connection, cut wire, short circuit, fault)
Indoor unit BEV unit, gas piping thermistor (Th3) Error (faulty
connection, cut wire, short circuit, fault)
Indoor unit Intake air thermistor (Th1) Error (faulty connection,
cut wire, short circuit, fault)
Indoor unit Outlet air thermistor (Th4) Error (faulty connection,
cut wire, short circuit, fault)
CJ
Indoor unit remote controller sensor error
E0
Outdoor unit Safety device operation
E1
Outdoor unit PC board assembly fault
E1
Outdoor unit PC board assembly fault
E3
Outdoor unit High-pressure switch fault
E4
Outdoor unit Low-pressure switch fault
E9
Outdoor unit Electric expansion valve motor (20E) error
EC
Heat source unit Intake water temperature inter-lock operation

(fan operation)
EF
Outdoor unit Ice thermal storage unit error
F3
Outdoor unit Discharge piping temperature error
H3
Outdoor unit High-pressure switch operation
H4
Outdoor unit Low-pressure switch operation
H9
H9
Outdoor unit Outdoor air thermistor (Th1)

Error (faulty connection, cut wire, short circuit, fault)
Outdoor unit Outdoor air thermistor (Th1)
HC
Outdoor unit Water temperature sensor system error
HF
Ice thermal storage unit error, ice thermal storage controller error,
error in outdoor unit during ice thermal storage operation
HJ
Outdoor unit water system fault
J1
Outdoor unit pressure sensor error
J3
J3
J5
Outdoor unit Discharge piping thermistor (Th3)

Outdoor unit Discharge piping thermistor (Th3)
Outdoor unit Intake piping thermistor (Th4)
J6
Outdoor unit Heat exchange thermistor (Th2) error
J6
Outdoor unit Heat exchange thermistor (Th2) error

J7
Outdoor unit Header thermistor (Th6) error
JA
Outdoor unit Discharge piping pressure sensor error
JC
Outdoor unit Intake piping pressure sensor error
JF
Outdoor unit Oil temperature sensor (Th5) system error
JH
Outdoor unit Oil temperature sensor (Th5) system error
L0
Outdoor unit Inverter system fault
L4
Outdoor unit Inverter cooler fault
L5
Outdoor unit Ground circuit for compressor motor, short circuit,

or power unit short circuit
18
Options
381
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
L6
Outdoor unit Ground circuit for compressor motor, short circuit
L8
Outdoor unit Compressor overload, compressor motor wire

disconnection
L9
Outdoor unit Compressor lock
LA
Outdoor unit Power unit error
LC
Outdoor unit Transmission error between inverter and outdoor

control unit
or
M1
Central controller: PC board fault
or
M8
Transmission error between central controllers
or
MA
Central controller: Incorrect combination
or
MC
Central controller: Address setting fault
P0
Insufficient gas (thermal storage)
P1
Outdoor unit Power voltage imbalance, phase loss
P4
Outdoor unit Power unit temperature sensor error
U0
Pressure drop due to insufficient refrigerant, electric expansion

valve fault, etc.
U1
Reversed or lost phase
U2
Power voltage error, momentary electrical stoppage
U4
U5
U5
U6
U7
U7
U8
U9
UA
Transmission error between indoor unit/BEV unit and outdoor/BS

unit, Transmission error between outdoor unit and BS unit
Transmission error between remote controller and indoor
control unit
Remote controller board fault or remote controller setting fault
Transmission error between indoor units
Transmission error between outdoor units
Transmission error between outdoor unit and ice thermal
storage unit
Transmission error between outdoor units
(cooling/heating batch, low-noise operation)
Transmission error between master remote controller and slave
remote controller (slave remote controller error)
Incorrect combination of indoor unit and remote controller within
a single system (model)
Transmission error between indoor unit/BEV unit and outdoor
unit within a single system
Transmission error between BS unit and indoor unit/BEV unit and
outdoor unit within a single system
Incorrect combination of indoor, BS, and outdoor units within a
single system (model, number of units, etc.)
Incorrect combination of indoor unit and remote controller
(remote controller in question) BS unit connection position fault
UC
Central control group numbers overlap
UE
Transmission error between indoor unit and central controller
UF
Unset system, incorrect settings between BEV unit and

indoor unit
UH
System fault
error codes (in outline font) do not display maintenance and the system will run, but please check the content
of the display and contact your dealer.
19
382
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
Setting master remote controller

(Fig. 15)
You must set the master remote controller of the operation mode for one of the indoor units, if two or more
such indoor units with the remote controller are connected with the outdoor unit where the operation
modes such as cool/heat operation and FAN operation
can be set by remote controller and central remote controller.
1. Preparations
When switching operation

In case of operation switch
Call up the zone including the group with the
setting of master remote controller.
(Zone without the display
Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR

BUTTON several times, and switch to the
desired operation mode.
Each time you press it, the display is switched

When you want to fix settings
to
Check the particular group with the master

remote controller setting for the refrigerant
system you wish to reset. (See the below.)
NOTE
Call up the group without the display
(See page 16.)

Hold the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR
BUTTON down for about four seconds while
the above group is being called up.
The display
flashes on the liquid crystal display of the remote controller
for all the groups sharing the same outdoor
unit or BS unit.
When you turn on the power switch for the first
time, the display
flashes.
and
in sequence.
However, the displays
and VENTILATION MODE may appear in some zones,

depending on the type on indoor unit with which they
are connected.
(VENTILATION MODE)
or
or
[System Display]
1. Test run mode is necessary to display the system
display.
2. In order to turn on test run mode, select the appropriate air conditioner on the individual screen with
the cursor and then set its operation mode to either
cooling or heating. (The air conditioner does not
need to be running. It doesnt matter if it is, though.)
3. Press the inspection/test run button twice to put it
into test run mode.
4. Pressing the inspection/test run button for four or
more seconds in test run mode will display
REF CIRCUIT.
the
2. Setting selection right

Pall up the desired group to set the master
remote controller, and press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON. The master
remote controller is set for this group, and the
display
goes out. The display
appears for the other groups.

Setting is finished now.
20
Options
383
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
Call the unit whose system you wish to look up using

the arrow keys.
The
on all groups in the same system as the
displayed group will light up.
Of those, the
display in all groups which have
cooling/heating selection privilege will blink.
2.
Press the FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON, and the display

disappears. (Including all the groups where the
air filter has been cleaned.)
NOTE
Be sure to check the display !
has
disappeared at this point. The appearance of the
above display is a sign that the air filter or air cleaner
element of some group still needs cleaning.
In this example, individual units 1-00, 1-03, 1-05,

1-06, 1-07, 2-02, and 2-03 are in the same system,
and 1-05 has the cooling/heating selection privilege.
To look up other systems, call up all the units you wish
to look up using the arrow keys.
Pressing the inspection/test run button one more time
gets rid of the system display and ends it.
The unit will enter the individual screen automatically if
nothing is done for one minute in the system display
screen.
This function may not be available for all connected
outdoor units, in which case REF CIRCUIT will blink.
It will also not be correctly displayed if DIII-NET extension ADP is used.
Display of time to clean (Fig. 16)

This central remote controller displays the time to clean
the air filter or air cleaner element for each group or any
given group by utilizing two types of signs. The display
tells the time to clean the air filter or the air

cleaner element of some group.
If a cleaning sign is displayed

A filter or element in some group is ready to be
cleaned.
1.
Press the ARROW KEY BUTTON, and

search the groups displaying
or

(The group may be plural.)
Clean or change the air filter or air cleaner

element.
For further details, see the operation manual
attached to each indoor unit. (Clean or change the
air filter or air cleaner element of all the groups displaying
or
.)
21
384
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
INSTALLATION TABLE
When installing the equipment, mark the zone No. of each group and installation location in the below table.
Setting group No.
(Setting is not possible unless power is activated to
both the central remote controller and indoor unit.)
Operated by simplified remote controller

1. Activate power to both the central remote controller
and indoor unit.
2. Remove the upper part of the remote controller.
Operated by remote controller

1. Activate power to both the central remote controller
and indoor unit.
3. Press the
BUTTON (field set) on the PC
board. The controller will enter the FIELD SET
MODE.
2. While in the normal mode, hold down the

button for a minimum of 4 seconds. The unified ON/
OFF controller will enter the FIELD SET MODE.
3. Select the MODE No.
4. Use the
with the
4. Select the MODE No.

TON and
button.
button to select the group No. for
6. Press
BUTTON (temperature setting).
6. Press
BUTTON (set/cancel) to set the
selected group No.
MODE NO.

GROUP NO.
5 "
7. Press
BUTTON (field set) to return to the
NORMAL MODE.

2.6
BUT-
5. Use the
BUTTON (set A) and
BUTTON (set B) to select the group No. for each
group. (Group No. increases in the order of 1-00,
1-01 ... 1-15, 2-00, ... 8-15.)
each group. (Group No. increases in the order of

1-00, 1-01 ... 1-15, 2-00, ... 8-15.)
5. Press
with the
4
3.7 6
5 5
Zone No.
Group No.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Indoor unit
Quantity of units
Controlled by
Location
Zone No.
Group No.
Indoor unit
Quantity of units
Controlled by
Location
22
Options
385
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
Zone No.
Group No.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Indoor unit
Quantity of units
Controlled by
Location
Zone No.
Group No.
Indoor unit
Quantity of units
Controlled by
Location
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
>
=
You can perform the normal operation, take off the malfunction contact point and unified start/stop by contact
point, all by connecting this unit with the unification adaptor for computerized control. For further details, ask
your DAIKIN dealer.
(a) Unification adaptor for computerized control
(b) Central remote controller
DOUBLE CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLERS
(b)
(a)-(1)
(a)-(2)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
With two central remote controllers, centralized control (indoor units) is possible from different locations.
(a) Central remote controller
(b) Group No. 1 00
(c) Group No. 1 15
( f ) A maximum of 64 groups
(e) Group No. 4 15
(d) Group No. 2 00
Note)
For control alignment and settings for double central remote controllers, contact your dealer.
23
3P124623-8D
386
Options
EDSG18-936
4.2
Control Devices
<DCS301BA61> Unified ON/OFF Controller

Turns up to 16 groups of indoor units (max. 128 units) on/off (operation/stop) by individual group or all at
once, and lets you check display of operation/malfunction at the same time.
For a maximum of 16 groups of indoor units (max. 128 units),
unified operation/stop or individual operation/stop can be
performed with this optional accessory. Also allows you check
operation/error display at a glance.
By combining with a central remote controller and schedule
timer, you can construct a system that matches the size and use
of the building.
Up to 8 units connectable within 1 system.
Up to 16 units in the double central control mode.
Features thin design of a mere 16mm in thickness. (Uses JIS
recessed box for 2.)
Wiring can be up to 1km in length. Applicable wiring methods
include bus and star in addition to crossover type.
Can be used in combination with other D-BACS equipment.
4.2.1
Dimensions
Unified ON/OFF Controller
Optional switch box
HOST
46
16
120
ALL I
2-5 x 7 round end slit
ALL
UNIFIED
ON/OFF CONTROLLER
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
D2 D1 T2 T1 F2 F1
83.5
02
71.0
01
120
00
15
DCS301B51 61
52.5
90
3D050339
Options
387
Control Devices
4.2.2
EDSG18-936
Installation Manual
Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be sure to install it correctly. After completing the
installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during the star t-up operation. Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it maintained.
CAUTION ....... Indication a potentially hazardous situation which, if noW
t aA
voR
idN
edI,N
mG
ay result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to aler t against unsafe practices.
NOTE ............. Indication situation that may result in equipment or proper ty-damage-only accidents.
WARNING
Failure to use the specified par ts may result in water leakage, electric shocks, fire or the unit falling.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this unit and that all electrical work is carried out by qualified personnel according to local
laws and regulations and this installation manual.
When wiring the power supply and connecting the remote controller wiring and transmission wiring, position the wires so that the electric parts box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the electric par ts box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or the terminals overheating.
When installing or relocating the system, be sure to keep the refrigerant circuit free from substances other than the specified refrigerant (R410A), such as air.
If the pressure switch, thermal switch, or other protection device is shor ted and operated forcibly, or par ts other than those specified by Daikin are used, fire or
explosion may result.
Do not touch the switch with wet fingers. Touching a switch with wet fingers can cause electric shock.
Install an leak circuit breaker, as required. If an leak circuit breaker is not installed, electric shock may result.
Plastic par ts may deteriorate and fall off or result in water leakage.
Corroding copper pipes or soldered par ts may result in refrigerant leakage.
(d) where flammable gases may leak, where there are carbon fiber or ignitable dust suspensions in the air, or where volatile flammables such as thinner or
gasoline are handled.
CAUTION
Safely dispose of the packing materials. Packing materials, such as nails and other metal or wooden par ts, may cause stabs or other injuries.
Tear apar t and throw away plastic packaging bags so that children will not play with them. If children play with a plastic bag which was not torn apar t, they face the risk of suffocation.
Do not turn off the power immediately after stopping operation. Always wait at least five minutes before turning off the power. Otherwise, water leakage and trouble may occur.
NOTE
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wires at least 3.5ft. away from televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can result shorter than expected in rooms with electronic fluorescent lamps. (inverter or rapid start types)
Dismantling of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and eventual other parts, should be done in accordance with the relevant local and national regulations.
388
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
COMPONENTS
Check the following components are included in this
optional accessory before installation.
Body
Installation screw (M4 16)
Operation manual
1
4
Installation table*
Switch display sticker
When using this optional accessory for EMC

(Electromagnetic Compatibility) (European
Directive), a electric parts box of KJB212AA
and an optional accessory applicable to EMC
(KEK26-1A) are required. In this case, refer to
the installation manual of KEK26-1A.
For installation, a steel electric parts box to be
embedded is necessary.
*DCS301BA61 includes only one installation
manual and installation table.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This unified ON/OFF controller enables individual and unified operation/stop for a maximum of 16 groups of indoor units. With 2 to 8
unified ON/OFF controllers, individual and unified control is possible with up to a maximum 128 groups of indoor units.
When using 1unified ON/OFF
controller
When using 2 to 8 unified

ON/OFF controllers
Outdoor
unit
Outdoor
unit
Forced
OFF input
Host computer
monitor panel
Group No.
100
Unified ON/OFF
controller
Group No.
100
Group No.
115
Group No.
200
Group No.
215
Group No.
800
Group No.
815
Outdoor
unit
Forced
OFF input
Group No.
115
Max. 16 groups
Host computer
monitor panel
Outdoor
unit
Stops with input to

any single unified
ON/OFF controller.
Max. 128 groups
(This optional accessory can not be used in conjunction with wiring adapter for electrical appendices (optional accessory).)
The goups of indoor units are as follows:
One indoor unit without remote controller
One indoor unit controlled by one or two remote controllers

or
Without remote controller
One remote
controller
Two remote
controllers
A maximum of 16 indoor units controlled in groups by one or two remote controllers

or
Remote
controller
Max.
16 units
Two remote
controllers
Max. 16
indoor units
ELECTRIC WIRING
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
All wiring, components and materials to be procured on the site must comply with the applicable local and national codes.
Use copper conductors only.
All field wiring and components must be provided by licensed electrician.
Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes.
Fit the power supply wiring with a fuse and a switch.
After wiring work, check power to the equipment shuts OFF when switch is shut OFF.
WIRING OUTLINE
Switch
Fuse
(15A)
Electric parts
box
(KJB212AA)
F1,F2
Power supply
~
100-240V 50/60Hz
Outdoor
unit
F1,F2
F1,F2
F1,F2
F1,F2
F1,F2
Max. 16 groups
Wiring specification
Power supply
wiring
Transmission
wiring
Type
Size
H05VV-U3G
(NOTE 1)
Sheathed wire (2 wire)

(NOTE 2)
0 . 7 5 1 . 2 5 m m2
NOTES) 1. The size of power supply wiring must comply with the
applicable national and local codes.
2. Allowable length of transmission wiring is as follows.
Max. 1000m (Total wiring length: 2000m)
Connect the wiring between indoor and outdoor units, indoor/outdoor units and power supply, and indoor units and remote controllers.
For details, refer to the installation manuals of indoor and outdoor units.
Options
389
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
EXAMPLES OF WIRING FOR TRANSMISSION

Series wiring
F1,F2
F1,F2
ON
F1,F2
OFF
Bus type wiring (Can be branched up to 16 branchings)
Star type wiring (Can be branched up to 16 branchings)
Example of 3 branchings
Example of 3 branchings
F1,F2
F1,F2
ON
F1,F2
F1,F2
F1,F2
F1,F2
F1,F2
F1,F2
F1,F2
OFF
F1,F2
F1,F2
F1,F2
ON
(NOTE 1)
(NOTE 1)
OFF
F1,F2
F1,F2
ON
OFF
Unified ON/OFF
: controller
F1,F2
F1,F2
Terminal board
: (Part to be procured
in the field)
: Indoor unit
: Outdoor unit
NOTES) 1. No branching is allowed after branching.

2. Use a relay terminal board (part to be procured in the field) to branch more than 3 control wirings from the same terminal
board.
WIRING TO THE INDOOR UNIT AND OUTDOOR UNIT

Outdoor unit
TO IN/D UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT
F1 F2
F1 F2
Outdoor unit
TO IN/D UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT
F1 F2
F1 F2
CONTROL TERMINAL STRIP

1
2
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
For connecting indoor unit (F1, F2)

Forced OFF input (T1, T2)
While the forced OFF input (no voltage contactor, for micro current)
is ON (energized), all the connected indoor units are stopped and
can not be operated.
Use only contactors which guarantee the minimum applicable load
DC16V, 10mA.
T1
Indoor unit
P1 P2 F1 F2
NOTE) Use instantaneous contactor of

over 200msec. energizing time,
when necessary.
D C1 6 V
T2
Indoor unit
P1 P2 F1 F2
Indoor unit
P1 P2 F1 F2
Indoor unit
P1 P2 F1 F2
Indoor unit
P1 P2 F1 F2
Optional accessory
applicable to EMI
(KEK26-1A)
For schedule timer (D1, D2)

Power can be supplied to the schedule timer (DST301BA5161
optional accessory). For details, refer to the installation manual of
the schedule timer.
Wire 2 and 3 only when necessary.
2
1
F1
F2
T1
3
T2
D1
D2
LN
F1F2
LN
LN
Power supply (NOTE 1)

~
100-240V 50/60Hz
Electric
parts box
(KJB212AA)
NOTE) 1. When not using the optional accessory

applicable to EMI (KEK26-1A), connect
the power supply wiring directly to the
unified ON/OFF controller.
(NOTE)
Do not connect the power supply wiring (220 to 240V) to the control terminal strip. If connected by mistake, it may damage or b urn electrical parts of
optional controllers for centralized control and indoor unit. It may result in serious danger. Be sure to check wirings before turning the power ON.
INSTALLATION
Open the upper part of remote controller.
Insert a screwdriver (2 locations) into the recess between the upper
part and the lower part of remote controller and twist the screwdriver lightly.
screwdriver
(2 locations)
PC board is attached with both the upper and lower part of remote
controller. Do not damage the board with the screwdriver.
Open the upper part of remote controller and install the electric parts
box (part to be procured in the field) with the attached installation screws
(M4 16).
NOTE) Suitable length of the electric wire is about 160mm from the inlet of
the electric parts box. If it is difficult to contain a long wiring, strip the
sheathed part of the wiring.
Wiring for
transmission
Installation screws
(2 screws)
Conduit tube
Power supply
wiring
Electric parts
box
About 160mm
Electric parts box
390
Do not contain the power supply

and the transmission wiring in the
same conduit tube.
(Part to be procured
in the field)
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
are initialized when power is turned ON, therefore complete settings

Setting
through
before activating the power.
INITIAL SETTING
Connector for setting master controller (X1A) (Provided with connector at factory set)
When using 1 unified ON/OFF controller, do not disconnect the connector for setting master controller. (Use the unit with the
connector in the state in which it was delivered.)
When using multiple unified ON/OFF controllers, or using the unified ON/OFF controller in conjunction with other optional
controllers for centralized control, makes settings as indicated in the below table.
Pattern of connection of optional controllers for centralized control
Unified ON/OFF controller Central remote controller Schedule timer
1 to 4
1 to 16
1
1 to 4
Connector for setting master controller (X1A) Settings

Unified ON/OFF controller Central remote controller Schedule timer
the rest to Not used.
Set all to Not used.
(Note)
Not used
the rest to Not used.
Set all to Not used.
(Note)
Not used
(Note) For instructions on how to set the connector for setting master controller on the central remote controller, see the installation
manual provided with the central remote controller.
Switch for setting each address (DS1)
These switches are used to set group control address.
Groups Nos. 100 through 115 are grouped in the same control group when the unit is shipped from the factory.
8-00 ~ 8-15
DS1
ON
DS1
1 2 3
Set each adress
7-00 ~ 7-15
ON
DS1
1 2 3
Set each adress
6-00 ~ 6-15
ON
ON
DS1
1 2 3
Set each adress
5-00 ~ 5-15
1 2 3
Set each adress
DS1
1 2 3
Set each adress
4-00 ~ 4-15
ON
DS1
1 2 3
Set each adress
3-00 ~ 3-15
ON
DS1
ON
ON
D S1
s et t i n g
2-00 ~ 2-15
1 2 3
Set each adress
DS1
1 2 3
Set each adress
Eac h Ad d r es s 1-00 ~ 1-15
( Fac t o r y s et t i n g )
(To hold reset)
After setting, attach the number seal applicable to

respective control range of the attached switch display
sticker, as shown in the diagram below.
Connector for setting master controller

Forced reset switch
UNIFIED
ON/OFF CONTROLLER
Switch for setting each address
(Example)
In the case of 1-00 to
1-15, attach 1 .
Control mode selector

MAIN/SUB changeover switch
MAIN/SUB changeover switch setting

With two unified ON/OFF controllers, centralized control
(indoor units) is possible from different locations. In this
kind of set-up, it is necessary to set the MAIN/SUB
changeover switch.
Outdoor unit
Group
No.
100
Unified ON/OFF
Group
No.
115
Unified ON/OFF
Max. of 16 groups
One of the two unified ON/OFF controllers (1)(2) is set to
controller (2)
controller (1)
MAIN while the other is set to SUB.
Setting of the sequential operation function
The unified ON/OFF controller is equipped with a sequential operation function that sequentially turns indoor units on in 2-second
intervals during unified operation. (Sequential operation is factory set to ON.) To switch sequential operation ON or OFF, set as follows.
While holding down the unified stop button, perform forced reset.
ON
OFF
While holding down the unified operation button, perform forced reset.
(Factory set)
NOTE: The sequential operation function is designed to reduce the load on the power supply equipment, but does not guarantee that compressors
will not be started simultaneously. You cannot therefore count on a capacity reduction effect by power supply equipment breaker selection.
Control mode selector (DS2)
The following four patterns of control mode can be set.
Control mode
Content
Individual
Operation/stop is controlled
by both unified ON/OFF
controller and remote
controller.
Centralized
After operated by unified ON/
OFF controller, operation/stop
is freely controlled by remote
controller until stopped by
unified ON/OFF controller.
Timer operation possible by

remote controller
When used in conjunction
with schedule timer,
operation/stop is controlled
freely by remote controller
during the set time but
operation is not available
when schedule timer is ON.
ON/OFF control impossible

by remote controller
Operation/stop is controlled
by unified ON/OFF controller
only.
(This unit can not be
operated/stopped by remote
controller.)
2
1
CONTROL MODE
D S2
ON
2
1
CONTROL MODE
D S2
ON
2
1
CONTROL MODE
ON
D S2
ON
D S2
DS2 setting
CONTROL MODE
(Factory set)
NOTES)
Options
RESET
OFF
ON
RESET
OFF
ON
indicates the position of switches.

Set control mode before turning power supply ON.
When used in conjunction with central remote controller, the control modes of the central remote controller has the priority.
Forced reset switch (SS1)
When changing the setting of the connector for setting master controller, etc.,
you can reset simply by setting it to the reset side once and returning to the
Normal side
normal side, without turning the power OFF.
Reset side
(Factory set)
(For normal operation, set the switch to the normal side.)
391
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
SETTING GROUP NO. FOR CENTRALIZED CONTROL

Set the group number of each group of the indoor unit from the remote controller. (In case of no remote controller, also connect the
remote controller and set the group No. Then, remove the remote controller.)
(1) Turn ON the power of the indoor unit and UNIFIED ON/OFF CONTROLLER.
(When the power supply is turned ON, all LCD appear once and the unit may not accept the operation for about one minute with the
display of .)
button for a
minimum of 4 seconds.
T ES T
with the
button.
MODE NO.
GROUP NO.
FIELD SET
MODE
SETTING
(4) Use the
button to select the group No. for each group.

(Group numbers increase in the order of 1-00,1-01,...1-15, 2-00,
...8-15.)
(5) Press
(6) Press
T ES T

TEST
2.6
NOTES)
For simplified remote controller, see the installation table.

See the instruction manuals which came with the Ventiair and adapters (i.e., multi-purpose adapters) for details on their
Group No. settings.
NOTICE
Enter the group No. and installation place of the indoor unit into the installation table in the operation manual.
CONFIRMING OPERATION
Before starting test operation, supply power to the indoor units, outdoor units, and unified ON/OFF controller and press the ON/OFF button.
If the operation lamp flashes, it indicates a malfunction in the indoor unit of the applicable group.
If the display of HOST
flashes, it indicates a malfunction in the optional controllers for centralized control. Check for such malfunctions.
NOTES
For test operation of indoor and outdoor units, refer to the installation manual attached with the outdoor unit.
After turning the power supply ON, if the unit does not accept operation for two minutes or more with the display of
HOST
flashing, check the following points.
Check that setting of the connector for setting master controller is correct.
Check that the group No. for centralized control has been set.
1P162827-1
392
Options
EDSG18-936
4.2.3
Control Devices
Operation Manual
Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be sure to install it correctly. After completing the installation, make sure that the
unit operates properly during the start-up operation.

WARNING ......Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION .......Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
NOTE .............Indicates situation that may result in equipment or property-damage-only accidents.
Keep these warning sheets handy so that you can refer to them if needed.
Also, if this equipment is transferred to a new user, make sure to hand over this operation manual to the new user.
WARNING
In order to avoid electric shock, fire or injury, or if you detect any abnormality such as smell of fire, turn off power and call your dealer for instructions.
Incomplete installation performed by yourself may result in a water leakage, electric shock, and fire.
Ask your dealer for improvement, repair, and maintenance.
Incomplete improvement, repair, and maintenance may result in a water leakage, electric shock, and fire.
Improper installation or attachment of equipment or accessories could result in electric shock, short-circuit, leaks, fire or other damage to the equipment. Be sure only to use
accessories made by Daikin which are specifically designed for use with the equipment and have them installed by a professional.
Ask your dealer to move and reinstall the air conditioner or the remote controller.
Incomplete installation may result in a water leakage, electric shock, and fire.
Never let the indoor unit or the remote controller get wet.
Never use flammable spray such as hair spray, lacquer or paint near the unit.
Never replace a fuse with that of wrong ampere ratings or other wires when a fuse blows out.
Use of wire or copper wire may cause the unit to break down or cause a fire.

Ask a qualified service person to perform this work.
Do not wash the air conditioner or the remote controller with excessive water.
Do not install the air conditioner or the remote controller at any place where flammable gas may leak out.
CAUTION
After a long use, check the unit stand and fitting for damage.
If they are left in a damaged condition, the unit may fall and result in injury.
Do not allow a child to mount on the unit or avoid placing any object on it.
Do not let children play on and around the unit.
If they touch the unit carelessly, it may result in injury.
Do not place a flower vase and anything containing water.
Water may enter the unit, causing an electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the front panel. Some parts inside are dangerous to touch, and a machine trouble may happen.
For checking and adjusting the internal parts, contact your dealer.
Avoid placing the controller in a spot splashed with water.
Water coming inside the machine may cause an electric leak or may damage the internal electronic parts.
Do not operate the air conditioner when using a room fumigation - type insecticide.
Failure to observe could cause the chemicals to become deposited in the unit, which could endanger the health of those who are hypersensitive to chemicals.
Packing materials, such as nails and other metal or wooden parts, may cause stabs or other injuries.
Tear apart and throw away plastic packaging bags so that children will not play with them. If children play with a plastic bag which was not torn apart, they face the risk of suffocation.
The appliance is not intended for use by young children or infirm persons without supervision.
The remote controller should be installed in such away that children cannot play with it.
NOTE
Never press the button of the remote controller with a hard, pointed object.
Never pull or twist the electric wire of the remote controller.
Do not place the controller exposed to direct sunlight.
The LCD display may get discolored, failing to display the data.
Do not wipe the controller operation panel with benzine, thinner, chemical dustcloth, etc.
The panel may get discolored or the coating peeled off. If it is heavily dirty, soak a cloth in water-diluted neutral detergent, squeeze it well and wipe the panel clean. And wipe it with another dry
cloth.
Dismantling of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and eventual other parts, should be done in accordance with the relevant local and national regulations.
Options
393
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
1 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

<< NOTE >>
When using unified ON/OFF controller with other optional controllers for
centralized control, OPERATION LAMP of the equipment which is not
operated may turn on or off after several minutes.
This state occurs due to signal communications and is not a failure.
Do not open the upper part of remote controller except when rewriting
the indication sticker or selecting control modes.
UNIFIED OPERATION/STOP
BUTTON
UNDER HOST COMPUTER
INTEGRATED CONTROL LAMP
Starts/stops all indoor units.
When this lamp turns on, no other

operations are possible.
HOST
ALL
ALL
UNIFIED
ON/OFF CONTR
CONTROLLER
OLLER
GROUP NO.
OPERATION LAMP
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
ROOM NAME INDICATION

PLATE
08
09
10
11
Refer to the 2. PUTTING

ROOM NAME INDICATION
STICKER
12
13
14
15
Turns on during operation of

each group and flashes
during malfunction stop.
INDIVIDUAL OPERATION/
STOP BUTTON
Starts/stops each indoor
unit group individually.
2 PUTTING ROOM NAME INDICATION STICKER

Open the upper part of remote controller.
Insert a () screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote
controller (at 2 locations) and twist the screwdriver lightly.
Put the attached indication sticker on the room name indication plate.
In case of serial type
Indication plate
Indication sticker
PC board is attached both the upper and lower part of remote controller.
Do not damage the board with the screwdriver.
Put the sticker aligning the lines of the sticker with those of the plate.
() screwdriver
In case of individual type
Indication plate
Indication sticker
(2 locations)
Pull out the room name indication plate.

Insert the point of a mechanical pencil etc, into the hole of the indication sticker to
pull it out.
Put the sticker on the center of the frame.

Write the room name in the frame of the sticker with a ball point pen or a felt-tip
pen (oil-base).
Reinstall the plate as it were, with checking the correct direction.
Close the upper part of remote controller.
Indication plate
Control mode selector

(DS2)
3 SELECTING CONTROL MODES

The following four patterns of control mode can be set.
1 2
CONTROL MODE
Operation/stop is controlled by
unified ON/OFF controller only.
Indoor units can not be operated/
stopped by remote controller.
ON
When used in conjunction with schedule

timer, operation/stop is controlled freely
by remote controller during the set time
but operation is not available when
schedule timer is ON.
ON/OFF control impossible by

remote controller
1 2
CONTROL MODE
1 2
CONTROL MODE
(Factory set)
ON
DS2 setting
After operated by unified ON/OFF

controller, operation/stop is freely
controlled by remote controller until
stopped by unified ON/OFF
controller.
Timer operation possible by

remote controller
ON
Centralized
Operation/stop is controlled by both

unified ON/OFF controller and
remote controller.
1 2
CONTROL MODE
Content
Individual
ON
Control mode
NOTE :
indicates the position of switches.
Set control modes before turning power supply on.
When used in conjunction with central remote controller, the control modes of the central remote controller has the priority.
4 DISPLAY OF MALFUNCTION
Flashing of lamps indicates malfunctions. Contact your Daikin dealer.
When turning power supply on, all lamps may light and UNDER HOST COMPUTER INTEGRATED CONTROL lamp may flash and not accept the operation for about one minute.
These conditions are not malfunctions.
States of lamps
Contents of malfunctions
Flashing of operation lamp
Indicates malfunctions in the indoor unit in the group where the operation lamp is flashing.
Flashing of UNDER HOST COMPUTER INTEGRATED CONTROL lamp
Indicates malfunctions in optional controllers for centralized control.
2P167410-1
394
Options
EDSG18-936
4.3
Control Devices
<DST301BA61> Schedule Timer

Enables you to connect and control weekly schedule for up to 128 indoor units all together.
Simultaneous control of up to 128 indoor units is managed by a
week schedule.
The start and stop time for twice a day can be set for the week
in increments of 1 minute.
By combining with a central remote controller and schedule
timer, you can construct a system that matches the size and use
of the building.
If used together with a central remote controller, you can set up
to 8 schedule patterns which can be distributed among zones as
desired using the central remote controller.
Is equipped with a compensation function for power failure up to
48 hours.
Features thin design of a mere 16 mm in thickness. (Uses JIS
recessed box for 2.)
Wiring can be up to 1 km in length. Applicable wiring methods
include bus and star in addition to crossover type.
Can be used in combination with other D-BACS equipment.
4.3.1
Specifications / Dimensions
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Display of time
12-hour digital display
Clock cycle type
Quartz clock type
Clock accuracy
Within 30 sec./month (environmental temperature from

15C to 35C)
Timer programming
Two pairs of programmed time for both system start and

system off can be set in units of minute for each day of
the week
Power failure compensation time
Approximately 48 hours for a single occurrence of power

failure (clock with No. of programmed time)
Size
120 (W) 120 (H) 53 (D) mm

(Width/Height/Depth)
Weight
Approximately 210g
Outline drawings
37
71
16
120
120
Specifications and appearance subject to change without notice.
Options
395
Control Devices
4.3.2
EDSG18-936
Installation Manual
Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be sure to
install it correctly. After completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during the star t-up operation.
CAUTION ....... Indication a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may
also be used to aler t against unsafe pracW
ticA
esR. NING
NOTE ............. Indication situation that may result in equipment or proper ty-damage-only accidents.
WARNING
Failure to use the specified par ts may result in water leakage, electric shocks, fire or the unit falling.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this unit and that all electrical work is carried out by
qualified personnel according to local laws and regulations and this installation manual.
When wiring the power supply and connecting the remote controller wiring and transmission wiring, position the wires
so that the electric parts box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the electric par ts box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or the terminals overheating.
When installing or relocating the system, be sure to keep the refrigerant circuit free from substances other than the
specified refrigerant (R410A), such as air.
If the pressure switch, thermal switch, or other protection device is shor ted and operated forcibly, or par ts other than those
specified by Daikin are used, fire or explosion may result.
Install an leak circuit breaker, as required.
If an leak circuit breaker is not installed, electric shock may result.
Plastic par ts may deteriorate and fall off or result in water leakage.
Corroding copper pipes or soldered par ts may result in refrigerant leakage.
(d) where flammable gases may leak, where there are carbon fiber or ignitable dust suspensions in the air, or where volatile
flammables such as thinner or gasoline are handled.
CISPR 22 Class A Warning.
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
396
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
CAUTION
Packing materials, such as nails and other metal or wooden par ts, may cause stabs or other injuries.
Tear apar t and throw away plastic packaging bags so that children will not play with them. If children play with a plastic bag
which was not torn apar t, they face the risk of suffocation.
NOTE
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wires at least 3.5ft. away from televisions or
radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can result shorter than expected in rooms with electronic
fluorescent lamps. (inverter or rapid start types)
This unit is a class A product.
In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Dismantling of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and eventual other parts, should be done in accordance with
the relevant local and national regulations.
Options
397
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
ACCESSORIES
Check the following accessories are included in the kit before installation.
Body
Installation screws (M4 16)
Operation manual
Attached electric wire (for individual use)
Crimp style terminal (for individual use)
For lnstallation, a electrical box to be embedded is necessary (part to be procured in the field/with covers).
* DST301BA61 includes only one installation manual.
INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SETTING

1. Remove the upper part of the remote controller.
() screwdriver
Insert a () screwdriver (2 locations) into the recess
between the upper part and the lower part of the remote
controller and twist the screwdriver lightly.
The PC board is attached with the upper part of the remote
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
.
D
o
n
o
t
d
a
m
a
g
e
e
l
e
c
t
r
i
c
p
a
r
t
s
w
i
t
h
a
s
c
r
e
w
d
r
i
v
e
r
,
e
t
c
.
(2 locations)
Attach the lower part to the electrical box (part to

be procured in the field) with the provided
installation screws.
Select a flat face as a installation place. Do
not tighten the installation screws excessively
not to damage the lower part of the remote

controller.
Lower part of the

remote controller
Installation screw
(2 screws)
Electrical box
(part to be procured in the freld.)
For part to be procured in the field electrical

box, use KJB212AA (optional accessory).
2. Initial setting
Setting connector for individual use (X1A) (Factory set : OFF) (Set for individual use only)
For individual use of schedule timer
Insert the connector attached with the body case on the PC board.
For combined use with other optional controllers for centralized control
Do not change the factory setting.
Control mode selector (SS2) (Set for individual use only)

By changing the switch, setting mode of individual and
centralized operation is available.
CENT. INDIV.
Note) When used with other optional controllers,
CONTROL MODE
control mode of central remote controller and
Individual
(Factory set)
unified ON/OFF controller have the priority.
CENT. INDIV.
CONTROL MODE
Centralized
Setting of the sequential operation function

The schedule timer is equipped with a sequential operation function that sequentially turns
indoor units on in 2-second intervals during unified operation.
(Sequential operation is factory set to ON.)
To switch sequential operation ON or OFF, set as follows.
While holding down the unified stop button, perform forced reset.
OFF
ON
(Factory set)
While holding down the unified operation button, perform forced reset.
Note) The sequential operation function is designed to reduce the load on the power supply
equipment, but does not quarantee that compressors will not be started simultaneously. You cannot therefore count on a capacity reduction effect by power supply
equipment breaker selection.
398
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
Forced reset switch (SS1)

When changing the setting of the connector for individual use, etc., the switch can be reset
simply by setting it to the reset side once and returning to the normal side. This procedure
enables to reset without turning off the power. (Set the normal side at normal operation.)
Normal side
(Factory set)
Reset side
OFF
ON
RESET
OFF
ON
RESET
Individual use setting connector
Control mode selector.

X1A
X1A
In case of combined use with

other optional controllers for
centralized control
(Factory set)
In case of individual use of

schedule timer
Forced reset switch
Setting for special function

When you want to have a programmed
operation of a part of indoor units by
using only schedule timer, cut off JP1
and supply the power again.
You can have a programmed operation
of the indoor units set the address for
central control by local remote controller.
J1
J1
3. Transmission wiring
In case of individual use of schedule timer
Connect terminals of the schedule timer (F1.
F2) with terminals of the indoor unit (F1. F2).
Connect terminals of the schedule timer (D1.
D2) and the connector on the indoor unit PC
board, using the attached electric wire and
crimp style terminals.
Prevent the connection part of crimp style
terminal from getting out of the electric parts
box of indoor unit.
In case of combined use with other optional
controllers for centralized control
Connect terminals of the schedule timer (F1,
F2, D1, D2) and the terminals of the central
remote controller (or unified ON/OFF
controller).
To schedule timer
D1 and D2
Field wiring
To the connector on
indoor unit PC board
Attacehd
electric wire
Cr i m p st yl e t er m i nal
Cr i m p st yl e t er m i nal
Use a proper tool to securely clamp
crimp style terminals.
Attached wire
To other
indoor unit
F1 F2
D1 D2 F1 F2
CN
Indoor unit
Schedule timer
The connection adapter may

be separately necessary for
the connection with Sky Air.
VRV : To X18A
To X35A
(Only For FXF-L type)
SKY : To X35A
Wi r i n g s p e c i f i c a t i o n s
To other
outdoor unit
D1, D2
F1, F2
Wiring
Sheathed wire (2-wire) Sheathed wire (2-wire)
Gauge
0.75 ~ 1.25mm
Length
Max. 1000m
0.75 ~ 1.25mm
D1 D2 F1 F2
F1 F2 T1 T2 D1 D2
Schedule timer
Central remote
controller(unified
ON/OFFcontroller)
Max. 150m
NOTES:
1. Electrical box and transmission wiring are not attached.
2. Do not touch the PC board with your hand.
3. Keep transmission wiring at least 50 mm away from power
supply wiring to avoid malfunctions.
4. Install the upper part of the remote controller
as before.
Fit the lower claw first.
Options
399
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
SETTING GROUP NO. FOR CENTRALIZED CONTROL

Set the group number of each group of the indoor unit from the remote controller. (In case of no remote
controller, also connect the remote controller and set the group No. Then, remove the remote controller.)
(1) Turn ON the power of the indoor unit and SCHEDULE TIMER.
(When the power supply is turned ON, all LCD appear once and the unit may not accept the operation
for about one minute with the display of .)
button for a minimum of 4 seconds.
TEST
with the
button.
MODE NO.
(4) Use the
button to select the group No. for
each group.
FIELD SET
MODE
S E TT I N G
(Group numbers increase in the order of
GROUP NO.
1-00,1-01,...1-15, 2-00,...8-15.)
(5) Press
(6) Press
NOTES)
NOTICE

T ES T
T E ST
2.6
In case of individual use of schedule timer

Group number setting is not necessary. It is automatically set when turning power supply ON.
See the instruction manuals which came with the Ventiair and adapters (i.e., multi-purpose
adapters) for details on their Group No. settings.
TEST OPERATION
Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
In case the schedule timer is used individually and the wiring is changed after the system has
been operated, reset the power after energizing for more than five minutes.
It may not be possible to control the unit from the schedule timer.
3P162015-1A
400
Options
EDSG18-936
4.3.3
Control Devices
Operation Manual
4 6
7
8
5
DST301BA61
10
11
12
15
14
16
17
DST301BA61
13
18
19
20
[1]
Options
401
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
18
2
2
DST301BA61
3
6
5
DST301BA61
18
5
37
4
56
DST301BA61
DST301BA61
[2]
402
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be sure to install it correctly.
After completing the installation, make sure that
the unit operates properly during the start-up
operation.
Please instruct the customer on how to operate
the unit and keep it maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store
this installation manual along with the operation
manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances not accessible to the general public .
WARNING............. Indicates a potentially
hazardous situation
which, if not avoided,
could result in death or
serious injury.
CAUTION ............. Indicates a potentially
hazardous situation
which, if not avoided,
may result in minor or
moderate injury. It
may also be used to
alert against unsafe
practices.
NOTE ................... Indicates situation
that may result in
equipment or property-damage-only
accidents.
Keep these warning sheets handy so that
you can refer to them if needed.
Also, if this equipment is transferred to a new
user, make sure to hand over this operation
manual to the new user.
WARNING
In order to avoid electric shock, fire or injury,
or if you detect any abnormality such as
smell of fire, turn off power and call your
dealer for instructions.
Ask your dealer for installation of the air
conditioner.
Incomplete installation performed by yourself may result in a water leakage, electric
shock, and fire.
Ask your dealer for improvement, repair,

and maintenance.
Incomplete improvement, repair, and maintenance may result in a water leakage, electric shock, and fire.
Improper installation or attachment of
equipment or accessories could result in
electric shock, short-circuit, leaks, fire or
other damage to the equipment. Be sure
only to use accessories made by Daikin
which are specifically designed for use
with the equipment and have them
installed by a professional.
Ask your dealer to move and reinstall the
air conditioner or the remote controller.
Never let the indoor unit or the remote
controller get wet.
Never use flammable spray such as hair
spray, lacquer or paint near the unit.
Never replace a fuse with that of wrong
ampere ratings or other wires when a
fuse blows out.
Use of wire or copper wire may cause the
unit to break down or cause a fire.
Ask a qualified service person to perform this
work.
Do not wash the air conditioner or the
remote controller with excessive water.
Do not install the air conditioner or the
remote controller at any place where
flammable gas may leak out.
If the gas leaks out and stays around the air
conditioner, a fire may break out.
Touching a switch with wet fingers can cause
electric shock.
CISPR 22 Class A Warning:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
Options
403
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
CAUTION
After a long use, check the unit stand and
fitting for damage.
If they are left in a damaged condition, the
unit may fall and result in injury.
Do not allow a child to mount on the unit
or avoid placing any object on it.
Do not let children play on and around
the unit.
If they touch the unit carelessly, it may result
in injury.
Do not place a flower vase and anything
containing water.
Water may enter the unit, causing an electric
shock or fire.
Do not remove the front panel. Some parts
inside are dangerous to touch, and a
machine trouble may happen.
For checking and adjusting the internal
parts, contact your dealer.
Avoid placing the controller in a spot
splashed with water.
Water coming inside the machine may cause
an electric leak or may damage the internal
electronic parts.
Do not operate the air conditioner when
using a room fumigation - type insecticide.
Failure to observe could cause the chemicals to become deposited in the unit, which
could endanger the health of those who are
hypersensitive to chemicals.
Packing materials, such as nails and other
metal or wooden parts, may cause stabs or
other injuries.
Tear apart and throw away plastic packaging
bags so that children will not play with them. If
children play with a plastic bag which was not
torn apart, they face the risk of suffocation.
Do not turn off the power immediately
after stopping operation.
Always wait at least five minutes before turning off the power. Otherwise, water leakage
and trouble may occur.
supervision.
The remote controller should be installed
in such away that children cannot play
with it.
NOTE
Never press the button of the remote controller with a hard, pointed object.
Never pull or twist the electric wire of the
remote controller.
Do not place the controller exposed to
direct sunlight.
The LCD display may get discolored, failing
to display the data.
Do not wipe the controller operation
panel with benzine, thinner, chemical
dustcloth, etc.
The panel may get discolored or the coating
peeled off. If it is heavily dirty, soak a cloth in
water-diluted neutral detergent, squeeze it
well and wipe the panel clean. And wipe it
with another dry cloth.
Dismantling of the unit, treatment of the
refrigerant, oil and eventual other parts,
should be done in accordance with the
relevant local and national regulations.
404
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
CONTENTS
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS ...........1
FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS ........3
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
OPERATING SECTION .......................4
OPERATION .............................................5
Setting present time ........................................5
Setting no. of programmed time......................6
Change and cancellation of no. of

programmed time............................................7
Manual operation ............................................9
Operation control code ...................................9
Error diagnosing function................................9
QUESTION AND ANSWER .............10
SPECIFICATIONS ...............................12
Specifications................................................12
Outline drawings ...........................................12
FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS

n Operation controlled by programmed time
Operating time and stopping time can be set to the

minute by each day of the week. The operating and
stopping patterns can also be set in schedule
according to the time slot given twice a day in tune
with the uses.
5
See page
59.
n Unified Operation/Stop
By using this schedule timer, the unified

operation/stop of the indoor unit can be executed
manually regardless of the No. of programmed time in
operation.
See page
9.
When used in conjunction with central remote controller (Optional Accessory)

The operation controlled by programmed time can be set for up to eight different patterns (timer
No. 1 8). Each schedule pattern can be also selected.
Options
405
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF OPERATING SECTION

(Fig. 1, 2)
UNIFIED OPERATION BUT-
TON
(TIME NO.)
Displays the time No. only when used

in conjunction with the central remote
controller.
DISPLAY
PROGRAM
START.
(PROGRAMMING START)
11
Lights above the day of the week set

as holiday. The operation controlled by
timer is not available on that day.
DISPLAY (SETTING
OF DAYS OF A WEEK)
Flashes below the day of the week programmed.
DISPLAY
(MALFUNCTION CODE)
Displays the contents of malfunction
during the stop due to malfunction.
DISPLAY
(PROGRAMMED TIME OF SYSTEM
OFF)
Displays the time programmed to stop.
12 TIME NO. BUTTON
See page 59.
CLOCK ADJUSTING
13 BUTTON
Press this button to set the present

time.
The light turns on when the timer is

programmed.
DISPLAY OFF (HOLIDAY

SETTING)
DISPLAY
(PROGRAMMED TIME OF SYSTEM
START)
Displays the time programmed to start.
The light turns on during the operation

of the indoor unit.
DISPLAY
10
Press this button to perform the unified

stop regardless of the No. of programmed time.
Displays the present day of the week

and time.
Press this button to perform the unified

operation regardless of the No. of programmed time.
UNIFIED STOP BUTTON
DISPLAY
(PRESENT TIME)
PROGRAMMING START
BUTTON
14
Press this button to set or check the

No. of programmed time. Press it
again after you are through with the
program.
BUTTON FOR SELECTING
15 DAYS OF A WEEK
Press this button to select the day of

the week.
HOUR/MINUTE BUTTON
16
Press this button to adjust the present

time and the programmed time.
406
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
2.
TIMER ON BUTTON
17
Press this button to set the present

time and the programmed time.
(NOTE)
The display MON follows the display
SUN.
HOLIDAY SETTING
18 BUTTON
Press the BUTTON FOR

SELECTING DAYS OF A WEEK.
Each time the button is pressed,
the day display shifts to the right.
2
Press this button to set holidays.
BUTTON FOR COPYING

PROGRAM OF PREVIOUS
19 DAY
Set the day to Friday.
3.
Use this button to set the No. of programmed time same as that of the previous day.
PROGRAM CANCELING
BUTTON
20
Set the time with the HOUR/

MINUTE BUTTON. Each time the
HOUR/MINUTE BUTTON is
pressed, the display is put forward
minute by minute and hour by
hour. When the button is kept
continuously.
(NOTES)
After becoming AM 11:00 , when the
button is pressed, the display becomes
PM 0:00 .
After becoming 59 (minute), when the
button is pressed, the display becomes
00 (minute).
Use this button to set the programmed

time to cancel. The display shows
; .
(Note)
1. Please note that all the displays in the figure appear for explanation purpose or
when the cover is open.
Set the time to 5:30 p.m.
OPERATION
Setting present time (Fig. 3)
(Example)
1.
In case of setting Friday, 5:30

p.m.
Press the CLOCK ADJUSTING

BUTTON. The present time display flashes.
4.
Press the TIMER ON BUTTON

the moment the time signal of TV,
radio, telephone, etc. is heard.
The mark : flashes, and the
clock starts.
(NOTE)
The present time needs adjusting in case
of turning power supply on for the first
time or the occurrence of power failure
over the period of 48 hours or more.

in tune with the time signal at 5:30 p.m.
(NOTES)
The clock used is of 12-hour type.
When you turn power supply on, the system may display
for about one
minute and not start to operate after all the
liquid crystal displays appear at a time.
If the CLOCK ADJUSTING BUTTON is
pressed by mistake, press it again to
return to the original state. As the clock
does not stop, the time indicated by the
clock is kept correct. In case of power
failure within 48 hours, the clock keeps
operating by utilizing the built-in battery.
Options
407
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
Setting no. of programmed time

(Fig. 4)
(Example)
(1) Setting programmed time

4.
Time No. 5 (to be programmed

only when used in conjunction
with the central remote controller)
Monday to Friday:
Operating from 8:45 a.m. till
5:00 p.m.
Operating from 5:15 p.m. till
11:00 p.m.
Saturday and Sunday:
Setting the whole day stop operation (application for holidays)
controlled by programmed time.
1.
1
Press the PROGRAMMING
START BUTTON. Programming is
available.
The display PROGRAM
START
appears, and the display of days of a
week flashes.
4
Set the programmed time of
system start 1 by using the HOUR/
MINUTE BUTTON. Each time the
HOUR/MINUTE BUTTON is
minute by minute and hour by
hour. When the button is kept
continuously.
Set the PROGRAMMED TIME OF

SYSTEM START 1 at 8:45 a.m.
5.
Press the TIMER ON BUTTON,

and set the programmed time of
system start 1. Each time you
press it, the next area to be set
flashes.
(NOTE)
Set the other programmed time in the
same procedure.
2.
2
Press the TIME No. BUTTON,
and select the desired number.
(NOTE)
Unless used in conjunction with the central remote controller, The TIME No. is
not displayed and can not be selected.
Select the TIME No. 5.
3.

SELECTING DAYS OF A WEEK,
and set the proper day of the week.
Each time you press it, the flashing display of days of a week shifts
to the right.
Set to Monday.
408
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
(2) Set the next day of the week.
The flashing display goes off, and the

No. of programmed time of the present
day is displayed. Then the operation
controlled by timer starts.
The operation controlled by timer is executed even while the program is being
set.
Set the day of the week to Tuesday, and

copy the program of the previous day
(Monday). In the same procedure, set the
day of the week to Wednesday through Friday in sequence.
6.

SELECTING DAYS OF A WEEK
and set the following day. Press
the BUTTON FOR COPYING PROGRAM OF PREVIOUS DAY. The
same program as that of the immediately preceding day of the week
is set.
(NOTE)
Repeat each procedure 3 5 in the
above when not copying the contents of
the previous day.
This is the end of the setting example.
Change and cancellation of no.

of programmed time (Fig. 5)
(Example)
(3) Holiday setting

7.
7
SELECTING DAYS OF A WEEK
and set one or more days of the
week as holiday. Press the HOLIDAY SETTING BUTTON, and the
display OFF is displayed at the
top of the day of the week. If you
press it again, the display returns
to the original state.
Set Saturday and Sunday as holidays.
8.
Operating from
8:45 a.m. till
5:00 p.m.
Operating from
5:15 p.m. till
11:00 p.m.
A: Change/
cancel partially
B: Cancel the
whole
(Wednesday)
After operating
from 8:45 a.m.
till 7:00 p.m.,
the operation
stops.
(Thursday)
Whole day
stop.
1.
1
START BUTTON. The program
setting is ready. The display
PROGRAM
START appears,
and the display of days of a week
flashes.
2.
2
Press the TIME No. BUTTON,
and select the desired No.
8
START BUTTON, and finish the
program setting.
(NOTES)
Unless the button is pressed within 20
minutes, the display will automatically
revert back to the original state. In this
case, setting contents up to the point
where the TIMER ON BUTTON (or HOLIDAY SETTING BUTTON or BUTTON
FOR COPYING PROGRAM OF PREVIOUS DAY) is pressed will only take
effect.
The display PROGRAM
START
and the display of days of a week
disappears.
Time No. 3 (to be set only when

used in conjunction with the
central remote controller)
Select the time No. 3.
Options
409
Control Devices
3.
EDSG18-936

and set the day of the week to be
changed. The set No. of programmed time of the day of the
week is displayed.
6.
Press the PROGRAM CANCELING BUTTON, and cancel the

programmed time. If you press it
again, display returns to the original state. Press the TIMER ON
BUTTON to finalize the cancellation.
Set the day to Wednesday.

Shift to the PROGRAMMED TIME OF
SYSTEM START 2.
A. Change/cancel partially
4.
4
and change, and the display of
programmed time flashes. Each
time you press it, the next area to
be set flashes.
Set the PROGRAMMED TIME OF

SYSTEM START 2 to program
cancellation.
In the same procedure, cancel the programmed
time of system off 2.
Shift to the display PROGRAMMED

TIME OF SYSTEM OFF 1.
5.
Press the HOUR/MINUTE

BUTTON and change the programmed time. Press the TIMER
ON BUTTON, and finalize the setting of change.
B. Cancel the whole

7.

and shift to the day of the week to
be canceled. Then, press the HOLIDAY SETTING BUTTON, the display OFF appears at the top of
the particular day of the week. The
programmed time is canceled. If
you press the button again, the
display returns to the original
state.
Change the PROGRAMMED TIME OF

SYSTEM OFF 1 to 7:00 p.m.
Shift the day of the week to Thursday
to set as a holiday.
410
Options
EDSG18-936
8.
Control Devices

START BUTTON. The program
setting is now finished.
(NOTES)
Unless the button is pressed within 20
minutes, the display will automatically
revert back to the original state. In this
case, setting contents to the point where
the TIMER ON BUTTON (or HOLIDAY
SETTING BUTTON or BUTTON FOR
COPYING PROGRAM OF PREVIOUS
DAY) is pressed will only take effect.
To continue the change/cancellation, do
not press the PROGRAMMING START
BUTTON until all change/cancellation
are completed.
The operation controlled by timer is executed even while the program is being
set.
Manual operation (Fig. 6)

This schedule timer enables the operation/stop
by pressing the UNIFIED OPERATION/STOP
BUTTON in addition to the operation controlled
by timer (operation/stop according to the programmed time) at any time.
1.
Press the UNIFIED OPERATION BUTTON, and the OPERATION LAMP turns on.
2.
Press the UNIFIED STOP BUTTON, and the OPERATION LAMP is

turned off.
(NOTES)
The operation automatically stops
according to the programmed time of
system off even during the manual operation. In the meantime, the operation
starts automatically according to the programmed time of system start even during the stop of operation.
If the unit is used in conjunction with
other optional controllers for centralized
control, the OPERATION LAMP of the
unit that is not under operation control
may be turned on or off a few minutes
behind schedule. This shows that the
signal is being exchanged, and does not
indicate any failure.
Operation lamp
Turn on: The light turns on when any of
the indoor units is in operation
whether the operation is
controlled by timer or by hand.
Turn off: The light turns off when all the
indoor units stop.
Operation control code

Two different types of operation control codes
can be selected when this kit is used independently (when not used in conjunction with the
central remote controller, unified ON/OFF controller, etc.).
Individual
In case where the operation/stop is controlled
by both schedule timer and remote controller.
Centralized
The operation is controlled by the schedule
timer alone, and the operation/stop is controlled
freely with the remote controller during the programmed time.
(NOTES)
For current settings, contact your DAIKIN
dealer.
To change settings, contact your DAIKIN
dealer.
Do not change settings yourself.
Error diagnosing function

(Fig. 7)
This schedule timer is provided with the malfunction diagnosing function. The malfunction
code flashes if there occurs any malfunction in
communication, etc. between and among the
optional controllers for centralized control. In
addition, the operation lamp also flashes if
there occurs any malfunction in communication
with the indoor unit. Check the contents of the
display and contact your DAIKIN dealer
because the signals give you the idea of the
trouble area.
Options
411
Control Devices
Operation lamp
EDSG18-936
Malfunction code
Contents of malfunction
Address failure of
schedule timer.
Failure of PC board
of schedule timer.
Turn off
Turn on
or off
M1
Fixes
The following
causes are possible. Check each
one.
1. PC board problems
Turn on
or off
MC
Malfunction of
transmission
between each
optional controllers
for centralized control.
M8
Fixes
Check all central
devices which are
connected (e.g.,
power supply,
transmission
wiring, etc.).
Malfunction of
transmission
between indoor
unit and optional
controllers for centralized control.
Flash
UE
Improper combination of optional

controllers for centralized control.
Turn on
or off
MA
Fixes
The following
causes are possible. Check each
one.
1. Are all central
devices combined correctly?
2. Is the master
central connector attached to
two or more central devices?
3. Are there 128 or
more indoor
units connected?
Fixes
The following
causes are possible.
Check each one.
1. Do the control
range addresses
in the central
remote controller overlap?
2. Do the control
range addresses
in the on/off controller overlap?
3. Are there 2 or
more schedule
timers connected?
Flash
Fixes
Inspect all indoor
units which are displaying an error
(e.g., power supply,
transmission
wiring, etc.).
Malfunction in
indoor unit (Refer
to the malfunction
codes of the indoor
remote controller,
while also read the
CAUTION FOR
SERVICING
attached to the
indoor unit.)
QUESTION AND ANSWER

Question
It is possible to
make settings
twice a day, but is
it possible to
make only the
off setting?
(To avoid forgetting to turn the
unit off.)
Answer
Yes. Press the PROGRAM CANCELING

BUTTON in the
section in order to set it

to OFF .
10
412
Options
EDSG18-936
Is it possible to
set times which
straddle days?
Control Devices
Yes, it is possible.
Example:
Start operation at
5:00 a.m. on Sunday
Stop operation at
6:00 p.m. on Monday
The TIME NO. is

not displayed.
The following causes

are possible.
1. The TIME NO. is not
displayed when
using the schedule
timer alone.
(It can be set if using
the central remote
controller at the
same time.)
The display
remains
The unit does not
turn on even
though the set
on time has
come.
(When using the
schedule timer
alone)

are possible.
1. Are the on time
and the off time set
to the same time?
The unit does not

turn on even
though the set
on time has
come.
(When using the
unit with a central
remote controller)

are possible. Check
each one.
1. Was the timer number set with the central remote
controller?
Was an incorrect
timer number set?
2. Is another timer no.
set with the central
remote controller set
for off at the same
time?
3. Is the operation code
set to remote control
permission timer
using the central
remote controller or
the on/off controller?
The unit operates even though

that day is set as
a holiday.
(When using the
unit with a central
remote controller)

are possible.
1. Is another timer number set with the central remote controller
set for on at the
same time?
(If two timer numbers
are set, make sure
that the settings for
holidays and working
days do not overlap
between the different
timer numbers.)
even though I
push the
HOUR/MINUTE
BUTTON in the
timer program
settings.
I cannot set
central management priority or
after-push priority with the
schedule timer.

are possible.
1. Is the day set to a
holiday?
5
are possible.
1. Is a central remote
controller or on/off
controller also
installed?
The priority order of
the operation codes
depends on the
central devices
which are installed.
The below operation
codes are set.
Schedule timer
Central remote
controller is used
as well
Operation code of
the central remote
controller
Schedule timer
On/off controller is
used as well
Operation code of
the on/off controller
Schedule timer
Central remote
controller
On/off controller is
used as well
Operation code of
the central remote
controller
11
3P124623-5C
Options
413
Control Devices
4.4
EDSG18-936

Combinations of Optional Controllers for Centralized Control
Besides using the various optional controllers for centralized control by themselves, a schedule timer or
unified ON/OFF controller can be combined with and connected to the central remote controller. By
devising a component system such as this, you can freely construct the ideal central control system
according to use and scale.
4.4.1
System Example
Schedule timer + central remote controller
Connect a unified ON/OFF controller according to the number Lets you set up to 8 patterns of weekly schedule for turning
of indoor units. A network consisting of up to 16 groups8
air-conditioning equipment ON/OFF twice a day. Operates up
units=128 groups can be constructed using a single line.
to 128 groups of indoor units individually or by zone
according to a programmed schedule.
Schedule timer + unified ON/OFF controller
Central remote controller + unified ON/OFF controller
Combines the high functionality of a central remote controller Lets you set ON/OFF for twice a day.
and the easy operation of a unified ON/OFF controller.
Operates up to 128 groups of indoor units all together according
Centrally controls up to 128 groups of indoor units.
to a programmed schedule.
Unified ON/OFF
controller
(DCS301BA61)
Connection of
up to 8 units
possible
Independent
and centralized
control of HRV
is possible.
Address setting of central control can be

performed from the remote controller.
Connectable number of
centralized control
equipment
Central remote
contoroller
2 units
Unified on / off
contoroller
8 units
Schedule timer
1 unit
Group control of up to 16 units is possible

(group control via automatic address setting)
System without remote control is also available.
Forced
shut-down
input
Central remote
controller
(DCS302CA61)
Central control
adaptor kit
(DTA107A55).
Wiring adaptor
for other airconditioners
(DTA103A51)
Outdoor-air
processing
unit can be
connected.
Interface adaptor for SkyAir

series (built-in indoor unit)
(DTA102A52)
Up to 2 units
connectable
6 cores
Schedule timer (DST301BA61)
1 unit connection possible ;
8 weekly schedule control patterns possible
414
7 cores max.
Unification adaptor for computerized

control * (DCS302A52)
Interlink Building Management System

(host computer monitor panel) also possible
Note: Certain units limit the functions of
some control systems.
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
You can freely combine the central controllers within the limitation of the following number of each
controller; 1~4 units of central remote controllers, one unit of schedule timer and 1~16 units of unified ON/
OFF controllers.
However, the maximum number of the indoor units to be controlled is 128 units for one system in any
combination of the central controllers.
Connection Pattern for Optional Controller for Centralized Control
Central Remote Controller
DCS302CA61
1~4
Unified ON/OFF Controllers DCS301BA61
Schedule Timer DST301BA61
1~16
1
1
The maximum number of indoor units is based on one unit in each zone and is also under the double
central control system.
4.4.2
Electric Wiring
Combination of 1 Central Remote Controller, 1 Schedule Timer, 3 Unified ON/OFF Controllers
Options
415
Control Devices
4.4.3
EDSG18-936
Initial Settings for Central Control Equipment

1. Central Remote Controller
Leave the master control connector (X1A) connected.
(Connected when shipped from the factory)
The connector is to be connected to only 1 central line.
Operation control setting
Sets the priority ranking of control for the central remote controller and remote controller for indoor units.
Zone setting
Sets the zones when several groups are controlled as one group.
2. Unified On/Off Controller (No.s 1, 2, and 3 in the figure above)
Remove the master control connector (X1A).
Control range setting switch (DS1)
Sets the range of group No.s for each group of indoor units to be controlled by unified ON/OFF
controllers no.1,2 and 3 in the figure above. 16 units (16 groups) can be set by 1 unified ON/OFF
controller.
Control mode switch (DS2)
Sets priority ranking of control for unified ON/OFF controllers and remote controllers for indoor units. If
using in combination with a central remote controller, the central remote controllers control mode is
given priority.
3. Schedule Timer
Leave the setting connector for individual use (X1A) disconnected. (Disconnected when shipped from
the factory)
Control mode switch (SS2)
Sets the priority ranking of control for the schedule timer and remote controllers for indoor units. If using
in combination with a central remote controller, the central remote controllers control mode is given
priority.
4.4.4
Group No. Setting for Central Control

1. Setting by Remote Controller for Indoor Units
Sets group No.s in local setting mode by remote controller. (Group No.s are 1-00~1-15, 2-00~2-15 up to
8-00~8-15)
2. Adaptor PC Board Setting
Sets group No. setting switches RS1 and RS2 for central control on PC board when using an interface
adaptor for SkyAir series, or wiring adaptor for other air-conditioners.
RS1 (Upper): 1~4 (1~8 in case of interface adaptor for SkyAir Series)
RS2 (Lower): 0~F
416
Options
EDSG18-936
4.5
Control Devices
<KRP928B2S> Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (Residential Air Conditioner)

1.Overview, Features and Compatible Models
Safety Precautions
This kit is the interface required when connecting the central controller and a Daikin Room Air
Conditioner. Use of the central controller makes it possible to perform the following monitoring
and operations. It is compatible with room air conditioners which have an HA connector S21.
zRead these Safety Precautions carefully to ensure correct installation.

This manual classifies precautions into WARNING and CAUTION.
1.Run / stop for the central controller and wired remote controller, operating mode
selection, and temperature can be set.
2.The operating status, any errors, and the content of those errors can be monitored
from the central controller and wired remote controller.
3.Run / stop for the central controller and wireless remote controller, operating mode
selection, and the temperature setting can be limited by the central controller.
4.Zone control can be performed from the central controller.
5.The unit can remember the operating status of the air conditioner before a power
outage and then start operating in the same status when the power comes back
on.
6.Card keys, operating control panels, and other constant / instantaneous
connection-compatible equipment can be connected.
7.The Operating / error signals can be read.
8.HA JEM-A-compatible equipment can be connected.
9.The indoor temperature can be monitored from the Ve-up controller.
WARNING : Failure to follow WARNING is very likely to result in such grave

consequences as death or serious injury.
CAUTION : Failure to follow CAUTION may result in serious injury or

property damage, and in certain circumstances, may result in
a grave consequence.
Be sure to follow all the precautions below ; they are all important for
ensuring safety.
WARNING
z Installation should be left to the dealer or another qualified professional.
Improper installation by yourself may cause malfunction, electrical shock, or fire.
z Install the set according to the instructions given in this manual.

Incomplete or improper installation may cause malfunction, electrical shock, or fire.
Precaution
1.When reading the Operating / error signals, a separate external power source
(DC 12V) is needed.
2.A separate timer power source (DC 16V) is needed when using the schedule
timer independently, and not in conjunction with other central controllers.
3.The range of temperatures that can be set from the central controller is 18C to
32C in cooling and 14C to 28C in heating.
4.Fan operation cannot be selected from the central controller or wired remote controller.
5.Group control (i.e., control of multiple indoor units with a single remote controller) is
not available.
6.Monitoring is not available of the thermo status, compressor operating status,
indoor fan operating status, electric heater, or humidifier operating status.
7.Forced thermo off, filter sign display and reset, fan direction and speed settings,
air conditioning fee management, energy savings instructions, low-noise
instructions, and demand instructions cannot be made.
z Be sure to use the standard attachments or the genuine parts.

Use of other parts may cause malfunction, electrical shock, or fire.
z Disconnect power to the connected equipment before starting installation.

Failure to do so may cause malfunction, electrical shock, or fire.
CAUTION
z An earth leakage circuit breaker should be installed.
If the breaker is not installed, electrical shock may occur.
z Do not install the set in a location where there is danger of exposure to

inflammable gas.
Gas accumulated around the unit at the worst may cause fire.
2.Component Parts and Separately-Sold Parts which are Required
z To prevent damage due to electrostatic discharge, touch your hand to a

nearby metal object (doorknob, aluminum sash, etc.) to discharge static
electricity from your body before touching this kit.
This kit includes the following components. Check to ensure that none of
these are missing.
Static electricity can damage this kit.
Qty
Parts
Kit assy
PCB is in the housing.
z Lay this cable separately from other power cables to avoid external
electrical noises.
zAfter installation is complete, test the operation of the PCB set to check
for problems, and explain how to use the set to the end-user.
Screw cover
Parts
Qty
Connection harness (about 1.6m)
1set
Mounting screws
3pcs.
Binding band
1pc.
Installation manual
1set
3.Names of Parts and Electric Wiring

<Wiring procedure>
Lower group number

switch (SW1)
Room air conditioner indoor unit
Service monitor (LED1: green)

When the CPU is working
properly, the LED flashes.
Upper group number

switch (SW2-1to 3)
Operation when recovering
from a power outage mode
switch (SW2-4)
Japanese unit / Overseas unit

Setting switch (SW3-3)
DAIKIN
1234
OFF
SW1
SW2
LED1
Supplied connection harness
SW3
S6
Tes1
S1
S16
Cable available field supply

(See the installation manual of
the central remote controller)
F1
S8
Options
S5
Forced stop
Settings switch (SW3-1)
Power supply terminal (S8)
Connect an external DC 12V power
supply only when reading the
Operating / error display.
S19
F2
A cable field supply
Non polarity
Included in the Drain
Up Kit.
OFF
Once the switches are set and

the wiring complete, secure the
case using the included
screws.
Momentary contact / constant contact

Selection switch (SW3-2)
1 2 3 4 ON
ON
1 1234
To HA connector (S21)
A cable field supply
Separately sold remote control code (quadplex)

KRCW101A Series
Central controller equipment

z DCS302 Series
z DCS301 Series
z DCS601 Series
z DST301 Series
KRC65, KRC72,
KDC100A10, and KDC101B
Series cannot be connected.
z Tele-con (Field supply)
In case that a central remote

controller is connected
In case that the device coping

with HA JEM-A is connected
z Remote controller
BRC944 Series
z Card key
(Field supply)
z Operating control panel
(Field supply)
z Operating monitoring
equipment
(Field supply)
The adapter included with the

remote controller is not used.
Connecting a Wired
Remote Controller
Connecting a Momentary / constant

Contact Input Equipment
Reading the Operating / error Display
417
Control Devices
4.Switch Settings
5.Control Codes
Turn the power on after all the switches have been set.
Settings made while the power is on are invalid.
When using a central remote controller, the operating codes can be used to limit
operation from wireless remote controllers.
{ : permitted; : prohibited
OFF
(Factory setting)
0,1,3
10,11
2
1219
4
5
6,7
8
Overseas
ON
z Automatic
operation is available from the central controller.
(2) Group number settings (SW1 and SW2-1 to SW2-3)

Set these when using the central controller. (Set to the side.) Do not set more
than one unit to the same number.
However, these settings do not need to be made when using the schedule timer
independently.
(The settings are needed when used in conjunction with another DCS Series
central controller.)
In this case, the schedule timer performs an auto address after the power is turned
on, so new group numbers are automatically set. Settings made using the switches
will be overwritten.
SW2 Upper
setting group NO.
1 1 2 3
Lower
SW1
setting group NO.
1 1 2 3 4
1
0
Lower
SW1
setting group NO.
1 2 3 4
0 0
0 8
Constant
contact mode
9
2,10-19
0,1,3,5-7
4
8
9
{
{
{
{*
{*
{
{
{
{*
{*
{
{
{
{
{
{*
{*
{
{
{*
{*
{
{
Forced stop
*Only during timer operation
The remote controller permission / prohibition settings using the Ve-up controller are as
follows.
{ : permitted; : prohibited
0
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
2
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
0 1
1 2 3 4
3
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
0 4
1 2 3 4
6
1 2 3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 3
1 2 3 4
0 6
1 2 3 4
1 2
0 5
7
1 2 3
1 1
1 2 3 4
1 4
1 2 3 4
0 7
1 5
NOTE also that a separate timer power source is needed when using the
schedule timer independently.
Power source specs: DC 16V, +10%, -15%, 200mA.
Recommended power source: Omron S82J-01015A. (Should be used with the
output voltage adjusted to the center, DC 16V.)
(3) Settings when recovering from a power outage (SW2-4)
This selects whether to restart operation when the power comes back on after a
power outage occurred during operation. This setting is given priority in cases
where the indoor unit has an auto start ON / OFF jumper. Note also that
regardless of whether switch SW2-4 is on or off, the operating mode, set
temperature, fan direction and speed settings, and remote control prohibition
status are stored.
SW2-4 setting
OFF
(Factory setting)
Instantaneous
contact mode ON / OFF permitted permitted/prohibited
control is
Constant rejected prohibited permitted/prohibited

contact mode
permitted
Instantaneous
permitted
prohibited
contact mode Only OFF
prohibited permitted/prohibited
control is
permitted
accepted
permitted
Constant
prohibited
contact mode
permitted permitted/prohibited
Instantaneous
contact mode Last command prohibited permitted/prohibited
permitted permitted/prohibited
Constant priority
contact mode
Forced stop
Does not affect settings
{
{
Power supply for relay (DC 12V)

Operating control panel (Field supply)
MC
S5
M1
()
()
MR1
MR1
MR2
Power source
for display
Operating Display
Abnormality display
MR2
Control mode
7.Combining Equipment
Last command priority
Instantaneous contact input
HA JEM-A-compatible equipment
Wired Remote Controller
Wireless Remote Controller
Total wire length max: 100m
Constant contact input
Run / stop Input

Contact specs
No-voltage minute electric current contact
(Minimum applicable load DC 12V, 1mA or lower)
Forced stop contact input
ON / OFF control is rejected

(operate / stop / timer prohibition)
(NOTE 2).
During a forced stop, all
remote controller actions
are prohibited.
The central controller can be combined with the following devices.

D-BIPS
What Happens
The operating status of the air conditioner

OFF is reversed by an instantaneous input of
100 msec or more.
Contact - Open to close: air condition runs.
ON Close to open: air conditioner is stopped
(NOTE 1).
Contact - Open to close: air condition stops
Invalid (forced stop). Close to open: no change in
operating status.
Relay specs (MR1 and MR2)

Coil voltage: DC 12V
Coil resistance: 160 10%
(Matsushita Electric HC
Relay, Omron MY Relay)
Wiring length
Max: 100m
(+)
Schedule timer
CB
KRP928B2S
M2
KRP928B2S
S1
6.Read Operating / Error Display Signal
S8
NOTE1: Since central equipment and HA JEM-A-compatible equipment both use

last command priority, the contact status and operating status of the air
conditioner might not match sometimes.
Example: If the unit is run from the central controller while the air
conditioner is stopped with an open contact, the contact will be
open and the unit will be running.
NOTE2: Operating mode and fan direction and speed settings can be changed.
CA
ON / OFF controller
ON
Stops after recovering from a power outage
SW3-1 SW3-2
S1
operating mode setting setting
OFF
Operating mode Fan direction

temperature and fan speed
What Happens
(4) Contact input function settings (SW3-1 to SW3-2)

When using contact input (S1), choose one of the following functions.
Instantaneous contact
input (factory setting)
Stop
Operations from
central controller,
contact input and
HA JEM-A input
The Operating / error signals can be read from the contact output (S5).
Output specs
M1: Turn MR 1 ON when the air conditioner is running.
M2: Turn MR 2 when a communication error has occurred between the KRP928B2S and
the air conditioner, or MR 1 is ON and the unit has stopped after an error.
MR 2 is not turned ON during a warning.
Stops if the unit was stopped before the power outage

and runs if it was running.
ON
Operations from the remote controller
operating Change set

Start / stop Changemode
temperature Run / timer
1 0
0 3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
0 9
Ve-up controller settings
S1 pin
operating mode
1 2 3 4
0 2
4
1 2 3
Forced stop or remote

controller permission input
Instantaneous Central priority

contact mode
Last command priority
Timer operation
is accepted by
remote controller
Stop
Japan
operation is not available from the central controller.

When using automatic operation using the wireless remote
controller, the central controller displays automatic cooling
(heating) and 25C. Even if the temperature is changed, it will
return to 25C after a while.
Operations from
central controller,
contact input and
HA JEM-A input
Operating mode
temperaturet
Fan direction
and fan speed
ON / OFF control
is rejected
Only OFF control
is accepted
What Happens
z Automatic
Run / timer
Control
code
Fan direction
and fan speed
SW3-3 setting
Control mode
Stop
Destination
S1
operating
mode
Operations from the remote controller

Run control from the Stop control from the
central controller
central controller
Operating mode
temperature
Open the Kits case and set the switches on the circuit board.
(1) For Overseas / Japanese unit setting (SW3-3)
Room air conditioners, different methods are used for setting the temperature in
automatic mode, so this switch needs to be set.
Run / timer
NOTE
EDSG18-936
ON / OFF controller
Schedule timer
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
D-BIPS
Forced stop contact input
Instantaneous contact input
HA JEM-A-compatible equipment
Wired Remote Controller
Wireless Remote Controller
3P157704-2B
418
Options
EDSG18-936
4.6
Control Devices
<DTA112BA51> Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (SkyAir)

Accessories
Check if the following accessories are included in the kit.
1 Adaptor
Relay PCB
3 Relay harness
(for models
other than FFQ)
Note
PC board support
Clamp material
Installation manual
(for FFQ model)
Before opening control box lid, besure cut off the all air conditioner power of indoor unit and outdoor unit,
or you may get an electric shock..
SYSTEM OUTLINE
By connecting this kit to an optional controller for centralized control,
all units of the SKY AIR Series in the system can be controlled
as a group from the optional controller.
Adaptor 1
Set the triangle

marks together
X1A
One kit must be installed onto the master unit of each group.
X2A
ELECTRIC WIRING for FFQ model

X60A
(1) Mount the Adapter 1 on the indoor unit PCB by setting the triangle marks together.(Fig.1)
(2) Insert the Relay harness 3 into the connector of the Adapter 1 (Fig.2)
(3) Remove the remote control terminal block(X1M) from the control box mounted
inside the indoor unit.
(4) Connect the Relay harness 3 with the terminals F1 and F2 on the terminal block(X1M). (Fig.2)
(5) Mount the remote control terminal block(X1M) on the inside of the control box
as it was before removing it.
(6) Bind the extra wires with the attached Clamp material 5 so that
the wires do not go over the indoor unit PCB. (Fig.3)
(7) Connect the wires from the terminals F1 and F2 to the centralized control. (Fig.2)
Indoor unit PCB
Fig.1
X61A
Indoor unit Terminal block (X1M)

Indoor unit Terminal block (X1M)
Clamp material 5
(Clamp with earth wire)
Field wiring (Note.1)

P1 P2 F1 F2
Relay harness 3
Adaptor 1
Optional controller
for centralized control
P1 P2 F1 F2
Other group
Indoor unit PCB
Reverse side
X3A
X1A
X1A
X2A
Fig.2
Options
Indoor unit PCB X61A

Adaptor X2A
adaptor 1
X2A
X3A

Adaptor X1A
Noise filter
Clamp material 5
(Clamp noise filter to the side of control box)
Fig.3
Note 1. Wiring specifications ... Use a 0.75-1.25mm sheathed vinyl cord or cable (2 wires).
2. For details on compatible systems and how to connect to optional controllers,
see the instruction manual of the optional controller and technical reference materials.
419
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
ELECTRIC WIRING for MODELS OTHER THAN FFQ

Relay PCB 2
(1) Mount the adapter 1 on the indoor unit PCB by setting the triangle marks
ELECTRIC WIRING for FFQ model )
together. (Fig. 1
(2) Insert the harness from Relay PCB 2 into the connector (X3A) of the Adapter 1 .(Fig.4)
(3) Mount the Relay PCB 2 on the required location referring to the figure of
Installe position of Relay PCB.
(4) Bind the extra wires with the attached Clamp material 5 so that the wires do not go over
the indoor unit PCB and the parts on the PCB do not get damaged.
(5) Connect the wires from the terminals F1 and F2 to the centralized control. (Fig.4)
F2
Field wiring (Note.1)
F1
Optional controller
for centralized control
Other group
Indoor unit PCB
Reverse side
X3A
X1A
X1A
X2A

Adaptor X2A
adaptor 1
X2A
Note1. Wiring specifications ... Use a 0.75-1.25mm sheathed vinyl cord or cable (2 wires).
2. For details on compatible systems and how to connect to optional controllers,
see the instruction manual of the optional controller and technical reference materials.

Adaptor X1A
Fig.4
Installation position of Relay PCB

<Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type>
FCQ
<Ceiling Mounted Built-In Type>
(Multi Flow Type)
FBQ
Bind the extra wire
PC board support 4
Indoor unit PCB
Bind the extra wire
Relay PCB 2
Relay PCB 2
Control box
Indoor unit PCB
Control box
PC board support 4
C : 1P107904-1C
420
Options
EDSG18-936
4.7
Control Devices
<KRC72> Centralized Control Board-up to 5 Rooms

Possible to control max. 5 Room Air conditioners with centralized function. This is a low cost system which
can only control about ON/OFF.
4.7.1
Appearance and Functions

Centralized control can apply to max. 5 Room Air conditioners
handling from one location.
Contribute to save energy by eliminating turn-off of lamps.
Possible to control the action of ON/OFF individually for each
Room Air conditioner.
(Last command priority is adopted from either an indoor remote
controller or a home controller.)
It understands an operation situation with the operation display
lamp.
Accessories
Lower casing 1
Control panel 1
Room label 1
Indispensable Optional Accessories

Central remote controller for 5 Room Air conditioners
<KRC72>
Remote control PC board <KRP413A1S>
JIS three-throw switch box (Field supply).
M4 truss
small screw 6
Manual 1
(Q0086)
Room label
(Q0214)
External Dimensions
Controller
83.5
A
137
120
23
46
120
5-6hole
Operation Lamp
Lighted up when
each Room
Airconditioner is
operating.
A arrow view
33
70
8
2
168
46
Room label
Put each room's
label
Operation switch
Repeats ON and OFF every time
to be pushed.(see Note.)
Note: Possible to operate from
either a home controller or
each Room Airconditioner.
(Q0087)
Options
(Q0088)
421
Control Devices
4.7.2
EDSG18-936
Wiring Example
Transmission wiring length : 50 m or less/unit
totally within 250 m
Terminal strip
E4
E3
E2
E1
D4
D3
D2
D1
C4
C3
C2
C1
B4
B3
B2
B1
A4
A3
A2
A1
Transmission wiring: four wires

E room's airconditioner
D room's airconditioner
C room's airconditioner
B room's airconditioner
Terminal strip
2
1
2
1
Main body control PC board
S
4
S
1
A room's
airconditioner
Controller box KRC72

Main body of airconditioner
PC board for remote
control adapter
KRP413A1S
Connection of connectors
(Connector No.: S21)
Note: Switches of control panel are named A,B,C,D,E counted from the right.
(Q0089)
Key Points
Connect to the terminal number 1 ~ 4 on the control panel as shown below.
A4
A3
A2
A1
Controller box
KRC72
1 S
2 4
S +
8 -
1 S
2 1
1
S
5 2
3
1 S
2 2
SW1
1 S
2 3
1
2
ON OFF
To connector S21
on the PC board
of indoor unit
S6(5P)
50
S
51
7
52
Monitor
Normal
SW2
ON
OFF
1 234
(Q0090)
Switch Setting of KRP413A1S

Choose the action mode 1 by switching SW1-1 to OFF.
SW1
ON
OFF
1 2
(Q0091)
422
Options
EDSG18-936
4.8
Control Devices
<KRP413A1S> Wiring Adaptor for Timer Clock / Remote Controller

Safety Precautions
z Read these safety precautions carefully before installing the unit, and be
sure to install the unit properly.
z This manual classifies precautions to the user into the following two
categories. These warnings and cautions are for your safety. Follow them.
WARNING
Faulty installation can result in death or serious injury
CAUTION
Faulty installation can result in serious injury

or other serious consequences.
z Below is a key to symbols used in this manual.

Be sure to follow instructions.
Be sure to perform grounding work.
Never attempt.
z After installation is complete, test the unit to confirm that it is working

properly, and instruct the owner its proper use.
WARNING
z Installation should be left to the dealer from whom you purchased the unit, or
another qualified professionals.
z Install the unit securely according to the installation manual. Faulty installation
may lead to electric shock or fire.
z Be sure to use the supplied or specified parts. Using other parts may lead to
electric shock or fire.
z Install the unit securely in a location that will support its weight. If installed in a
poor location or improperly installed, the unit may not work as intended.
z For electrical work, follow local electric standards and the installation manual.
Faulty installation may lead to fire or electric shock.
z Do not bundle the power cord, or attempt to extend it by splicing it with another
cord or by using an extension cord. Do not place any other load on the power
circuit used for the unit. Improper wiring may lead to electric shock, heat
generation or fire.
z Use dedicated wiring for all electrical connections, and be sure to arrange the
wiring so that force applied to the wiring will not damage the terminals. Poor
wiring or installation may cause electric shock, heat generation or fire.
1. Functions and Features

z On/Off setting
z Switching between Instantaneous Contact/Normal Contact
z Connection with five-room central controller (KRC72 for oversea model)
z Connection with fan coil remote controller
z Automatic reset after power failure
z Output of normal operation signals/malfunction signals
2. Field Wiring
For interconnecting wiring, use Daikin KDC100A12 cable (not supplied) or
other similar cable. The cable should have the specifications shown below.
Optional cable KDC100A12 (without connectors)
Specifications:
0.2 mm2 4 core (sheathed)
Outer diameter: 5.3
Length:
100 m
Colour:
Grey
Other cable (commercially available)
Outer dia.
Remarks
Cable for instrumentation (IPVV) 0.3 mm2 4-core
Item
7.2 mm
Hard sheath
Microphone cord (MVVS) 0.3 mm2 4-core
8.0 mm
6.5 mm
4.8 mm
Shielded
Intercom cable 0.65 mm2 dia. 4-core

PVC jumper wire (TJVC) (from 0.5 mm dia. 4 pcs.)
Not sheathed
Note 1: Keep any wiring for the control unit away from the power cord to prevent
electrical noise.
Note 2: Do not use cables shown above for power cord, inter-unit cord/cable or
power cord for lamps.
CAUTION
z Before installation, unplug the air conditioner to ensure safety. Failure to do so
may cause electric shock.
z Static electricity may damage electric components. Before connecting cables
and communication lines, and operating the switches, be sure to discharge any
electrical charge from your body (by, for example, touching the earth line)
z Do not install the unit in a location where it may be exposed to flammable
gases. If gas leaks and build up around the unit, it may catch fire.
z Do not place the wiring close to the power cord, inter-unit cable, or pipes which
generate noise. Treat the wiring with care.
Options
423
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
Installation
This product is available in two types. The KRP413A1S KRP413AA1S is for installation in a case independent of the indoor unit, and
the KRP413A1 is for installation within the indoor unit.
1. KRP413A1S KRP413AA1S
1
3. Attaching Adaptor Case Assy (for KRP413A1S KRP413AA1S)
Installation diagram
1
Adaptor case
Indoor unit PCB
Using the screws (to mount on a wall, etc.)
z Use the 3 supplied screws to attach the case assy .
Adaptor case
S21
Indoor unit
wiring
Local wiring or
power cord, etc.
Install the adaptor case assy as close to the indoor unit as possible.
c Removing case front
Case front
Components
c Adaptor case assy

(Adaptor (PCB) is attached in the adaptor case.)
d Wiring (approx. 0.8 m)
Screw
Adaptor PCB
Screw cover
e Accessories
Binding band (4 pcs.)
Securing tape for attaching to the indoor unit (2 sets)
Screws for attaching the adaptor case (4 pcs.)
Screws for attaching to the wall (3 pcs.)
Remove the screw cover, one of the screws

and then the case front.
d Attach the case back to the surface by
tightening the screws through the screw
holes (one round hole, two long holes).
e After connecting the cables (refer to the following sections), replace the
case front. Be careful not to damage the wiring in the case.
Press in so that the prong catches
the case back.
f Installation manual
Wiring
2. KRP413A1
For this type, install the adaptor PCB within the indoor unit. The method of
installation and connection vary depending on the model of the air
conditioner. See your air conditioner installation manual for details.
Screw
Screw cover
Components
c Adaptor PCB
e Installation manual
d Wiring (approx. 0.25 m)
Using securing tape (to attach on the indoor unit)
z Attach the adaptor case with the supplied securing tape.

c Remove the case front (as for mounting on a wall).
d After connecting the cables (see the following sections), replace the
case front. It can be screwed to the case back from the rear with the
four supplied screws.
Be careful not to damage the wiring in the case.
e Attach the hook side (loop side) of the included securing tape to the rear
surface of the HA case, then attach the loop side (hook side) to the top of
the air conditioner unit spaced at the same intervals.
Securing tape
Hook side (loop side)
Securing tape
Loop side (hook side)
Indoor unit
To prevent the adaptor case assy from falling, do not use the securing
tape for attaching it to a wall or other surface.
424
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
Wiring
1. Wiring
4. Connection with Remote Controller
c Connect one end of the wiring to connector S21 of the PCB in the
indoor unit.
d Connect the other end of the wiring to connector S6 of the adaptor
PCB.
e Connect field wiring according to the functions assigned to each
connection terminal of the adaptor PCB.
f Secure all wires.
Example connections with three kinds of remote controllers are shown

bellow.
Note: These connections cannot be used in combination.
Generic remote controller
z Set SW1-1 to Off and select Operation Mode 1.

SW1
Securing wires in the adaptor case assy (for KRP413A1S KRP413AA1S)
ON
OFF
z Fasten with a tie-wrap so that wires will not come loose even if pulled.
If the wire protrudes from
this side, cut the cut-off
section of the case front.
<Instantaneous Contact>
1
On/Off
2
1
Off
Inter unit
cable (field wiring)
Tie-wrap
(to prevent the wires from coming loose)
1
2
1
On
2. Automatic Reset After Power Failure
z This PCB stores the following data in the event of a power failure
(common features).
c On/Off (see Note 1) d Operation modes e Temperature setting
f Air flow rate g On/Off status of remote controller
z Power On/Off cannot be controlled

from the units remote controller.
z When power is restored after a
power failure in this mode, On or
Off is determined according to
the current settings of the remote
controller.
Operation
Securing wires in the indoor unit (for KRP413A1)
S
1
S
2
Five-room central controller (KRC72)
z Set SW1-1 to Off and select Operation Mode 1.

z The remote controller most recently used takes precedence.
SW1
ON
Five-room central
controller
(Note 1 When SW1-2 is in Off mode, the unit will not be activated.)
OFF
1
3. Monitor Signal Output (normal operation and malfunction)
Terminal
blocks A to E
z Maximum length of the wiring is 100 m.
1 S
2 4
3
2
1 S
2 1
Monitor signal output for LED

Locally procured parts
1
R
D
LED
Item Manufacturer
S
4
Max 100 m
S
2
<Normal Contact>
z The method for securing wire varies depending on the model of the air
conditioner. See your air conditioner installation manual for details.
z The remote controller most

recently used (local or air
conditioner) takes precedence.
z Use a remote controller with a
pulse width of 100 msec or
more.
S
1
LED
Toshiba
Rohm
Type
TLG208 (green)
TLR208 (red)
1S2473
510 ohm 1/4W
Monitor signal output (normal operation and

malfunction)using external relay contacts
Fan coil remote controller
z Set SW1-1 to On and select Operation Mode 2.

z Most settings (power On/Off, air flow rate, mode change) cannot be
made using the air conditioners remote controller.
z When power is restored after a power failure in this mode, On or Off is
determined according to the current settings of the remote controller.
z When the Cooling /Heating mode is changed, use the air conditioners
remote controller to adjust the temperature.
SW1
ON
S
8
DC12V
S
5
L1
2
3
L2
OFF
: Operation light
: Malfunction light
S
1
H M L OFF
(+)
MR1
()
L1
MR1
MR2
()
MR2
External power
supply for light
L2
1
2
Max 100 m
Field supplied parts
Field procured parts (Recommended external relay contacts)

Manufacturer
Options
Type
Coil rated voltage
Fan coil remote controller
Omron
MY relay
12 V DC
160 ohm 10%
HC relay
12 V DC
160 ohm 10%
1 S
3
On (When heating)
Coil resistance
Matsushita
S
2
Off
(When cooling)
Cooling/heating switch
425
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
Test Operation and Confirmation

1. When the System is Not Working
Is the air conditioner working properly?
Are the connectors of the wiring properly connected?
Are the remote controller and field wiring properly connected?
Are all switch settings correct?
If there is nothing apparently wrong, conduct a diagnostic check using the following procedure.
Diagnostic check
c Defect in adaptor PCB.
d Defect in wiring.
e Defect in indoor units PCB.
f Transmission error (between remote controller and indoor unit)
START
Is the CPU Normal light

for the remote controllers
PCB flashing?
No
Yes
Is 12 V DC being supplied
to No. 4 and No. 5 on S6 of the
remote controllers PCB?
No
Yes
c
Is 12 V DC being supplied
to No. 4 and No. 5 on S21
of the indoor unit?
No
Yes
d
Is the malfunction light
of the remote
controllers PCB on?
No
Yes
f
d OR e
2. Switch Settings and Connection Terminals
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
S
4
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
8
S
5
SW1-1
Selecting the operation

mode
SW1-2
Selecting On/Off when

power is restored after
a power failure
1
2
1
2
3
S6
SW1-1: OFF
(Operation mode 1)
Operation mode 2 (Used with fan coil remote controller settings)
OFF
Always Off
ON
Off if operation was in Off mode before power failure; On if operation was in
On mode before power failure
Normal contact
S1 (1) - S2 (1)
OPEN
CLOSE
S1 (1) - S1 (2)
Pulse input
On/Off switching
OPEN, Not activated

CLOSE, Activated
S1
S2 (2), S3
S2
S1, S2 OPEN
S3
S1 (1) - S1 (2) CLOSE
On, airflow: L tap
S1 (1) - S2 (1) CLOSE
On, airflow: M tap
S1 (1) - S2 (2) CLOSE
On, airflow: H tap
S3 (With the remote

controller only)
CLOSE, Heating
SW1-1: ON
(Operation mode 2)
CPU normal operation monitor

(Flashes when the operation is normal.)
Operation mode 1 (Used with the exception of fan coil remote controller settings)
Instantaneous contact
SW1
1
2
OFF ON
OFF
ON
S4
S5
Not activated
OPEN, Cooling
(1) - (2)
Voltage on (DC12 V), normal operation light output
(1) - (2)
Normal operation light output (power for light required)
(1) - (3)
Malfunction light output (power for light required)
S6 connector
S8
Not used
(+) - ()
Connect with connector S21 on the PCB of the indoor unit

Relay DC 12 V power supply terminal (Field supplied parts)
2P031616-1B
426
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
4.9
<KRP4AA51/53> Wiring Adaptor for Electrical Appendices
4.9.1
Outline / Features
This adaptor is a interface required to connect the indoor unit with the central
monitoring panel. And by installing this adaptor in the indoor unit, it enables you to
have various remote controls (ON/OFF, temperature setting, operation status
display and malfunction display). One adaptor can control simultaneously the
group of units (Max. 16 units) connected to the remote control wiring line (P1, P2).
Note:
1. This adaptor cannot be used together with central control equipment and data station.
2. The model of adaptor differs according to the type of indoor unit to be installed.
4.9.2
Applied Model
Applied Model
Remark
SkyAir Series
Residential Air Conditioner
4.9.3
System Configuration
Note:
1. Marked
shows wiring adaptor for electrical appendices.
2. Marked
indicates the same control range.
3. The wiring adaptor for electrical appendices (2) can control simultaneously the group of the units
(Max. 16 units) connected to the remote control wiring line (P1, P2). In another words, all the units
connected between P1 and P2 terminal have the same control.
Point of wiring
Options
427
Control Devices
4.9.4
EDSG18-936
Names and Functions of Operating Part
Note:
1. This is valid only for the indoor unit, which has a temperature setting function.
2. Terminal No. X18A is for the indoor unit of VRV system. For SkyAir series and other air-conditioner,
connect to the relevant terminal for each units.
4.9.5
Input/Output for External Control
1. Depending on whether [voltage input] or [non voltage input], connect the wiring as shown below.
Input with Voltage.
Set the Voltage/Non voltage changeover switch (SS1) to VOLT.
Input with No Voltage.

Set the Voltage/Non voltage changeover switch (SS1) to NON VOLT.
2. Display Signal Retrieval (Output)

The normal operation output terminals (W1, W2) and error output terminals (W3, W4) are non-voltage
output contacts. (Permissive current is 10mA~3A per contact.)
Output is as given below.

Output
System
Group control
428
Both Ry1 and Ry2 is OFF.
Only Ry1 is ON.
Only Ry2 is ON.
OFF
All normal operation
At least one unit is stopped due to error or transmission

error between the adaptor and the indoor unit.
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
3. Temperature Setting Input
Temperature setting corresponds to resistance values in the range of 0 to 135.

Their relationship is as shown below.
Relation between the setting temperature and the resistance are as follows.
Setting
temperature (C)
Resistance ()
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
0.0
~
3.4
5.0
~
11.6
13.8
~
20.0
22.4
~
28.4
31.0
~
36.4
39.4
~
44.8
48.2
~
52.8
56.6
~
61.2
65.2
~
69.4
73.8
~
77.8
82.4
~
85.8
91.0
~
94.0
99.4
~
102.2
108.6
~
110.4
117.2
~
119.2
125.8
~
127.4
134.2
~
140.0
Note:
The value of resistance includes the resistance of wiring.
The setting temperature is limited within the setting range of indoor unit. If you set the temperature
outside of the range by the adaptor, it controls at the nearest setting range.
Setting of Control Mode Selector Switch (RS1)

Description of Operation by Input Mode A and B
Position
Functions
Input A (Between B1~Bc)
Input B (Between B2~Bc)
Input Ignored
Remote Control Rejection
Start at ON, and stop at OFF
Central Priority
Remote Control Acceptance/

Rejection
Rejection, OFF
Start at ON (remote control acceptance),

stop at OFF (remote control rejection)
The same as position 1
(Only stop is accepted by remote controller)
Start at ON (remote control acceptance),
stop at OFF (remote control rejection)
Start/Stop (Repeats)
Last Command Priority

(remote control acceptance all the time)
Stop at ON remote control acceptance),

start at OFF (remote control rejection)
Start at ON
Stop at ON.
Stop at ON
(remote control rejection)
Remote Control OFF Acceptance

Rejection, OFF
Start at ON
(remote control acceptance)
(Only stop is accepted by remote controller)
Start at ON
(remote control acceptance)
(remote control acceptance all the time)
Position 5 + Energy Saving Control
Position 5 + Temperature SetBack
Position 6 + Energy Saving Control
Position 6 + Temperature SetBack
Stop at ON
(remote control rejection),
Input A acceptance at OFF

Stop at ON
(remote control rejection)
Forced thermostat OFF at ON

Setting temperature shift command at ON
Forced thermostat OFF at ON
Setting temperature shift command at ON
Note:
1. When constant input is used for input B at position 7~A, the system is shut-down forcibly (Ignored input
A). Constant input cannot be used for input B at position B.
2. Refer to the followings for the outline of above functions.
Options
429
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
Description of Functions (Outline)

1. Remote Control Rejection ................................ For when you want to turn ON/OFF only by central remote controller. (ON/OFF
cannot be controlled by remote controller for indoor unit.)
2. Remote controller OFF Only Accepted ......
For when you want to turn ON only by the central remote controller, and
turn OFF only by remote controller for indoor unit.
3. Central Priority ............................................... For when you want to turn ON only by the central remote controller, and
during the set time, turn ON/OFF freely by remote controller for indoor unit.
4. Individual Priority (Last command priority) ... For when you want to turn ON/OFF by both central remote controller and
remote controller for indoor unit.
5. Remote Controller Permission Timer ........... For when you want to turn ON/OFF by remote controller for indoor unit
during set time, and you want to start the operation by remote controller for
indoor unit at the programmed time of system start.
<Example when the control mode selector switch is set at position 6>
The following is the time chart for the command by remote controller and the indoor unit
against input signal.
430
Options
EDSG18-936
4.9.6
Control Devices
Instruction for Installation

(Fit the edge of the adaptor PCB into the
grooves on the adaptor box.)
FFQ
Groove
Lid of installation box

KRP1B101 (Option accessory)
Adaptor
(KRP4A53)
Adaptor
KRP4A(A)53
Adaptor fixing box

KRP1B98 (Optional
accessory)
PCB support
Note:
Installation box for adaptor
PCB is required to install the adaptor.
Installation box for adaptor PCB

KRP1B101 (Option accessory)
(R4931)
Note:
Installation box for adaptor PCB is
required to install the adaptor.
(V3126)
Ceiling Mounted Built-In Type
Options
431
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
4.10 <KRP1BA54/57> Adaptor for Wiring

A
(600600)
<< Ceiling-mounted cassette type >>
(950950)
NOTE: Installation box for adaptor PCB

is required to install the adaptor.
C:1PA60037E
432
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
4.11 <KRP1BA101> Installation Box for Adaptor PCB

Notes
Indoor unit
Kit name
One kit is required for each adaptor.
KRP1BA101
Refer to the installation manuasl attached to the indoor unit and adaptor.
Accessories
FFQ25 35 50 60BV1B9
Check the following accessories are included in this kit.
Name
Installation box
Quantity
x1
Lid of
installation box
x1
2
Clamp
Screws
Cord sticker
x3
x3
x3
Installation
manual
Screws
English x1
Japanese x1
6
x2
7
Shape
( This manual )
Applicable adaptor
(IN CASE OF FFQ TYPE)
Adaptor
Kit name
Adaptor for wiring
KRP1B(A)57
Wiring adaptor for

electrical appendices(2)
KRP4A(A)53
<IN CASE OF FFQ TYPE>

Method of attaching the adaptor
Attach the adaptor
Attach the adaptor in the Installation box 1 by the PCB supports.
(PCB supports are accessories of adaptor.)
Detach the aluminum tape of the Installation box 1 to insert the PCB supports.
Adaptor : KRP1B(A)57
--- Detach the aluminume tapes A.
KRP2A52,KRP2A62,KRP4A(A)53,DTA104A52 --- Detach the aluminume tapes B.
B
B
A
A
A
B
Connect wires with the adaptor before attaching to the Installation box 1 .
Low voltage wires and high voltage wires should be kept space at least 50mm from each other.
Adaptor PCB
PCB supports
(Accessories of Adaptor)
Hole for low
voltage wires
(Signal line)
Hole for high

voltage field wires
Installation box 1
C : 1P107687-1C
Options
433
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
Attach the Lid of installation box

Attach the Lid of installation box 2 to indoor unit with two screws.
If two adaptors are installed, the second adaptor is attached to side of first one.
Lid of installation box 2

for second PCB
Lid of installation box

for first PCB
2
screws 4
Attach the Installation box

Attach the Installation box 1 into the Lid of installation box
2 with the screw.

Installation box
Lid ofi nstallation box
screw 4
Put the Installation box 1

into the Lid of installation box 2
Method of wiring processing

Connect wires with control box. (Refer to the installation manual attached to the adaptor.)
After connecting wires with the control box, clamp wires by using the cord stickers 5 and the clamps 3
as shown in the below drawing.
Clamp 3
Cord sticker 5
C : 1P107687-1C
434
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
4.12 <KRCS01-1B> Remote Sensor

Components
Check the following components.
Designation
Remote sensor
(sensor box)
Extension cable
(2-core, 12m)
Clamps
1 Piece
1 Piece
2 Pieces
Installation
Sensor box
manual
mounting screws
(this drawing)
(M4X16)
shape
Pieces
1 sheet
2 Pieces
Note 1) If you are unsure if this kit can be used for your indoor unit, check if the type of the thermistor
(for detection of inlet air temperature) is as same as the type in this kit (ST8601).
The shape of the thermistor for detection of the indoor unit inlet air temperature is shown below.
ST8601
Mounting
1) Selecting the mounting location
The thermistor for temperature detection is incorporated into the remote sensor. Select the mounting
location taking the following cautions into account.
1 where the average temperature of an air conditioned room can be detected.
2 where it is not exposed to the direct sunlight.
3 where it is not influenced by other heat sources.
4 where it is not exposed to the direct discharge air from the air conditioner.
5 whera it is not exposed to the outdoor air infiltrated into the room by opening the door.
2) Mounting
Remove the cover of the sensor box.
about 6mm width

2
flat blade screw driver
Options
Insert a flat blade screw driver into the sensor box concave
part (2 locations)and remove the cover pushig up the nail to
the cover of the sensor box.
<Cautions>
Do not push the nail powerfully with a narrow flat blade screw driver,
because you may break off the nail.
435
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
1 When mounting on the wall

Heat insulating material
Knockout hole for cable
32
Sensor box
Mounting screws
Released paper
Sensor box cover
42
Air holes
2-M4
Wall surface mounting holes(unit Fmm)
Break open the knockout hole in the sensor box with a nipper or a similar tool. Pass the extension wires
through the hole and fasten the wires to the terminals with screws.
To avoid tensile force on the terminals, pass the attached clamp through the holes shown in the below
right figure and tighten the extension cable with the attached clamp at the sheathed part. (The knot must
Extension cable
come to the box inside.)
Clamp holes
Clamp(knot)
Sheathed part
Fasten the terminals with
care to prevent the wires
from touching each other.
Sensor box
Screw the sensor box securely to the wall surface with screws M4X16(2 places).
If the sensor box cannot be screwed to wall surface, tear off the released paper and mount it on the
wall surface
Extension cable
2 For embedded wiring

Sensor box cover
Switch box(for single unit)

(to be sourced locally)
Through hole
Sheathed part
Clamp(knot)
Mounting screws
Sensor box
Metal plate
(for single unit without hole)
Sensor box
Mounting frame which
matches with the switch box
Heat insulating material
Pass the extension cable through the switch box cable hole and carry out the wiring.
(120)
21
Tap M4 screw holes in the metal plate (to be sourced locally) as

shown in the right drawing and mount the switch box on the
metal plate.
2-M4
42
Pass the attached clamp though the clamp holes and tighten the extension
32
cable at the sheathed part as shown in the upper right drawing.
(70)
Holes to be tapped in the
metal plate on site (unit: mm)
<Cautions>
Give caution when wiring so that the air holes will not be blocked.
When the extension cable is longer than necessary, cut it to the apporopriate length, peel the insulation,
attach the round crimp terminal for M3 (to be sourced locally) and carry out the wiring. The length of
insulation to be peeled off is as shown.
45
(Work carefully so that the connector side may not be cut.)
For M3
Round crimp terminal
436
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
Wiring method
Connect the extension cable connector side to the indoor unit PCB (printed circuit board)
For connection to the indoor unit, follow the procedure shown below.
Caution
1) Make sure to turn off the power supply before starting the wiring work and do not turn on
until all the work is completed.
Read also the installation manual and the wiring diagram of the indoor unit
when carrying out the work.
2) When wiring the extension cable, do not pass where the extension cable may be affected by
the power line or noise.
3) Make sure to securely connect the connectors.
Defective connection may result in incorrect detection of room temperature or malfunction.
4) Do not splice wires.
5) Since the connector marking of the thermistor for detection of inlet air temperature differ
depending on the indoor unit type, make sure to check the indoor unit wiring diagram and
follow it correctly.
6)Lay and clamp the extension cable inside the indoor unit switch box just like
the low voltage line(cord for remote controller).
And do not pass where the extension cable inside the indoor unit switch box
may be affected by the power line(cord for the indoor unit and
the other electric line).
<Procedure>
1. When wiring to the indoor unit PCB, remove the existing thermistor (for detection of inlet air
temperature) and then connect the extension cable.
<For SkyAir and VRV>
Connector connection
Extension cable
Screwed terminal
connection
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
Printed circuit board (PCB)
Extension cable
2 Connect
1 Remove
Existing thermistor or
humidity sensor
2. Lay and clamp the extension cable inside the indoor unit switch box just like the existing thermistor.
Provide protection of the existing cable for thermistor without affecting other components.
3. Fit the sensor box cover into the sensor box.
Operation test after mounting the sensor

Conduct cooling and heating operation test after the sensor is mounted and the wiring is completed.
C : 3K019189B
Options
437
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
4.13 <BRC1C61> Wired Remote Controller for SkyAir

4.13.1 Features and Functions
Large liquid crystal screen displays complete operating status.
Digital display lets you set temperature in a unit of 1C.
Possible to make the individual setting such as not only the
combined operation with the total heat exchanger HRV but also
the single operation, the fresh-up operation, and the filter sign,
without HRV's exclusive remote controller.
Lets you individually program by timer the respective times for
operation start and stop within a maximum of 72 hours.
Equipped with a thermostat sensor in the remote controller that
makes possible more comfortable room temperature control.
Monitors room temperature and preset temperature by
microcomputer, and can switch cool/heat operation mode
automatically.
Enables you to switch cool / heat / fan operation mode with the
indoor remote controller of your choice without using the cool /
heat selector.
Constantly monitors malfunctions in the system for 40 items,
and is equipped with a self-diagnosis function that lets you
know by message immediately when a malfunction occurs.
Lets you carry out various field settings by remote controller.
<BRC1C61>
5 12
3
7
hr
C
hr
6
8
NOT
AVAILABLE
TEST
L H
14
9
11
10
13
21
20
TEST
16
19
15
17
18
22
3PA59583-16Z-1
438
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
ON/OFF BUTTON
stop.
DISPLAY
UNDER
CENTRALIZED CONTROL.
DISPLAY

(VENTILATION/AIR CLEANING)
This display shows that the total heat
exchange and the air cleaning unit are in
operation (These are optional
accessories).
DISPLAY
(OPERATION MODE)
MODE. For cooling only type,
(Auto)
DISPLAY
OPERATION)
system mode is in.
hr
DISPLAY
14
15

TIMER ON/OFF BUTTON

16 This button is used only by qualified service
17 Use this button for programming START and/
or STOP time.
18
19
20 Press this button to select the fan speed,
21
Press this button to select OPERATION MODE.
22
NOTE
shown on the display in Figure 1 contrary to
(PROGRAMMED TIME)
hr
This display shows the PROGRAMMED TIME

of the system start or stop.
8
DISPLAY
(SET TEMPERATURE)
DISPLAY
(FAN SPEED)
DISPLAY
(AIR FLOW FLAP)
10
DISPLAY
11 TER)
12
DISPLAY
(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FIL-
(DEFROST)
If that particular function is not available, pressing the button may display the words NOT
AVAILABLE for a few seconds.
13 When running multiple units simultaneously
Options
3PA59583-16Z-2
439
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
Example of Control by Remote Controller

Remote control (Fundamental use)
The most fundamental use which connects one indoor unit with one
remote controller.
Control by double remote controllers

This is a convenient system, when you want to operate an indoor
unit in a living room from a porch, for example, or finely operate an
indoor unit from a local or remote location. (The same applies to
other types of indoor units.)
Group Control
Simultaneous control of up to 16 units with a one remote controller
Remote Control
The remote control wiring can be extended up to 500m.
Accordingly, it is easy to concentrate the plural remote controller of
indoor units installed in a room widely spread into one position.
Combined control
Simultaneous control with a total heat exchanger HRV is possible
through the indoor unit linkage.
Note:
1. If the system structure displaces the SkyAir's wired remote controller with a wireless remote controller,
the same control can be carried out.
2. Impossible to structure with twin wireless remote controllers in case of the control adopting double
remote controllers. Be sure to use a wired remote controller for the one of the two controllers.
Double Remote Controllers

One indoor unit is controlled by double remote controllers from two separate locations
This is a convenient system, when you want to operate an indoor unit in a living room from a porch, for
example, or finely operate an indoor unit from a local or remote location. (The same applies to other types
of indoor units.)
Operation control mode of the indoor unit has last command priority.
Remove the front panel of the remote controller and set the MAIN/SUB changeover switch on the PC
board to MAIN for the main remote controller, and to SUB for the sub remote controller.
440
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
4.13.2 Example of System

Group Control
Simultaneous control of up to 16 units with a one remote controller
This is a convenient system, when you want to simultaneously control several indoor units on the same
settings for air conditioning a space with wide and single floor.
Wiring to a remote controller for group control has no polarity. So, P1 and P2 can be exchanged.
All indoor units within the group have the same setting, and each indoor unit is controlled individually by
its own built-in thermostat.
Because the automatic address system is used, the address does not require the setting by a remote
controller for group control.
5
Combined Control
Simultaneous control between HRV and SkyAir's indoor unit.
This is a convenient system when the simultaneous control of SkyAir indoor unit with a total heat
exchanger HRV is required.
Since the remote controller's wiring doesn't have polarity, opposite positioning between
P1 and P2 is allowed.
One remote controller can conduct the simultaneous control up to 16 units (SkyAir indoor
units + HRV = 16 units)
Options
441
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
4.13.3 Installation
1.Remove the upper part of remote controller.

Insert minus screwdriver into the slots in the lower part of
remote controller (2 places), and remove the upper part of
remote controller.
The PC board is mounted in the
upper part of remote controller. Be
careful not to damage the board
with the minus screwdriver.
Upper Part of
Remote Controller
Lower Part of
Remote Controller
Minus screwdriver
Insert the minus
screwdriver and
twist lightly to remove.
2.Fasten the remote controller.

c For exposed mounting, fasten with
the included wood screws (2).
Wood Screws
d For flush-mounting, fasten with (3.5 x 16)

the included machine screws (2).
Switch Box
(Field supplied parts)
Machine
Screws
(M4 x 16)
For the field supplied switch box, use optional accessories

KJB111A or KJB211A.
NOTE
Choose the flattest place possible for the mounting surface. Be careful not to distort the shape of the lower part of
remote controller by over-tightening the mounting screws.
442
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
3.Wire the indoor unit.
NOTE
Connect the terminals on top of the upper part of
When wiring, run the wiring
remote controller (P1, P2), and the terminals of the
away the power supply wiring in
indoor unit (P1, P2). (P1 and P2 do not have polarity.) order to avoid receiving electric
noise (external noise).
Indoor Unit
Indoor Unit
P1, P2
P1, P2
Notch the part for the wiring to

pass through with nippers, etc.
Ground the shielded

part on the indoor
unit side. (NOTE.2)
Wiring Specifications
Sheathed vinyl code or cable
Wiring Type
(2 wire)
(NOTE.2)
0.75 1.25 mm2
Size
Lower part of
remote controller
PC Board
Upper Part of
Remote controller
(Wired from the rear)
PC Board
(Wired from the top)
NOTE) 1.Peel the shield and sheath for

the part that is to pass through
the inside of the remote controller case, as shown in the figure
below.
4.Reattach the upper part of remote controller.

Be careful not to pinch the wiring when attaching.
NOTE
1.The switch box and wiring for connection are not
included.
2.Do not directly touch the PC board with your hand.
If controlling one indoor unit with two remote
controllers
Peel the shield

and sheath.
2. Shield wire (2 wire) can be

used for remote controller
wiring, but it must confirm to
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) (European Directive).
First, begin fitting from
the clips at the bottom.
Change the MAIN/SUB changeover switch setting as

described below.
PC Board
S
S
M
M
Main Remote Sub
Controller
Remote
(Factory Set) Controller
Set one remote controller tomain, and the other to sub.

NOTE
z If controlling with one remote controller, be sure to set it
to main.
z Set the remote controller before turning power supply on.
is displayed for about one minute when the power supply is turned on,
and the remote controller cannot be operated in some cases.
Options
443
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
If optional accessories are mounted on the indoor unit, the

indoor unit setting may have to be changed. Refer to the
instruction manual for each optional accessory.
FIELD SETTING
Procedure
c When in the normal mode, press the

and the FIELD SET MODE is entered.
TEST
d Select the desired MODE NO. with the
button for a minimum of four seconds,

button.
e During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 21 and 23
have been selected), push the
button and select the INDOOR UNIT NO to
be set. (This operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
f Push the
upper button and select FIRST CODE NO.
g Push the
lower button and select the SECOND CODE NO.
h Push the
button once and the present settings are SET.
i Push the
TEST
button for about one second to return to the NORMAL MODE.
(Example) If during group setting and the time to clean air filter is set to FILTER CONTAMINATION HEAVY, SET MODE NO. to 10, FIRST CODE NO. to 0, and SECOND CODE NO to 02.
UNIT NO.
MODE NO.
SECOND
CODE NO.
FIRST
CODE NO.
FIELD
SET
MODE
UNIT NO.
SETTING
.
1 7
TEST
Mode No. FIRST

Note) 1 CODE NO.
13(23)
Description of Setting
SECOND CODE No.

01
Note) 2
02
03
Ultra-long-life type
Filter Contamination - Heavy/Light
Approx. 5,000 hours
Approx. 10,000 hours
(Setting for spacing time of display time to clean air filter)
Long-life type Light Approx. 2,500 hours Heavy Approx. 1,250 hours
(Setting for when filter contamination is heavy, and
Approx. 200 hours
Approx. 100hours
spacing time to clean air filter is to be halved)
Standard type
Long-life filter type (Setting of filter sign indication time)

(Change setting when Ultra-long-life filter is installed)
Long-life filter
Ultra-long-life filter (1)
Spacing Time of Display Time to Clean Air Filter Count

(Setting for when the filter sign is not to be displayed)
Display
Do Not Display
Setting Number of Connected Skyair Simultaneous Operation System

Indoor Units(Setting for Simultaneous Operation System)
Pair
Twin
High Celling Setting

(Setting for when installed in a Ceiling higher than 2.7m)
Normal
High Ceiling 1
High Ceiling 2
Selection of Air Flow Direction (Setting for when a blocking pad kit has
been installed)
Air Flow Direction Adjust Function

(To be set when decoration panel for air outlet is installed)
Equippeed
No Equippeed
Air Flow Direction Range Setting
Upper
Normal
Lower
Normal
High Static Pressure
Low Static Pressure
Setting the External Static Pressure

(Setting according to the connected duct resistance)
(For FHYK, follow the High Ceiling Setting)
(Normal)
(High Ceiling)
10(20)
11(21)
Note:
1. Setting is carried out in the group mode, however, set the mode number inside the ( ) for individual
setting of the each indoor unit or confirmation after setting.
2. The SECOND CODE number is set to 01 when shipped from the factory.
However for the following cases it is set to 02.
Air flow direction range setting.
3. Do not make any settings not given in the table above.
4. Not displayed if the indoor unit is not equipped with that function.
5. When returning to the normal mode, 88 may be displayed in the LCD in order for the remote
controller to initialize itself.
2P068938-1
444
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
4.14 <BRC7C613W> Wireless Remote Controller

Before Installation
Accessories
Check if the following accessories are included with your unit.
Note to the Installer
Be sure to instruct the customer how to properly operate the system showing him/her the attached
operation manual.
Receiver Installation
(1) Preparations before installation

Install this kit after installing the decoration panel.
1. Remove the suction grille and the air filter according to the instructions in the installation manual
attached to the decoration panel.
2. Remove the control box lid according to the instructions in the installation manual attached to the indoor
unit.
(2) Determination of address and MAIN/SUB remote controller

If setting multiple wireless remote controllers to operate in one room, perform address setting for the
receiver and the wireless remote controller. If setting multiple wired remote controllers in one room, change
the MAIN/SUB switch of the receiver.
Setting Procedure
1. Setting the receiver
Through the small opening on the back of the receiver, set the wireless address switch (SS2) on the printed
circuit board according to the table below.
When using both a wired and a wireless remote controller

for 1 indoor unit, the wired controller should be set to
MAIN. Therefore, set the MAIN/SUB switch (SS1) of the
receiver to SUB.
<After completing setting, seal off the opening of the address switch and the MAIN/SUB switch with
the attached sealing pad.>
Options
445
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
2. Setting the address of wireless remote controller (It is factory set to 1)

<Setting from the remote controller>
Hold down the
button and the
button for at least 4 seconds to get the Field Set
mode. (Indicated in the display area in the figure at right).
Press the
button and select a multiple setting (A/b). Each time the button is pressed the
display switches between A and b.
Press the
button and
button to set the address.
Address can be set from 1 to 6, but set it to 1 ~ 3 and to same address as the receiver. (The receiver
does not work with address 4 ~ 6.)
Press the
button to enter the setting.
Hold down the
button for at least 1 second to quit the Field Set mode and return to the
normal display.
Multiple setting A/b

When the indoor unit is being operating by outside control (central remote controller, etc.), it sometimes
does not respond to ON/OFF and temperature setting commands from this remote controller. Check what
setting the customer wants and make the multiple setting as shown below.
Remote controller
446
Indoor unit
Multiple setting
Remote controller display
To control other air conditions and For other than on left

units
A:Standard
All items displayed.
Commands other than ON/OFF

and temperature setting accepted.
(1 LONG BEEP or 3 SHORT
BEEPS emitted)
b:Multi System
Operations remain displayed All commands accepted (2 SHORT BEEPS)

shortly after execution.
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
3. Stick the Unit No. label on the air outlet of the decoration panel and the back of the
wireless remote controller.
PRECAUTIONS
Set the Unit No. of the receiver and the
wireless remote controller to be equal. If
the setting differs, the signal from the
remote controller cannot be transmitted.
(3) Receiver installation

Detach the swing motor and
the diagonally opposite
decorative corner panel. This
corner panel piece is not
needed hereafter.
(For instructions on attaching/
detaching decorative panels,
see the installation instructions
provided with the original
panel.)
The receiver cannot be
installed anywhere but in
this corner.
Pull the relay harness from the
receiver up to where the clamp
meets the stopper, as shown
at right.
Install the receiver where the

decorative corner panel
before. Proceed in the
opposite order in which you
removed the corner panel.
Fit the relay harness under the
tab on the decorative panel
and connect it to connector
X24A on the indoor unit PC
board. Bundle the remaining
harness with the included tie
band so that it does not droop
or get pinched in the suction
grille.
Attach the lid to the indoor
units switch box and the
suction grille to the decorative
panel.
Options
447
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
MODE
FIRST
NO.
CODE NO.
12
(VRV
system)
13
01
Filter Contamination-Heavy/Light
(Setting for spacing time of display
time to clean air filter) (Setting for when Long Life
filter contamination is heavy, and
Filter
spacing time of display time to clean air
filter is to be halved)
Spacing time of display time to clean air filter count

(Setting for when the filter sign is not to be
displayed)
Setting the number of connected simultaneous

operation system indoor units.
ON/OFF input from outside (Set to enable starting/

Forced OFF input
stopping from remote.)
Thermostat differential changeover (Set when

using remote controller thermostat sensor.)
10
11
(SkyAir
system)
SECOND CODE NO. NOTE)
DESCRIPTION OF SETTING
Light
02
Approx.
Approx.
2,500 hrs. Heavy 1,250 hrs.
03
Display
Do not display
Pair
Twin
Triple
ON/OFF
1C
0.5 C
High ceiling setting (Setting for when installed in a

ceiling higher than 2.7m)
Normal
High Ceiling 1
High Ceiling 2
Selection of Air Flow Direction (Setting for when a

blocking pad kit has been installed)
Upper
Normal
Lower
Note:
The SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01. However, for the following cases it is set to 02.
Do not use any settings not listed in the table.
For group control with a wireless remote controller, initial settings for all the indoor units of the group are
equal. (For group control, refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit for group control.)
448
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
Test Operation
Perform test operation according to the instructions in the installation manual attached to the indoor
unit.
After refrigerant piping, drain piping, and electric wiring, operate according to the table to protect the
unit.
<PRECAUTIONS>
3. Refer to malfunction diagnosis label attached to the unit if it does not operate.
4. Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for individual operation system types.
Order
Operation
(1)
Open gas side stop valve.
(2)
Open liquid side stop valve.
(3)
Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours. (Not necessary for cooling type units)
(4)
Set to cooling with the remote controller and push
(5)
Push
button to start operation.
button twice and operate in TEST OPERATION mode for 3 minutes.
(6)
Push
button and confirm its operation.
(7)
Push
button and operate normally.
(8)
Confirm its function according to the operation manual.

3PA59585-9V
Options
449
Control Devices
EDSG18-936
4.15 <BRC7E531W> Wireless Remote Controller

Names and Function
Name of Option
Remote Controller C / O
Model Series
FFQ-B
BRC7E531W
1
ON OFF
DOWN
10
ON OFF
UP
TEMP
FAN
L TIME
11
hr.
UP
hr.
FAN
DOWN
13
RESERVE CANCEL
hr.
TIMER
12
MODE
15
hr.
TEST
7
SWING
14
16
TEST
TEST
17
3PA63363-21T-1
Explanation of Receiver
FFQ
21
20
22
23
19
18
3P107422-1F
450
Options
EDSG18-936
Control Devices
DISPLAY
(SIGNAL
TRANSMISSION)
1
This lights up when a signal is being
transmitted.
DISPLAY
(OPERATION MODE)
M L
(SET TEMPERATURE)
10
11
12

14 BUTTON
15
16

hr.
DISPLAY hr.
(PROGRAMMED TIME)
This display shows PROGRAMMED

5
DISPLAY
TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON
2 This display shows the current OPERATION MODE. For straight cooling
type,
(Auto) and (Heating)
are not installed.
DISPLAY
13
17
18
(AIR FLOW FLAP)
DISPLAY
(FAN SPEED)
The display shows the set fan speed.
TEST
DISPLAY
(INSPECTION/ TEST OPERATION)
When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON is pressed, the display
shows the system mode is in.
ON/OFF BUTTON
Press the button and the system will
start. Press the button again and the
system will stop.
Press this button to select the fan
speed, HIGH or LOW, of your choice.
Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE (Operates with the front cover
of the remote controller closed.)
PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON
Use this button for programming
START and/or STOP time. (Operates
with the front cover of the remote controller opened.)
19
20
21
22
23

BUTTON
MODE.
Refer to the section of MAINTENANCE
in the operation manual attached to the
indoor unit.
INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION
BUTTON
This button is used only by qualified
service persons for maintenance
purposes.
EMERGENCY OPERATION SWITCH
This switch is readily used if the remote
controller does not work.
RECEIVER
This receives the signals from the
remote controller.
OPERATING INDICATOR LAMP
(Red)
This lamp stays lit while the air
conditioner runs. It flashes when the
unit is in trouble.
TIMER INDICATOR LAMP (Green)
This lamp stays lit while the timer is set .
AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME
INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
Lights up when it is time to clean the air
filter.
DEFROST LAMP (Orange)
Lights up when the defrosting operation has started. (For straight cooling
type this lamp does not turn on.)
3PA63363-21T-3
Options
451
Warning
Daikin Industries, Ltd.s products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the
world. Daikin Industries, Ltd. does not have control over which products are exported to and used in a
particular country. Prior to purchase, please therefore confirm with your local authorised importer,
distributor and/or retailer whether this product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for
use, in the region where the product will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict
or modify the application of any local legislation.
Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorised parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
Read the User's Manual carefully before using this product. The User's Manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any enquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cautions on product corrosion

1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
Organization:
DAIKIN INDUSTRIES, LTD.
AIR CONDITIONING MANUFACTURING DIVISION
JMI-0107
Scope of Registration:
THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT AND MANUFACTURE OF
COMMERCIAL AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, COOLING,
REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT, COMMERCIAL HEATING
EQUIPMENT, RESIDENTIAL AIR CONDITIONING
EQUIPMENT, HEAT RECLAIM VENTILATION, AIR
CLEANING EQUIPMENT, MARINE TYPE CONTAINER
REFRIGERATION UNITS, COMPRESSORS AND VALVES.
Organization:
DAIKIN INDUSTRIES
(THAILAND) LTD.
JQA-1452
Scope of Registration:
THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT
AND MANUFACTURE OF AIR
CONDITIONERS AND THE
COMPONENTS INCLUDING
COMPRESSORS USED FOR THEM
All of the Daikin Groups business

facilities and subsidiaries in Japan
are certified under the ISO 14001
international standard for
environment management.
Dealer
Head Office:
Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi,
Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan
Tokyo Office:
JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan
http://www.daikin.com/global_ac/
c All rights reserved
Specifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of August 2009 but subject to change without notice.
EDSG18-936
Printed in Japan 08/2009 B AK

SM-Super Multi Splus E Series - Cooling Only

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

SM-Super Multi Splus E Series - Cooling Only

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

EDSG18-936

Part 1 Features ............................................................................ 1

Part 2 Multi-Split System Room Air Conditioners

Outdoor Units .........................................................................................20

7. Capacity Tables ....................................................................................57

Part 3 Installation Manual ......................................................... 75

Safety Precautions ...............................................................................110

Duct Connected Type FDKS50/60C, FDKS25/35EA ...........................144

Part 4 Operation Manual .......................................................... 219

RMKS112/140/160E Series .................................................................220

Part 5 Options .......................................................................... 309

2. Options for Outdoor & BP Units ..........................................................314

3. Options for Indoor Units ......................................................................318

Duct Connected Type...........................................................................318

<DCS302CA61> Central Remote Controller .......................................355

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series

L.S.P. Duct Slim & Compact Type

: New Model Mo/C: Mo/C model : Continued Model

L.S.P. Duct (Slim Compact)

L.S.P. Duct (Slim)

M.S.P. Ceiling Mounted Built-in

Ceiling Mounted Cassette

Ceiling Mounted Cassette

< FTKS25/35D >

Slim & Compact Type

Slim type (25-60 class)

< FBQ60/71B >

< FTKS50B >

< FTKS50-71F >

Thrust Slide Part

High Efficiency G Type Compressor

High Thrust mechanism

Night Quiet Mode

Night Quiet Mode

Night Quiet Mode Ends

Note: This function is available in setting at site.

Automatic Test Operation

Just press the test operation button after

Easy Wiring Work

Total main piping length

Total piping length

Note) Refrigerant charge is necessary.

Max. Inter-unit Piping Length

Piping length BP I/U (f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m)

Piping length 1st branch I/U (ex. b+c+m)

Total main piping length *1 (O/U - BP: a+b+c+d+e)

Total branch piping length *2 (f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m)

Total piping length ( *1+*2 )

Note) The pipe size of branch BP varies according to the capacity of

Rated capacity (kW) Cooling

Maximum number of connectable BP units

Rated capacity (kW)

Duct connected (Slim)

Ceiling mounted built-in

Ceiling mounted cassette

Ceiling mounted cassette

Ceiling mounted built-in

Wired remote controller

Control by Remote Controller

Unit Name and

Available functions are different by models.

Control by Remote Controller

Total piping length ( 1+2 )